One Line RV 10 Users Manual

ASPEN
OneLiner
Version 10
User's Manual
Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.
NOTICE
ASPEN OneLiner is a proprietary computer program of Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc. (ASPEN).
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.
assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Copyright 1988-2005 Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved.
HOW TO ORDER MORE MANUALS

This User's Manual may be duplicated by the Licensee for its own use. You can order a new copy by writing to the
address below. Please refer to document OL-UM -2005.
HOW TO REACH ASPEN

Mailing address:
ASPEN
34 N. San Mateo Drive
San Mateo, CA 94401
U.S.A.
Telephone:
Fax:
eMail (tech support in English):
eMail (tech support in Spanish):
eMail (tech support in Portuguese):
Web Site:
(650)347-3997
(650)347-0233
support@aspeninc.com
scayres@aspeninc.com
scayres@aspeninc.com
www.aspeninc.com
Our office hours are from 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Pacific time (GMT-8 in the winter, GMT-7 in the summer), Monday
through Friday.
_________________________________________________________________________________
ASPEN OneLiner, ASPEN Power Flow, ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor, ASPEN Distance Relay
Editor, ASPEN DistriView, ASPEN Batch Short Circuit Module, ASPEN PowerScript, ASPEN Breaker
Rating Module and ASPEN Relay Database are trademarks of Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.
PSS/E and PSS/U are trademarks of Power Technologies, Inc.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Incorporated.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.
Contents
SECTION 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................. 9
ONELINER FEATURES........................................................................................................................................................9
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................15
NETWORK SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................................................15
SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION ............................................................................................................................................15
BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT MODULE................................................................................................................................15
BREAKER RATING MODULE...........................................................................................................................................16
RELAY DATABASE..............................................................................................................................................................16
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL............................................................................................................17
2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL ..........................................................................................................................17

2.2 STARTING THE WORKING MODEL..............................................................................................................................18
2.3 INSTALLING THE PRODUCTION VERSION.................................................................................................................18
2.4 STARTING THE PRODUCTION VERSION.....................................................................................................................19
2.5 FILES......................................................................................................................................................................................19
2.6 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................................21
2.7 ONE-LINE SYMBOLS .........................................................................................................................................................22
2.8 ONELINER QUICK TUTORIAL........................................................................................................................................23
OPENING A BINARY DATA FILE......................................................................................................................................23
MOVING SYMBOLS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM.....................................................................................................24
REVIEWING AND EDITING EQUIPMENT PARAMETERS ..........................................................................................25
REVIEWING AND EDITING RELAY PARAMETERS......................................................................................................27
DELETING AND RESTORING EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................................29
ADDING EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................................................................31
GETTING AROUND..............................................................................................................................................................35
SIMULATING AND DISPLAYING FAULTS......................................................................................................................40
DISPLAYING RELAY OPERATING TIME ON THE 1-LINE DIAGRAM.......................................................................46
DISPLAYING POST-FAULT SOLUTIONS ON OVERCURRENT RELAY CURVES...................................................47
VIEWING DIFFERENT FAULTS ........................................................................................................................................50
TRIAL ADJUSTMENT OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS ....................................................................................................51
ADJUSTING OVERCURRENT RELAY SETTINGS..........................................................................................................52
GETTING RELAY TEST VALUES.......................................................................................................................................53
DISPLAYING POST-FAULT SOLUTION ON DISTANCE RELAY CURVES ...............................................................54
CHECKING RELAY COORDINATION..............................................................................................................................57
IMPORTING A NETWORK DATA FILE IN TEXT FORMAT..........................................................................................60
IMPORTING A RELAY DATA FILE IN TEXT FORMAT .................................................................................................64
CREATING A BUS FAULT SUMMARY.............................................................................................................................65
PERFORMING A VOLTAGE SAG ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................66
GETTING ONLINE HELP ABOUT OneLiner ...................................................................................................................68
EXITING OneLiner ...............................................................................................................................................................69
TO EXPLORE FURTHER.....................................................................................................................................................69
2.9 BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT QUICK TUTORIAL...............................................................................................................70
STARTING BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT ...............................................................................................................................70
OPENING A BINARY DATA FILE......................................................................................................................................71
ASPEN OneLiner Version 10
Contents i
SIMULATING FAULTS ........................................................................................................................................................72

GETTING ONLINE HELP ABOUT Batch Short Circuit.................................................................................................75
EXITING Batch Short Circuit.............................................................................................................................................77
TO EXPLORE FURTHER.....................................................................................................................................................77
SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE............................................................................................................................79
3.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................................79
3.2 MAIN WINDOW COMMANDS ......................................................................................................................................80
FILE MENU......................................................................................................................................................................82
NEW COMMAND................................................................................................................................................................82
OPEN BINARY DATA FILE COMMAND........................................................................................................................83
OPEN TEXT DATA FILE COMMAND.............................................................................................................................84
CLOSE COMMAND.............................................................................................................................................................85
SAVE COMMAND...............................................................................................................................................................86
SAVE AS COMMAND.........................................................................................................................................................87
FILE COMMENTS COMMAND........................................................................................................................................88
STATISTICS COMMAND...................................................................................................................................................89
MERGE FILE COMMAND .................................................................................................................................................90
EXPORT NETWORK DATA COMMAND.......................................................................................................................91
EXPORT BREAKER DATA COMMAND.........................................................................................................................94
EXPORT SUBSTATION DATA COMMAND..................................................................................................................95
READ CHANGE FILE COMMAND...................................................................................................................................96
PRINT SETUP COMMAND................................................................................................................................................97
PRINT ONE-LINE DIAGRAM COMMAND ....................................................................................................................98
EXPORT ONE-LINE DIAGRAM COMMAND ..............................................................................................................100
EXIT COMMAND..............................................................................................................................................................101
NETWORK MENU ......................................................................................................................................................102

PROPERTIES COMMAND ...............................................................................................................................................102
OPTION COMMAND........................................................................................................................................................103
NEW | BUS COMMAND....................................................................................................................................................104
NEW | GENERATOR COMMAND...................................................................................................................................111
NEW | LOAD COMMAND................................................................................................................................................116
NEW | SHUNT COMMAND..............................................................................................................................................119
NEW | SWITCHED SHUNT COMMAND........................................................................................................................122
NEW | LINE COMMAND ..................................................................................................................................................125
NEW | SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR COMMAND ..................................................................................................128
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND ......................................................................................................130
NEW | PHASE SHIFTER COMMAND .............................................................................................................................135
NEW | SWITCH COMMAND............................................................................................................................................138
NEW | 3-W TRANSFORMER COMMAND.....................................................................................................................140
NEW | 2-TERMINAL DC LINE COMMAND..................................................................................................................145
NEW | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR COMMAND .........................................................................................................148
NEW | ANNOTATION COMMAND................................................................................................................................149
DELETE | OBJECT COMMAND ......................................................................................................................................151
DELETE | ALL IN AREA/ZONE COMMAND ................................................................................................................152
DELETE | ALL INSIDE REGION COMMAND ...............................................................................................................153
DELETE | ALL OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND...........................................................................................................154
DELETE | ALL BREAKERS COMMAND........................................................................................................................155
DELETE | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIRS INVOLVING SELECTED LINE COMMAND ...........................................156
DELETE | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR COMMAND ...................................................................................................157
RESTORE COMMAND .....................................................................................................................................................158
CHANGE | NOMINAL kV COMMAND..........................................................................................................................159
CHANGE | T TO 3-W TRANSFORMER COMMAND...................................................................................................161
ii Contents
CHANGE | LINE TO SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR COMMAND..........................................................................163

CHANGE | BUSES IN REGION COMMAND..................................................................................................................164
TOGGLE SWITCH COMMAND ......................................................................................................................................165
TAKE OUT OF SERVICE COMMAND...........................................................................................................................166
PUT IN SERVICE COMMAND.........................................................................................................................................167
COPY COMMAND ............................................................................................................................................................168
PASTE COMMAND...........................................................................................................................................................169
SPLIT BUS COMMAND....................................................................................................................................................171
MERGE BUSES COMMAND............................................................................................................................................172
INSERT TAP BUS COMMAND .......................................................................................................................................173
REMOVE TAP BUS COMMAND ....................................................................................................................................174
MUTUAL COUPLING | MUTUAL GROUP PROPERTIES COMMAND...................................................................175
MUTUAL COUPLING | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR PROPERTIES COMMAND..................................................177
SET GENERATOR REF. ANGLE COMMAND ..............................................................................................................179
RESET ALL TRANSFORMER TAPS TO NOMINAL COMMAND.............................................................................180
BOUNDARY EQUIVALENT COMMAND .....................................................................................................................181
OUTAGE LIST COMMAND.............................................................................................................................................187
DIAGRAM MENU........................................................................................................................................................188
COPY ONE-LINE GRAPHICS TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND.....................................................................................188
OPTIONS COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................189
kV COLOR CODE COMMAND........................................................................................................................................191
EQUIV. BRANCH COLOR CODE COMMAND.............................................................................................................193
PLACE BUSES COMMAND .............................................................................................................................................194
BUS SYMBOL | DOT/HORIZONTAL BAR/VERTICAL BAR/ LONGER/SHORTER/ROTATE COMMANDS ......196
BUS SYMBOL | SHOW (OR HIDE) ID COMMAND......................................................................................................197
HIDE BUSES | SELECTED BUS COMMAND .................................................................................................................198
HIDE BUSES | INSIDE/OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND..............................................................................................199
SHOW BUSES | INSIDE/OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND............................................................................................200
SHOW / HIDE AREA OR ZONE COMMAND................................................................................................................201
SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES COMMAND.............................................................................................202
ATTACH/DETACH ANNOTATION TO/FROM OBJECT COMMAND....................................................................203
RESET TEXT POSITION COMMAND............................................................................................................................204
INSERT LINE KINK COMMAND....................................................................................................................................205
SCALE/SHIFT ONE-LINE COMMAND...........................................................................................................................206
VIEW MENU ..................................................................................................................................................................207

FIND BUS BY NAME COMMAND.................................................................................................................................207
FIND BUS BY NUMBER COMMAND............................................................................................................................208
FIND ANNOTATION COMMAND.................................................................................................................................209
GO TO END BUS COMMAND ........................................................................................................................................210
HIGHLIGHT ATTACHED OBJECT COMMAND.........................................................................................................211
PLAIN 1-LINE COMMAND..............................................................................................................................................212
IMPEDANCES ON 1-LINE COMMAND.........................................................................................................................213
MUTUAL PAIRS ON 1-LINE COMMAND ....................................................................................................................214
BRANCH NAMES ON 1-LINE COMMAND ..................................................................................................................215
AREAS, TIE LINES ON 1-LINE COMMAND .................................................................................................................216
TTY WINDOW COMMAND ............................................................................................................................................217
TOOLBAR COMMAND....................................................................................................................................................218
DEVICE PALETTE COMMAND......................................................................................................................................219
RELAY MENU................................................................................................................................................................220
PROPERTIES COMMAND ...............................................................................................................................................220
OPTIONS COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................223
NEW RELAY GROUP COMMAND.................................................................................................................................225
DELETE RELAY GROUP COMMAND...........................................................................................................................226
Contents iii
VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND...............................................................................................................................227

OPEN CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND....................................................................................................................228
OVERCURRENT/DISTANCE RELAY WINDOW COMMAND....................................................................................230
PLACE IMPORTED RELAY COMMAND......................................................................................................................231
FORM COORDINATION PAIR COMMAND................................................................................................................232
CREATE RELAY TEST FILE COMMAND .....................................................................................................................234
IMPORT RELAY COMMAND.........................................................................................................................................240
EXPORT RELAY COMMAND.........................................................................................................................................241
REPORT COMMAND .......................................................................................................................................................242
DELETE ALL RELAYS COMMAND ...............................................................................................................................243
FAULTS MENU............................................................................................................................................................244
SPECIFY CLASSICAL FAULT COMMAND...................................................................................................................244
SPECIFY SIMULTANEOUS FAULT COMMAND ........................................................................................................249
SHOW SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND..................................................................................................................252
SHOW PHASORS COMMAND ........................................................................................................................................256
SOLUTION REPORT COMMAND..................................................................................................................................259
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN COMMAND...........................................................................................................262
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | SHOW 3LG/2LG/1LG/LL FAULTS SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND ...............264
BUS FAULT SUMMARY COMMAND...........................................................................................................................265
GROUND CURRENT CALCULATOR COMMAND.....................................................................................................268
FAULT LOCATOR COMMAND .....................................................................................................................................270
OPTIONS COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................273
CHECK MENU .............................................................................................................................................................275

PRIMARY/BACUP RELAY COORDINATION COMMAND.......................................................................................275
OC MINIMUM PICKUP COMMAND............................................................................................................................280
OC INSTANTANEOUS SETTING COMMAND ............................................................................................................283
RELAY LOADABILITY COMMAND..............................................................................................................................287
NETWORK ANOMALIES COMMAND..........................................................................................................................289
DATA COMPATIBILITY COMMAND ..........................................................................................................................292
TOOLS MENU ...............................................................................................................................................................293

UNDO COMMAND...........................................................................................................................................................293
DATA BROWSER COMMAND .......................................................................................................................................294
SCRIPTING | EDIT/CREATE SCRIPT COMMAND.......................................................................................................301
SCRIPTING | RUN SCRIPT COMMAND........................................................................................................................302
USER-DEFINED COMMANDS | SETUP COMMAND..................................................................................................303
RUN CONFIGURATION PROGRAM COMMAND......................................................................................................304
RUN DISTANCE RELAY EDITOR COMMAND ...........................................................................................................305
HASP KEY UPDATE | REQUEST KEY UPDATE CODE COMMAND .......................................................................306
HASP KEY UPDATE | APPLY KEYS SERIAL NUMBER UPDATE CODE COMMAND........................................308
3.3 CURVES WINDOW COMMAND...................................................................................................................................309

MISC MENU...................................................................................................................................................................310
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND.......................................................................................................................................310
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND............................................................................................................................................311
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND........................................................................................................................................313
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND...............................................................................................................314
VIEW CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND ....................................................................................................................315
SAVE THIS CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND ..........................................................................................................316
OPTIONS COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................318
CLOSE WINDOW COMMAND........................................................................................................................................320
ADD MENU ....................................................................................................................................................................321

RELAY CURVES COMMAND..........................................................................................................................................321
CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND............................................................................................................322
iv Contents
TRANSFORMER DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND .......................................................................................................324

DAMAGE CURVE FROM LIBRARY COMMAND.......................................................................................................327
ANNOTATION COMMAND ...........................................................................................................................................328
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND.................................................................................................................329
REMOVE MENU ..........................................................................................................................................................330

RELAY CURVE COMMAND............................................................................................................................................330
DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND ......................................................................................................................................331
ALL BUT 1ST RELAY CURVE COMMAND....................................................................................................................332
FAULT COMMAND..........................................................................................................................................................333
PICTURE COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................335
EDIT MENU ...................................................................................................................................................................336

RELAY SETTING COMMAND........................................................................................................................................336
TRIAL RELAY ADJUSTMENT COMMAND.................................................................................................................337
SHIFTING FACTOR COMMAND...................................................................................................................................339
DAMAGE CURVE PARAMETERS COMMAND ..........................................................................................................341
LEGEND COMMAND.......................................................................................................................................................342
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND........................................................................................................................343
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND .........................................................................................................................344
SHOW MENU.................................................................................................................................................................345
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND..............................................................................................345
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND .....................................................................................................346
TEST VALUES COMMAND.............................................................................................................................................348
FAULT BROWSER COMMAND......................................................................................................................................350
3.4 DS RELAYS WINDOW COMMANDS..........................................................................................................................351

MISC MENU...................................................................................................................................................................352
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND.......................................................................................................................................352
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND............................................................................................................................................353
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND........................................................................................................................................354
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND...............................................................................................................355
OPTIONS COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................356
GRID ON/OFF COMMAND .............................................................................................................................................357
LOAD REGION COMMAND ...........................................................................................................................................358
ADD MENU ....................................................................................................................................................................361

RELAY CHARACTERISTICS COMMAND ....................................................................................................................361
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND.........................................................................................................363
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND.................................................................................................................365
REMOVE MENU ..........................................................................................................................................................366

ALL BUT 1ST RELAY COMMAND..................................................................................................................................366
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND.........................................................................................................367
PICTURE COMMAND......................................................................................................................................................369
EDIT MENU ...................................................................................................................................................................370

RELAY SETTING COMMAND........................................................................................................................................370
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND........................................................................................................................372
FIND ORIGIN COMMAND..............................................................................................................................................373
SECOND RELAY ORIGIN COMMAND..........................................................................................................................374
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND .........................................................................................................................375
Contents v
SHOW MENU.................................................................................................................................................................376
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND..............................................................................................376
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND .....................................................................................................377
3.5 TTY WINDOW COMMANDS........................................................................................................................................380

CLEAR COMMAND..........................................................................................................................................................381
SELECT FONT COMMAND.............................................................................................................................................382
PRINT SELECTED TEXT COMMAND...........................................................................................................................383
SAVE SELECTED TEXT COMMAND.............................................................................................................................384
SELECT ALL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................386
COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND .............................................................................................387
FIND COMMAND .............................................................................................................................................................388
SECTION 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
NETWORK MODELS .................................................................................................................................389
BUSES..................................................................................................................................................................................389
GENERATORS, LOADS,AND SHUNTS........................................................................................................................389
TRANSMISSION LINES & SERIES CAPACITORS/REACTORS..............................................................................391
PHASE SHIFTERS.............................................................................................................................................................392
TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................................................................392
2-WINDING TRANSFORMERS......................................................................................................................................395
3-WINDING TRANSFORMERS......................................................................................................................................397
ZERO-SEQUENCE MUTUAL COUPLING.....................................................................................................................400
PREFAULT VOLTAGE PROFILE....................................................................................................................................401
SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT ....................................................................................................................403
5.1 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................................403
5.2 FILE HEADER ....................................................................................................................................................................404
5.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................................................404
5.4 FILE COMMENTS.............................................................................................................................................................406
5.5 BUS DATA .........................................................................................................................................................................406
5.6 BUS REGULATION DATA..............................................................................................................................................408
5.7 GENERATOR DATA ........................................................................................................................................................408
5.8 LOAD DATA .....................................................................................................................................................................411
5.9 SHUNT DATA ...................................................................................................................................................................411
5.10 SWITCHED SHUNT DATA ..........................................................................................................................................412
5.11 TRANSMISSION LINE DATA......................................................................................................................................414
5.12 PHASE SHIFTER DATA ................................................................................................................................................416
5.13 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA .........................................................................................................................417
5.14 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA .........................................................................................................................420
5.15 SWITCH DATA...............................................................................................................................................................422
5.16 DC LINE DATA ...............................................................................................................................................................424
5.17 MUTAL COUPLING DATA ..........................................................................................................................................425
5.18 AREA DATA ...................................................................................................................................................................426
5.19 ZONE DATA ....................................................................................................................................................................427
5.20 BREAKER DATA ............................................................................................................................................................427
5.21 BREAKER NAMEPLATE DATA .................................................................................................................................430
5.22 BREAKER CONNECTION DATA ................................................................................................................................431
SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES ...........................................................................................................................433
6.1 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................................433
6.2 OVERCURRENT GROUND RELAYS..............................................................................................................................433
6.3 OVERCURRENT PHASE RELAYS..................................................................................................................................442
vi Contents
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
FUSES ..................................................................................................................................................................................446
RECLOSERS........................................................................................................................................................................448
DISTANCE GROUND RELAYS.......................................................................................................................................450
DISTANCE PHASE RELAYS...........................................................................................................................................451
SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT ............................................................................................................................455
7.1 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................................455
7.2 RELAY LOCATION INFORMATION............................................................................................................................455
7.3 OVERCURRENT GROUND RELAYS..............................................................................................................................456
7.4 OVERCURRENT PHASE RELAYS..................................................................................................................................457
7.5 FUSES ..................................................................................................................................................................................458
7.6 RECLOSERS........................................................................................................................................................................459
7.7 DISTANCE GROUND RELAYS.......................................................................................................................................460
7.8 DISTANCE PHASE RELAY.............................................................................................................................................461
7.9 RELAY GROUP COMMENTS ..........................................................................................................................................463
7.10 SAMPLE RELAY DATA FILE.......................................................................................................................................463
SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT...................................................................................................................................465
8.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT......................................................................................................465

8.2 TITLE PAGE .......................................................................................................................................................................465
8.3 FAULT SOLUTIONS.........................................................................................................................................................466
SECTION 9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES...................................................................................................................471
SHORTCUTS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW ...................................................................................................................471

SHORTCUTS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW ...............................................................................................................473
SHORTCUTS FOR THE DS RELAY WINDOW ...........................................................................................................473
SHORTCUTS FOR THE TTY WINDOW .......................................................................................................................474
SHORTCUTS FOR THE DIALOG BOXES .....................................................................................................................474
KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS ......................................................................................................................................475
APPENDIX....................................................................................................................................................................................477
APPENDIX A:
SOLUTION ALGORITHM.....................................................................................................................478
A.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION ...................................................................................................................................478
A.2 SPARSE MATRIX AND VECTOR METHODS ........................................................................................................478
APPENDIX B:
2-WINDING TRANSFORMERS ...........................................................................................................479
B.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................................................479
APPENDIX C:
TIME DIAL CALCULATOR .................................................................................................................481
C.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................481
C.2 TIME DIAL CALCULATOR.......................................................................................................................................481
APPENDIX D:
OVCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY..........................................................................................................482
D.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................482
D.2 OVERCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY..........................................................................................................................482
APPENDIX E:
DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY..............................................................................................................484
E.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................................................484
E.2 THE DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY...........................................................................................................................484
APPENDIX F:
CASE COMPARISON PROGRAM.......................................................................................................485
F.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................................................485
F.2 APPLICATION NOTES ..............................................................................................................................................485
F.3 INSTRUCTIONS..........................................................................................................................................................486
APPENDIX G:
LINKAGE TO RELAY DATABASE....................................................................................................490
G.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................490
G.2 RELAY DATA IN ONELINER AND ASPEN RELAY DATABASE .........................................................................490
G.3 ENABLING RELAY DATABASE CONNECTION....................................................................................................490
G.4 LINKING RELAYS IN ONELINER AND RELAY DATABASE...............................................................................491
Contents vii
G.5 DATA MAPPING..........................................................................................................................................................491

Direct mapping ...................................................................................................................................................................492
Data mapping using PowerScript ...................................................................................................................................492
PowerScript data mapping variables.............................................................................................................................492
Data mapping PowerScript program file structure .....................................................................................................493
Data mapping script code generator and editor..........................................................................................................493
Sample data mapping scripts ...........................................................................................................................................493
INDEX............................................................................................................................................................................................495
viii Contents
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 ONELINER FEATURES

ASPEN OneLiner is a PC-based short circuit and relay coordination program for relay engineers. OneLiner is a
productivity tool. It relieves the engineer from the tedious and time-consuming tasks of leafing through stacks of
printouts and plotting and re-plotting relay curves and one-line diagrams. OneLiner works very quickly under the
control of the engineer. The engineer can change the relay settings and network configuration and see the
results of the change immediately. The following are some highlights of OneLiner:
Native Microsoft Windows program with easy-to-use interactive graphics interface under Windows 98, ME,
NT, 2000, and XP with built-in PC network support.
Accurate modeling of 2- and 3-winding transformers, phase shifters, lines, switches, series capacitors and
reactors, dc lines, generators, loads, shunts and zero-sequence mutual coupling.
Detailed modeling of fuses, reclosers, and overcurrent and distance relays. Comes with extensive relay
library that can be edited by the user (See Appendix D).
Built-in short circuit program that simulates all classical fault types (bus faults, and line-end, line-out and
intermediate faults), as well as simultaneous faults.
Virtually unlimited system size with modest memory requirement.
Lightning fast solution speed
Advanced analysis tools: boundary equivalence, bus fault summary, voltage sag analysis, fault location, and
more.
Graphical display of post-fault solution and relay operating time on the one-line diagram and the phasor
diagram (figures 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3).
Automatic checking of overcurrent and distance relay coordination (figure 1.4), plus automatic checking of
overcurrent relays pickup and instantaneous settings.
Automatic plotting of overcurrent and distance relay characteristics on the screen (figures 1.5 and 1.6).
High-quality printed outputs on a large variety of printers and plotters (figures 1.7 and 1.8).
Data importing facilities for short circuit data in ANAFAS, CYME, Electrocon, GE, PTI (PSS/E and PSS/U),
Tranmission-2000 and other formats.
Data exporting in PTI PSS/E, ANAFAS, and GE data formats.
Exporting of fault data for relay testing in COMTRADE, Doble and other formats.
Built-in scripting language using the BASIC programming language.
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION 9
Proven reliability at major utilities in the U.S. and abroad.
Figure 1.1: OneLiner shows the post-fault voltages and currents on the one-line diagram for
the fault described in the status bar at the bottom of the window. The branch currents shown in
this case are Ia in amps. The phase angles in degrees are shown after the 'A' symbol. The
phase-A bus voltages in kV, line-to-ground, are shown under the bus names.
Figure 1.2: OneLiner displays the relay operating time for the fault indicated on the status line.
The relay operating time is shown next to each relay group. The time in seconds is preceded by
OP if it is from an overcurrent phase relay, OG if from an overcurrent ground relay, FU if from a
fuse, ZPn if from a distance phase relay (n is the zone number) and ZGn if from a distance
ground relay.
10 SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Figure 1.3: A probe feature allows the user to see readily the voltage and current phasors
at any point in the one-line diagram. This picture clearly shows that in this line-to-line fault, the
current in phase 'c' leads the quadrature voltage Va -Vb.
Figure 1.4: The TTY Window shows the results of a relay-coordination checking run. The program flags
the cases in which the coordination time interval is outside the range of acceptable values.
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION 11
Figure 1.5: OneLiner displays overcurrent characteristics for a fault. The relay current and
operating time is shown in text and as points on the relay curves. The user has the option of
having the curves shifted automatically or manually. The user can also store a series of curve
collections in a binary file for later recalling.
Figure 1.6: OneLiner displays the characteristics of two distance relays on the same graph in
primary ohms. The impedance of the transmission line is shown as a slanted line from the
origin. The fault impedance Va/Ia is plotted as a point on the complex plane.
12 SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
ALASKA
33.kV 30
1.6@-17517@-4
HAWAII
33.kV 29
17@177 1.7@-172
ARKANSAS
33.kV 27
28@173 1.8@-169
28@-7
499@113
32@174
531@-61
CALIFORNIA
COLORADO
33.kV 26
531@119 33.kV 25
2.2@-171
552@-60 2.2@-171
25@15525@-25
32@-6
FLORIDA
125@-67
33.kV 24
ILLINOIS
3.0@-173
85@115
252@122
33.kV 23
INDIANA
252@-58
552@120
3.3@-173
33.kV 22
381@-54
3.3@-173
MINNESOTA
334@-45
278@-54
381@126
33.kV 15
73@-99
3.5@-173278@126
2141@-71
1266@102
WASHINGTON
MARYLAND
422@102
33.kV 17
33.kV 18
2141@109
IOWA
DELAWARE
9.1@178
3.1@-178
9485@-74
33.kV 21
33.kV 19
1376@107
5769@104
3.2@-178
29@-14
29@166
220@-44 3.3@-173
73@81
117@-17 KENTUCKY
33.kV 20
117@163 3.2@-177
NEW HAMPSHR
VERMONT
0@0
33.kV 10
HANCOCK
137@-16
33.kV 12
3.5@-173
13.8kV 13
5769@-76
1266@-782.9@-168
0.00@0
0.0@0
220@136
422@-78
137@164
334@135
1332@-75
0.00@0
3926@98
1298@99
ROANOKE
139@-76
1376@-73
1332@105
13.8kV 11
3097@102
TEXAS
TENNESSEE OREGON
0.0@0
0.00@0
132.kV 4
99@102 132.kV 3
0.00@0
33.kV 16
2.2@-175
0.00@0
2.4@-176
NEVADA
6.0@-180
0@0
0.00@0
99@-77
99@103
132.kV 6
148@-81
3.5@-178
49@89
324@-81
348@-79
86@-65
148@99
227@95
191@105
CLAYTOR
193@109
132.kV 2
FIELDALE
50@-91 1.4@-172
193@-71
132.kV 5
46@103
203@-80
192@-75
1.2@-170
46@103
186@106
187@-74
21@102
22@-78
123@-82
Figure 1.7: An unretouched printed output from OneLiner showing the zero-sequence post-fault currents (3Io)
and voltages for a single-line-to-ground fault at bus WASHINGTON 33kV (near the center).
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION 13
Figure 1.8: An unretouched printed output from OneLiner showing overcurrent relay curves and damage curves.
The relay current and operating time is shown both as points on the curves and as text within the description
boxes. The fault description on the left indicates that the voltages and currents were taken from an intermediate
fault on a transmission line.
14 SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

Hardware Requirements
OneLiner runs on Intel Pentium-based PCs and compatibles. Other hardware requirements include:
A 800-by-600 or better color monitor.

Memory: 256 Mbytes minimum. 512 Mbytes recommended.
60 Mbytes of available hard-disk space.
A 2- or 3-button mouse.
Any graphics-capable printer or plotter that works under Windows.
Software Requirements
Microsoft Windows 98, ME, NT, 2000, and XP.
1.3 NETWORK SUPPORT

OneLiner lets any PC on a local area network (LAN) execute the program as long as the number of simultaneous
executions does not exceed the license limit. The network configuration is a cost-effective way to share the
OneLiner software among different engineers in the company.
OneLiner supports IPX/SPX, NetBIOS and TCP/IP protocols. It works in LANs and WANs with servers running
Windows NT, 2000 or XP, Novell NetWare, and others.
1.4 SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION

OneLiner can handle power systems with up to about 30,000 buses. The 100-bus version has an artificial limit of
100 buses.
1.5 BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT MODULE

The Batch Short Circuit Module works much the same way as a classical short circuit program. It automatically
simulates a large number of faults and outputs the results to a text file. It effectively complements ASPEN
OneLiner, which is designed to simulate faults and relay operations on a case-by-case basis. The Batch Short
Circuit Module is a valuable tool for users who need text output for a large number of fault simulations. It is also
a time saver for engineers who routinely perform breaker-rating studies, or voltage sag analysis for voltage
sensitive customers.
The input to the Batch Short Circuit Module can be either a text data or a binary data file. The program simulates
bus faults, line-end faults and line-out faults with all the classical phase connections: 3-phase, 2-line-to-ground,
single-line-to-ground, and line-to-line. The user can apply the selected fault types and phase connections to all
the buses in the system or apply them selectively to all buses in an area or a zone, or to all buses whose nominal
kV, bus number and bus name are within a certain range.
The program also computes the ANSI X/R ratio, which is an important value for determining the short-circuit duty
of circuit breakers. The program can give you a summary of bus faults, line-end faults and line-out faults, plus
their ANSI X/R ratios, in a tabular form.
You can use the program to compose a text command file and frequently execute the file later without further user
input. The command file specifies the file name, output options and a series of faults to be simulated.
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION 15
The output of the Batch Short Circuit Module is a text file that is identical in format to that generated by the
Fault | Solution Report command in OneLiner. The output file can be printed on any 132-column printer.
The Batch Short Circuit Module is a standard part of ASPEN OneLiner.
1.6 BREAKER RATING MODULE

The Breaker Rating Module is designed to streamline the otherwise tedious work of checking the rating of
circuit breakers against the short circuit currents they need to interrupt. The Breaker Rating Module is selfcontained: It simulates the faults, computes the ANSI X/R ratios, and compares the fault currents to the
rating of the breakers. The output is a text report showing the fault current as a percentage of the rating. The
report calls attention to those breakers that are operating at or near their short circuit ratings and therefore
warrants closer scrutiny by the protection engineers. Additional information on this module is available in
the on-line help file labeled Breaker Rating Help in the OneLiner folder.
The Breaker Rating Module is not a standard part of OneLiner and must be purchased separately.
1.7 RELAY DATABASE

The ASPEN Relay Database is designed to store the physical data of relays and circuit breakers. By
physical data we mean the actual knob and dip-switch settings of the physical device. This is contrast to
the electrical data required by OneLiner for short circuit simulation. Examples of the physical data of a relay
include the characteristic angle and zone impedances.
The ASPEN Relay Database is ideal for keeping settings and maintenance records of relays and breakers,
but it is not necessary to run OneLiner. For this reason, the Relay Database is not a standard part of
OneLiner and must be purchased separately.
If you have OneLiner and the Relay Database installed on the same computer, you can enable direct
transfer of relay and breaker data from the Relay Database to OneLiner. In future version of OneLiner this
link will work in both directions.
Several versions of the ASPEN Relay Database are available, including an Unlimited Version that utilizes
MS Access tables and two Client/Server versions that utilize MS Sql Server and Oracle engines.
16 SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL
2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL

The installation of the Working Model will only take a few minutes.
1.
Insert the Working Model CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click on Start, then on Run. A dialog box will appear.
3.
In the edit box labeled Command Line type D:\1L\SETUP. (We assume your CD
driver is d:). Click on OK. The installation program will start.
Follow the instructions on the screen. The working model requires about
6 Mbytes of free space. The default directory is C:\ASPENWM1
When the setup program finishes, you will see a Windows program group
called "OneLiner Working Model. When you open it, it should look
something look like this:
4.
Proceed to Section 2.2 to start the working model.

Note: When you are done with the working model, you can uninstall it
using the Add/Remove Program icon within the Control Panel.
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL 17
2.2 STARTING THE WORKING MODEL

Start Up the Working Model:
1.
On the Windows desktop, look for a program group called OneLiner Working
Model. Double click on the OneLiner icon to start the program.
The first time you start the Working Model a dialog box will appear asking
for a name and a numeric key.
Consult the printed Working Model Manual for the Name and Key that
you need to enter, and press OK.
The Main Window will appear when the program starts up.
2.3 INSTALLING THE PRODUCTION VERSION

The instructions to install the Production version are in a separate document entitled, Getting Started with
ASPEN OneLiner & Power Flow V10. When you have finished installing the program, you will see a folder
labeled ASPEN V10 on your Windows desktop. The contents of this folder look like this:
18 SECTION 2
2.4 STARTING THE PRODUCTION VERSION

START UP ONELINER:
1.
On the Windows desktop, look for a program group called ASPEN V10. Double
click on the OneLiner icon to start the program.
You will see the Main Window when the program starts up.
2.
Enlarge the window by clicking the mouse once on the maximize box at the
upper-right corner.
The Main Window will take up the entire screen and be ready for your
commands.
2.5 FILES
This section describes all the input and output files of ASPEN OneLiner. The input data files are these:
Binary data files with .OLR extension. These are binary files that contain the system parameters as well as
graphical and relay information. You can read in an OLR file with the File | Open Binary Data File command.
Text data files with .DXT extension. These are text files that contain the network data. Most commonly, text
data files came from one of the many data conversion programs. Text data files can be imported into the
program with the File | Open Text Data File command in the Main Window and saved as OneLiner binary
data files. OneLiner can also add the contents of a text data file to an existing binary data file with the File |
Add Network command in the Main Window. The text data file format is described in Section 5.
Relay data files with .RAT extension. These are text files with relay data created by the Relay | Export Relay
command in the Main Window. Relay data files can be imported into OneLiner using the Relay | Import
Relay command. The relay data format is described in Section 7.
Change files with .CHF or .ANA extension. This is one of the outputs of the ASPEN Case Comparison
Program when you compare two data files. Change file contains commands that will make the network and
relay data of one of the files to be the same as the other. The .CHF change file format is very similar to that
described in Sections 5 and 7. The .ANA change file is compatible with ANAFAS software, which is used
widely in many Brazilian utilities. See Appendix F for more information on the Case Comparison Program.
Overcurrent Relay libraries *.RLY. OneLiner reads these relay libraries to get the curve parameters for
overcurrent relays and fuses. You can use Overcurrent Relay Editor to edit the existing curves, create new
curves, and to copy curves from other relay libraries. The full path name of the relay library folder used by
SECTION 2
OneLiner is stored in the Window registry under "LibraryPath=" entry in the [OneLiner] section. You can
specify the location of the Overcurrent Relay Library Directory by running the OneLiner/Power Flow
Configuration Program, CFG1L.EXE.
NOTE: The curves in the relay libraries were created by users of OneLiner. ASPEN collects the relay
curves periodically and distributes them to all the users. The correctness of the relay curves has not been
verified by ASPEN. It is important for users to check these curves against the manufacturers' specifications
before applying them.
Distance Relay Library ASPEN.DRL (or other names you specified). OneLiner reads this library to get the
type names, the method name and parameter list for distance relays. You can use the Distance Relay Editor
to edit the existing relay types and to create new types. The full path name of the distance relay library
referenced by OneLiner is stored in the Window registry under "DSlibrary=" entry in the [OneLiner] section.
You can specify the name and location of the default relay library by running the OneLiner/Power Flow
Configuration Program, CFG1L.EXE.
Note: It is important for users to check the distance relay models against the manufacturers' specifications
before applying them.
Previous Curve Collection Files with .PCC extension. These are binary files created by OneLiner within the
Curve Collection dialog box. When you recall a previous curve collection, the program displays the curves,
descriptions and annotation in the exact position as before.
Lines Table Files with .LTB extension. These are text files containing electrical parameters of various types
of lines and cables. The program reads this file when it begins execution. The full path name of the line table
file used by OneLiner is stored in the Window registry under "LineTable=" entry in the [OneLiner] section.
You can specify the name and location of the default line table file by running the OneLiner/Power Flow
Configuration Program.
PowerScript files with .BAS extension. These are text files containing programs written in the Basic
programming language. You can create a script file with the Script Editor in OneLiner or with any text editor.
OneLiner generates the following files:
Log file ASPEN.LOG. These are text files that contain a list of errors when you:
1. Import a text data file with the File | Open Text File command in the Main Window,
2. Execute changes in a change file with the File | Read Change File command in the
Main Window.
Output files with .OUT extension. These are text files that contain the short circuit solutions in the
traditional text form. The output files are generated when you invoke the Faults | Solution Report command
of the Main Window. The description of the output file is given in Section 8.
Report files with .REP extension. These are text files that contain a report of the network or relay data in the
traditional text form. The report files are generated when you invoke the following commands:
1. The Network | Report command in the Main Window,
2. The Relay | Report command in the Main Window,
3. The Menu | Save Selected Text command in the TTY Window.
Temporary files with .TMP extension and names that begin with ~1L. While it is running, OneLiner creates
a temporary file in the root directory or in the temporary directory (usually c:\windows\temp). OneLiner
deletes the temporary files automatically at the end of each session. In the event the program bombs out
before the end of a session, the temporary files will be left behind on the disk. If you see any of the
temporary files on the directory when OneLiner is not running, you can reclaim the disk space by deleting
them. DO NOT delete these files while OneLiner is running.
Text Data Files with .DXT extension. Text data files contain system parameters but no graphical or relay
information. You can generate a text data file with the File | Export Network command.
20 SECTION 2
Relay data files with .RAT extension. These are text files that contain the relay data. Relay data files can be
exported using the File | Export Relay command. The relay data format is described in Section 7.
Previous Curve Collection Files with .PCC extension. These are binary files created by OneLiner within
Curve Collection dialog box. This file stores a series of overcurrent relay collections for later recalling.
Backup files with .BAK extension. When you update an existing binary data file using the File | Save or File |
Save As commands, OneLiner saves the original data file under the .BAK extension. This file serves as a
backup in case you want to revert back to the original file.
Windows metafiles with .WMF extension. When you execute the File | Export One-Line Diagram command,
OneLiner creates a Window Metafile or Enhanced Window Metafile with extensions .WMF or .EMF that
corresponds to the current state of the one-line diagram. The metafiles are vector-graphic files that can be
imported to other Windows programs, such as Word and AutoCAD.
2.6 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

You need to be familiar with a few basic terms that are used throughout this manual.
Click:
Quickly press and release the mouse button.
Drag:
Hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.
Double click:
Click the mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Dialog box:
A pop-up window used for various purposes. The picture below illustrates several
common components of a dialog box.
Message box:
A simple dialog box that contains a message.
SECTION 2
2.7 ONE-LINE SYMBOLS

The one-line diagram symbols are labeled in the figures below. The program uses the American transformer
symbol by default (top figure). If you prefer the European symbol (bottom figure), you can easily change it by (1)
selecting the Options command from the Diagram menu and then (2) selecting 'European' in the Transformer
Symbol group box and clicking on "OK".
WITH AMERICAN TRANSFORMER SYMBOLS
WITH EUROPEAN TRANSFOMER SYMBOLS
22 SECTION 2
2.8 ONELINER QUICK TUTORIAL

This tutorial is designed to acquaint new users with the basic functions of OneLiner. We assume you have
installed OneLiner (Section 2.1 or 2.3) and started the program (Section 2.2 or 2.4). If not, do so now. This tutorial
will take about an hour to complete.
OPENING A BINARY DATA FILE
A 30-bus system is used in most of this tutorial. You will now open its binary data file.
1.
Select the File | Open Binary Data File command.

Note: To select this command you first click the left mouse button on 'File' to
open its pull down menu. Then click the left mouse button on 'Open Binary Data
File'.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the binary data file
that you want to open.
2.
Open the file SAMPLE30.OLR as follows.

Click once on the file name 'SAMPLE30.OLR' in the list box. The name
will appear in the File Name edit box. Click on the "Open" button.
The dialog box will disappear. After a short time the one-line diagram of
the 30-bus system will appear in the Main Window.
Note: See Section 2.7 if you are unsure of the meanings of the various symbols.
SECTION 2
MOVING SYMBOLS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

You can manipulate the symbols on the one-line diagram by dragging them with the mouse. You never have to
type in x-y coordinates. Try it now!
Note: Dragging means to first click the left mouse button on the symbol you want to move and then move
the mouse while you continue to hold down the mouse button. When you release the mouse button, the move
will be completed.
1.
Move a transmission line, transformer, or phase shifter by dragging the symbol.

The horizontal segments can be moved vertically and vertical segments
can be moved horizontally. Segments attached to a bus are constrained
by the extent of the bus symbol.
2.
Move a bus by dragging the bus symbol.

The bus symbol can be moved anywhere. The bus name and all the
equipment attached to the bus will automatically move with the bus
symbol.
3.
Move a bus name by dragging the name.

The bus name will be replaced by a rectangle while it is being moved. The
bus name can only be moved within a certain distance of the bus symbol.
4.
Move a generator, load, or shunt by dragging the symbol.

The symbol can be moved to either side of the bus symbol.
24 SECTION 2
REVIEWING AND EDITING EQUIPMENT PARAMETERS

You can review and edit the parameters of any piece of equipment by pointing and clicking with the mouse. The
procedure below is for a transmission line. The same procedure can be used to review and edit other types of
equipment, except for relays (which will be covered next).
1.
Double click the LEFT mouse button on the transmission line between
VERMONT 33 kV and OREGON 33 kV as indicated by the arrow cursor.
The line symbol will turn dotted red. A dialog box for this line will appear.
2.
Edit the transmission line parameters.

The text cursor (a blinking vertical bar) will initially be in a box labeled
Name.
Move the text cursor to the edit box labeled X= with the <Tab> key.
Type 0.03 to change the positive -sequence reactance to 0.03.
SECTION 2
3.
Click on the "Help" button at the lower right corner.

The on-line help window will appear. The help topic is set automatically
for this dialog box.
4.
Select the File | Exit command to close the on-line help window.
The on-line help window will disappear.
5.
Click on the "OK" button to close the line dialog box.

The dialog box will disappear.
26 SECTION 2
REVIEWING AND EDITING RELAY PARAMETERS

You can model both distance and overcurrent relays in OneLiner. The relays are stored in an object called the relay
group. The symbol for a relay group is a small rectangle that looks like the traditional circuit breaker symbol. Relay
groups are placed on terminal of branches that are protected by relays.
You can review and edit the parameters of any relay by pointing and clicking with the mouse.
1.
Click the right mouse button on the third relay group on the right hand side of
the bus labeled NEVADA as indicated by the arrow cursor.
The relay group symbol will turn dotted red, and a floating menu will
appear. Repeat this step if the bus or the entire line turns dotted red.
2.
Click on the Properties command.

The following relay-group dialog box will appear. The list box near the top
lists all the relays and fuses that are in this relay group.
SECTION 2
3.
Click on the overcurrent relay labeled 'OC ground relay NV-G1' in the list box
and click on the "Get Info" button.
Note: OC stands for overcurrent and DS stands for distance.
A dialog box with the parameters of this overcurrent ground relay will
appear.
The relay parameters are explained in Section 6.2, 'Overcurrent Ground

Relays' in the On-Line Help.
4.
Click on the "Cancel" button to close the dialog box.

The relay parameters dialog box will disappear.
5.
Have a look at the dialog box for a distance relay by repeating steps 3 and 4 for
the distance relay labeled 'DS ground relay NV_Reusen G1'.
6.
Click on the "Done" button to close the Relay Group dialog box.
28 SECTION 2
DELETING AND RESTORING EQUIPMENT

You can delete any piece of equipment by pointing and clicking with the mouse. The equipment you deleted is kept
in a buffer until the end of the session. You may restore any deleted equipment later if you choose to do so. The
procedure below is for a transmission line. Similar procedure works for other types of equipment.
DELETING A TRANSMISSION LINE:
1.
Click the right mouse button on the transmission line between Vermont 33.0 kV
and Oregon 33.0 kV.
The line symbol will become dotted red, and a floating menu will appear.
Repeat this step if the line does not turn dotted red.
2.
Click on the Delete command.

A message box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion.
3.
Click on the "OK" button in the message box.

The selected transmission line will disappear from the one-line diagram.
OneLiner will automatically update the system model.
SECTION 2
RESTORING A DELETED TRANSMISSION LINE:

1.
Select the Network | Restore | Branch command.

Note: To select this command you (1) click the left mouse button on
'Network' to open its pull down menu, (2) click the left mouse button on
'Restore' to open its second level menu, and (3) click the left mouse
button on 'Branch'.
A dialog box will appear. The list box will display in alphabetical order all
of the branches that can be restored. In this case, there is only the one
line you just deleted.
2.
Click on the line identifier in the list box.

The line identifier will become highlighted.
3.
Click on the "Restore" button.

The line you deleted will reappear on the one-line diagram. OneLiner will
update the system model automatically.
Note: The "Take Out of Service" and "Put In Service" commands are
very similar to the "Delete" and "Restore" commands, except that out-ofservice equipment remains visible on the screen (in dotted black line)
and is kept in the data file when you save the file.
Note: You can also use the Tools | Undo command to restore deleted
equipment. However, the Undo command works only for the last eight
commands you executed.
30 SECTION 2
ADDING EQUIPMENT
You can add new equipment to the system by selecting the equipment type from the device palette and dropping
a new device on the diagram. You will learn in the following how to create new buses and lines. Similar procedures
apply to other types of equipment.
ADDING A NEW BUS:
1.
Select command View | Device Palette to show the Device Palette if it is not
already visible
Click the New bus button
on the Device Palette.
The cursor will change into a cross with a bus symbol attached to it.
2.
Click on an empty space in the diagram to place the new bus.
A dialog box will appear showing the parameters of the new bus.
3.
Modify the bus data.

Type New Bus in the edit box labeled 'Name'.
Type 33 in the edit box labeled 'Nom. kV'.
Select Vertical bar for the symbol style.
Mark the Show ID on one-line diagram check box.
The Bus dialog box should look like this.
SECTION 2
Note: The second page of the bus dialog box (not visible), labeled
'Breaker Data', is for circuit breaker information. The breaker data are
used by the ASPEN Breaker Rating Module (an optional module of
ASPEN OneLiner) to evaluate the adequacy of the breaker interrupting
rating.
4.
Click on the "OK" button.

The dialog box will disappear and a new bus will appear at the location
you selected in step 2.
32 SECTION 2
ADDING A TRANSMISSION LINE:

You will now add a new transmission line between the new 33 kV bus and the Vermont 33 kV bus.
1.
Click the New line button
The cursor will change into a cross with a line symbol attached to it.
2.
Click the left mouse button on the Vermont 33 kV bus. Without releasing the
left button, move the mouse toward the New Bus. A line symbol will appear with
one end attached to Vermont 33 kV bus. The other end of the line will move with
the cursor.
When the cursor is near the New Bus 33kV bus, the bus symbol will turn
dotted red. Release the mouse button.
A dialog box will appear showing the data of the new line.
SECTION 2
By default, the line data is set equal to that of the previous line object.
That is why the line impedances are already set to a nonzero value. (You
can change this behavior in the Network | Options dialog box.)
3.
Give this line a reactance of 0.1 per-unit in the positive sequence and 0.3 perunit in the zero sequence.
Type 0.1 in the edit box labeled 'X'.
Type 0.3 in the edit box labeled 'X0'.
4.

A new line will appear between the selected buses.
5.
Press the <Esc> key on your keyboard to exit from the Add-Equipment mode.
The mouse cursor will change back to the normal arrow cursor.
34 SECTION 2
GETTING AROUND
Your computer monitor usually can display only a portion of your system's one-line diagram. OneLiner has
several features that let you to navigate from one part of the system to another:
Find Bus:
Move the viewport to the location of a given bus. This can be

accomplished by using either the bus name or number.
Scroll:
Move the viewport horizontally or vertically.
Zoom:
Show the one-line diagram in the viewport with different
magnifications.
Split Screen: View the one-line diagram in two different panes at the same time.
These features are described in the following sections.

FINDING A BUS BY NAME:
1.
Click the right mouse button in a vacant section of the screen.

A floating menu will appear.
2.
Click on the Find Bus By Name command.

A dialog box will appear showing an alphabetical listing of all the buses in
the network.
Note: You can also press the F key on the keyboard to bring up this
dialog box.
3.
Click on the name California 33. kV 26 in the list box.

The number 26 is the bus number.
4.

The selected bus will appear at the center of the screen.
Note: You can locate a bus by its number by selecting the Find Bus By
Number command in step 2.
SCROLLING TO VIEW DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THE NETWORK:

1.
Scroll the one-line diagram vertically and horizontally by clicking the mouse on
the scroll bars of the window or by dragging the scroll bar button.
If you have a mouse with a wheel, rotating the wheel will scroll the oneline diagram vertically. Also, moving the mouse with the wheel pressed
down will cause the viewport to move with the mouse.
Note: If the network disappears, use the Find Bus command mentioned
above.
SECTION 2
ZOOMING TO VIEW DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THE NETWORK:

1.
Change the zoom setting by dragging the zoom slider control on the tool bar.
2.
Zoom into a specific area on the one-line diagram.

Click the right mouse button at a location. While still holding the right
mouse button, drag the mouse to delineate a rectangular area that you
wish to magnify. Release the mouse button.
A floating menu will appear. Your screen will look like this.
36 SECTION 2
3.
Click on the "Zoom In" command.

The screen will show a detailed view of the network that was enclosed in
the dotted rectangle.
SECTION 2
USING THE SPLIT SCREEN OPTION:

You can split the main one-line window into two panes. The two panes have independent zoom and scroll
controls, and may display different quantities. You can edit the one-line in either pane. The other pane is
updated automatically. The split window view greatly improves the ease of use: When you are coordinating the
relays at two ends of a branch, you can position the split window to see what is happening at both ends at the
same time. You can also view in the two panes the fault currents and relay operating times at the same time. The
possibilities are endless.
1.
Move the arrow cursor over to the left side of the viewport until it turns into two
double bars with arrows pointing inward, as shown below.
2.
Now while holding the left mouse button down, drag the double bars to the center
of the screen.
The viewport will now be split into two panes.
The active pane will have a yellow tint at the bottom of the screen. You
can now scroll the two sections and modify each independently.
38 SECTION 2
CLOSE AND RE-OPEN THE BINARY DATA FILE:

1.
Close the file.

Select the File | Close command.
If you are running the working model, the file will close now. Proceed to
step 2.
If you are running the production version, a dialog box will appear asking
you whether you want to save the changes.
Click on the "No" button.

The current example file will be closed. The Main Window of OneLiner
will show the word ASPEN on a gray background.
2.
Re-Open the file SAMPLE30.OLR.

Click on the File menu to display the menu items.
At the bottom of the menu, just above the Exit command, you will see the
file name of the last four files you opened. The name SAMPLE30.OLR
should be among the files listed.
Click on the menu item SAMPLE30.OLR to open the file.
After a short time, the Main Window will again show the one-line diagram
of the 30-bus system.
Drag the splitter bar back to the left edge so that only one pane is visible.
SECTION 2
SIMULATING AND DISPLAYING FAULTS

The following instructions show you how to simulate faults in the vicinity of a relay group.
1.
Click the right mouse button on the third relay group on the right hand side of
the bus NEVADA 132kV.
The relay group symbol will turn dotted red, and a floating menu will
appear. Repeat this step if the bus or the entire line turns dotted red.
2.
Click on the Specify Fault command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the faults to be simulated.
Note there are four fault types within the Phase Connection group box:
3LG: Three-phase fault.
2LG: Two phase to ground fault.
1LG: Single phase to ground fault.

L-L: Line to line fault.
The 1LG check box should already been marked.
40 SECTION 2
3.
Click on each of the 12 check boxes labeled 'No outage' and 'With outage' to
select all the available fault types.
Close-in fault: A fault immediately in front of the selected relay group.
Close-in fault with end opened: A fault immediately in front of the
Selected relay group with the far end of the branch disconnected.
Remote bus fault: A bus fault at the far end of the branch.
Line-end fault: A fault at the far end of the branch with the branch
disconnected from the remote bus.
Intermediate fault (also called a sliding fault): A fault in the middle of a
transmission line. This option is not available to relay groups on
transformers or phase shifters.
Intermediate fault with end opened: A fault in the middle of a
transmission line with the far end of the branch disconnected.
4.
Move the text cursor to the edit box labeled '%' and type in the value 44.
This specifies that the intermediate faults are at 44% of the distance
between NEVADA 132 kV and REUSENS 132 kV.
We will leave the phase connection to 1LG, which stands for single line to
ground, and the fault impedance to zero ohms. The fault-specification
dialog box should look like this.
5.
Click on the "Simulate" button.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify branch outages.
SECTION 2
6.
In the list box, mark the checkbox for the first entry 6 NEVADA 132. kV 28
ARIZONA 132. kV 1L to select a line outage.
This outage will be taken for all the fault types for which the "With
outage" check boxes were marked.
7.
Click on "OK" to begin the fault simulation.

A dialog box will appear to inform you of the program's progress. At the end of the
simulation the dialog box will disappear and the last fault simulated will be displayed
on the one-line diagram. You will see a line that reads "1LG Interm. Fault on: 6
NEVADA 132.kV- 6 REUSENS 132.kV 1L 1LG Type=A " in the status area at the
bottom of the Main Window. This is a description of the fault that is being
displayed.
The bus voltages are shown directly beneath the bus names and nominal
kV. The branch currents are shown on the branch symbols. Both the
voltage and the current will be displayed as complex numbers in polar
coordinates. The zero-sequence quantities are displayed by default for a
single-line-to-ground fault. The '@' symbol separates the magnitude on
the left from the phase angle (in degrees) on the right.
8.
View other quantities on the one-line diagram.

Select the Faults | Show Fault Solution on 1-line command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the display options. The list
box at the top of the dialog box shows the twelve faults that you just
simulated. The fault being displayed is selected by default.
42 SECTION 2
Notice the '3' in the 'No. of tiers' edit box. This tells OneLiner that you
want to see the solution for all the equipment within three buses back from
the fault.
9.
Click on the "Phase a" radio button to display the phase 'a' voltages and
currents.
The radio button labeled "Physical" at the lower-left corner is highlighted
(by default) to indicate that the voltages will be in units of kV line-toground, and the currents in amperes.
10. Click on the Display button.

The dialog box will disappear. The one-line diagram will be refreshed to
show the phase 'a' currents and voltages. Note the letter 'A' between the
magnitude and angle of the branch currents.
11. View other quantities using the toolbar buttons.

You may easily display other quantities by clicking on one of the toolbar
shortcut buttons.
SECTION 2
The '0', '+', and '-' buttons are for displaying the zero-, positive- and
negative- sequence quantities, respectively. The 'A', 'B' and 'C' buttons
are for displaying the phase 'A', phase 'B' and phase 'C' quantities. The
button that resembles a 'clock' is used for displaying the relay operating
times.
Click on the 'B' shortcut button to display the phase 'B' quantities.
The one-line diagram will be re-drawn showing the phase 'B' quantities.
12. View the fault summary in text.
OneLiner always prepares a summary for the fault being displayed. The
summary includes the fault MVA, the fault current, the relay current, the
Thevenin impedance, and the voltage at both ends of the relay branch.
You can see this summary by opening the TTY Window.
Click on the TTY button on the toolbar.
The TTY Window will appear. You will see the last part of the summary
when the window opens. You can click on the scroll bars of this window
to bring the other parts of the summary into view.
13. Select the TTY | Close Window command to close the TTY Window.
The TTY Window will disappear.
14. Use the Phasor Probe.
Click the right mouse button on the transmission line between NEVADA
132 kV and OHIO 132 kV. The line will become highlighted and a
floating menu will appear.
Click on the View Phasors command.
A pop-up window will show you the voltage and current phasors at one
end of the NEVADA-OHIO line. The words Solution at NEVADA 132.
kV at the upper left corner tells you that the phasors shown are for the
NEVADA end of this line.
44 SECTION 2
Click on Sequence within the Current from this bus box to see the
current phasors for each of three sequences.
Click on the Show Opposite Bus button near the bottom. The phasor at
the OHIO end of the selected line will appear.
Click on "Done". The phase-probe dialog box will disappear.
SECTION 2
DISPLAYING RELAY OPERATING TIME ON THE 1-LINE DIAGRAM

You can display the relay operating time directly on the one-line diagram.
1.
Click on the relay operating time shortcut button
on the toolbar.
The screen will look something like this.
The fastest relay time in each relay group is displayed above the relaygroup symbol. The operating time is preceded by the symbol:
'FU' if it is from a fuse.
'OG' if it is from an overcurrent ground relay.
'OP' if it is from an overcurrent phase relay.
'RG' if it is from a ground recloser.
'RP' if it is from a phase recloser.
'ZG1', 'ZG2', 'ZG3' or 'ZG4' if it is from a ground distance relay. The
numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are the zone numbers.
'ZP1', 'ZP2', 'ZP3' or 'ZP4' if it is from a phase distance relay. The
numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are the zone numbers.
The words 'No active relay' are shown if there are no relays of the type
being displayed within the relay group. The quantity '9999s' is shown if
none of the relays of the type being displayed has operated.
46 SECTION 2
DISPLAYING POST-FAULT SOLUTIONS ON OVERCURRENT RELAY CURVES

OneLiner lets you plot overcurrent relay curves on the Curves Window.
1.
The relay group on the line between NEVADA 132 kV and REUSENS 132 kV
should still be highlighted. Click on it with the right mouse button.
2.
Click on the View Relay Curves command in the floating menu.

A dialog box will appear asking you which of the relays in the relay group
you want to display.
3.
Click on the entry 'OC ground relay NV-G1' in the list box.
The Curves Window will appear showing the characteristics of the
overcurrent relay NV-G1. The relay parameters will be shown inside a box
to the right of the plot.
4.
We will add the curves of several neighboring relays to this plot.

Select the Add | Relay Curves command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the relay curves to be added
to the plot. The list box labeled "Relays in Vicinity" contains the relays
that are in the vicinity of the relay being displayed.
5.
Increase the No of tiers to 1. Select the entries for NV Fuse, NV-G2 and RE-G1
in the list box by marking the check box in front of each name.
SECTION 2
6.
Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear. The characteristics of the three relays you
selected will be displayed on the same plot as the first relay. The parameters
of the added relays will also be shown in boxes to the right of the plot. Note
the relay curves and the parameter boxes are numbered from 1 through 4.
We are now ready to display the relay operations on the plot.
7.
Select the Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select one of the fault solutions.
The fault being displayed on the one-line diagram is selected by default.
48 SECTION 2
8.
Scroll the list to the first fault, '1LG Close-in fault on: 6 Nevada 132 kV-8
Reusens 132 kV 1L 1LG Type=A', and select it. Select Manual in the
Horizontal Shift option. Click on the "Display" button.
The dialog box will disappear. The Curves Window will be refreshed to
show the time-current points on each of the curves. The relay current and
operating time will be added to the respective parameter boxes and the
fault description will be shown below the relay-parameter boxes.
You can specify different options that will dictate how the curves are
displayed using the Misc. | Options command.
9.
Select the Misc. | Options command.

A dialog box will appear allowing you to set certain parameters within the
Curves Window.
Click on 'Hatch' within the Fuse Curves box to fill in the area between
the total clear and minimum melt curves.
Click on 'Decades only' within the Grid Style box to display only the
decade lines on the Curves Window.
Click on "OK" to close the Misc. | Options dialog box.
The Curves Window should appear as shown below.
SECTION 2
VIEWING DIFFERENT FAULTS

You can view relay operation for another fault that has been simulated.
1.
Select Show | Fault Browser to display the Fault Browser VCR buttons bar if its
not already visible.
Press the VCR-like buttons to view the relays response to different faults.
50 SECTION 2
TRIAL ADJUSTMENT OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS

Prior to adjusting a relay, OneLiner lets you experiment with the time-dial and pickup setting to see its effects on
the relay's time delay. This feature allows you to find the time dial and pickup setting needed to reach a desired
time delay for coordination.
In this example, we will experiment with the settings of the fourth relay.
1.
Click the right mouse button on the parameter caption of the fourth relay.
A pop-up menu will appear.
2.
Click on the 'Relay trial adjustment' command.

A dialog box will appear. The relay type and the relay current are shown
at the top of the dialog box. The relay operating time in seconds is shown
inside the box labeled "Operating Time".
3.
Click on the up arrow of the vertical scroll bar to increase the time dial setting.
The time dial value is shown below the scroll bar. As you click on the
scroll bar, the time dial value, as well as the relay's time delay, will change.
SECTION 2
4.
Click on the right arrow of the horizontal scroll bar to increase the pickup
setting.
The pickup setting is shown below the scroll bar. As you click on the
scroll bar, the pickup setting, as well as the relay's time delay, will change.
5.
Click on "Cancel" to abandon the changes.

Note: If you had clicked on the "Apply It" button the program would
have implemented the new time-dial and pickup setting.
ADJUSTING OVERCURRENT RELAY SETTINGS

You can adjust the relay settings while the overcurrent relay curves are being displayed. After each adjustment,
the program will automatically re-compute the relay operating time and display the new curves.
In this example, we will adjust the setting of the fourth relay to increase the delay. Please make a mental note of
the position of this relay curve.
1.
Double click the left mouse button within the parameter caption of the fourth
relay.
A dialog box with the parameters of this relay will appear, as shown below.
Note that CT ratio can be a numeric value. It can also be in the form of
XXX : YYY or XXX / YYY, e.g., 600 : 5 for a 600A-to-5A CT.
2.
Use the <Tab> key to move the text cursor to the 'Time Dial' edit box and change
the time dial setting from 0.5 to 1.4.
The dialog box will disappear and the relay curves will be redrawn to
reflect the new setting. The new relay operating time will be shown in the
parameter box.
52 SECTION 2
Note that the fourth relay curve is shifted upward as a result of increasing
the time dial setting.
Similar procedures can be used to adjust the pickup setting, the
instantaneous setting, and other relay parameters. You can also change
the relay type if needed.
GETTING RELAY TEST VALUES
After changing the settings of a relay in OneLiner, the program gives you the test values that are necessary to
set the relay in the field. We will use the fourth relay again in the following.
1.
Click the right mouse button on the parameter caption of the fourth relay.
A pop-up menu will appear.
2.
Click on the 'Show relay test values' command.

A table with the test current (in primary and secondary amps) and the
associated time delay will be displayed in the TTY window. These values
will enable the technicians to set the relay in the field.
4.
Click on "Done" to close the dialog box.
5.
We will close the Curves Window.

Select the Misc | Close Window command.
The Curves Window will close and you will be back to the Main Window
within OneLiner.
SECTION 2
DISPLAYING POST-FAULT SOLUTION ON DISTANCE RELAY CURVES

OneLiner lets you plot the characteristics of distance relays in much the same way as overcurrent
relays. OneLiner will also show the relay currents and operating times.
1.
The relay group on the line between NEVADA 132 kV and REUSENS 132 kV
should still be highlighted. Click on the relay group with the right mouse
button.
2.
Click on the View Relay Curves command in the floating menu.

A dialog box will appear asking you, which of the relays in the relay group
you want to display.
3.
Click on the 'DS phase relay NVPhase1' relay in the list box. Then, click on the
"OK" button.
The Distance Relay Window will appear showing the characteristics of the
distance relay NVPhase1. The relay parameters will be shown inside a box
to the right of the plot.
4.
Select the Misc. | Options command.

A dialog box will appear allowing you to set certain parameters within the
Distance Relay Window.
54 SECTION 2
These parameters include which units of time to display, which color to

use for the circular grid and the desired font size.
Click on "Cancel" to accept the default settings.
The dialog box will close. We are now ready to show the relay operations
for one of the faults.
5.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select one of the fault solutions.
The close-in fault is already selected by default.

6.
Click on the "Display" button.

The dialog box will disappear and the window will be refreshed to look like
the figure below. The fault description will be shown below the relayparameter box.
SECTION 2
The apparent impedances plotted on the complex plane are for

informational purposes only.
OneLiner determines the operation of this KD relay from the XYZ-triangle
principle. In general, each relay type is modeled using phase and
magnitude comparators that are appropriate for that relay type. The
tripping information (in text, within the parameter box) is the output of this
detailed model. Details on distance relay modeling can be found in
Section 2 of the Distance Relay Users Manual (In the Main Window, click
on Help | DS Relay Editor Help to see the on-line version).
In some cases such as this one the relay may trip even though none of
the apparent impedances are within the relay characteristics.
7.
Select the Misc | Close Window command.

The Distance Relay Window will close and we will be back to the Main
Window of OneLiner.
56 SECTION 2
CHECKING RELAY COORDINATION

OneLiner has an automatic relay coordination checking feature that checks the coordination of a selected relay
group against either its backup relays or the relays that it backs up. The coordination check can be done with
line-to-line faults, 3-phase faults or single-line-to-ground faults. You may also instruct the program to consider
single and/or double contingencies. The results will warn you of cases where the coordinating time interval is
outside the range of acceptable limits you specified. The primary-backup relay pairs have to be specified before
this feature can be used.
1.
Select a primary relay group.

Click the left mouse button once on the relay group at the left end of the
line between NEVADA 132 kV and REUSENS 132 kV.
2.
Select the backup relay group.

With the <Shift> key held down, click the right mouse button once on the
relay group at the right end of the line between NEVADA 132 kV and
OHIO 132 kV as shown. A pop-up menu will appear.
3.
Click on the Form Coordination Pair menu item.

A message box will appear asking you to confirm the formation of the
coordination pair.
Click on "OK" to form the coordination pair.

The coordination pairs are stored within the binary data file once they are
specified. We will now begin to check the relay coordination.
4.
Select the relay group of interest.
SECTION 2
Click the left mouse button once on the relay group at the left end of the
line between NEVADA 132 kV and REUSENS 132 kV as you did in step
1.
5.
Select the Check | Primary/Backup Coordination command to check the

coordination of the primary-backup relays.
A dialog box will appear allowing you to enter the relay checking
parameters.
Enter all of the settings as shown in the picture below.
Click on the "OK" button to begin checking coordination of the relay

groups.
The dialog box will disappear. The TTY window will appear displaying the
program's progress and the coordination report.
At the beginning of the coordination report is the name of selected relay group, the
CTI (Coordinating Time Interval) criteria and the fault type. Following this
summary, the report shows the names of primary and backup relays and a list of
branches that will be taken out of service. The branches are numbered 1, 2, 3, etc.
58 SECTION 2
The program will check the coordination of these two relay groups by
simulating faults on the protected line and comparing operating time of
relays in coordination pair.
The program will show the results in a tabular form. For each fault, the
table will show:
The names of the primary and backup relays that operate fastest in the
overcurrent relay groups.
Line outages, if any.
The current and operating time of the primary and backup relays.
The difference in the two operating times.
Fault description.
A warning flag; "W1", if the operating time exceeds Max CTI value or is
below the Min CTI value.
6.
Select the Menu | Close Window command to close the TTY Window.
7.
Close the example file.

If you are running the Working Model, the file will close now. Proceed to
next page.
A message box will appear asking if you would like to save the changes to
the file.

The dialog box will disappear and the main screen will turn gray.
SECTION 2
IMPORTING A NETWORK DATA FILE IN TEXT FORMAT

The network import feature is used by new users to create the one-line diagram for the first time. New users of
OneLiner will need to first convert their existing short circuit data to an ASPEN text data file. ASPEN has a
number of data conversion programs for data in the PTI PSS/E, PTI PSS/U, Electrocon, CYME, GE, ANAFAS and
other popular formats. (The data conversion programs are available free of charge to OneLiner users.) After
converting the data to the ASPEN format, the users can then use the import feature to create the one-line diagram.
This procedure needs to be done only once. The network data and the graphical information are stored in a
binary data file.
We will demonstrate the import feature with a small 7-bus system.
1.
Select the File | Open Text Data File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the text data file to
open.
2.
Click once on the file name EXAMPLE.DXT in the list box. Then click on the
Open button.
The dialog box will disappear. After a brief pause during which OneLiner
reads and process the text data file, you will see a blank Main Window. A
message box will appear informing you that 7 buses have been read in and
none are visible now.
3.
Click on the "OK" button to close the message box.
4.
Place the bus WOODSIDE 115kV and its neighbors.

Click the right mouse button once near the middle of the window. A
Click on the Place Buses command in the floating menu.
A dialog box will appear to let you select the buses to be placed. The left
list box shows all the buses in the system. The buses that have been
placed are designated by the letter A at the end of the bus identifier.
60 SECTION 2
Click on the name WOODSIDE 115kV 1 on the left list box.

All the immediate neighbors of WOODSIDE 115kV are displayed in the
right list box. The buses are listed in alphabetical order by bus name and
nominal kV. Both of these buses are highlighted because the default
option is to place all the neighbors along with the selected bus.

The bus WOODSIDE 115 kV will appear at the position of your last mouse
click. The generator at this bus is automatically added by OneLiner. Its
neighboring buses MTN. VIEW 115 kV and SANTA CLARA 115 kV are
also automatically placed.
OneLiner will add four lines, representing the four branches, between
WOODSIDE 115kV and its neighboring buses. As a general rule,
OneLiner will automatically add the generator, load and shunt at the new
buses, as well as all the branches between them and the buses that are
already on the screen.
Note the bus symbol for WOODSIDE is solid, while the symbols for its
neighbors are hollow. A solid bus symbol means all the neighbors of that
bus are visible on the screen. A hollow symbol means one or more
neighbors remain hidden.
Tidy up the one-line diagram by dragging the symbols with the mouse.
Use the picture below as a guide.
SECTION 2
5.
Place the neighbors of MTN. VIEW 115kV.

We know MTN. VIEW has one or more invisible neighbors because the
bus symbol of MTN. VIEW is hollow.
Click the right mouse button once on the bus MTN. VIEW 115kV. A
Click on the Place Buses command.
A similar place-bus dialog box will appear. The bus WOODSIDE 115kV is
highlighted on the left. Its neighbors are shown on the right. The two
invisible neighbors, PALO ALTO and MENLO PARK are highlighted.

The buses PALO ALTO and MENLO PARK will appear on the screen.
6.
Place remaining buses by repeating step 5.

Use the diagram on this page as a guide for the placement of the buses.
After the last bus is placed on the screen, a message box will appear,
informing you that the one-line diagram has been completed.

The 7-bus system should look something like this.
62 SECTION 2
There is also an Export Network command, which produces a text data file
based on the network data stored in the binary data file. The exported text
data file can be in ASPEN format or one of the following foreign formats:
PTI PSS/E format, GE PSLF format, GE short circuit format, or ANAFAS
format.
SECTION 2
IMPORTING A RELAY DATA FILE IN TEXT FORMAT

The relay import feature is designed to facilitate the transfer of a large amount of relay data from a text file into a
OneLiner binary data file. The text file must be in the ASPEN Relay format described in Section 7. This command
is used most commonly to transfer relay data from a foreign relay database into OneLiner. (Users of the ASPEN
Relay Database can transfer relay data to OneLiner through a different mechanism.)
We will demonstrate the relay import feature with a text data file called RELAY.RAT.
1.
Select the Relay | Import Relay command.

Note: This feature is not enabled within the working model. If you are
running the working model, please skip to the next page.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the relay data file to
open.
Click once on file name RELAY.RAT in the list box. Click on the
"Open" button.
Once OneLiner accepts the file name, the dialog box will disappear and the
TTY Window will appear. OneLiner will display in this window the
program's progress as well as any data errors found within the text data
file.
Part of the data for each relay tells the program where it resides in the
network. Relays that have valid location data are placed automatically by
the OneLiner.
There is also an Export Relay command, which produces a text data file
that corresponds to the relay settings stored in the binary data file. The
Relay | Exp ort Relay command is the Import Relay command in reverse.
64 SECTION 2
CREATING A BUS FAULT SUMMARY

This command simulates 3-line-to-ground, 2-line-to-ground, single-line-to-ground and line-to-line faults at a
number of buses and produces a tabular output of the fault currents and Thevenin impedances.
1.
Select the Faults | Bus-Fault Summary command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the buses to be faulted.
Leave everything else at the default settings.

2.
Click on "OK".
The 'Save to File' dialog box will appear in which you must specify the
output file name.
3.
Type in the output file name SAMPLE30 and click on "Save".

Both the 'Save to File' and 'Bus Fault Summary' dialog box will disappear.
When the simulation and file output are complete, the program will display a
message box asking if you want to view the output file in a spreadsheet program.
Click on Yes to see the tabular results.
SECTION 2
PERFORMING A VOLTAGE SAG ANALYSIS

This command will automatically simulate bus faults and intermediate faults in the vicinity of a monitored bus (i.e.,
the location of a voltage sensitive customer) and tabulate the voltage at the monitored bus. Faults that cause the
monitored voltage to dip below the threshold are flagged.
1.
Click right mouse button on California 33.kV bus.

The bus symbol will be highlighted in dotted red and a popup menu will
appear.
2.
Select the Fault | Voltage Sag Analysis command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the input parameters.
3.
Leave 'Voltage threshold (Per unit)' at its default setting of 0.6.

The voltage threshold is used as a stopping criterion for the fault
simulations. The faults are applied first at the monitored bus, then at lines
and buses one bus away, and two buses away, and so on, until the
monitored-bus voltage for faults at a certain number of buses away is
above the threshold of 0.6 per unit.
66 SECTION 2
4.
Leave the 'No. of intermediate faults for each line' at its default setting 1.
The program will place an intermediate fault at the midpoint of all
transmission lines.
5.
Click on "OK".
When the simulations and file output are complete, the 'Sag Analysis Progress'
dialog box will disappear. The result will be displayed on the one-line diagram
When the analysis is complete, OneLiner will display the voltage-sag

results on the one-line diagram. Specifically, the monitored-bus voltage in
per unit will be shown below each faulted bus name. The program will also
paint a colored halo around each faulted bus to help you visualize its
effect on the monitored bus. The more severe the voltage sag at the
monitored bus caused by a fault, the darker halo will be painted around
the faulted bus.
SECTION 2
GETTING ONLINE HELP ABOUT OneLiner

We can use one of the three ways to get online help:
1.
Get help through the Table of Contents.

Click on the Help | Contents command.
The Help Window will appear. Its client area shows the contents of the
on-line help topics that are shown underlined. The on-line help contains
the full text and graphics of this Users Manual, from beginning to end.
Click on one of the topics to page to the sub-index or the detailed

explanations.
2.
Get help on a specific command.

Click on the top menu to bring down the list of menu commands. Use the
up or down arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight the menu item of
interest. Then press the <F1> key.
3.
Click on the Help button in any dialog box.

The Help Window will appear showing the help topic of the
corresponding command. We demonstrated this method at the beginning
of this tutorial when we added a new transmission line to the network.
Note: To access on-line help for dialog boxes with multiple pages press
the <F1> key while the dialog box is displayed.
4.
68 SECTION 2
Click on the File | Exit command to close the help file.
EXITING OneLiner
This ends the quick tutorial for OneLiner. The remaining instructions will take you back to the Windows
desktop.
1.
Select the File | Exit command.

If you are running the working model, the program will close now and you
are done.
If you are running the production version, a dialog box will appear asking
you whether you want to save the changes.

OneLiner will close. You will be back on the Windows desktop.
TO EXPLORE FURTHER
This tutorial covered only a small subset of the commands in OneLiner. You can find a detailed description of all
the commands in Section 3 of the OneLiner User's Manual. (The manual is available as an on-line help file in the
Working Model.) You may also read Section 4 to see how OneLiner models the various network elements.
Finally, you may wish to browse through the appendices, which cover a wide range of topics that include the
solution method and techniques for transformer modeling.
The tutorial for the Batch Short Circuit Module is in the next Section.
You can find tutorials for the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor and the ASPEN Distance Relay Editor in Section
2 of the respective User's Manual. (Not included in the Working Model.)
SECTION 2
2.9 BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT QUICK TUTORIAL

This tutorial is designed to acquaint new users with the basic functions of the Batch Short Circuit Module. The
Batch Short Circuit Module is installed along with OneLiner. We assume you have installed OneLiner (Section
2.1 or 2.3). If not, do so now. This tutorial will take about 20 minutes to complete.
STARTING BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT
On the Windows desktop, look for a program group called ASPEN OneLiner or OneLiner Working Model. Inside
the program group are a number of program icons that look like this:
Start Up Batch Short Circuit:

1.
Double click on the Batch Short Circuit icon to start the program.
When the program starts up, you will see the Main Window.
2.
Enlarge the window by clicking the mouse once on the maximize box at the
upper-right corner.
The Main Window will take up the entire screen and be ready for your
commands.
70 SECTION 2
OPENING A BINARY DATA FILE

An example 30-bus system is used for this tutorial. You will now open its binary data file.
1.
Select the File | Open .OLR or .DXT File command.

Note: To select this command you first click the left mouse button on
'File' to open its pull down menu. Then click the left mouse button on
'Open .OLR or .DXT File'.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the data file that you
want to open.
2.
Open the file SAMPLE30.OLR.

Click once on the file name SAMPLE30.OLR and then click on the
"Open" button.
3.
The Program Progress Report will appear.

The program will report on its progress while reading in the 30-bus
system. The word "Ready" will appear when the program is ready for
your commands. Note that the data file name is listed on the title bar.
SECTION 2
SIMULATING FAULTS
You will simulate faults on two of the buses, bus 16 and bus 17.
1.
Select the Faults | Specify Faults command.

2.
Select the fault type and phase connections.

We want to simulate bus faults, both 3-phase and single-phase to ground.
These options are the default selections, so no entries are needed.
3.
Select the bus number range.

Change the 'Bus numbers from' edit boxes to read 16 to 17.
The dialog box should now look like this.
4.
Click on "Show bus list" to view the buses that will be faulted.
A dialog box will appear listing the buses that will be faulted.
5.
Click on "Done" to close the 'Selected Fault Buses' dialog box.
6.
Click on "OK" in the 'Fault Specification' dialog box.

Another dialog box will appear, asking you to specify the output parameters.
72 SECTION 2
7.
Click on the "Write to New File" button.

The 'Output Style' dialog box will be replaced with the 'Save to File' dialog
box in which you must specify the output file name.
8.
Type in the output file name SAMPLE30.OUT, and then click on "Save".
Once the Batch Short Circuit Module accepts the file name, both the
Fault Specification dialog box and the Save to File dialog box will
disappear. The Batch Short Circuit Progress dialog box will appear.
The number above the top bar, in this case, 4, indicates the total number
of faults to be simulated.
The first three bars and the number immediately to the right indicate the
number of faults that have been simulated in the R+jX case, the R-only
case and the X-only case, respectively. (The R-only case and the X-only
case are needed to compute the ANSI X/R ratios.)
SECTION 2
The bottom-most bar and the number to the right indicate the number of
faults that have been written to the output file.
When the simulation and file output are complete, the Batch Short Circuit
Progress dialog box will disappear and the Main Window will report that 4
faults were written successfully to the file C:\ASPEN\IEEE30.OUT.
You will see this message box.
Click on Yes to view the output file.

The Output Viewer will appear, showing the first page of the output.
Click on Next! on the menu bar to see the next page.

The is result of the the 3-phase fault on OREGON 33 kV.
74 SECTION 2
When done, click on File | Exit.

GETTING ONLINE HELP ABOUT Batch Short Circuit
We can use one of the three ways to get online help:
1.
Get help through the Table of Contents.

Click on the Help | Contents command.
The Help Window will appear. Listed in the client area are the topics of the online help file.
Click on one of the topics to page to the sub-index or the detailed

explanations.
2.
Get help on a specific command.

Click on the top menu to bring down the list of menu commands. Use the
up or down arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight the menu item of
interest. Then press <F1> key.
SECTION 2
3.
Click on the Help button in any dialog box.

The Help Window will appear showing the help topic of the
corresponding command.
76 SECTION 2
EXITING Batch Short Circuit

This ends the quick tutorial for Batch Short Circuit. The remaining instructions will take you back to the
Windows desktop.
1.

Batch Short Circuit will close. You will be back on the Windows desktop.
TO EXPLORE FURTHER
This tutorial covered only a small subset of the commands in Batch Short Circuit. You can find a detailed
description of all the commands in Batch Short Circuit User's Manual. This manual is also available as an on-line
help file Batch Sckt. Help.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section documents the commands in the Main Window, the Curves Window, the DS Relays
Window and the TTY Window.
____________________________
Main Window Commands
The Main Window displays the one-line diagram of the network. The commands in the Main
Window are described in Section 3.2.
______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________
Curves Window Commands
The Curves Window displays the characteristics of overcurrent relays. The commands in the
Curves Window are described in Section 3.3.
______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________
DS Relays Window Commands
The DS Relays Window displays the characteristics of distance relays. The commands in the DS
Relays Window are described in Section 3.4.
______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________
TTY Window Commands
The TTY Window displays the program outputs in the traditional text form. The commands in the
TTY Window are described in Section 3.5.
__________________________________________________________________________
___
SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE 79
3.2 MAIN WINDOW COMMANDS

The Main Window is initially gray when the program begins execution. OneLiner shows the one-line diagram of
the power system in the Main Window after a binary data file has been opened or created. The name of the binary
data file is shown in the caption area. The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the fault description
when a short-circuit solution is being shown.
You can split the main window into two panes by dragging the thick vertical line on the left side of the window. The
two panes have independent scroll controls. A zoom slider on the toolbar controls the zoom setting. The zoom
commands you issue will affect only the active pane, which is indicated by a thin yellow bar at the bottom. You can
make a pane active by clicking the mouse on it.
Zoom Slider
The two panes may display different quantities: you may have the system impedance on one pane and the shortcircuit solution on the other, for example. You can edit the one-line in either pane. The other pane is updated
automatically. There is a toolbar immediately below the menus.
Toolbar
The 25 icons on the toolbar are shortcuts to the following frequently used commands.
File | New
File | Open Binary Data File
File | Save
Tools | Undo
Tools | Data Browser
Faults | Specify Classical Faults
Faults | Specify Simultaneous Fault
Faults | Show Solution on 1-line
Display Zero Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Positive Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Negative Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'A' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'B' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'C' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Relay Operating Times (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display First Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Previous Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Next Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Last Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Tools | Scripting | Run Script
View | Device Palette
View | TTY Window
Relay | Curves Window
80 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
THE DEVICE PALETTE

The Device Palette, and the drag-drop model building technique makes the task of constructing OneLiner oneline diagram models intuitive and effortless. You can add a new object to the diagram by simply selecting it the
Palette with the mouse and placing it on the one-line diagram.
Device supported:
You can show or hide the Palette by selecting command View | Device Palette or by clicking on the corresponding
button on the main toolbar.
Modal operation:
Once you have selected an object type in the Device Palette, the program goes into the Add Object mode. You
can add new objects of the selected type repeatedly, and perform a limited set of related commands while you are
in this mode. To exit the Add Object mode, click on the Pointer pane in the Device Palette or press the <Esc> key
on your keyboard.
General drag-and-drop technique:
To add single-terminal objects such as a bus, generator, shunt, switched shunt, load or annotation, simply select
the object from the Device Palette and then click the mouse on the diagram where you want to place the new
object.
To add a new two-terminal branch such as a line, 2-winding transformer, phase shifter, series capacitor/reactor,
switch, or dc line, first select the object from the Device Palette, and then click and drag the mouse to place one
end of the branch and then the other. If there is an existing bus in the vicinity of the mouse clicks, the program
will attach a terminal of the new branch to that bus. If you click on an empty place, the program will create new
bus(es) to anchor the new device.
To create a 3-winding transformer, follow the same direction for two-terminal branches to place the first two
buses. The program will create the tertiary bus automatically at a position between the first two terminals. The
tertiary is initially not connected to any existing bus, but you can easily merge it with any existing bus of the same
nominal kV.
To paste an object from clipboard, click first on the Paste button
above to place the pasted object on the 1-line.
on the palette. Use the technique described
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
NEW COMMAND
The New command in the Main Window lets you create a new binary data file
TO CREATE A NEW BINARY DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | New command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the system base MVA.
2.
Enter the system base MVA if you wish to use a value other than 100.
Note: The system base MVA cannot be changed once this dialog box is
closed.
Click on the "OK" button to close the dialog box.
The screen will turn to a white background with nothing on it. You can
enter buses and branches using commands under the Network | New menu
or with the drag/drop palette.
The new file is named "untitled" until you save it and give it a name.
82 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
OPEN BINARY DATA FILE COMMAND
The Open Binary Data File command in the Main Window lets you open an existing binary data file for editing
and for simulating faults and coordinating relays.
TO OPEN AN EXISTING BINARY DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Open Binary Data File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the binary data file to
open.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of the
binary data file.
A new dialog box will appear showing you the progress in reading and
processing the data. After a short time, this dialog box will disappear and
the Main Window will display the one-line diagram of the selected binary
data file.
The program locks the file you open with the "exclusive write" privilege
until you close the file or exit the program. When another user attempts to
open the same file, OneLiner will warn him or her that the file can be
opened for "read only".
A read-only file can be saved only under another file name, with the File |
Save As command.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
OPEN TEXT DATA FILE COMMAND
The Open Text Data File Command in the Main Window reads in a text data file that contains the network
parameters of a power system. In most cases, the text data file is the output of a data conversion program.
TO OPEN A TEXT DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Open Text Data File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the text data file to
open. A text data file has extension of .DXT.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to select the text data file.
If errors are encountered, the errors are listed both in the TTY Window
and in the message file ASPEN.LOG. The TTY Window will open
automatically. If you wish to view the message file, use an editor such as
Notepad.
If no errors are found, a dialog box will appear informing you of the size of
the system that has been read in and that none of the buses are visible.
You can make one or more buses visible on the one-line with the Diagram |
Place Bus command. At the minimum, the equipment you wish to fault
must be visible.
If one or more nodes have non-zero state-plane coordinates, the program
will ask you whether you want to place those nodes automatically, based
on their coordinates.
If you answer Yes, the dialog box of the Snap-to-State-Plain-Coordinates

command will appear. Please refer to the documentation of the Diagram |
Snap to State Plain Coordinates command for details.
If any of the nodes are not visible on the diagram, you can place them and
make them visible on the one-line with the Diagram | Place Bus command.
84 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
CLOSE COMMAND
The Close command in the Main Window closes the current data file (the one-line diagram of which is being
shown on the main window).
TO CLOSE A BINARY DATA FILE:
1.

If the current binary data file has been modified, a dialog box will appear
asking you whether the changes should be saved.
Click on "Yes" if you wish to save the updated data to disk under the current file
name; otherwise, click on "No".
The original binary data file, if any, is saved under the .BAK extension.
The changes you made during the session will be lost. The dialog box will
disappear.
If a previous curve collection (PCC) file is currently open and it has been
changed, another dialog box will appear asking you whether the changes
should be saved.
Click on "Yes" if you wish to save the changes to the PCC file; otherwise, click
on "No".
The Main Window will show the ASPEN icon with a gray background.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
SAVE COMMAND
The Save command in the Main Window saves the current case to the disk under the current binary data file
name. The old binary data file is saved under the .BAK extension. It is wise to periodically save a file on which
you are editing to guard against information loss in the event of a program or system failure.
TO SAVE A BINARY DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Save command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if (1) if the file
has not been modified or (2) the file was opened for "read only".
If the file was created with the File | New command or imported with the
File | Open Text Data File in the same session, the program will ask you for
the name of the binary data file.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to enter the binary data
file name. Click on "OK".
The cursor will turn into an hourglass while the current binary data are
being written to the disk. You may continue working with the current file
after the cursor is restored to the original arrow shape.
86 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
SAVE AS COMMAND
The Save As command in the Main Window saves the current case to disk under a different binary data file name.
The current binary data file is not altered.
TO SAVE THE BINARY DATA FILE UNDER A NEW NAME:
1.
Select the File | Save As command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the binary data
file.
2.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of the binary
data file.
You should name all your binary data files with the .OLR extension.
3.

The cursor will turn into an hourglass while the current binary data file is
being written to the disk. The new file name will appear in the title bar of
the Main Window. You may continue working with the new file after the
cursor is restored to the original arrow shape.
Note: If this operation overwrites an existing data file, the original file is
saved automatically under the .BAK extension.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
FILE COMMENTS COMMAND
File comments are notes that describe the binary data file. The File Comments command in the Main Window
allows you to review and edit previously entered comments and to add new comments. The file comments are
printed on the title page of the output when you use the Solution Reports commands.
TO EDIT FILE COMMENTS:
1.
Select the File | File Comments command.

A dialog box will appear showing the current file comments. A blinking
text cursor indicates where new text will appear.
If you wish to review the file comments only, click on "Cancel" after you
have looked at the comments.
2.
Using the mouse and the keyboard, edit the comments or add new comments.
A file comment can have up to 5999 characters. You can force the program
to start a new line by hitting <Enter> with the <Ctrl> key held down.
Click on the "OK" button to save the new comments.
88 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
STATISTICS COMMAND
The Statistics command in the Main Window shows you the statistics of various objects in the current file. These
include the number of buses, generators, lines and relays.
TO VIEW SYSTEM STATISTICS:
1.
Select the File | System Statistics command.

A dialog box will appear showing the system statistics. The system MVA
base is shown at the top of this dialog box.
The top listbox shows the number of network objects, such as buses, lines
and generators. It also shows the total number of annotations.
The bottom listbox shows the number of protective equipment, including
fuses, reclosers, relays and coordinating pairs.
2.
Click on Done when you are finished.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
MERGE FILE COMMAND
The Merge File command in the Main Window allows you to augment an existing data file with contents of
another binary data file.
If a bus is found in both files, the program automatically adds a ~ character at the beginning of one of the bus
names. A list of these duplicate buses is shown in the TTY window. After the files are merged, you can then
manually combine these bus pairs (with the Merge Bus command) as needed to stitch together the two files.
Note: This command in Version 9 allowed you to added data from a DXT file. This feature is no longer
supported in Version 10. To add data from a DXT file, we suggest that you first open the DXT file and saved it as
an OLR file. You will then be able to use this command.
TO MERGE NETWORK DATA FROM ANOTHER DATA FILE:
1.
With the scrollbar controls, move the viewport to an empty space where you want
to place the center of the added network.
This center location need not be exact, because you will be able to move the
added network later in step 4.
2.
Select the File | Merge File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the data file that you
wish to add.
3.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of the data
file. Click on the "OK" button.
Once OneLiner accepts the file name, the dialog box will disappear and the
one-line diagram of a ghosted image of the added network will appear on
the screen.
4.
Place the added network.

With the mouse, drag the ghosted image to the desired location in the
viewport. Clicking the mouse outside the ghosted image will permanently
place it on the screen.
90 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT NETWORK DATA COMMAND
The Export Network Data command in the Main Window lets you create a new text data file that corresponds to
the current state of the network. The exported file is a text file in one of the following formats: ASPEN text data
file format (see Section 5 for details), PTI PSS/E format,, ANAFAS format, GE Short Circuit format, and GE Power
Flow (PSLF) format. If you are planning to export to a PTI PSS/E or GE PSLF format, we suggest you first execute
the Check | Data Compatibility command to see if there are any data incompatibilities, and, if so, fix them before
you export the data.
OneLiner will perform certain fix-ups to the data during a PTI, GE or ANAFAS conversion:
Buses with zero bus number are given a unique positive bus number. These bus number
assignments are temporary.
Branches and generating units with blank circuit IDs are given an ID of 1. The ID assignments
are temporary.
Switches are exported as lines with a very small reactance.
For ANAFAS conversion only: Shunts, loads, phase shifters and dc lines are ignored.
For PTI conversion only: Multiple shunt units on a bus are lumped into a single shunt. Generators
and loads are not aggregated
3-winding transformers are converted to the standard T model. (The exception to this rule is PTI
version 27 and later, in which case, each 3-winding transformer in ASPEN is exported as a 3winding transformer object in PTI format.) The T-model conversion is temporary and does not
affect the existing 3-winding transformer parameters.
For GE Conversion only: For bus shunts, the letter b is added to the beginning of the ID of
shunts (if the b is not there already). All bus names are truncated to 8 characters. Also, branch
names are truncated to 8 characters and are exported as the branches long ID. All these changes
are temporary.
Note: The graphical information of the one-line diagram is not included in the exported file.
TO EXPORT NETWORK DATA TO A NEW TEXT DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Export Network command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the extent and format of the
report.
SECTION 3
2.
Select either the entire network or an area or a zone.

Click on the radio button "Entire Network" to export everything.
Click on the radio button "Area no.". Then, select an area in the drop
down list box to export only the equipment within that area.
Click on the radio button "Zone no.". Then, select a zone in the drop
down list box to export only the equipment within that zone.
3.
Select the output data format. Click on:

ASPEN:
To export the network using the ASPEN format.
PTI:
To export the network using the PTI PSS/E format.
ANAFAS:
To export the network using the ANAFAS format (a PECOlike format widely used by Brazilian utilities for data
exchange.)
GE Short Circuit: To export the network using the GE Short Circuit

format.
GE PSLF:
4.
To export the network using the GE Power Flow (PSLF)

format.
Click on Include tie lines to included them in the text data file.
This option is meaningful only if you are exporting the network data from
a single area or zone. A tie line is a branch that spans the selected area
or zone and one of its neighbors. When this option is turned on, the
program will export all the tie lines and their terminal buses, even though
some of the tie-line bus terminals do not belong in the selected area or
zone.
IF YOU SELECTED ASPEN, ANAFAS OR GE FORMAT:

A dialog box will appear asking you to name the new text data file.
text data file.
The default file extension is shown at the bottom of the dialog box.
The TTY Window will appear on top of the Main Window to inform you
of the program's progress. After the system is exported, you will see the
line "Close this window to continue..." in the TTY Window.
Skip the rest of the instructions for this command.
IF YOU SELECTED THE PTI FORMAT:
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the PTI version number
and starting bus numbers.
92 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Select the PTI format you want.

Enter first fictitious bus numbers: for 3-winding transformer midpoint
buses. The program will assign bus numbers to the equivalent T model of
3-winding transformers starting with this number, unless you have
specified a nonzero fictitious bus number in the 3-winding transformer
dialog box.
Enter first bus number: for buses with no bus numbers. OneLiner will
assign bus numbers, starting with this number, to buses whose number
is 0. The assigned bus number will become a permanent part of the bus
data.
Click on "OK" to close the "ASPEN-to-PTI" dialog box and start the
conversion.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the new PTI
Raw Data file and PTI Sequence Data File.
PTI Raw Data file. Click on "OK".
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT BREAKER DATA COMMAND
The Export Breaker Data command in the Main Window lets you create an ASPEN Change File that contains the
data of all the circuit breakers. You can import the breaker data to another network at any time with the File | Read
Change File command. You can also use this file as a separate depository for breaker data.
TO EXPORT BREAKER DATA TO A TEXT DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Export Breaker Data.

A File Save dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the data
file.
Use the controls in the dialog to select location and enter the name for
the data file. The program will automatically assign file extension CHF.
Click OK to export.
94 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT SUBSTATION DATA COMMAND
The Export Substation Data command in the Main Window outputs a text file containing the equivalent
impedances of all the substation buses.
ASPEN OneLiner and ASPEN DistriView program users can use the change file created by this command to
update the substation-bus impedances with a single command. The name and kV of the substation buses in
OneLiner or DistriView distribution network file must match the name and nominal kV of the corresponding
buses in your OneLiner file.
For each of substation buses in OneLiner, you must assign a non-zero substation group number in the Bus
info dialog box. The following are the rules for assigning group numbers:
Assign a unique group number to a bus in OneLiner if the corresponding substation has no possibility of
being interconnected with other substations.
Assign a unique group number to a group of buses in OneLiner if the corresponding substations are
interconnected (or have the possibility of being interconnected).
You can direct this command to produce substation data file for all the group numbers, or for just a single
selected group number.
Note: DistriView and OneLiner will ignore change commands for substations that do not exist; hence there is
no harm in applying a change file with more change commands than you need in DistriView or OneLiner.
TO EXPORT A SUBSTATION DATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Export Substation Data command.

A dialog box will appear:
2.
Enter the Base MVA of distribution network file.

This mu st be the same as the base MVA of the DistriView or OneLiner
network to which you plan to apply the update. ,
3.
Select a substation group number to export or select _ALL to export all groups.
Click on Bus List to see the name of buses that belong to the selected
group.
4.
Click on Export.
A dialog will appear asking you to specify the output file name. The file
type can be DistriView change file with extension .DVC or OneLiner
change file with extension .CHF.
Click on Save to start the export.
SECTION 3
Main Windows
FILE MENU
READ CHANGE FILE COMMAND
The Read Change File command in the Main Window allows you to modify the network of a binary data file using
a change file produced by the ASPEN Case Comparison Program. (See Appendix F for information on the
ASPEN Case Comparison Program). The change file can be of the ASPEN format (with CHF extension) or the
ANAFAS format (with ANA extension). The change file includes three types of information:
Commands to delete network elements or protective equipment
Commands to add network elements or protective equipment
Commands to modify the network elements or protective equipment
TO READ A CHANGE FILE:
1.
Select the File | Read Change File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the change file.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated after you have
deleted one or more objects.
2.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of the change
file. Change files can have either .CHF or .ANA extension.
A series of dialog boxes will now appear asking you to confirm the
changes, one at a time.
3.
Confirm or skip the changes.

When a change-file command is encountered, a dialog box will appear.
Click on:
Yes:
to confirm the current command.
No:
to ignore the current command but continue to read the

remaining commands.
Rest OK:
to confirm the current command and the remaining

commands.
Cancel Rest: to ignore the current command and the remaining

commands.
After all the commands have been processed, the TTY Window will
appear listing all of the changes made to the network.
The program will automatically place new branches that span existing buses. You
can change their appearance with the mouse at any time. The program will show
the remaining branches when you place the buses
4.
96 SECTION 3
Optional: Use the Save command to save the updated system including the
graphical information to the disk.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
PRINT SETUP COMMAND
The Print Setup command in the Main Window allows you to set up your printer.
1.
Select File | Print Setup command.

You should follow the procedure outlined in your Windows Users
Manual to configure your printer.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
PRINT ONE-LINE DIAGRAM COMMAND
The Print One-Line Diagram command in the Main Window lets you print the one-line diagram using the current
printer. (You may change the current printer using the Select Printer command described on the previous page.)
TO PRINT THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the File | Print One-Line command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the scaling factor. The name of
the printer will be shown at the top of the dialog box.
2.
Enter the desired margin on all sides of the printed page.
3.
Enter a scaling factor to enlarge or reduce the image.

The scaling factor allows you to adjust the size of the image on the printed
page. When the scaling factor is 1.0, OneLiner will map the portion of the
one-line diagram visible on the screen to the printed page. When the
scaling factor is less than 1.0, the magnification will be reduced allowing a
larger portion of the one-line diagram to be copied onto the printed page.
You should experiment with different values of the scaling factor to find
the one that works best for your printer and paper size.
4.
Click on the Preview button to see how the one-line diagram will appear on the
printed page.
A pop-up window will appear to show you the portion of the one-line
diagram that will be printed. This window has the same aspect ratio as the
printed page. The bus names and other text in the Preview window are
drawn with a screen font that emulates the printer fonts typeface and size.
Within the preview window, the arrow pointer associated with mouse will
change to a small hand.
98 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
You can change the contents of the printed page by dragging the hand
icon with the mouse. Close the Preview Window by double clicking on
the control menu box at the upper left corner.
5.
Click on the "Change Font" button to select the printer font.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
The fonts shown in the list box are those available on your printer.
Common fonts are Courier, Arial and Times Roman. OneLiner uses Arial
to paint on the screen. You may wish to select another font if Arial is not
available on your printer or you prefer the appearance of another font.
Font size controls the height of the type in units of points where one point
is defined to be 1/72 of an inch. The font size is unaffected by the scaling
factor. Text printed using a 10-point font will be 10/72 inch high no matter
what the value of the scaling factor happens to be. For this reason, you
should specify a small font size to go with a small scaling factor.
Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select the font and
font size you want. Click on the "OK" button to close the font dialog box.
Optional: Press the Preview button to see how the new font looks on the one-line
diagram.
6.
Mark the check box labeled Print black and white if you want to print the oneline diagram in black and white even though the printer has color capability.
7.
Click on the "OK" button to close the dialog box and commence printing.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT ONE-LINE DIAGRAM COMMAND
The Export One-Line Diagram command in the Main Window creates a Window Metafile or Enhanced Window
Metafile that corresponds to the current state of the one-line diagram. Metafiles are vector-graphic files that can
be imported to other Windows programs, such as Word and AutoCad.
TO SAVE ONE-LINE DRAWING AS A WINDOWS METAFILE OR ENHANCED WINDOWS MATA FILE:
1.
Select the File | Export One-Line command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the file.
file and whether it should be a window metafile or an enhanced window
metafile.
The extension of the file will be automatically set depending on your
choice. A message box will appear informing you that the network data
has been exported. Press OK to continue.
100 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXIT COMMAND
The Exit command in the Main Window lets you close the current binary data file and shut down OneLiner.
TO EXIT OneLiner:
1.

If the current binary data file has not been changed, the Main Window of
OneLiner will simply disappear.
If the current binary data file has been modified, a dialog box will appear
asking you whether the changes should be saved.
2.
Click on "Yes" if you wish to save the updated data to disk under the current file
name.
The original binary data file, if any, is saved under the .BAK extension.
The changes you made during the session will be lost. The dialog box will
disappear.
OneLiner will shut down and its window will disappear.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Properties command in the Main Window lets you review or edit the parameters of a network element. To
execute this command you must first select the network element.
TO REVIEW OR EDIT THE PARAMETERS OF A NETWORK ELEMENT:
1.
Select the network element.

Click the left mouse button once on the element you want to review or edit.
The element will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | Properties command.

The properties dialog box for the element will appear.
Make necessary modifications and click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the modifications will be applied to the
element.
102 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
OPTION COMMAND
The Option command lets you change modeling settings that affect both short circuit and power flow simulations.
This command also allows you control the default values used for new objects and the string delimiters in
exported data files.
TO CHANGE NETWORK OPTIONS:
1.
Select the Network | Option command.

The network option dialog box will appear.
2.
Select switch reactance

OneLiner models switches as low-impedance branch. The same
impedance is als o used to simulate a bypassed series reactor or capacitor.
Note: The reactance value selected must be small to avoid introducing
unwanted changes to the network model. However, switches with very
small impedance can cause numerical problems and result in incorrect
short circuit solutions. The smallest switch impedance one can use is a
function of the system being modeled. In most cases, the impedances
should be 0.0001 per unit or larger.
3.
Select check box "Ignore Phase shift" to ignore the phase shifts of wye-delta
transformers and phase shifters.
This option is put here, instead of the Faults | Options dialog box, because the
ignore-phase-shift option will affect both short circuit and power flow
simulations.
4.
Select default parameters for new objects.

When checked, the program will automatically use data from the last entered
object as default values when it displays the data dialog box for new objects.
Otherwise, the program will show you a blank info dialog box for new objects.
5.
Select string delimiter.

Character strings in text data files (*.DXT) and relay data file (*.RAT) are
enclosed by quotes. You can choose either the single quote or the double quote
for that purpose. The single quote was used exclusively prior to version 9. The
double quote was added as an option because it allows users to have
apostrophes in names and comments.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | BUS COMMAND
The New | Bus command in the Main Window lets you add a new bus to the network. To execute this command you
must first select a position with the left mouse button. The 'bus' object is linked to the circuit breaker information.
You can add new breakers with this command, also.
TO ADD A NEW BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1a. Click on the New Bus button
on the Device Palette. The cursor will become a
cross with a bus symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the One-line where you want to place the new bus.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the bus.
TO ADD A NEW BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1.
Select the bus location.

Click the left mouse button once at the desired position of the new bus.
2.
Select the Network | New | Bus command.

A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new bus.
3.
104 SECTION 3
Input the bus parameters.

Name:
A 12-character name for the bus. Any alphanumeric

characters can be used, except '#', '$' and the string delimiter
(single or double quotation mark).
Nom. kV:
Nominal line-to-line bus voltage.
Bus. No.:
The bus number, if not zero, must have a unique value in

the range 1 to 9999999, inclusive. (For PTI PSS/E
compatibility, you should limit the bus number between 1
COMMAND REFERENCE
and 999997, inclusive.) You will get a warning if the bus

number you chose is already in use.
Substation Group No.: The group number must be between 0 and 999,
inclusive. Enter a non-zero group number to designate this
bus as a substation bus. Please refer to the documentation
of the File | Export Substation Data command for
explanation of the substation group number.
4.
Location:
An 8-character location name. OneLiner does not make use

of this datum at this time.
Area No.:
An area number between 0 and 999, inclusive.
Zone No.:
A zone number between 0 and 999, inclusive.
Select the bus symbol style from the pull-down list

Bus symbol can be vertical bar, horizontal bar or dot.
5.
Select whether or not to show the bus ID one one-line diagram.

Note: You must enable the show ID on one-line diagram option to see
the solution voltages on the one-line diagram for short circuit and
power flow simulations.
6.
Select the bus type.

Mark the check box labeled Tap Bus if this dialog box is for a tap bus.
Tap buses are usually used to break down a transmission line into
different sections. The program skips over tap buses when applying
remote bus, line-end and intermediate faults. A bus is a real bus
otherwise.
Mark the check box labeled Transf. Midpoint if this dialog box is for
the fictitious midpoint bus of the T circuit of a 3-winding transformer.
This option is designed primarily for users who work with network data of
ANAFAS format.
7.
Enter state place coordinates

The state-plane coordinates are floating point numbers that specifies the
geographical location of the bus. You can use the Diagram | Snap to State
Plane Coordinates command to automatically place all the bus on the oneline diagram.
8.
Click on the 'Breaker Data' page.

The 'Breaker Data' page is for circuit breakers that are linked to this bus. If
there are any breakers at this bus, their names will appear in the list box on
the left.
SECTION 3
TO ADD A BREAKER:
1.
Click on "Add" to add a circuit breaker to this bus.

A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the circuit breaker parameters.
ANSI/IEEE total-current rated breaker properties screen:
106 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
IEC rated breaker properties screen:
2.
Enter the circuit breaker name.

The circuit breaker name is limited to 12 characters.
3.
Click on the 'Rating method' drop down list box and select either:
IEEE - Symmetrical current: for breakers that are rated on a symmetricalcurrent basis using ANSI/IEEE standards. Most breakers
made in the US after 1964 are rated this way.
IEEE - Total current: for breakers that are rated on a total-current basis
using ANSI/IEEE standards. Breakers made in the US
before 1965 are rated this way.
IEC: for breakers that are rated using IEC standards. Breakers made by
European manufacturers are rated this way.
When in doubt on the breaker type, have a look at its nameplate ratings.
The rating for an IEEE total-current rated breaker is in MVA, whereas the
rating for an IEEE symmetrical-current rated breaker is in amperes. IEC
breaker nameplate usually shows both rated breaking current and rated
making current in amperes.
4.
Enter the circuit breaker capabilities:

For breakers that are rated on a symmetrical-current basis using
ANSI/IEEE standards, enter Rated short circuit amps.
For breakers that are rated on a total-current basis using ANSI/IEEE
standards, enter Rated short circuit MVA and Rated
momentary amps.
For breakers that are using IEC standards, enter Rated breaking amps,
Percentage dc component and Rated ac making amps.
5.
Enter the circuit breakers maximum designed kV or rated kV in Maximum

design kV box.
SECTION 3
6.
Enter the circuit breakers operating voltage in 'Operating kV'. The default value
of this quantity is equal to the nominal kV of the breaker bus.
7.
Enter the voltage range factor, K.

For breakers that are rated using ANSI/IEEE standards the voltage range
factor defines a range of voltage in which breaker interrupting capability is
inversely proportional to the operating voltage. Thus when K equals 1,
the rated interrupting capability of the breaker must be used even when
the breaker being operated at lower than its maximum design kV.
8a. Enter breaker Interrupting time for breakers that are rated using ANSI/IEEE
standards.
Breaker interrupting time should be between 0 and 8 cycles.
8b. Enter rated short-circuit current percent dc component for breakers that are
rated using IEC standards.
9.
Enter breaker contact parting time for fault on each of the 2 groups devices
protected by this breaker.
Contact parting time must include relay tripping delay and breaker
energization time. Breaker contact parting time should be between 0 and 12
cycles. Following table shows typical minimum contact parting time
(without relay tripping delay) for different breakers:
8-cycle breaker: minimum contact parting time 4 cycles.
2-cycle breaker: minimum contact parting time 1.5 cycles.
10. Enter breaker description in 'Description'.

11. Select the number of reclosing operation and enter the reclosing intervals in
seconds for breakers that are rated using ANSI/IEEE standards.
The description must be less than 32 characters in length.
Mark the Do not derate this breaker check box if applicable.
NOTE: The rated interrupting capabilities of only oil circuit breakers
and air magnetic circuit breakers need to be derated for reclosing.
This input is ignored for breakers rated using IEC standard.
12. Enter the No-ac-decay ratio for breakers that are rated using ANSI/IEEE
standards.
The No-ac-decay ratio is defined as:
NACD = (Itotal - Ilocal)/Itotal
Where:
Itotal: total breaker short circuit current;
Ilocal: short circuit current from local generators that are located no more
than one transformation away or have external reactance in series which is
less than 1.5 times the generator subtransient reactance.
The default value for NACD ratio is 1, which implies that the short circuit
current comes entirely from remote sources and no AC decay should be
considered in calculating breaker short circuit duty. This value usually
108 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
yields the highest breaker duty result. Therefore one can use the default
value of 1 when screening out breakers that clearly have sufficient fault
interrupting capability.
For in-depth breaker duty studies, the NACD ratio can be determined by
simulating short circuit with and without local generators in service and
calculating the ratio of breaker current in the two cases.
This input is ignored for breakers rated using IEC standard.
13. Enter devices that the breaker must protect.
These are devices that the breaker disconnects from the network when its
contacts open. For more flexibility in modeling you can include the
devices into two separate groups, each having a different contact parting
time setting.
Click on the Edit button in each protected device group box to change the
list of devices. The following dialog box will appear.
The list includes the breaker bus and all generators, shunts, and branches
found in the vicinity of the breaker bus. The list does not include
equipment, which belongs to the other protected device group of this
breaker.
Select the check box in from of the equipment name to add it to the group.
Each group can contain up to 10 devices.
When a branch is selected, its assumed that the near end bus of the
branch is the one that will be disconnected by the breaker operation.
Click on OK to close the Protected Devices dialog box.
14. We are back to the Breaker Info dialog box. Click on Total group current if the
breaker must interrupt the sum of currents flowing through all the devices
listed above. Click on Max. device current if the breaker must interrupt the
highest current flowing through the devices listed.
15. Repeat step 13 and 14, but for the second device group if necessary.
16. Click on "OK" to close the 'Breaker Info' dialog box.
SECTION 3
TO TOGGLE BREAKER IN/OUT-OF-SERVICE

1.
In the Breaker Data page of the Bus Dialog Box, select breaker(s) you want to
change the status and click on "In/Out-of service.
Out-of-service breakers will not be included in the breaker checking
TO COPY BREAKER DATA TO CLIPBOARD

1.
copy and click on "Copy.
TO PASTE BREAKER DATA FROM CLIPBOARD

1.
In the Breaker Data page of the Bus Dialog Box, on "Paste. A breaker info dialog
will appear to allow data input on new breaker name and connection information.
Note: If no breaker data is found in the clipboard the Paste button will be
grayed out.
Protected device group information will not be copied when breaker is being
pasted to a different location.
TO EDIT BREAKER INFORMATION:

1.
Select a breaker in the list box and click on 'Get Info' to edit or view its
parameters.
TO DELETE A BREAKER:
1.
delete in the list box and click on "Delete" to remove the circuit breaker from
this bus.
TO CLOSE THE BUS INFO DIALOG BOX:

1.
When you are done editing bus and breaker data, click on "OK" to close the 'Bus
Info' dialog box.
The dialog box will disappear and the symbol for the new bus will appear
on screen.
110 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | GENERATOR COMMAND
The New | Generator command in the Main Window lets you add a new generator to a bus. Each bus can have
only one generator, but the generator may have up to 32 generating units. Different units on the same bus are
differentiated by their 2-character identifiers. You can specify the impedance of each unit and whether it is on-line
or off-line. There are three sections below: (1) the "TO ADD A NEW GENERATOR TO A BUS" section shows
you how to add a new generator to a bus, (2) the "TO ADD A NEW GENERATING UNIT TO AN EXISTING
GENERATOR" section shows you how to add more units to an existing generator, and (3) the TO EDIT OR
DELETE A GENERATING UNIT will show you how to edit an existing generating unit.
TO ADD A NEW GENERATOR TO A BUS FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Generator button
on the Device Palette. The cursor will
become a cross with a generator symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the One-line where you want to place the new generator.
Note: You can click on an existing bus to place the new generator on the
bus. A bus can have at most one generator .The program will display an
error message if the bus or node already has a generator.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the generator.
TO ADD A NEW GENERATOR TO A BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the bus.
Note: A bus can have at most one generator, but the generator may have
up to 32 generating units. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be
activated if the bus already has a generator. Refer to the section below
"TO ADD A NEW GENERATING UNIT TO AN EXISTING GENERATOR"
to add more generating units.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus to which you want to add a
generator.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | Generator command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the generator data.
SECTION 3
3.
Input the open-circuit voltage and the reference angle.

The magnitude and angle of the generators internal voltage source are
used in flat-generator-voltages start option only. They have no effect in
flat-bus and power-flow voltage start options.
Note: Instead of entering the reference angle manually, we suggest you
use the Network | Set Generator Ref. Angle command to automatically
set the reference angle of all the generators in the network. Please refer
to the description of that command and see Section 4.9 for details.
4.
Select the type of power flow regulation. Click on:

Regulates voltage: If you want the generator to regulate the voltage
magnitude at its own terminal bus or at another bus.
Enter the target voltage magnitude (in pu) in the 'Hold V' edi t
box.
In the drop down list box, select the bus whose voltage magnitude is
to be regulated by this generator.
Fixed P+jQ output: If you want the generator's real and reactive power
output to be constant.
5.
Click on the "New" button to add a new generating unit to the bus.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the generating unit parameters.
112 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
6.
Input the generating unit identifier in 'ID'.

The unit ID is a 2-character identifier used to differentiate between
different generating units on the same bus. The program automatically
initializes the ID of a new generating unit to a numeric value that has not
been used by another unit on the same bus.
This identifier can be used to mark the generating unit as a fictitious
source generated by network equivalence. Refer to the Diagram |
Equivalent Branch Color Code command for further discussion.
7.
Input the MVA rating of the generating unit in 'MVA'.

The generator impedances are based on this MVA rating, and NOT the system
rating.
8.
Input the following generating unit impedances: Subtransient impedance,

transient impedance, synchronous impedance, negative -sequence impedance and
zero-sequence impedance.
Note: All the generating units impedances are based on its MVA rating,
and not on the system MVA.
As a shortcut, you can enter the subtransient impedance and press the
Copy button to copy the same impedance to all the other impedance edit
boxes.
Note: You can specify which impedance value (subtransient, transient
or synchronous) will be used in the positive-sequence model for short
circuit studies. Please refer to the Faults | Options command for more
information.
9.
Input the neutral impedance (in ohms) in 'Neutral Impedance '.

Enter the actual neutral impedance without multiplying it by 3.
10. Enter the scheduled generation.

Note: If the generating unit is to regulate voltage, only one edit box
(MW) will be displayed.
SECTION 3
Enter the real power generation in MW.

Note: If the generating unit is to maintain a fixed P+jQ output, two edit
boxes (MW + jMVAR) will be displayed.
Enter the real (MW) and reactive (MVAR) power generation in the
edit boxes.
11. Enter the generation limits.
Pmax:
Maximum real power output in MW.
Pmin:
Minimum real power output in MW.
Qmax:
Maximum reactive power output in MVAR.
Qmin:
Minimum reactive power output in MVAR.
The Rating and the Pmin and Pmax limits are not used in this version of
the program, but they may be used to limit the output of the system and
area slack generators in later versions.
12. Click on "OK" to close the generating unit dialog box.
The generator data dialog box will be displayed.
Note: The generating unit you entered is listed in the list box as 'Unit 1'.
Subsequent generating units will be labeled 'Unit 2', 'Unit 3', and so on.
13. Click on "Done" to close the generator data dialog box.
The dialog box will disappear and a new generator symbol will be shown
attached to the bus.
TO ADD A NEW UNIT TO AN EXISTING GENERATOR:
1.
Select the generator.

Click the left mouse button once on the generator to which you want to
add a generating unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the load units that are within this load.
3.
Click on the New button.

The load-unit dialog box will appear. Enter the necessary information and
press OK.
4.
Repeat step 3 above for each load unit. When done, press the Done button in the
Load dialog box.
TO EDIT OR DELETE A GENERATING UNIT:

1.
Select the generator.

Click the left mouse button once on the generator to which you want to
add a generating unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the units that are within this generator.
3.
114 SECTION 3
Click on a generating unit.
COMMAND REFERENCE
4.
Click on On/Off-Line to toggle a generating unit from off-line to on-line or vise

versa.
5.
Click on Edit to change the parameters of the generating unit.
6.
Click on Delete to delete a generating unit.
7.
When done, press the Done button in the Generator dialog box.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | LOAD COMMAND
The New | Load command in the Main Window lets you add a new load to a bus. Each bus can have only one
load, but the load may have up to 32 load units. Different units on the same bus are differentiated by their 2character identifiers. You can break down the total MW +jMVAR consumption of a load into constant-power,
constant-current and constant impedance components. You can also specify whether each load unit is on-line or
off-line. There are 3 sections below: (1) the "TO ADD A NEW LOAD TO A BUS" section shows you how to add
a new load to a bus, (2) the "TO ADD A NEW LOAD UNIT TO AN EXISTING LOAD" section shows you how to
add more units to an existing load, and (3) the TO EDIT OR DELETE A LOAD UNIT section shows you how to
edit an existing load unit.
TO ADD A NEW LOAD FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Load button on the Device Palette. The cursor will become a
cross with a load symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the One-line where you want to place the new load.
Note: You can click on an existing bus to place the new load on the bus. A
bus can have at most one load. The program will display an error message
if the bus already has a load.
A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new load.
TO ADD A NEW LOAD TO A BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the bus.
Note: A bus can have at most one load, but the load may have up to 32
load units. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus
already has a load. Refer to the section below "TO ADD A NEW LOAD
UNIT TO AN EXISTING LOAD" to add more load units.
load.
2b. Select the Network | New | Load command.
A dialog box will appear.
3.
116 SECTION 3
Specify whether the load is grounded or not.
COMMAND REFERENCE
A load is grounded by default. Mark the Load not grounded check box if
the load is not grounded. This selection will be applied to all the load units
in this load.
4.
Click on the "New" button to add a new load unit to the bus.
Note: This button is disabled if the load already has 32 units.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the load unit parameters.
Input the load unit identifier in 'ID'.

The unit ID is 2-character identifier used to differentiate between different
load units on the same bus. The program automatically initializes the ID of
a new load unit to a numeric value that has not been used by another unit
on the same bus.
Input the load unit parameters.
For each load unit, you can break down the total MW +jMVAR
consumption into constant-power, constant-current and constantimpedance components.
MW:
Megawatts consumed by the load unit when the voltage is

1.0 per unit.
MVAR:
Megavars consumed by the load unit when the voltage is

1.0 per unit.
Note: The constant-current load model is not yet working in this version.
The load unit is ignored if all the MW and MVAR values are zero.
Click on the "OK" button to close the individual load unit dialog box.
The load unit dialog box will be displayed.
5.
Click on "Done" to close the load dialog box.

The dialog box will disappear and a new load symbol will be shown
attached to the bus.
TO ADD A LOAD UNIT TO AN EXISTING LOAD:

1.
Select the load.

Click the left mouse button once on the load to which you want to add a
load unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the load units that are within this load.
SECTION 3
3.

The load-unit dialog box will appear. Enter the necessary information and
press OK.
4.
Repeat step 3 above for each load unit. When done, press the Done button in the
Load dialog box.
TO EDIT OR DELETE A LOAD UNIT:

1.
Select the load.

Click the left mouse button once on the load to which you want to add a
load unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the units that are within this load.
3.
Click on a load unit.
4.
Click on On/Off-Line to toggle a load unit from off-line to on-line or vise versa.
5.
Click on Edit to change the parameters of the load unit.
6.
Click on Delete to delete a load unit.
7.
When done, press the Done button in the Load dialog box.
118 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SHUNT COMMAND
The New | Shunt command in the Main Window lets you add a new shunt to a bus. Each bus can have only one
shunt, but the shunt may have up to 32 shunt units. Different units on the same bus are differentiated by their 2character identifiers. You can specify the admittance of each unit and whether it is on-line or off-line. There are 3
sections below: (1) the "TO ADD A NEW SHUNT TO A BUS" section shows you how to add a new shunt to a
bus, and (2) the "TO ADD A NEW SHUNT UNIT TO AN EXISTING SHUNT" section shows you how to add
more units to an existing shunt, and (3) the TO EDIT OR DELETE A SHUNT UNIT section shows you how to
edit an existing shunt unit.
TO ADD A NEW SHUNT FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Shunt button
on the Device Palette. The cursor will become
a cross with a shunt symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the One-line where you want to place the new shunt.
Note: You can click on an existing bus to place the new shunt on the bus. A
bus can have at most one shunt. The program will display an error message
if the bus already has a shunt.
A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new shunt.
TO ADD A NEW SHUNT TO A BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the bus.
Note: A bus can have at most one shunt, but the shunt may have up to
32 shunt units. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the
bus already has a shunt. Refer to the section below "TO ADD A NEW
SHUNT UNIT TO AN EXISTING SHUNT" to add more shunt units.
shunt.
2b. Select the Network | New | Shunt command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the shunt data.
3.
Click on the "New" button to add a new shunt unit to the bus.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the shunt unit parameters.
SECTION 3
4.
Input the shunt unit identifier in 'ID'.

The ID is a 2-character identifier used to differentiate between different
shunt units on the same bus. The program automatically initializes the ID
of a new shunt unit to a numeric value that has not been used by another
unit on the same bus.
5.
Input the shunt parameters.

You can input the positive and zero sequence admittances of the shunt
directly.
G, B:
Positive-sequence admittance in per unit. Set both G and B to
zero for a zero-sequence shunt, such as a zig -zag grounding transformer.
G0, B0: Zero-sequence admittance in per unit. Set both G0 and B0 to
zero for an ungrounded shunt.
If you want to derive the admittances from the MW and MVAR ratings of
the shunt, click on the "Convert" button.
Another dialog box will appear.
Input the shunt parameters.

MW:
MW consumed by the shunt when the voltage is 1.0 per unit.
MVAR: MVAR consumed by the shunt when the voltage is 1.0 per unit.
Enter a positive number for a shunt reactor, and a negative number for a
capacitor.
Click on "Convert".
The 'Convert Shunt Data' dialog box will disappear and the program will
update the admittances G and B based on the MW and MVAR values.
You must enter the values G0 and B0 manually.
6.
Click on the "3-winding transformer shunt" check box if the shunt is part of the
T model of a 3-winding transformer.
In the printed output, OneLiner will show the tertiary circulating current
for the transformer when the "3-winding transformer shunt" option is
chosen. It has no other effect on the solution or on the output.
See Section 4.2 for the shunt model and Section 5.9 for the definition of
the shunt parameters.
120 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
7.

The selected bus symbol will remain highlighted and a new shunt symbol
will be shown attached to the bus.
TO ADD A SHUNT UNIT TO AN EXISTING SHUNT:

1.
Select the shunt.

Click the left mouse button once on the shunt to which you want to add a
shunt unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the shunt units that are within this
shunt.
3.

The shunt-unit dialog box will appear. Enter the necessary information
and press OK.
4.
Repeat step 3 above for each shunt unit. When done, press the Done button in
the shunt dialog box.
TO EDIT OR DELETE A SHUNT UNIT:

1.
Select the shunt.

Click the left mouse button once on the shunt to which you want to add a
shunt unit.
2.

A dialog box will appear listing all the units that are within this shunt.
3.
Click on a shunt unit.
4.
Click on On/Off-Line to toggle a shunt unit from off-line to on-line or vise versa.
5.
Click on Edit to change the parameters of the shunt unit.
6.
Click on Delete to delete a shunt unit.
7.
When done, press the Done button in the Shunt dialog box.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SWITCHED SHUNT COMMAND
The New | Switched Shunt command in the Main Window lets you add a new switched shunt to a bus. Each
switched shunt can have up to eight banks of capacitors and reactors. Each bank can be turned on in steps or it
can be turned on in a continuous manner.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCHED SHUNT FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Switched Shunt button
on the Device Palette. The cursor
will become a cross with a switched shunt symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the One-line where you want to place the new switched shunt.
Note: You can click on an existing bus to place the new switched shunt on
the bus. A bus can have at most one switched shunt. The program will
display an error message if the bus already has a switched shunt.
A dialog box will appear asking for the switched shunt data.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCHED SHUNT TO A BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the bus.
switched shunt.
2b. Select the Network | New | Switched Shunt command.
Note: A bus can have at most one switched shunt. This menu item is
dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus already has a switched shunt.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the data.
3.
Specify the control mode. Click on:

Fixed:
Discrete:
122 SECTION 3
If the susceptance of the switched shunt is fixed at the

value of susceptance (B) you enter.
If the susceptance of the shunt banks is switched on and
off incrementally in discrete steps to regulate voltage.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Continuous: If the susceptance of the shunt banks is adjusted

continuously to regulate voltage. A continuous shunt can
have multiple banks.
4.
Click on the drop down list box and select a controlled bus.
This information is ignored when the control mode is on Fixed.
5.
Enter the maximum and minimum target voltage in per-unit.

This information is ignored when the control mode is on Fixed.
6.
Enter the parameters of the banks.

A switched shunt can have up to 8 banks of capacitors and reactors. You
can enter their parameters in the 8 rows of edit boxes under the heading of
No. of steps, B/step and B0/step. You must specify the banks in the
order they are switched on because the program logic is designed to
exhaust the susceptance available in the first bank before it uses those in
the second bank, and so on.
If a switched shunt contains banks of reactors (B<0) and capacitors (B>0),
you must list the reactor banks first. It should be noted that the program
logic for regulating voltage does not mix reactor and capacitor banks.
When the program turns on one or more capacitor banks, the prior reactor
banks are switched off.
The number of steps in each bank can be any integer between 1 through 9,
inclusive. The step size is taken into account when the control is
discrete. The step size and the number of steps are used only to
calculate the maximum and minimum susceptance of the switched shunt
when the control is continuous.
No. of steps: The number of steps for a bank must be an integer between
1 and 9, inclusive. A value of 0 means that this bank, as well
as all subsequent banks, are not in used.
7.
B:
Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step of a

bank. Enter a positive value for a capacitor, and a negative
value for a reactor.
B0:
Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step of a bank.

Enter a positive value for a capacitor, and a negative value
for a reactor. Enter zero if the bank is ungrounded.
Enter the positive -sequence susceptance.

B:
Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of the switched

shunt. Enter a positive value for a capacitor, and a negative
value for a reactor. You must make sure that the value you
enter can be realized by switching on the capacitor or
reactor banks available. This value of B is taken to be the
susceptance of the switched shunt when the control mode
is on Fixed. Otherwise, this value of B is considered to be
the initial value of the switched shunt. In all cases, the zerosequence of the switched shunt is calculated automatically
by the program. You can see the value of B0 in use in the
Data Browser.
SECTION 3
8.
Click on OK.
The selected bus symbol will remain highlighted and a new switched
shunt symbol will be shown attached to the bus.
124 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | LINE COMMAND
The New | Line command in the Main Window lets you add a new transmission line between two buses. The two
terminal buses of a line must have the same nominal kV.
TO ADD A NEW LINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Line on the Device Palette
Click on the New Line pane
become a cross with a line symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new line
Click the left mouse button on the one-line diagram where you want to
place the first end of the new line. With the mouse button held down, move
the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other end of the
line. A new line symbol will appear with its far end moving with the
cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the new line to that bus.
Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the new line in
series with that branch.
Release the mouse button where you want the line to terminate. A dialog
box will appear asking you for the line data.
Note: When you move the lines far end over an existing bus having the
same nominal kV, the bus symbol will be highlighted in red. You can
release the mouse button to attach the second end of the line to that bus.
Enter nominal kV for the new lines terminals where neither terminal is
connected to an existing bus.
NOTE: If you place the second end too close to the first one, the New
Line command will be ignored.
TO ADD A NEW LINE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two terminal buses. They must have the same nominal kV.
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses. Then with
the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on the other bus
terminal.
Both bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected. The first bus you
select will be the Bus1 of the line model and the second will be Bus2.
2b. Select the Network | New | Line command.
Note: The Line menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the
nominal kVs of the two terminal buses are different.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the line data.
SECTION 3
3.
Input the transmission line identifiers.

The lines terminal buses are listed at the top of the dialog box. The first
bus listed will be referred to as Bus1, and the second Bus2.
4.
Name:
A 12-character name for the transmission line.
Ckt ID:
A two-character circuit identifier that is commonly used to

differentiate between parallel lines. The program
automatically initializes the circuit ID of a new line to a
numeric value that has not been used by a parallel line. The
circuit ID can also be used to mark the line as a fictitious
line generated by network equivalence. Refer to the
Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code command for
further discussion.
Input the transmission line's electrical parameters.

You can either input the parameters directly or have OneLiner calculate it
for you, using information in the Line Table File.
TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS MANUALLY:
Input the following parameters.
126 SECTION 3
Length:
Physical length of line. This item and the Unit are used
for informational purposes only.
Unit:
Select unit of length: "mi", "ft", "kt", "m" or "km".
R, X:
Positive-sequence impedance in per unit.
R0, X0:
Zero-sequence impedance in per unit.
G1, B1:
Positive-sequence shunt admittance in per unit at the Bus1

side.
G2, B2:
Positive-sequence shunt admittance in per unit at the Bus2

side.
G10, B10:
Zero-sequence shunt admittance in per unit at the Bus1 side.
G20, B20:
Zero-sequence shunt admittance in per unit at the Bus2 side.
COMMAND REFERENCE
See Section 4.3 for the line model and Section 5.10 for definitions of the
line parameters.
TO HAVE OneLiner CALCULATE THE PARAMETERS FOR YOU:
Enter the following data.
Length:
Physical length of line in the unit to be selected next.
Unit:
Select unit of length: "mi", "ft", "kt" (1000 ft), "m" or "km".
Type:
Select one of the types available in the Line Table File. The
Line Table contains the parameters of various lines and
cables. You can edit this file with any text editor.
Click on "Recompute from table" button.

OneLiner will now calculate the series impedances and shunt admittances
for the transmission line and put them into the edit boxes.
5.
Input current ratings in 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D'.

You can enter up to four current ratings for the line in amperes. These
ratings can be the summer rating, winter rating, emergency rating, etc. The
Check | Relay Loadability command utilizes these ratings. Also, the Power
Flow Program checks for overloads with these ratings.
6.
Select a metering location.

Select the end at which the losses and the inter-area flow (if it is a tie line) will be
computed. This option is for Power Flow users.
7.
Click on the Mutuals button to display the mutual coupling parameters.

Note: This button is enabled only if the line is mutually coupled to one
or more lines in the zero sequence.
See documentation for the Network | Mutual Coupling | Mutual Coupling
Pair Properties command for details.
8.

The selected bus symbols will remain highlighted and a new line symbol
will be shown connecting the two terminal buses.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR COMMAND
The New | Series Capacitor/Reactor command in the Main Window lets you add a new series capacitor or series
reactor between two buses.
TO ADD A NEW SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Series Capacitor/Reactor on the Device Palette
Click on the Series capacitor/reactor button
The cursor will become a cross with a capacitor symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new series capacitor
place the first end of the new series capacitor/reactor. With the mouse
button held down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to
place the other end of the series capacitor/reactor. A new series capacitor
symbol will appear with its far end moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the first end of the new series
capacitor to that bus. Clicking on end segment of an existing branch will
place the new series capacitor/reactor in series with that branch.
Release the mouse button where you want the series capacitor to
terminate. A dialog box will appear asking you for the series
capacitor/reactor data.
Note: When you move the series capacitors far end over an existing bus
having the same nominal kV, the bus symbol will be highlighted in red.
You can release the mouse button to attach the second end of the series
capacitor to that bus.
Enter nominal kV for the new series capacitors terminals when neither
terminal is connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second end too close to the first one, the program
will ignore the command.
TO ADD A NEW SERIES CAPACITOR USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two terminal buses.
Note: Two buses can be connected by a series capacitor only if they
have the same nominal kV. (The nominal kV values appear on the oneline diagram below the bus names.)
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses. Then with
the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on the other
terminal bus.
Both bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected. The first bus you select
will be Bus1 of the series-capacitor model, and the second will be Bus2.
128 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
2b. Select the Network | New | Series Capacitor/Reactor command.

Note: The Series Capacitor/Reactor menu item is dimmed and cannot be
activated if the nominal kVs of the two terminal buses are not the same.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the series capacitor data.
3.
Input the series capacitor/reactor identifiers.

The series capacitor/reactors terminal buses are listed at the top of the
dialog box.
4.
Name:
A 12-character name for the series capacitor/reactor.
Ckt ID:

differentiate between parallel branches.
Input the series capacitors electrical parameters.

Reactance:
The reactance of the capacitor/reactor in per unit. Enter a

negative value for a capacitor and positive value for a
reactor.
Bypass flag: When this flag is checked, the program will model the series
capacitor or reactor with a very small reactance (the switch
reactance) in place of the capacitor/reactor reactance.
Please refer to the documentation for the Network | Options
command for details on the switch reactance.
MOV-bypass protective level current: This parameter is for series
capacitors only. The protective level current is used to
characterize the MOV that is in parallel with the series
capacitor. The protective-level current is defined as
Vpk/(1.414*X), where Vpk is the maximum capacitor voltage
maintained by the MOV, and X is the reactance of the
capacitor bank. The protective-level current is typically 2.0
to 2.5 times the rated current of the capacitor bank. Please
refer to Section 4.3 for more information on MOV-protected
series capacitor modeling.
Note: MOV-protected series capacitors are nonlinear device. To simulate
these devices properly, the short circuit logic has to iterate the solution
until convergence. The iteration logic is off by default. You can turn it
on in the Faults | Options dialog box.
5.

A new series capacitor/reactor symbol will be shown connecting the two
terminal buses.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND
The New | 2-Winding Transformer command in the Main Window lets you add a new 2-winding transformer
between two buses.
TO ADD A NEW 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Transformer on the Device Palette
Click on the 2-winding transformer button
on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with a transformer symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new transformer
place the first end of the new transformer. With the mouse button held
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other
end. A new 2-winding transformer symbol will appear with its far end
moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the first end of the new
transformer to that bus. Clicking on end segment of an existing branch will
place the new transformer in series with that branch.
Release the mouse button where you want to place the second terminal. A
dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer data.
Note: When you move the transformers far end over an existing bus, the
bus symbol will be highlighted in red. You can release the mouse button
to attach the second end of the transformer to that bus.
Enter the nominal kV for the new transformers terminals when one or
both terminals are not connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second end of the transformer too close to the first
one, the program will ignore the command.
TO ADD A NEW 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER USING MENU COMMAND:
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses and then
with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on the other
terminal bus.
Both bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | 2-W Transformer command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer parameters.
130 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.
Input the transformer identifiers.

The transformers terminal buses are listed at the top of the dialog box. The
first bus listed will be referred to as Bus1, and the second Bus2.
4.
Name:
A 12-character name for the transformer.
Ckt ID:

differentiate between parallel transformers. The program
automatically initializes the circuit ID of a new transformer to a
numeric value that has not been used by a parallel branch of the
same type. This ID can be used to mark the transformer as a
fictitious transformer generated by network equivalence. Refer
to the Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code command for
further discussion.
Select a winding configuration.

The following winding configurations are shown graphically in the dropdown listbox.
1. Wye-Wye
2. Auto-Wye
3. Wye-Delta, delta lags 30 degrees
4. Wye-Delta, delta leads 30 degrees
5. Delta-Delta
6. Zigzag-Wye, wye lags 30 degrees
7. Zigzag-Wye, wye leads 30 degrees
8. Zigzag-Delta
Note: The winding configurations are labeled in the lower left corner
with both American and British transformer labels. The American labels
are listed first. The British labels (British Standard BS171 1970) are
listed enclosed in parentheses.
SECTION 3
Select a winding configuration by scrolling through the selections in the

graphical drop-down list box and choose one by clicking the left mouse
button once on the picture.
Note: The program will automatically initialize the winding
configuration to wye-wye or wye-delta, with the delta leading or
lagging, depending on the phasing of the two terminal buses.
5.
Input the transformer parameters.

MVA1, MVA2, MVA3: MVA ratings of the transformer. The Power Flow
Program checks for overloads using these ratings.
MVA Base: MVA base for all per-unit quantities with the exception of
the line shunts admittances, G1, G10, G2, G20, B1, B10, B2,
and B20, which are always based on system base MVA and
the nominal kVs. You can enter the MVA base directly in
the edit box if the transformer object is new. To change the
MVA base of an existing transformer, you must first press
the Change button. A dialog box will ask you for the new
MVA base:
R, X:
Positive-sequence impedance in per unit (based on the

transformers MVA base and tap voltages).
B:
Positive-sequence magnetizing susceptance in per unit

(based on the transformers MVA base and tap voltages).
R0, X0:
Zero-sequence impedance in per unit (based on the

transformers MVA base and tap voltages).
B0:
Zero-sequence magnetizing susceptance in per unit (based

on the transformers MVA base and tap voltages).
Zg1, Zg2, Zgn: Grounding impedances in ohms.
132 SECTION 3
Tap kV:
The tap voltages are set initially to the bus nominal kV

rating. The tap voltages affect the turns ratio of the
transformer and the short circuit impedances.
G1, B1:
Positive-sequence admittance of the line shunt on the Bus1

side in per unit (based on system base MVA and nominal
kV of Bus1). A line shunt is a shunt that is switched on and
off with the transformer.
G10, B10:
Zero-sequence admittance in per unit of the line shunt on

the Bus1 side.
G2, B2:
Positive-sequence admittance of the line shunt on the Bus2

side in per unit (based on system base MVA and nominal
kV of Bus2).
G20, B20:
Zero-sequence admittance in per unit of the line shunt on

the Bus2 side.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Note: The line shunts were implemented mainly for PSS/E compatibility.
We recommend that you NOT use them, if possible. The reason is that
they may complicate the computation of relay currents.
Note: See Sections 4.5 and 4.6 for a discussion of the transformer model.
See also Appendix B for answers to some commonly asked questions
about the modeling of 2-winding transformers.
6.
Select the metering location.

Select the end at which the losses and the inter-area flow (if it is a tie line) will be
computed. This option is intended for power flow users.
7.
Swap terminal buses if needed.

Click on the "Swap Sides" button to swap the two terminal buses when
you have a wye-delta transformer and the delta winding is on the Bus1
side.
The terminal buses of the transformer are listed on the two Tap kV group
boxes. The left and right terminal buses correspond to the left and right
windings in the configuration box. The tap voltages are also swapped
with the terminal bus names. The neutral impedances are not swapped.
You may need to change them if they are not zero.
TO SPECIFY THE LOAD TAP CHANGER PARAMETERS:

1.
Click on the "LTC button.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the load tap changer (LTC)
parameters.
Note: The LTC is for Power Flow users only. The parameters here have
no effect on short-circuit simulations.
2.
3.
Select the location of movable taps. Click on:

None:
If the transformer does not have movable taps.
At Bus1:
If the movable tap is connected to the Bus1 terminal.
At Bus2:
If the movable tap is connected to the Bus2 terminal.
Specify the LTC tap settings.

Center:
Center tap position in kV.
Max:
Maximum tap in per unit based on the center-tap kV.
Min:
Minimum tap in per unit based on the center-tap kV.
SECTION 3
Step size:
Step size in per unit based on the center-tap kV. Enter zero
if continuous.
4.
The "Voltage" radio button in the 'Controls' box is automatically selected.
5.
Click on the "at" drop down list box and select the controlled bus.
The program will move the tap to regulate the voltage magnitude of the
controlled bus.
6.
Specify the controlled quantity limits.

Controlled bus:
Select controlled bus from the dropdown list.
Maximum V (pu):
Maximum controlled bus voltage level in per unit.
Minimum V (pu):
Minimum controlled bus voltage level in per unit.
These values (plus/minus a tolerance of 0.003pu) define the upper and

lower limits for the Power Flow program to control the bus voltage level.
7.
Click on "OK" to close the LTC properties dialog box.
TO CLOSE THE TRANSFORMER DIALOG BOX:

1.
Click on "OK" to close the transformer properties dialog box.

A new 2-winding transformer symbol will be shown connecting the two
terminal buses. The program adds a diagonal slash to the symbol when
the LTC is active.
134 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | PHASE SHIFTER COMMAND
The New | Phase Shifter command in the Main Window lets you add a new phase shifter between two buses.
TO ADD A NEW PHASE SHIFTER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Phase Shifter on the Device Palette
Click on the phase shifter button
on the Device Palette. The cursor
will become a cross with a phase shifter symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new phase shifter
place the first end of the new phase shifter. With the mouse button held
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other
end. A new phase shifter symbol will appear with its far end moving with
the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the first end of the new phase
shifter to that bus. Clicking on end segment of an existing branch will place
the new phase shifter in series with that branch.
dialog box will appear asking you for the phase shifter data.
Note: When you move the phase shifters far end over an existing bus, the
to attach the second end of the phase shifter to that bus.
Enter the nominal kV for the new phase shifters terminals when one or
both terminals are not connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second end of the phase shifter too close to the first
TO ADD A NEW PHASE SHIFTER USING MENU COMMAND:
terminal bus.
Note: The order in which you select the buses is unimportant as long as
you choose the correct sign for the shift angle. (The shift angle is defined
below).
2b. Select the Network | New | Phase Shifter command.
SECTION 3
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new phase
shifter.
3.
Input the phase shifter identifiers.

The terminal buses of the phase shifter are listed at the top of the dialog
box. The first bus listed will be referred to as Bus1, and the second Bus2.
4.
Ckt ID:

differentiate between parallel phase shifters. The program
automatically initializes the circuit ID of a new phase shifter to a
numeric value that has not been used by a parallel phase shifter.
This ID can also be used to mark the phase shifter as a fictitious
phase shifter generated by network equivalence. Refer to the
Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code command for further
discussion.
Name:
A 12-character name for the phase shifter.
Input the phase shifter parameters.

MVA Base: MVA base for all per-unit quantities. You can enter the
MVA base of the phase shifter directly in the edit box if the
phase shifter object is new. To change the MVA base of an
existing phase shifter, you must first press the Change
button. A dialog box will ask you for the new MVA base:
Shift Angle: The phase shift angle in degrees. A positive value will
cause Bus1 to lead Bus2 in the positive sequence, where
Bus1 and Bus2 are the two bus names listed at the top of
the dialog box.
R, X:
136 SECTION 3
Positive-sequence impedance in per unit, based on the

phase shifters MVA base and nominal kV.
COMMAND REFERENCE
R2, X2:
Negative-sequence impedance in per unit, based on the

phase shifters MVA base and nominal kV. The negativesequence impedance of an actual phase shifter is always
equal to the positive-sequence value. Only equivalent
branches generated by network equivalence have different
values in the positive and negative sequences.
R0, X0:
Zero-sequence impedance in per unit, based on the phase

shifters MVA base and nominal kV.
B, B2, B0:
Positive-, negative- and zero-sequence magnetizing

susceptance in per unit, based on the phase shifters MVA
base and nominal kV.
Note: See Section 4.4 for the phase shifter model and Section 5.11 for the
definitions of the phase shifter parameters.
5.
Specify whether the phase shifter angle is fixed or adjustable in the Power Flow
Program.
Click on Off if the angle is fixed, and On otherwise.
6.
Specify maximum and minimum angle limits in degrees.

These values are ignored when the MW flow control is off. Otherwise, the
Power Flow Program will adjust the phase shift between these limits. The
program requires the maximum angle to be more than 1 degree larger than
the minimum angle.
7.
Specify maximum and minimum target range for real power flow in megawatts.
These values are ignored when the MW flow control is off. Otherwise, MW is
positive when flowing from Bus1 to Bus2, and negative when flowing from Bus2
to Bus1.
8.

The selected bus symbols will remain highlighted and a new phase shifter
symbol will be shown connecting the two terminal buses.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SWITCH COMMAND
The New | Switch command in the Main Window lets you add a new switch between two buses of the same
nominal kV. OneLiner model switches as low impedance branches. You can adjust the impedance in the Network |
Options command. The program does not allow parallel switches between two buses.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCH FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Switch on the Device Palette
Click on the New Switch button
become a cross with a transformer symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new switch
Click the left mouse button on the one-line where you want to place the
first terminal of the switch. With the mouse button held down, move the
cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other terminal. A new
switch symbol will appear with its second terminal moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the switch to that bus.
Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the new switch
in series with that branch.
dialog box will appear asking you for the switch data.
Note: When you move the second terminal over an existing node having
the same kV, the bus will be highlighted in red. You can release the
mouse button to attach t he switch to this node.
Enter nominal kV for the new switchs terminals where neither terminal
is connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second terminal too close to the first one, the New
Switch command will be ignored.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCH USING MENU COMMAND:
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses or nodes.
Then with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on the
other terminal bus. The two terminal buses must have the same nominal
kV.
2b. Select the Network | New | Switch command.
Note: The Switch menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the
nominal kVs of the two terminal buses are not the same.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the switch data.
138 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.
Enter the switch parameters.
Name: A 16-character name for the switch.

Current rating in amps: The Power Flow program uses this rating to check for
overloaded switches.
Switch position: Click on either 'Open' or 'Close'.
4.
Click on "OK" to close the 'Switch Info' dialog box.

A new switch symbol will be shown.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 3-W TRANSFORMER COMMAND
The New | 3-W Transformer command in the Main Window lets you add a new 3-winding transformer among
three buses.
TO ADD A NEW 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New 3-Winding Transformer on the Device Palette
Click on the 3-winding transformer button
The cursor will become a cross with a transformer symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new transformer
place the first end of the new transformer. With the mouse button held
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the second
end. A new 3-winding transformer symbol will appear with its far end
moving with the cursor. The transformers third terminal will be shown
connected to a new bus.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the first end of the new
transformer to the bus. Clicking on end segment of an existing branch will
place the new transformer in series with that branch.
dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer data.
Note: When you move the transformers far end over an existing bus, the
to attach the second end of the transformer to that bus.
Enter the nominal kV for the new transformers terminals when one or
more terminals are not connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second end of the transformer too close to the first
Note: After completing data input for the new transformer, you can
connect its terminal to any existing node having the same kV using the
Merge Bus command.
TO ADD A NEW 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the three terminal buses.
Click the left mouse button once on the first terminal bus. Then, with the
<Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button once on the second bus
and once on the third bus.
140 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Note: The third bus you click on should always be the tertiary bus. The
order in which you click on the first two buses is important only if you
are making a wye-delta connection. In that case, the bus that is
connected to the wye winding must be selected first.
The three bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | 3-W Transformer command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new 3winding transformer.
3.
Input the transformer identifiers.

The transformers terminal buses are listed at the top of the dialog box. The
first bus listed will be referred to as, from left to right, Bus1, Bus2 and Bus3.
Bus3 is also called the tertiary.
4.
Ckt ID:
A two-character circuit identifier that is most commonly

used to distinguish between parallel transformers. The
circuit ID can also be used to mark the transformer as a
fictitious transformer generated by network equivalence.
Refer to the Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code
command for further discussion.
Name:
A 12-character name for the transformer.
Select a winding configuration.

The following nine winding configurations are shown graphically in the
drop-down listbox.
1. Wye-wye-wye
2. Auto-wye-wye
SECTION 3
3. Wye-wye-delta, delta lags

4. Wye-wye-delta, delta leads
5. Auto-wye-delta, delta lags
6. Auto-wye-delta, delta leads
7. Wye-delta-delta, delta lags
8. Wye-delta-delta, delta leads
9. Delta-delta-delta
Select a winding configuration by scrolling through the selections in the
graphical drop-down list box and choose one by clicking the left mouse
button once on the picture.
5.
Input the transformer parameters.

MVA1, MVA2, MVA3: MVA ratings of the transformer. The Power Flow
Program checks for overloads using these MVA ratings.
MVA Base: MVA base for all per-unit quantities. You can enter the
MVA base of the transformer directly in the edit box if the
transformer object is new. To change the MVA base of an
existing transformer, you must first press the Change
button. A dialog box will ask you for the new MVA base:
Tap kV:
The transformer tap kV at the three bus terminals.
Zps, Zpt, Zst: Positive-sequence short -circuit impedances in per unit

(based on the transformers base MVA and the tap
voltages).
Estimate from + Seq. Impedances: Press this button to get a set of zerosequence impedances that is equal to the positivesequence parameters Zps, Zpt and Zst. The word equal is
in quotes because a transformer with same winding
impedances in the positive and zero sequence may not have
equal short-circuit impedances when tested with positiveand zero-sequence voltage sources. We recommend that
you use this method to get the zero-sequence impedances
when there is no zero-sequence test information available.
Zps0, Zpt0, Zst0: Zero-sequence short -circuit impedances in per unit
(based on the transformers base MVA and the tap
voltages).
For wye-wye-delta transformers, you can alternatively enter the T-model
impedances in per unit (based on the transformers base MVA and the tap
voltages). Click on the radio button Classical T-Model Impedances and enter the
following:
Zpm0, Zsm0, Zmg0: Impedance of the T model in per unit (based on the
transformers base MVA and the tap voltages). Zpmo is the
impedance between Bus1 and the middle bus, Zsm0 is the
impedance between Bus2 and the middle bus, and Zmg0 is
the impedance between the middle bus and ground.
142 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
B, B0:
Positive- and zero-sequence magnetizing susceptances in

per unit (based on the transformers base MVA and the tap
voltages).
Zg1, Zg2, Zg3, Zgn: Grounding impedances in ohms. Some of these edit
boxes may be hidden.
Fict. Bus No: When you convert the network data to PTI PSS/E format
(Version 26 or prior) and GE PSLF format, the conversion
logic will assign this bus number to the middle bus of the Tequivalent.
Note: See Sections 4.5 and 4.7 and Appendix C for discussions of the
transformer model.
TO SPECIFY THE LOAD TAP CHANGER PARAMETERS:
1.
Click on the "LTC button.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the load tap changer (LTC)
parameters.
Note: The LTC is for Power Flow users only. The parameters here have
no effect on short circuit simulations.
2.
Select the location of movable taps. Click on:

None:
If the transformer does not have movable taps.
Bus1 Label: If the movable tap is connected to the Bus1 terminal.

Bus2 Label: If the movable tap is connected to the Bus2 terminal.
3.
Specify the LTC tap settings.

Center:
Center tap position in kV.
Max:
Maximum tap in per unit based on the center-tap kV.
Min:
Minimum tap in per unit based on the center-tap kV.
Step size:
Step size in per unit based the center-tap kV V. Enter zero if

continuous.
4.
The "Voltage" radio button in the 'Controls' box is automatically selected.
5.
Click on the "at" drop down list box and select the controlled bus.
The program will move the tap to regulate the voltage magnitude of the
controlled bus.
SECTION 3
6.
Specify the controlled quantity limits.

Controlled bus:
Select controlled bus from the dropdown list.
Maximum V (pu):
Maximum controlled bus voltage level in per unit.
Minimum V (pu):
Minimum controlled bus voltage level in per unit.
These values (plus/minus a tolerance of 0.003pu) define the upper and

lower limits for the Power Flow program to control the bus voltage level.
7.
Click on "OK" to close the LTC properties dialog box.
TO CLOSE THE TRANSFORMER DIALOG BOX:

1.
Click on "OK" to close the transformer properties dialog box.

A new 3-winding transformer symbol will be shown connecting the
terminal buses. The program adds a diagonal slash to the symbol when
the LTC is active.
144 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 2-TERMINAL DC LINE COMMAND
The New | 2-Terminal DC Line command in the Main Window lets you add a new 2-terminal dc line between two
buses. The dc line object includes the commutation transformers at both terminals.
TO ADD A NEW DC LINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New 2-Terminal DC Line on the Device Palette
Click on the dc line button on the Device Palette. The cursor will
become a cross with a dc line symbol attached to it.
2a. Drag-and-Drop the new dc line
place the first converter terminal of the new dc line. With the mouse
button held down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to
place the other end. A new dc line symbol will appear with its far end
moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing bus will attach the first converter terminal of
the new dc line to that bus. Clicking on end segment of an existing branch
will place the new dc line in series with that branch.
Release the mouse button where you want to place the second converter
terminal. A dialog box will appear asking you for the dc line data.
Note: When you move the dc lines far end over an existing bus, the bus
symbol will be highlighted in red. You can release the mouse button to
attach the second end of the dc line to that bus.
Enter the nominal kV for the new dc lines converter terminals when one
or both terminals are not connected to an existing bus.
Note: If you place the second end of the dc line too close to the first one,
the program will ignore the command.
TO ADD A NEW DC LINE USING MENU COMMAND:
terminal bus.
2b. Select the Network | New | 2-Terminal DC Line command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new dc line.
SECTION 3
3.
Input the dc line identifiers.

The two converter terminals of the dc line are listed as captions of two large
group boxes. Initially, the first bus you selected is assumed to be the rectifier
terminal, and the second the inverter terminal.
Reverse flow: Press this button to change the role of the two converter
terminals: The rectifier will become the inverter; the inverter
will become the rectifier. The caption of the two group
boxes will change accordingly.
4.
Ckt ID:

differentiate between parallel dc lines. The program automatically
initializes the circuit ID of a new dc line to a numeric value that has
not been used by a parallel dc line.
Name:
A 12-character name for the dc line.
Input the dc line parameters.

Maintains:
Select one of three possible control modes in the dropdown listbox: constant power at the rectifier, constant
power at the inverter, or constant current.
At:
The exact labeling is at (MW) if constant power, and at

(A) if constant current. Enter the control target in the edit
box. This value must be positive.
Margin:
Enter the control margin in per-unit. When the dc line is

under constant-power control and the rectifiers voltage is
too low, the program will reduce the MW target by this
amount.
Scheduled dc voltage: Scheduled dc voltage magnitude in kV. This value

must be positive.
DC line R:
146 SECTION 3
Resistance of the dc line in ohms. This value must be

positive.
COMMAND REFERENCE
5.
Input the converter parameters.

Enter the following parameters for both the rectifier and the inverter.
No. of bridges: Number of bridges that are connected in parallel on the ac
side and in series on the dc side. This value must be a
positive integer.
Angle Max:
Maximum value of alpha in degrees at the rectifier, or

maximum gamma at the inverter.
Angle Min:
Minimum value of alpha in degrees at the rectifier, or

minimum gamma at the inverter.
Transformer tap max: Maximum tap position of the commutation

transformer in per-unit. The movable tap is assumed to be
on the ac side of the transformer.
Transformer tap min: Minimum tap position of the commutation
transformer in per-unit.
Transformer tap step size: Enter 0 if the tap can be moved continuously.
Otherwise, enter the step size in per-unit.
Transformer tap: The tap is initialized to 1.0 per unit at the beginning of
each power flow solution. After convergence, this edit box
shows the tap position given by the power flow solution.
MVA rating per bridge: The MVA rating of each commutation
transformer.
Nominal kV on dc side: The nominal kV at the dc side of the commutation
transformer. (The nominal kV at the ac side is assumed to be
the nominal kV of the terminal bus.)
Transformer R, X: The impedance of the commutation transformer in perunit, based on the MVA rating per bridge and the
nominal kVs.
6.
Click on "OK" to close the dialog box.

A new dc line symbol will be shown connecting the terminal buses.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR COMMAND
The New | Mutual Coupling Pair command in the Main Window lets you specify the zero-sequence mutual
coupling between two transmission lines. To execute this command you must first select the two lines.
TO CREATE A MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR:
1.
Select the two lines.

Click the left mouse button once on one of the two lines of the new mutual
pair and then with the <Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button
once on the second line.
The line symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | New | Mutual Coupling Pair command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the lines you
selected in Step 1 are already a mutual coupling pair. Use the View |
Mutual Pairs on 1-line command to display the mutual pairs identifiers
on the 1-line diagram.
A mutual coupling data dialog box will appear.
4.
Input the mutual coupling parameters.

Z:
The mutual impedance in per-unit. This value should be positive if

the orientation of the two lines, as implied by the order of the endbus names, is the same. The value should be negative if the
orientation of the two lines is opposite. Base impedance for per
unit values is computed as follow:
Zbase = (kV1*kV2)/MVAbase
Where: kV1 and kV2 are nominal kV of the two lines and MVAbase is
the system MVA base.
percent: Starting and ending point of mutual coupling section on line 1.

percent: Starting and ending point of mutual coupling section on line 2.
NOTE: See Section 4.8 for details on the mutual coupling model.
5.

The dialog box will disappear and the two lines you selected will remain
highlighted.
148 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | ANNOTATION COMMAND
The New | Annotation command in the Main Window lets you add an annotation anywhere in the one-line
diagram. You can use the annotations to label the substations or to highlight certain features and modifications
that warrant special attention. You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for printing and delete them
immediately afterwards. The user interface for the annotations is the same as that for the network elements: You
can move an annotation with the mouse; you can highlight it by clicking on it with the mouse button and you can
change it by double-clicking. The annotations will be saved within the .OLR file; therefore, they stay on the oneline diagram once you have created them. To execute this command you must first select the location where you
would like the annotation to appear.
You can attach one or more annotations to any object on the one-line diagram. When you move the object, the
program will automatically move the attached annotations.
TO ADD A NEW ANNOTATION:
1.
Select the annotation location.

Click the left mouse button once on the desired location of the new
annotation.
2.
Select the Network | New | Annotation command.

A dialog box will appear to let you enter the new annotation.
3.
Type in the annotation in the Header box.

The header can have up to 50 characters. This part of the annotation will
appear on the one-line diagram.
4.
Choose a color from the drop down color menu.

The annotation will be drawn with this color.
SECTION 3
5.
Enter additional text in the memo field.

The memo box allow you to type in additional comments of up to 500 characters,
but it will not be shown on the one line diagram. This feature is designed to
reduce the clutter on the one-line diagram. The ellipses symbol () after the
annotation indicates the presence of the associated memo.
6.
Click on the "OK" button to close the memo dialog box.

The annotation will appear at the location you selected with the mouse.
TO ATTACH AN ANNOTATION TO AN OBJECT:

1.
Attach the annotation to an object.

To attach the annotation to an object first left click on the annotation and then
shift-right click on the object to be attached to.
Click on the "Attach annotation to Object" menu item to attach the annotation.
A "*" at the beginning of the note indicates that it is attached to an object. You
can attach more than one annotation to an object.
TO DETACH AN ANNOTATION FROM AN OBJECT:

1.
Detach an annotation from an object.

If an annotation is already attached to an object it can be detached as follows:
First right clicking to bring up the floating menu and choosing the "Detach
from Object" command.
150 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | OBJECT COMMAND
The Delete | Object command in the Main Window lets you delete a piece of equipment from the network. To
execute this command you must first select the equipment.
TO DELETE A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT:
1.
Click the left mouse button once on the piece of equipment you want deleted.
The equipment symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | Delete | Object command.

IF YOU ARE DELETING A BUS:
When you delete a bus, OneLiner automatically deletes everything that is
attached to the bus. This includes the generator, load and shunt on the
bus as well as all the connected branches. The bus and the attached
equipment will disappear from the one-line diagram.
IF YOUR ARE DELETING A LOAD, GENERATOR, SHUNT, LINE,
PHASE SHIFTER OR TRANSFORMER:
The selected equipment will disappear from the one-line diagram. The
program will automatically update the network data.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | ALL IN AREA/ZONE COMMAND
The Delete | All In Area/Zone command in the Main Window lets you delete all the buses in a specific area or
zone. The program also deletes all the equipment that is attached to these buses.
TO DELETE ALL EQUIPMENT IN AN AREA OR ZONE:
1.
Select the Network | Delete | Delete All in Area/Zone command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select the area or zone in which
you would like to delete all equipment.
2.
Select the areas and zones to be deleted.

Hold down the Shift key if you wish to highlight more than one entry in
the list box.
Mark the Retain all tie branches check box if you want the program to
keep lines, transformers, switches and other branches that connect the
area/zone being deleted to the rest of the system.
Note: To retain the tie branches will necessitate retaining some of the
boundary buses of the area or zone to be deleted.
Click on Delete.
All of the equipment, including buses, branches and relays, in the selected
area or zone will be deleted. The deleted elements are removed from the
one-line diagram. The program will automatically update the network data.
3.
152 SECTION 3
Repeat step 2 if needed. When done, press the Done button.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | ALL INSIDE REGION COMMAND
The Delete | All Inside Region command in the Main Window lets you delete all the buses that are within a
rectangle region you define with the mouse. The program will also delete all the equipment that is attached to
these buses.
TO DELETE BUSES AND EQUIPMENT INSIDE A REGION:
1.
Specify the region.

Drag with the right mouse button down to delineate a rectangular region
on the one-line diagram.
The region will be enclosed by a rectangle drawn with the dotted red pen.
2.
Select the Diagram | Delete | All Inside Region command.

The program will delete all the buses that are within the region. The
program will also delete all the equipment that is attached to these buses.
The deleted equipment will disappear from the one-line diagram. The
program will automatically update the database.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are no
buses within the region.
3.
Remove the dotted red rectangle.

Click mouse button on an empty space outside of the rectangle to deactivate it.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | ALL OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND
The Delete | All Outside Region command in the Main Window lets you delete all the buses that are outside of a
rectangular region you define with the mouse. The program will also delete all the equipment that is attached to
these buses.
TO DELETE BUSES AND EQUIPMENT INSIDE A REGION:
1.
Specify the region.

2.
Select the Diagram | Delete | All Outside Region command.

The program will delete all the buses that are within the region. The
program will also delete all the equipment that is attached to these buses.
The deleted equipment will disappear from the one-line diagram. The
program will automatically update the database.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are no
buses outside the region.
3.

154 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | ALL BREAKERS COMMAND
The Delete All Breakers command in the Main Window allows you to delete all the circuit breakers in your binary
data file.
TO DELETE ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
1.
Select the Network | Delete | All Breakers command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are no
breakers in your binary data file.
A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion of all breakers.
2.
Enter Delete all (without the quotes) in the edit box.
3.
Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear and all the circuit breakers will be deleted
from your binary data file.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIRS INVOLVING SELECTED LINE COMMAND
The Delete Mutual Coupling Pairs Involving Selected Line command in the Main Window removes all mutualcoupling pairs of which the selected line is a member. You must select a line on the one-line diagram before
executing this command.
TO DELETE MUTUAL COUPLING PAIRS INVOLVING A LINE:
1.
Select a line that is a member of one or more mutual coupling pairs.

You can most easily see which lines are mutually coupled if you execute
the View | Mutual Pairs on 1-Line command.
Click the left mouse on the lines.
The line symbol will appear highlighted.
2.
Select the Network| Delete | Mutual Coupling Pairs Involving Selected Line
command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the selected
line does not belong to any mutual-coupling pair.
A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion of all mutual
coupling pairs.
3.
Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear and all mutual coupling pair involving the
selected line will be deleted.
156 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR COMMAND
The Delete Mutual Coupling Pair command in the Main Window lets you to remove the mutual coupling between
two transmission lines. You must select the lines on the one-line diagram before executing this command.
TO DELETE A MUTUAL-COUPLING PAIR:
1.
Select the two lines.

You can most easily see which lines are mutually coupled if you execute
the View | Mutual Pairs on 1-Line command. The lines you select for this
command must belong to the same mutual pair.
Click the left mouse on one of the lines. With the Shift key held down,
click the left mouse on the other line.
Both lines will appear highlighted.
2.
Select the Network | Delete | Mutual Coupling Pair command.

lines do not belong a mutual coupling pair.
A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion of the mutual
coupling pair.
3.
Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear and all mutual coupling pair between the
selected lines will be deleted.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RESTORE COMMAND
The Restore command in the Main Window lets you restore a bus, generator, load, shunt or branch that was
deleted earlier in the session. (Note: A session ends when you issue the New, or the Open, or the Import, or the
Exit command under the File menu.) Equipment that was deleted in previous sessions cannot be restored.
Note: You may want to consider using the Tools | Undo command if the item you want to restore was deleted
recently in the same session.
TO RESTORE A GENERATOR, LOAD OR SHUNT:
1.
Select the Network | Restore | Gen., Load, or Shunt command.

A dialog box will appear. The list box in the dialog box will display in
alphabetical order all the generators, loads and shunts that can be
restored.
2.
Select a generator, load or shunt to restore by clicking once on the name of the
piece of equipment and then clicking on Restore.
The restored generator, load or shunt will be drawn on the one-line
diagram. The symbol will be highlighted.
If the bus to which the generator, load or shunt is attached is not active,
you get the following error message when you issue the restore command.
TO RESTORE A BUS OR BRANCH:

The instructions for restoring a bus or a branch are similar to restoring a
generator, load or shunt. Please refer to the previous section for
instructions.
158 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CHANGE | NOMINAL kV COMMAND
The Change | Nominal kV command in the Main Window lets you change the nominal kV of one or more buses
that are connected via transmission lines and switches. Depending on the options you specify, the program will
also modify the impedances and tap voltages of the network elements that are connected to one or more of the
affected buses. You must select a bus before executing this command.
TO CHANGE THE NOMINAL kV:
1.
Select a bus by clicking the left mouse button once on its symbol.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red when selected. Your selection will
define a set of buses that are connected via transmission lines and
switches. The nominal kV of these buses will be changed by this
command.
2.
Select the Network | Change | Nominal kV command.

A dialog box will appear to let you specify the new nominal kV and
whether or not to modify the network impedances and transformer taps.
The number of affected buses is shown at the top.
3.
Press the "Bus List" Button to see a list of buses that will be affected by this
command.
4.
Input the new nominal kV in the edit box.
5.
Specify update options on PU Impedances (excluding those of transformer).

This option will affect all the network elements (generators, shunts, loads,
transmission lines, switches and phase shifters) that are connected to one
or more of the affected buses. None of these options will automatically
change the MW and MVAR of the loads or the per-unit impedances of the
phase shifters.
Do not change:
Click this button if you want the program

NOT to change any of the per-unit impedances
of transmission lines, generators and shunts.
SECTION 3
Update automatically for the new nominal kV : Click this button if you
want the program to recalculate the per-unit
impedances for the new nominal kV. The
program will scale the per-unit impedances of
transmission lines, generators and shunts by
the ratio (kVold/kVnew)**2.
Update manually one by one: Click this button if you want to change the
parameters for each piece of equipment by
hand. A series of Info dialog boxes will appear
to let you modify the parameters.
The mutual coupling impedances are updated automatically if your option
is not set to Do not change.
6.
Specify update options on Transformer taps.

This option will affect all the 2- and 3-winding transformers that are
connected to one or more of the affected buses. None of these options
will automatically change the per-unit impedance of the transformers.
Do not change:
Click this button if you want the program

NOT to change the transformer tap voltages.
Update automatically to the new nominal kV: Click this button if you
want the program to automatically reset the
transformer tap voltages to the new nominal
kV.
Update manually one by one: Click this button if you want to change the
tap voltages and the per-unit impedances for
each transformer by hand. A series of Info
dialog boxes will appear to let you modify the
transformer parameters.
7.

The program will change the nominal kV of the affected buses. Depending
on the options you specified, the program will automatically update the
per-unit impedances and transformer tap voltages, or will display a series
of Info dialog boxes to let you update them manually.
Note: The default option is to have the program (1) adjust the per-unit
impedances of generators, shunts, transmission lines and the mutualcoupling parameters automatically for the new nominal kV, and (2) not
change the transformer taps, the per-unit impedances of transformers
and phase shifters, the MW and MVAR of loads. With these options and
in the absence of loads on the affected buses, the fault impedances will
remain the same before and after the nominal kV changes.
160 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CHANGE | T TO 3-W TRANSFORMER COMMAND
The Change | T to 3-W Transformer command in the Main Window lets you convert the old T model for wye-wyedelta transformers to OneLiners 3-Winding transformer model. Two classical T equivalent circuits for a wyewye-delta 3-winding transformer, one with the tertiary bus and one without, are shown below. The branch
between the fictitious bus and the primary or secondary bus can be a transmission line or 2-winding transformer.
The shunt connected to the fictitious bus in the second T circuit is a reactor, representing the effect of the delta
winding on the zero-sequence current. To execute this command you must first select the fictitious bus with the
mouse.
TO CHANGE "T" EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT TO 3-W TRANSFORMER:

1.
Select the fictitious bus.

Click the left mouse button once on the fictitious bus.
2.
Select the Network | Change | T to 3-W Transformer command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the positive
sequence admittance (G+ jB) of the shunt is not zero, or if there is a load
or generator on the fictitious bus.
If the T circuit is the second one without the tertiary bus, a dialog box
will appear asking you for the nominal kV of the tertiary bus.
Enter the nominal kV of the tertiary bus in the last edit box. Press OK.
SECTION 3
The program will automatically erase the old fictitious bus and all the
branches and the shunt on it and then create a new 3-winding transformer
with the correct parameters.
Note: The second T circuit does not provide sufficient information to
compute Zpt. The program computes Zpto and sets Zpt to be the same as
Zpto.
162 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CHANGE | LINE TO SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR COMMAND
The Change | Line to Series Capacitor/Reactor command in the Main Window lets you change a transmission line
to a series capacitor or series reactor. You must select a line before executing this command.
TO CHANGE A LINE TO A SERIES CAPACITOR:
1.
Select a line by clicking the left mouse button once on its symbol.
The line symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | Change | Line to Series Capacitor/Reactor command.

Note: This menu item is enabled only if all the following conditions are
met: (1) the lines resistances R and R0 are zero, (2) the lines positiveand zero-sequence reactances are the same (X=Xo), and (3) the lines
shunt admittances (B,Bo,G,Go) are all zero, and (4) the line is not
mutually coupled to other lines.
The Series Capacitor/Reactor dialog box will appear. The program
automatically copies the name, circuit ID and the reactance of the line to
this new series-capacitor/reactor object. The protective-level current is
initially zero.
3.
For MOV-protected capacitor only: Enter the protective -level current in

amperes.
4.
Press OK to close the dialog box.

The line symbol will be replaced by a series capacitor or reactor symbol on
the one-line diagram.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CHANGE | BUSES IN REGION COMMAND
The Change | Buses in Region command in the Main Window lets you change the area or zone number of all the
buses that are within in a rectangular region on the one-line diagram. You must create a region on the one-line
diagram before executing this command.
TO CHANGE BUSES IN REGION:
1.
Specify the region.

You can do this under any zoom setting. The region will be enclosed by a
rectangle drawn with the dotted red pen.
2.
Select the Network | Change | Buses in region command.

If there are hidden buses in the region, the program will display a dialog
box allowing you to choose whether or not to include them in the change
command.
The Change Buses In Region box will appear. The program automatically
lists and highlights the name of buses found in the selected region.
3.
Highlight the bus name to include it in the list.
4.
Making the change

Select the change type. You can change the zone or area number for all
selected buses in the list.
Click on Do It to make the change. A dialog box will appear asking for the
new area or zone number
Enter new Area or Zone number and click on OK.

5.
164 SECTION 3
Click on Done to close the Change dialog box
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
TOGGLE SWITCH COMMAND
The Toggle Switch command in the Main Window changes the switch position from open to close, or vise versa.
This command works on regular switch objects as well as bypass switch of series capacitor/reactors.
TO TOGGLE A SWITCH:
1.
Select the switch or series capacitor/reactor.

Click the left mouse button once on a switch or a series
capacitor/reactor.
The object symbol will become highlighted.
2.
Select the Network | Toggle Switch (or Toggle Bypass Switch) command.
The object will remain highlighted and the switch position will change.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
TAKE OUT OF SERVICE COMMAND
The Take Out of Service command in the Main Window lets you take a piece of equipment out of service. This
command, when applied to a bus, will take all of the attached equipment out of service. Unlike deleted equipment,
out-of-service equipment remains part of the one-line diagram and can be put back in service at any time even
after the current session has ended. (Note: A session ends when you issue the New, or the Open, or the Import,
or the Exit command under the File menu.) To execute this command you must first select a piece of equipment.
TO TAKE A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT OUT OF SERVICE:
1.
Select a branch, generator, load, shunt or bus.

Click the left button once on the symbol of the piece of equipment you
want to take out of service.
The symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | Take Out Of Service command.

The selected equipment will be taken out of service and the symbol will be
drawn with a dotted black line.
166 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PUT IN SERVICE COMMAND
The Put In Service command in the Main Window lets you put back in service a piece of equipment that was
previously taken out of service. This command, when applied to a bus, will put all of the attached equipment in
service. To execute this command you must first select a piece of equipment.
TO PUT A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT BACK IN SERVICE:
1.
Select a branch, generator load, shunt or bus.

Click the left button once on the symbol of the piece of equipment you
want to put back in service.
2.
Select the Network | Put In Service command.

Note: The menu item will be dimmed and cannot be activated if the
equipment selected had not previously been taken out of service.
The selected equipment will be put back in service. If you have selected a
bus in step 1 above, all attached equipment will be put back in service.
The symbol(s) will be drawn in its normal style and color.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
COPY COMMAND
The Copy command in the Main Window lets you copy network elements, protective relays and network region
into the Windows clipboard. This command, in conjunction with the Paste command, is designed to help you
copy system components from one location to another. This command will copy devices attached to busses and
branches, as well as relays.
TO COPY DATA OF A NETWORK ELEMENT TO THE CLIPBOARD:
1.
Select the network object.

The system elements that you can copy include generators, loads, shunts,
switched shunts, transmission lines, series capacitors, 2- and 3-winding
transformers, phase shifters, and switches.
Click the left mouse button once on the system component you want to
copy to the clipboard.
The system component symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Network | Copy command.

The data for the system component will be copied to the clipboard.
TO COPY THE DATA OF ALL THE RELAYS IN A RELAY GROUP TO THE CLIPBOARD:
1.
Select the relay group.

Click the left mouse button once on the relay group you want to copy.
The relay-group symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.

The data for all the relays within the relay group will be copied to the
clipboard.
TO COPY THE DATA OF A SINGLE RELAY IN A RELAY GROUP TO THE CLIPBOARD:

1.
Open the relay group.

Double click the left mouse on the relay group of interest.
A dialog box will appear, with all the relays listed in a listbox.
2.
Select the relay you want to copy and press the Copy button.
The data for the selected relay will be copied to the clipboard.
TO COPY EQUIPMENT AND RELAYS IN A REGION TO THE CLIPBOARD:

1.
Specify the region.

2.
Select the Network | Copy Equipment in Region to Clipboard command.

The data for the selected region will be copied to the clipboard.
168 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PASTE COMMAND
The Paste command in the Main Window lets you paste data from the clipboard. You can paste network element
data onto a bus, or between two or three buses. You can paste relay data into a relay group. You can paste a
region anywhere on the 1-line diagram. This command, in conjunction with the Copy command, is designed to
help you copy system components from one location to another. You can use either the drag-drop method with
the device palette or the menu command methods for pasting an element.
TO PASTE A NETWORK ELEMENT USING THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1.
Click on the Paste button

on the device palette. The cursor will become a
cross with a symbol of the copied element attached to it.
2.
Use drag-drop technique to place the element to the desired location on the oneline diagram.
TO PASTE A LOAD, GENERATOR, SHUNT, OR SWITCHED SHUNT ONTO A BUS USING MENU
COMMAND:
1.
Select the destination bus by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
2.
Select the Network | Paste command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if there is no
system component data in the clipboard or if there is an incompatibility
between the object in the clipboard and the item you selected.
A symbol for the pasted equipment will appear on the highlighted bus.
TO PASTE A LINE, 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER, SWITCH, OR PHASE SHIFTER BETWEEN TWO BUSES
USING MENU COMMAND:
1.
Select the first bus by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Then, with the
<shift> key held down, click on the second bus.
Note: If you are pasting a wye-delta transformer, the first bus you select will be
the wye side winding.
2.

system component data in the clipboard or if there is an incompatibility
between the object in the clipboard and the item you selected.
A symbol for the pasted equipment will appear.
TO PASTE A 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER BETWEEN THREE BUSES USING MENU COMMAND:

1.
Select the first bus by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Then, with the
<shift> key held down, click on the second bus and then the third bus.
Note: The first bus you select will be bus1, the second will be bus2, and the third
will be the tertiary bus.
2.

A symbol for the pasted transformer will appear on the highlighted bus.
SECTION 3
TO PASTE A RELAY GROUP ONTO A BRANCH USING MENU COMMAND:

1.
Select the destination branch.

Click on the branch symbol near the terminal where you want to paste the relay
group.
The branch symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.

The relay group, as well all the relays within it will be pasted onto on end
of the branch.
TO PASTE A RELAY GROUP ONTO ANOTHER RELAY GROUP:

1.
Select the destination relay group.

Click on the destination relay-group symbol.
The relay-group symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.

All the relays in the Windows clipboard will be added to the destination
relay group.
Note: When necessary, the program will alter the name of pasted relays
to avoid having mu ltiple relays with the same name in a relay group.
TO PASTE A SINGLE RELAY ONTO A RELAY GROUP USING MENU COMMAND:

1.
Open the relay group.

Double click the left mouse on the relay group of interest.
A dialog box will appear, with all the relays listed in a listbox.
2.
Press the Paste button.

The relay will be pasted. You will see its name listed in the listbox.
Note: When necessary, the program will alter the name of pasted relays
to avoid having multiple relays with the same name in a relay group.
TO PASTE EQUIPMENT AND RELAYS IN A REGION USING MENU COMMAND:

1.
Click the mouse button at an empty spot on the one-line diagram.

This spot will become the center of the pasted equipment.
2.
Select the Network | Paste Equipment command.

The pasted equipment will appear on the screen in a ghosted form. You
can move the equipment with the mouse. Clicking the mouse outside of
the ghosted area will finalize the pasting process.
Note: When necessary, the program will alter the name of pasted buses
to avoid having multiple buses with the same name and nominal kV.
170 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SPLIT BUS COMMAND
The Split Bus command in the Main Window lets you split a bus into two buses. To execute this command you
must first rearrange the attached equipment on the selected bus.
TO SPLIT A BUS:
1.
Edit the one-line diagram to assign the attached equipment to the correct bus.
Note: You can split a bus only if it is shown as either a horizontal bar or
a vertical bar. You cannot split a bus that is shown as a dot.
The bus will be split at the point where you click on it in Step #2. Before
issuing this command use the mouse to rearrange the attached equipment.
All equipment that is to remain attached to the old bus should be moved
to the upper portion of the bus symbol if the bus is a vertical bar, or to the
left portion if the bus is a horizontal bar. All equipment that is to remain
attached to the new bus should be moved to the remaining portion of the
bus symbol.
2.
Specify where to split the bus.

Click the left mouse button once on a point on the bus symbol between the
two groups of attached equipment.
The split will be made where you click on the bus. The bus symbol will
turn dotted red when selected.
3.
Select the Network | Split Bus command.

The program will automatically assign an unused name to the new bus and hide
the name from displaying on the diagram. To change new bus attributes double
click on its symbol and follow direction in the command Network | New Bus.
4.

After the command is executed successfully, the bus symbol will appear to
have both solid and dotted portions. Actually, you are seeing two bus
symbols with the new highlighted bus next to the old bus. Use the mouse
to drag one of the symbols away from the other.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
MERGE BUSES COMMAND
The Merge Buses command in the Main Window lets you merge two buses into one. The buses being merged
must have the same nominal kV. This command is the Split | Bus command in reverse.
TO MERGE BUSES USING THE MOUSE:
1a. Drag and drop the first bus on the second bus
Hold down the <Ctrl> key and drag the first bus over the second bus.
Release the mouse button when the second node turns dotted red.
After the buses are merged, the bus you dragged will no longer exist. All
its equipment will be attached to the merged bus.
Note: If the second node has a different nominal kV it will not turn
dotted red and the merge will not happen when the button is released.
TO MERGE BUSES USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Align the two buses.
Drag the first bus until its symbol is aligned with that of the second bus
symbol.
2b. Select the two buses.
Click the left mouse button once on the first bus. Then, with the <Shift>
key held down, click the left button once on the bottom bus.
3b. Select the Network | Merge Buses command.
NOTE: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if the two buses
being merged have different nominal kVs,
The first bus will be merged into the second bus.
172 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
INSERT TAP BUS COMMAND
The Insert Tap Bus command in the Main Window lets you insert a tap bus into a transmission line.
TO INSERT A TAP NODE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Bus in the device palette.
Click on the New Bus button
node symbol attached to it.
. The cursor will become a cross with a
2a. Click on the line to which you want to insert a tap node.
A dialog box will appear asking where you want to locate the tap node. Go
to step 3 below.
TO INSERT A TAP BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select a transmission line.
Click the left mouse button once on the transmission line to which you
want to insert the tap bus.
The transmission line symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | Insert Tap Bus command.
A dialog box will appear asking where you want to locate the tap bus.
3.
Enter the position of the tap bus as a percentage of the length of the
line. Then, click on "OK".
Note: The percentage is limited to 0.01% to 99.9%. If you use a
percentage value near either extreme, you should check the impedance
of the shorter line segment to make sure that it is not too small.
A tap bus will appear at an intermediate point of the line. A small T is
drawn below this bus to indicate that it is a tap bus. The name of the tap
bus is assigned by the program e.g., Bus0. You can change the bus
name by double clicking on the tap bus.
If the original line is mutually coupled to one or more lines, the program
will automatically change the mutual coupling parameters to account for
the tap bus.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
REMOVE TAP BUS COMMAND
The Remove Tap Bus command in the Main Window lets you remove a tap bus and merge the attached line
segments into one. This is the exact opposite of the Network | Insert Tap Bus command. To execute this
command you must first select a tap bus.
TO REMOVE A TAP BUS:
1.
Select a tap bus.

Click the left mouse button once on the tap bus you want to remove.
2.
Select the Network | Remove Tap Bus command.

The tap bus will be deleted and the two transmission lines will be merged
together.
Note: This command does not work if the line segments on either side of
the tap bus are mutually coupled. Please consider using the Tools |
Undo command if the tap bus was inserted recently in the same session.
The Undo command will work even if the original line was mutually
coupled.
174 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
MUTUAL COUPLING | MUTUAL GROUP PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Mutual Coupling | Mutual Group Properties command in the Main Window lets you edit the parameters of a
zero-sequence mutual group, which is a collection of lines that are directly or indirectly mutually coupled to each
other. To execute this command you must first select a mutually coupled line, or two lines that belong to the same
mutual group.
Note: We have done away with the concept of mutual groups in Version 10. We kept this command for users
who are accustomed to the mutual group concept. Please do not use this command if you are not familiar with
the mutual-group concept.
TO VIEW MUTUAL COUPLING PARAMETERS:
1.
Select a mutually coupled line.

Click the left mouse button once on a line that is a member of one or
more mutual pairs.
Select the Network | Mutual Coupling | Mutual Group Properties command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the line you
selected is not mutually coupled.
A dialog box will appear. The line you selected will be highlighted in the
top grid. The bottom grid lists the lines in the mutual group that may be
mutually coupled to the line in the top grid. The first entry in the bottom
grid is highlighted by default.
Click on one of the lines on the bottom grid.
SECTION 3
This row will become highlighted. The mutual parameters in the bottom
grid will be updated automatically to reflect the mutual coupling between
the highlighted lines in the two grids.
2.
Edit the mutual coupling parameters.

Press the Edit button. A dialog box will appear to let you edit the mutual
coupling parameters.
3.
Input the mutual coupling parameters.

Z:

percent: Starting and ending section of line 1 that is mutually coupled to

line 2.
line 1.
Note: See Section 4.8 for details on the mutual coupling model.
4.
Click on "OK" to close the Mutual Coupling Data dialog box.
5.
Select other line pairs by clicking on the top and bottom grid. Modify their
parameters as needed.
6.
Click on "Done" to close the Mutual Coupling Data dialog box.

The main Mutual Coupling Data dialog box will close and the changes
made to the mutual group will be saved.
176 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
MUTUAL COUPLING | MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Mutual Coupling | Mutual Pair Properties command in the Main Window lets you edit the parameters of a
zero-sequence mutual pair. To execute this command you must first select a mutually coupled line, or two lines
that are mutually coupled.
TO VIEW MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR PARAMETERS BY SELECTING ONLY ONE LINE:
1a. Select a mutually coupled line.
Click the left mouse button once on a line that is a member of one or
more mutual pairs.
Select the Network | Mutual Coupling | Mutual Coupling Pair Properties
command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the line you
selected is not mutually coupled.
A dialog box will appear showing list of mutually coupling pairs of which
the selected line is a member.
Click on one of the mutual pairs in the list. This row will become
highlighted.
Press the Edit button. A dialog box will appear to let you edit the mutual
coupling parameters.
Go to step 2 below.
TO VIEW MUTUAL COUPLING PAIR PARAMETERS BY SELECTING TWO LINES:
1b. Select two lines that belong to the same mutual pair.
Click the left mouse button once on one of the lines.
With the <Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button on the other
line.
SECTION 3
Select the Network | Mutual Coupling | Mutual Pair Properties

command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if two lines you
selected are not mutually coupled.
A dialog box will appear to let you edit the mutual coupling parameters.
2.
Edit the mutual coupling parameters.

Z:


line 2.
line 1.
Note: See Section 4.8 for details on the mutual coupling model.
3.
178 SECTION 3
Click on "OK" to close the Mutual Coupling Data dialog box.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SET GENERATOR REF. ANGLE COMMAND
The Set Generator Reference Angle command in the Main Window automatically sets the reference angle of all
the generators, with one of the generators being the reference (with angle equal to zero). This is a prerequisite for
using the Start from a linear network solution starting option (formerly the flat generator voltage option.)
Please refer to Sections 4.2 and 4.9 for a detailed explanation of the generator model.
TO SET GENERATOR REFERENCE ANGLE:
1.
Select the Network | Set Generator Ref. Angle command.

A dialog box will appear to let you select a reference generator whose
angle will be set to zero.
Select a reference bus by clicking on it with the mouse. Click on OK.

The TTY window will appear showing the changes made to generator
reference angles.
3.
SECTION 3
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RESET ALL TRANSFORMER TAPS TO NOMINAL COMMAND
The Reset All Transformer Taps to Nominal command in the Main Window automatically resets the tap kVs of all
the 2- and 3-winding transformers to 1.0 per-unit voltage. It also resets the center position of all LTCs to 1.0 perunit voltage.
Resetting the tap kVs is useful for comparing the fault currents of OneLiner to those from another short-circuit
program that assumes nominal transformer taps. The reset-LTC feature has no effect on short-circuit solutions. It
is intended for power flow users.
TO RESET ALL TRANSFORMER TAPS AND LTCS CENTER KV TO NOMINAL:
1.
Select the Network | Reset All Transformer Taps To Nominal command.

Mark the first check box to reset the tap kVs of all 2- and 3-winding
transformer to the nominal kV of the respective terminals.
Mark the second check box to reset the center position of all LTCs on 2and 3-winding transformers to the nominal kV of the tap-side bus.
Note: In the event that the nominal kV is not within the LTCs range of
tap positions, the program will set the center position to the midpoint
between the maximum and minimum positions. Whenever possible, the
program will limit the center position to the range of [0.95, 1.05] perunit.
Press OK.
180 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
BOUNDARY EQUIVALENT COMMAND
The Boundary Equivalent command in the Main Window computes the multi-port Thevenin equivalent for one or
more buses in the network. At the end of this command, the equivalent network will appear on the one-line
diagram. This command employs a wizard interface to guide you through the process of specifying the portion
of the network that you want to eliminate or the portion that you want to retain.
TO COMPUTE A BOUNDARY EQUIVALENT:
1.
Select the Network | Boundary Equivalent command.

The Boundary Equivalent wizard will appear. The first page will ask you
what you want to do.
Choose one of the three choices and press Next.

The three choices are explained in the following.
OPTION 1: REDUCE THE NETWORK TO A SMALL NUMBER OF BUSES:
A typical application is to reduce the network to the terminal buses of a
transmission line, so that the reduced system can be studied further using the
EMTP.
1.
Specify which buses to retain.

The wizard will ask you which buses you wish to keep.
For each bus to be retained, locate its name in the listbox on the left
listbox. Select the bus by clicking on it. Press the > button to move that
bus to the listbox on the right.
Repeat this process for each bus.
2.
Mark the checkbox Retain all existing equipment at these buses if you wish to
keep the original branches between the retained buses. Otherwise, the fictitious
branches generated by the network-equivalence algorithm may subsume these
branches.
SECTION 3
Press Next>.
Skip to the subsection CONFIRM YOUR SELECTION AND FINISH
BUILDING THE EQUIVALENT
OPTION 2: DELETE A PORTION OF THE NETWORK AND REDUCE THE REST TO THE BOUNDARY:
A typical application is when your neighbor asks you for an equivalent of your
companys network at the company boundary. We assume that the file you are
using has both your network and your neighbors. That is why you must delete
your neighbors network before reducing the remainder (i.e., your network) to the
boundary buses.
1.
Specify which buses to delete.

The wizard will ask you which buses you wish to delete.
For each bus to be delete, locate its name in the listbox on the left listbox.
Select the bus by clicking on it. Press the > button to move that bus to
the listbox on the right.
Alternatively, press the >> button. This will bring up a dialog box that will
enable you to move buses by area, zone, tier, etc.
182 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
The wizard should look something like this.
Press Next>
2.
Check the boundary buses identified by the program.

This page lists the boundary buses in a listbox on the right. The equivalent
network will contain only these buses.
If needed, add or remove bus from the list of boundary buses using the >
button and the < button.
3.
Mark the checkbox Retain all existing equipment at these buses if you
wish to keep the original branches between the boundary buses. Otherwise,
these branches may be subsumed by the fictitious branches generated by the
network-equivalence algorithm.
Press Next>
Skip to the subsection CONFIRM YOUR SELECTION AND FINISH
BUILDING THE EQUIVALENT
SECTION 3
OPTION 3: REDUCE A PORTION OF THE NETWORK TO THE BOUNDARY AND LEAVE THE REST
OF THE NETWORK UNCHANGED:
A typical application is when you have a file that contain your system and
your neighbors system, and you wish to reduce your neighbors system to an
equivalent network at the boundary and leave your own system unchanged.
1.
Specify the network to be left unchanged.

The wizard will ask you to specify the network to be left unchanged.
For each bus to be included, locate its name in the listbox on the left
listbox. Select the bus by clicking on it. Press the > button to move that
bus to the listbox on the right.
Alternatively, press the >> button. This will bring up a dialog box that enables
you to move multiple buses by area, zone, etc.
The wizard should look something like this.
Press Next>
2.
Check the boundary buses identified by the program.

This page lists the boundary buses in a listbox on the right. The equivalent
network will contain only these buses.
If needed, add or remove bus from the list of boundary buses using the >
button and the < button.
184 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.
Mark the checkbox Retain all existing equipment at these buses if you
wish to keep the original branches between the boundary buses. Otherwise,
the fictitious branches generated by the network-equivalence algorithm may
subsume these branches.
Press Next>
CONFIRM YOUR SELECTION AND FINISH BUILDING THE EQUIVALENT:

The following steps are common to all three options.
1.
Check the information displayed at the top of this page. If it is not correct, press
the <Back button to go back to the previous pages and fix the problem.
2.
Enter the full path name of the output file.

The output file is a binary data file (with extension .OLR) that will contain the
reduced network. Press the Browse button to specify the file name and
location with the standard file dialog box, if needed.
SECTION 3
3.
Specify the impedance threshold for the equivalent branches.

An equivalent branch with per-unit impedance greater than this number
will be ignored.
4.
Check the box Transfer all existing annotations to the equivalent file to keep
all existing text annotations in the equivalent network.
Press Next>
4.
Finished.
This final page tells you that the equivalent network has been created
successfully.
Press Finish
The output file name will appear at the top of the main window, and the one-line
diagram of the equivalent network will appear.
186 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
OUTAGE LIST COMMAND
The Outage List command in the Main Window creates a TTY report listing all deleted and out-of-service
equipment.
TO GET AN OUTAGE LIST:
1.
Select the Network | Outage List command.

The TTY window will appear displaying a list of all the deleted and out of
service equipment.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
COPY ONE-LINE GRAPHICS TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Copy One-Line Graphics to Clipboard command in the Main Window lets you to copy a region of the oneline diagram graphics to the window clipboard. The graphical data is stored in the enhanced Windows metafile
format in the clipboard. You can paste the picture into other Windows programs, such as Microsoft Word and
AutoCad.
TO COPY A PORTION OF THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM TO CLIPBOARD:

1.
Specify the region.

Note: The picture in the clipboard will include the objects that are
within, or partially within, the rectangle.
2.
Select the Diagram | Copy One-Line Region to Clipboard command.

A dialog box will appear informing you that a portion of the one-line
diagram has been copied to the clipboard.
Click OK to continue.
3.

188 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command in the Main Window lets you specify the various options that affect the appearance of the
main window. These include (1) whether to show the one-line diagram in color or black & white, (2) the unit of
time, (3) choice of American or European transformer symbols, (4) sorting preference, (5) whether to show tapbus names, bus numbers and annotations (6) the font size and (7) the unit of length. The program will store your
preferences in Window registry on your PC.
TO SPECIFY OPTIONS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW:
1.
Select the Diagram | Options command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the main window options.
2.
Select your color preference. Click on:

"In color" to displ ay everything in color. This is the default setting if you
have a color monitor or a black-and-white monitor with multiple shades of
gray.
"Back and white" radio button to display everything in black and white.
Some users that have black-and-white monitors with multiple shades of
gray prefer this setting because the screen is more legible.
3.
Select the units of time. Click on:

"Seconds" to use seconds as the units of time.
"Cycles 60 Hz" to use cycles as the units of time, assuming 60 hertz.
This selection will affect the textual output of the relay operating times on
4.
Select either "American" or "European" to display either American or

European (IEC) transformer symbols.
5.
Select sorting preference.

Click on either Bus names or Bus numbers.
SECTION 3
This option will affect how the program sorts items within dialog boxes,
data browsers, and reports.
6.
Select whether to hide tap bus names.

Click on "Tap bus names" to hide the identifier of tap buses. Otherwise,
the bus identifier of tap buses will appear on the one-line diagram.
7.
Select whether to hide bus numbers.

Click on "Bus numbers" to not show the bus numbers. Otherwise, the
bus number, if not zero, is shown as part of the bus identifier on the oneline diagram.
8.
Select whether to hide annotations.

Click on "Annotations" to not show the annotations on the one-line
diagram. Otherwise, the annotations will appear on the one-line diagram.
9.
Select the screen font size.

Click on the 'Screen Font Size' drop down list box and select the desired
font size.
Font sizes 8 to 28 are available. OneLiner will use the selected font size for
the text in the one-line diagram. ,
10. Select the unit of length.

Click on the 'Preferred Unit of Length' drop down list box and select the
desired unit of length.
Units of length available are: "ft", "kt" (1000 ft), "mi", "m" or "km". Your
preferred unit will be used as the default for new transmission lines and as
the unit for existing lines of zero length,.
11. Click on the "OK" button to save the options.
The dialog box will disappear and the new options will take effect
immediately.
190 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
kV COLOR CODE COMMAND
The kV Color Code command lets you customize the appearance of the one-line diagram by using colors to
distinguish different voltage ranges. You can also use this command to hide equipment in certain voltage ranges
by giving them the color "invisible". (Note: Coloring equipment "Invisible" has no effect on the system. These
changes affect only the visual appearance of the one-line diagram and DO NOT remove, delete or take out of
service any equipment.) As OneLiner draws the one-line diagram, it colors each piece of equipment according
to the follow logic:
if ( The equipment is an equivalent branch ) {
if ( The equivalent branch color* is not "invisible" ) {
Draw with the color corresponding to the kV of the equivalent branch.
}
} else {
if ( The equipment is a branch ) {
if ( All the end buses of the branch have visible colors ) {
Draw each portion of the branch with the color corresponding to
the kV of the end bus to which it is attached.
} else if ( Only one end bus of the transformer has a visible color ) {
Draw the visible half normally and the invisible half
with dotted lines.
}
} else {
if ( The equipment has a visible color ) {
Draw the equipment with the color corresponding to its kV value.
}
}
}
Note: You can assign the equivalent branch color using the Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code command.
TO ASSIGN COLORS TO DIFFERENT kV RANGES:
1.
Select the Diagram | KV Color Code command.

A window will appear to show you the current color assignments.
The dialog box has a horizontal ruler with markings between 0 kV and 1000
kV. Six triangular knobs are attached to the bottom of the ruler marking
the kV ranges. One of the knobs will be colored and the square with its
color will be highlighted in the lower portion of the dialog box.
2.
Select the kV range.

Click the left mouse button on the triangular knob at the minimum value
of the kV range and drag it to the new desired voltage.
SECTION 3
All the knobs can be dragged except for the leftmost one. Each knob
controls the maximum voltage of the kV range to its left and the minimum
voltage of the kV range to its right. As the knob is dragged, its position is
shown at the upper left corner.
3.
Select the color of the kV range.

Click the left mouse button once on the triangular knob at the minimum
value of the kV range. The knob will become highlighted. Click the left
mouse button once on the new color square.
The knobs and the ruler will be drawn to show the new selection.
4.
Select the Menu | OK command.

The dialog box will disappear and the one-line diagram will be redrawn
with the new color scheme.
192 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
EQUIV. BRANCH COLOR CODE COMMAND
Branches and generators are fictitious network elements created by network reduction. You should designate all
equivalent branches and generators as such by giving them a special circuit identifier such as 'N' or '3'. You can
assign this circuit identifier when you create the equipment, or at a later time by editing the circuit ID field in the
properties dialog box for that equipment.
The Equivalent Branch Color Code command in the Main Window allows you to assign a unique color to identify
all the equivalent branches and generators in the one-line diagram. This color overrides the color that would have
been assigned on the basis of the equipment's nominal kV. You can also use this command to hide all equivalent
branches and generators by giving them the color "invisible". (The logical steps used to determine the color
used for each piece of equipment are discussed in the kV Color Code command description.)
TO ASSIGN A COLOR TO EQUIVALENT BRANCHES AND GENERATORS:
1.
Select the Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code command.

2.
Enter in the Equivalent Branch ID in the edit box.

Any line, transformer, or phase shifter with this circuit ID is considered to
be an equivalent branch. Any generator with this ID is considered to be
an equivalent generator.
3.
Select the color for the equivalent branches and generators.

Click on the drop down list box and select the appropriate color.
These branches and generators will not be drawn if you click on the
Invisible button.
Note: Coloring the equivalent branches and generators "Invisible" has
no effect on the system. This change affects only the visual appearance of
the one-line diagram and does NOT remove, delete or take out of service
any equipment.
4.

The equivalent branches and generators on the one-line diagram will be
redrawn with the new color. Only the equipment with the special circuit ID
will be considered as equivalent.
5.
Re-assign equipment circuit identifiers.

Select equipment by clicking on it once with the left mouse button. Then,
select the Network | Properties command and enter the new circuit
identifier in the 'Ckt ID' edit box. Click on "OK" to close the dialog box.
The equipment will be redrawn using the equivalent branch color.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
PLACE BUSES COMMAND
Some buses in the system may not be visible on the one-line diagram because (1) they came from a text data file
and have not been placed previously, or (2) they were placed and subsequently made invisible with the Diagram |
Hide Bus or Diagram | Hide Area commands. This Place Buses command in the Main Window lets you place a
hidden bus on the one-line diagram and make it visible. The program will automatically display any branches
connecting this bus to neighboring buses that are already visible on the one-line. If the bus to be placed was
hidden previously with the Diagram | Hide Bus command, you have the option of restoring the bus to its old
position.
TO PLACE A BUS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the Diagram | Place Buses command.

A dialog box will appear. Displayed in the left list box are all the buses in
the system in ascending order of bus name or bus number, depending on
your bus-sorting selection in the Diagram | Options dialog box. The
visible buses are shown with the letter A following the bus name. One
of these buses is selected. The list box on the right shows its neighboring
buses . Again, the letter A denotes visible buses.
2.
Select a bus to be placed on the one-line diagram.

If the buses are sorted by name, enter one or more characters of the bus
name in 'Search For'. If the buses are sorted by bus number, enter one or
more digits of the bus number.
The bus with the best match will automatically appear in the window
highlighted.
3.
Select the neighboring buses to be placed on the one-line diagram.

Click on "Place All" if you want to place not only the selected bus but
also all its neighboring buses. You may alternatively select them
individually.
4.
Click on "Use Old Location" to place buses at their previous locations.

A bus has a previous location if it was visible at one time, before it was hidden.
The Use Old Location option is dimmed and unavailable if there is no previous
location information.
194 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
5.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear. The selected bus and its neighboring
buses will be drawn on the screen. If the selected bus is out of the
viewable portion of the screen, OneLiner will scroll the one-line diagram to
bring the selected bus to the center of the Main Window. The
neighboring buses will automatically be placed around the bus.
All of the branches that connect the bus to its neighboring buses will be
automatically added along with any attached equipment, such as
generator, load or shunt.
A bus is drawn with a hollow bus symbol if it has one or more invisible
neighbors.
After the last bus is placed on the screen a message box will appear
informing you that the one-line diagram has been completed.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
BUS SYMBOL | DOT/HORIZONTAL BAR/VERTICAL BAR/
LONGER/SHORTER/ROTATE COMMANDS
This set of Bus Symbol commands in the Main Window lets you change the way a bus is displayed on one-line
diagram. These commands change only the appearance of the one-line diagram, and they have no effect on faultsimulation results. You must first select the bus you would like to change before executing any of these
commands.
1.
Select a bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus you would like to hide.
It will turn dotted red.
2.
Select the symbol or action.
TO SHOW A BUS AS VERTICAL BAR:

Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Vertical Bar command.
TO SHOW A BUS AS HORIZONTAL BAR:
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Vertical Bar command.
TO SHOW A BUS AS A DOT:
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Dot command.
TO MAKE BUS SYMBOL LONGER:
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Longer command.
TO MAKE BUS SYMBOL SHORTER:
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Shorter command.
TO ROTATE BUS SYMBOL:
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Rotate command.
The bus symbol will change from a horizontal bar to a vertical bar, or vise
versa.
196 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
BUS SYMBOL | SHOW (OR HIDE) ID COMMAND
This Bus Symbol | ID command in the Main Window lets you toggle display status of the bus ID, which include
the bus name, bus number and nominal kV. It also includes the solution voltage when the solution of a power
flow or short circuit is being displayed. These commands change only the appearance of the one-line diagram,
and they have no effect on fault-simulation results. You must first select the bus before executing this command.
TO HIDE OR SHOW THE BUS ID:
1.
Select a bus.
It will turn dotted red.
2.
Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Show (or Hide) Bus ID command.
The appearance of the bus ID will change accordingly.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
HIDE BUSES | SELECTED BUS COMMAND
This Hide Bus | Selected Bus command hides a bus and all the attached components, including generators, loads,
shunts and branches. This command changes only the appearance of the one-line diagram, and it has no effect
on fault-simulation results. You must first select the bus you would like to hide before executing this command.
TO HIDE A BUS:
1.
Select a bus.
Its symbol will turn dotted red.
2.
Select the Diagram | Hide Bus command.

The bus and all the attached components will disappear. Neighboring
buses that are connected to the hidden bus will be drawn with a hollow
bus symbol.
198 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
HIDE BUSES | INSIDE/OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND
This Hide Bus | Inside Region and Hide Bus | Outside Region commands in the Main Window let you hide all the
buses that are within (or outside of) a rectangular region you define. The program also hides all the equipment
that is attached to these buses. These commands change only the appearance of the one-line diagram, and they
do not affect fault-simulation results.
TO HIDE BUSES AND EQUIPMENT INSIDE OR OUTSIDE A REGION:
1.
Specify the region.

2.
Select the Diagram | Hide Buses | Inside Region or Diagram | Hide Buses |
Outside Region command.
The program will hide all the buses that are within (or outside of) the
region. The program also hides all the equipment that is attached to these
buses.
3.

SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SHOW BUSES | INSIDE/OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND
This Show Bus | Inside Region and Show Bus | Outside Region commands in the Main Window let you show all
the hidden buses that are within (or outside of) a region you define. The program also makes visible all the
equipment that is attached to these buses. These commands change only the appearance of the one-line diagram,
and they have no effect on fault-simulation results.
TO SHOW BUSES AND EQUIPMENT INSIDE OR OUTSIDE A REGION:
1.
Specify the region.

Drag with the right mouse button down to delineate a region on the oneline diagram.
2.
Select the Diagram | Show Buses | Inside Region or Diagram | Show Buses |
Outside Region command.
The program will you show all the hidden buses that are within (or outside
of) the region. The program also makes visible all the equipment that is
attached to these buses.
3.

200 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SHOW / HIDE AREA OR ZONE COMMAND
This command lets you hide or display all of the network elements located in a specific area or zone. To show the
equipment in an area or zone that is currently invisible, you must have placed the buses in that area or zone
previously with the Diagram | Place Bus command. This command changes only the appearance of the one-line
diagram, and it has no effect on fault-simulation results.
TO HIDE OR SHOW AN ENTIRE AREA OR ZONE:
1.
Select the Diagram | Show/Hide Area or Zone command.

A dialog box will appear asking for the area or zone you would like to hide
or display.
2.
Select an area or zone by clicking on it in the list box.
3.
Click on:
4.
Show:
To display all the buses and branches in the selected area or zone.
Hide:
To hide all buses and branches in the selected area or zone.
Click on "Done" to close dialog box.

The one-line diagram will be updated accordingly.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES COMMAND
The Snap to State Plane Coordinates command in the Main Window re-positions all the buses according to their
state-plane coordinates. This command also makes visible all the buses that have state-plane coordinates but
were not placed previously.
Many users create their text data files by exporting information from their GIS database. If the buses state-plane
coordinates are within these files, the user can use this command to place all the buses automatically according to
their geographic location.
TO ALIGN ALL NODES TO THEIR COORESPONDING GPS COORDINATE:
1.
Select the Diagram | Snap to State Plane Coordinates command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the screen parameters. The
program will fill in the three edit boxes with estimates computed based on
the coordinates available. These estimates work well in most cases. You
can edit them if you wish.
2.
Enter in 'X' and 'Y' the state-plane coordinate for the position being displayed at
the center of your screen.
3.
In 'Screen Width in State Plane Coordinates', enter the width of the computer
screen in state-plane coordinates.
4.
Click on the 'Place All Invisible Buses ' check box to have the program place
all hidden buses that have state-plane coordinates.
5.
Click on "OK".
The 'Snap to State Plane Coordinates' dialog box will disappear. All the
buses with state plane coordinates will be re-positioned according to their
coordinates. Buses and nodes with coordinate of (0,0) will not be moved.
202 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
ATTACH/DETACH ANNOTATION TO/FROM OBJECT COMMAND
The Attach Annotation To Object and Detach Annotation from Object commands in the Main Window let you
attach an annotation to, or detach it from, an object on the one-line diagram. A note that is attached to an object
will move with the attached object.
TO ATTACH A NOTE TO AN OBJECT:
1.
Select the note or annotation by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
A dotted red box will be drawn enclosing the note.
2.
Hold down the <Shift> key and click on the object to which the note is to be
attached.
The object will turn dotted red.
3.
Select Diagram | Attach Annotation to Object command.

A * will appear at the beginning of the note signifying that it is attached to an
object.
TO DETACH A NOTE:
1.
Select the note by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Then select the
Diagram | Detach Annotation from Object command.
Once the note is detached from the object, and the * marking will disappear.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
RESET TEXT POSITION COMMAND
The Reset Text Position command in the Main Window lets you reset the position of the text blocks to their
default positions. Text blocks are used to display text associated with bus equipment (generators, loads and
shunts) and branches (lines, transformer, phase shifters and switches). You can reset position of all text blocks
on the one-line diagram or just the text blocks of a single object.
TO RESET TEXT POSITION OF A SINGLE OBJECT:
1.
Select the object.

Click the left mouse button once on the symbol of a generator, load, shunt
or branch.
2.
Select Diagram | Reset Text Position command.

The text blocks associated with this branch will be moved to their default
position.
TO RESET TEXT POSITION ON THE ENTIRE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:

1.
Un-select any object that is currently selected.

Click the left mouse button once on an empty area on the diagram away
from visible objects.
Any symbol that was highlighted dotted red should become black.
2.
Select Diagram | Reset Text Position command.

A confirmation dialog will occur.
Click on Yes to reset position of all text blocks to their default position.
204 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
INSERT LINE KINK COMMAND
The Insert Line Kink command in the Main Window lets you introduce more segments into a line symbol. This
command changes only the visual appearance of the one-line diagram and has no effect on the system mode or
simulation results.
The figure below shows the effect of inserting a kink on the graphic symbols of a line.
Before inserting
After inserting
TO INTRODUCE MORE SEGMENTS INTO A LINE SYMBOL:

1.
Select the branch.

Click the left mouse button once on the line symbol. The kink will be
inserted near where you clicked.
2.
Select the Diagram | Insert Line Kink command.

transmission line already has a total of 49 vertical and horizontal
segments.
3.
Edit the line symbol.

Edit the line by dragging different portions of the line until the result is
esthetically pleasing.
SECTION 3
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SCALE/SHIFT ONE-LINE COMMAND
The Scale/Shift One-Line command in the Main Window lets you scale or shift the entire one-line diagram. A
common usage is to blow up the entire diagram to give more room between adjacent symbols. This is done by
multiplying all x and y coordinates by a scaling factor a that you specify.
TO SCALE OR SHIFT THE ONE-LINE:
1.
Select the Diagram | Scale/Shift One-Line command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the scaling/shifting parameters 'a',
'b', and 'c'.
The one-line diagram is within a rectangle with the following coordinates:

Xmin, Ymin, Xmax, Ymax. The program will use the following formula to
calculate the new coordinates ( x', y' ) on the one-line diagram:
x' = a * x + b
y' = a * y + c
2.
3.
Input the scaling/shift factors.

a:
Scaling Parameter: expands (a >1) or shrinks (a < 1) the oneline diagram.
b:
Horizontal Shift Parameter: shifts the one-line diagram right

or left.
c:
Vertical Shift Parameter: shifts the one-line diagram up or

down.

The dialog box will disappear and the Main Window will display the
modified one-line diagram.
Note: Sometimes unexpected placement of symbols results when you
cascading two or more Scale/Shift commands. We suggest that you undo
a scale/shift operation before re-applying it with different scale and shift
factors.
206 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND BUS BY NAME COMMAND
The Find Bus by Name command in the Main Window helps you quickly locate a bus by its name and nominal
kV.
TO FIND A BUS BY NAME:
1.
Select the View | Find Bus By Name command.

A dialog box will appear displaying an alphabetical listing of all the buses
in the network. Each entry consists of the bus name, the nominal kV and
the bus number.
2.
Select the bus.

Type in one or more characters of the bus name. The bus name will
appear in the list box highlighted. Use the scroll bar as needed to locate
the bus name.
3.
Click on the bus name to select it, if it is not selected already.

The dialog box will disappear and the selected bus will appear highlighted
in dotted red in the center of the screen. The program also displays a
green arrow next to the target bus to help you finding it.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND BUS BY NUMBER COMMAND
The Find Bus by Number command in the Main Window helps you quickly locate a bus by its bus number.
TO FIND A BUS BY BUS NUMBER:
1.
Select the View | Find Bus By Number command.

A dialog box will appear displaying a list of all the buses in the network, in
ascending order of the bus number. Each entry consists of the bus name,
the nominal kV and the bus number.
2.
Select the bus.

Type in one or more digits of the bus number. A bus with the number
you entered will appear in the list box highlighted. Use the scroll bar as
needed to locate the bus.
3.
Click on the bus name to select it, if it is not selected already.

The dialog box will disappear and the selected bus will appear highlighted
in dotted red in the center of the screen. The program also displays a
green arrow next to the target bus to help you finding it.
208 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Find Annotation command in the Main Window helps you quickly locate an annotation by its text. This
feature effectively allows you to use the annotations as bookmarks in the one-line diagram.
TO FIND ANNOTATIONS:
1.
Select the View | Find Annotation command.

A dialog box will appear displaying a list of all the annotations in
alphabetical order. The Header portion of each annotation occupies
one line in the dialog box.
2.
Select the annotation.

Type in one or more characters of the annotation. The annotation that
begins with the letters you entered will appear in the list box highlighted.
3.
Select the annotation by clicking on it.

Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the annotation will appear in the center
of the screen.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
GO TO END BUS COMMAND
The Go to End Bus command in the Main Window helps you move quickly between the end buses of a
transmission line or 2-winding transformer. Using the command repeatedly will toggle between the two ends of a
line or transformer.
TO GO TO THE END BUS:
1.
Select a transmission line, a 2-winding transformer, or a relay group that is on a

transmission line or 2-winding transformer.
Click the left mouse button on the line or transformer or relay group of
interest.
The selected symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the View | Go To End Bus command.

If you selected a relay group, OneLiner will automatically scroll the oneline diagram to bring the other end bus to the center of the screen.
If you selected a line or transformer, OneLiner will automatically center the
one-line diagram on the end bus that is farthest from the center of the
screen.
If you selected a line and there is one or more tap buses on that line, the
program will pop up a dialog box to ask you to select either a tap bus or
one of the line ends.
Click on a bus on the list and click on OK.
210 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
HIGHLIGHT ATTACHED OBJECT COMMAND
The Highlight Attached Object command in the Main Window helps you identify quickly the object to which the
selected annotation is being attached.
TO HIGHLIGHT ATTACHED OBJECT:
1.
Select a annotation that has been attached to an object.

Click the left mouse button on the annotation of interest.
The selected symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the View | Highlight Attached Object command.

OneLiner will automatically scroll the one-line diagram to bring the object
to the center of the screen and highlight it in dotted red.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
PLAIN 1-LINE COMMAND
The Plain 1-Line command in the Main Window lets you view the one-line diagram without additional information
such as voltages, currents, branch impedances or mutual pair information.
TO SHOW A PLAIN ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the View | Plain 1-line command.

If voltages, currents or branch impedances are being displayed the screen
will be redrawn to show a plain one-line diagram.
212 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
IMPEDANCES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Impedances on 1-Line command in the Main Window displays the branch impedances, generator
impedances, shunt admittances, and load MW and MVAR on the one-line diagram.
TO SHOW IMPEDANCES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the View | Impedances on 1-line command.

The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the branch impedances,
generator impedances, shunt admittances, and load MW and MVAR. The
branch impedances shown are as follows:
1. For lines, phase shifters and 2-winding transformers, the positivesequence impedances will be displayed at one end of the branch symbol
and the zero-sequence impedances at the other end.
2. For 3-winding transformers, the short-circuit impedances Zps and Zpso
will be shown next to the primary bus, the impedances Zst and Zsto next
to the secondary bus and the impedances Zpt and Zpto next to the tertiary
bus.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
MUTUAL PAIRS ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Mutual Pairs On One-Line command in the Main Window displays for transmission lines that are mutually
coupled the mutual-pair numbers on the one-line diagram.
TO SHOW MUTUAL PAIRS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the View | Mutual Pairs on 1-Line command.

The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the mutual-pair information.
On each transmission line that is mutually coupled, you will see Pairs x, y,
z, where x, y, z, etc. are mutual pair numbers.
Two lines are members of mutual pair x, if the number x is shown on both
lines.
Please be aware that the mutual numbers are merely labels. The numbers
need not be consecutive, and they may change within a session when you
introduce tap buses or edit the mutual information.
214 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
BRANCH NAMES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Branch Names on 1-Line command in the Main Window displays the branch names on the one-line diagram.
Branch names are optional and are entered in the 'Name' edit field in the properties dialog boxes.
TO SHOW BRANCH NAMES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the View | Branch Names on 1-Line command.

The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the branch names.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
AREAS, TIE LINES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Area, Tie Lines on 1-Line Command in the Main Window displays (1) the area and zone numbers for each
bus and (2) a Tie Line on transmission lines and transformers that are tie lines. This command is intended for
power flow users.
TO DISPLAY AREA AND TIE LINE LABELS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the View | Areas, Tie Lines On 1-Line command.

The one-line diagram will be redrawn displaying the area and tie line
labels. The area and zone numbers for each bus are shown below the bus
identifier next to the bus symbol. A transmission line or 2-winding
transformer is labeled tie line if it spans two buses with different area
numbers.
216 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
The TTY Window command in the Main Window lets you open the TTY Window and view its contents.
TO VIEW THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the View | TTY Window command.

The TTY Window will appear on top of the Main Window.
2.
Use the scroll bars on the TTY Window to bring different sections of the window
into view.
The horizontal and vertical scroll bars let you browse through the
contents of the window.
3.
Close the TTY Window by selecting the Menu | Close Window command.
SECTION 3
Main Window
VIEW MENU
TOOLBAR COMMAND
The Toolbar command in the Main Window lets you show or hide the toolbar. You can use the toolbar for quick
access to commonly used commands.
TO SHOW OR HIDE THE TOOLBAR:
1.
Select the View | Toolbar command.

The toolbar will either be displayed or hidden.
Note: You can also hide the toolbar using the -T command line option.
218 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
VIEW MENU
DEVICE PALETTE COMMAND
The Device Palette command in the Main Window lets you show or hide the Device Palette. The device palette
allows you to build the one-line diagram conveniently and effortlessly.
TO SHOW OR HIDE THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1.
Select the View | Device Palette command.

The palette will either be displayed or hidden from view. A picture of the
palette is shown below.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Properties Command in the Main Window lets you review or edit the properties of a relay group. Within this
dialog box, you can edit the parameters of relays that are within the group. You can add new relays to the relay
group or remove existing relays from the group. You can also edit the coordination-pair and protection scheme
information.
Please see Section 6, Relay Dialog Boxes, for instructions on how to add relays, fuses and reclosers. To execute
this command you must first select the relay group you would like to review.
TO REVIEW OR EDIT THE PARAMETERS OF A RELAY:
1.
Select a relay group.

Click the left mouse button once on the relay group you want to review or
edit.
The relay group symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Relay | Properties command.

A dialog box will appear. The list box at the top shows a list of all the
relays, fuses and reclosers that are currently within the relay group. One
of these devices is highlighted.
TO ADD COMMENTS FOR A RELAY GROUP:

1.
Enter notes in the "Comments" edit box near the bottom.

You may enter up to 240 characters in this box.
TO GET INFO ON A DEVICE:

1.
220 SECTION 3
Select the device you would like to review or edit.
COMMAND REFERENCE
2.
Click on "Get Info" to review or edit the device parameters.

A dialog box will appear listing the parameters of the relay, fuse or reclose
you selected. Please refer to Section 6, Relay Dialog Boxes, for more
information.
TO SHOW THE RELAY CURVE:

1.
Select a relay, fuse or recloser in the list and press Show Curve.
The Relay Group dialog box will disappear. The OC Curves Window or
the DS Curves Window will appear showing you the curve of the selected
device.
TO TOGGLE ON-LINE STATE OF A DEVICE:

1.
Select a relay, fuse or recloser in the list and press On/Off-line.

The indicator to the right of the relay ID will change to reflect the new
state. The program will not compute operating time of off-line devices.
TO ADD A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER TO A RELAY GROUP:

1.
Click the Add button. A dialog box will ask you want you want to add.
Click on one of the radio buttons and press OK.

If you adding a distance relay, a dialog box will appear asking you for the
relay type. The relay type name is generally the relay's actual trade name.
If the relay type name you are seeking is not in the list, you must first exit
OneLiner and add the new relay type to the Distance Relay Library using
the Distance Relay Editor.
Highlight a relay type and press OK.

The dialog box for the relay, fuse or recloser will appear. Please refer to
Sections 6.2 through 6.6 for more information on these dialog boxes.
TO DELETE A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER:
1.
Select a device you want to remove and click on "Delete".

The device will be removed from the relay group. Its name will disappear
from the list box.
SECTION 3
TO COPY A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER TO THE CLIPBOARD:

1.
Select a device you want to copy and click on "Copy".

The program will copy the data of the selected device to the clipboard.
TO CREATE A NEW RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER BY PASTING THE DATA FROM THE CLIPBOARD:
1.
Click on the Paste button.

Note: The Paste button is enabled only where there is relay data in the
clipboard.
The program will create a device using data from the clipboard. The new
device will appear in the list.
TO TAKE A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER IN OR OUT OF SERVICE:

1.
Select a device and click on "On/Off Line".

The status of the device will toggle between on-line and off-line. An offline device is not considered when computing the operating time at a relay
group.
TO VIEW AND EDIT PROTECTION SCHEMES:

1.
Click on the 'Protection Schemes' tab to review or edit the coordination pairs
and pilot protection schemes for this relay group.
The 'Protection Schemes' page will appear. Please refer to the Relay | Form
Coordination Pair command and Relay | Pilot Protection Scheme command in the
Main Window for more information concerning coordinating pairs and Pilot
Protection Scheme.
TO CLOSE THE RELAY GROUP DIALOG BOX:

1.
Click on "Done".
If you just created a new relay group, the program will insert a relay group
symbol at the end of the selected branch.
222 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command in the Main Window lets you specify certain options pertaining to relays. For overcurrent
relays you may (1) ignore instantaneous units and/or (2) extrapolate curves to 1.0 times the pickup setting and
how relay curves are looked up in relay libraries. For distance relays you may specify four separate percentages,
which will be used when displaying the positive-sequence impedance of the line. You can also specify program
relay operating time report option.
TO SPECIFY RELAY OPTIONS:
1.
Select the Relay | Options command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the relay options.
2.
Click on "Ignore Instantaneous units" to ignore the instantaneous unit on all

overcurrent relays when (1) plotting the time-current points on the relay curves
and (2) calculating the relay operating times.
The program will plot a vertical line for the instantaneous unit in the Curves
Window, even though it is not used for time-delay calculations.
3.
Click on "Extrapolate curves to 1.0 times pickup" to use the value of the pickup
setting as the starting point of the relay curve.
Most relay manufacturers draw their relay curves with the minimum current at 1.25
or 1.50 times the pickup setting, even though the relays may operate with current
smaller than this value. When this Extrapolate curves option is selected, the
program will extrapolate all relay curves to 1.0 times pickup and will show a finite
operating time for relay currents larger than the pickup.
4.
Click on "Ignore file name when looking up curves in relay libraries" if you
want the program to use only relay curve name in library searches.
When the "Ignore file name when looking up curves in relay libraries" option is
selected the program will use first curve with matching name it finds in any of the
overcurrent relay library files in the program overcurrent library directory.
5.
Enter the percentage of the positive -sequence line impedance you would like to
display from within the distance relay dialog box.
You can specify up to four separate values. The default percentages are
80%, 85%, 150% and 200%. The line impedances are displayed when you
click on the "Line Impedances" button on the distance relay dialog box.
See Section 6.6, 'Distance Phase Relays' for more information.
SECTION 3
6.
Click on "Output text report to TTY window when showing relay operating time
on 1-line" if you want the program to produce a table with relay operating time
every time relay operating time is displayed on the 1-line.
7.

The options you specify in this command are saved to the binary file when you
exit.
224 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW RELAY GROUP COMMAND
The New Relay Group command in the Main Window lets you create a new relay group for a line, phase shifter or
transformer (2- or 3-winding). Initially the relay group contains no relays or coordinating pairs. To execute this
command you must first select a branch.
TO ADD A NEW RELAY GROUP ON A BRANCH:
1.
Select a branch.
Click the left mouse button once on the branch to which you want to add a
new relay group.
The branch symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Relay | New Relay Group command.

Note: The Relay group menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if
the selected branch already has relay groups at all its terminal buses.
The program will insert a relay group at a terminal bus of the selected
branch that is closest to the last mouse click. A dialog box will appear.
Click on Done if you do not wish to add any relays to the group at this
time.
Otherwise, please refer to the Relay | Properties command for more
information.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
DELETE RELAY GROUP COMMAND
The Delete Relay Group command in the Main Window lets you delete a relay group and all of its relays, fuses
and reclosers from the network. When a relay group is deleted, the program will also remove all the coordinating
pairs and pilot schemes that involve the deleted relay group. To execute this command you must first select the
relay group.
TO DELETE A RELAY GROUP FROM THE NETWORK:
1.
Click the left mouse button once on a relay group.

2.
Select the Relay | Delete Relay Group command.

A dialog box will appear asking if you want to delete the relay group and
all of its relays and fuses.
3.
Click on "Yes" to delete the relay group.

The relay group symbol will disappear from the one-line diagram.
226 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND
The View Relay Curves command in the Main Window lets you view the time-versus-current characteristics of an
overcurrent relay or the impedance characteristics of a distance relay. To execute this command you must first
select a relay group.
TO VIEW A RELAY CURVE:
1.

Click the left mouse button once on the relay group that contains the
relay you want to display.
2.
Select the Relay | View Relay Curves command.

A dialog box will appear asking you which of the devices in the group you
want to display.
3.
Select a relay in the list box and click on the "OK" button.
If you select an overcurrent relay, fuse or recloser, the Curves Window
will appear showing the time-versus-current characteristics of the device
you selected. If the DS Relays Window is currently open the program will
closed it first. If a Curves Window is currently open, the program will
display a confirmation dialog box:
Click on Yes to add selected curve to the Curves Window. Click on No to

display selected curve in a fresh screen.
If you select a distance relay, the DS Relays Window will appear showing
the impedance characteristics of the relay you selected.
You can work on the Main Window and the Curves Window (or DS
Relays Window) at the same time. If you have a large monitor, you can
arrange the windows side by side and execute commands in both
windows. When you display a fault in one of the windows, the same fault
is displayed in the other window. If your monitor is not large enough to
see both windows at the same time, you can minimize the OC Curves
window (or DS Relays Window) while you view the one-line diagram.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
OPEN CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
A curve collection contains the time-versus-current characteristics of overcurrent relays, fuses, reclosers,
damage curves as well text and graphic annotation that were displayed on the Curves Window. The program lets
you store one or more curve collections in binary files called Previous Curves Collection (PCC) files. The Open
Curve Collection command in the Main Window lets you recall, view or edit a curve collection with a PCC file.
TO VIEW A CURVE COLLECTION:
1.
Select the Relay | Open Curve Collection command.

If a PCC file has not been opened, a dialog box will appear asking you the
name of the PCC file that you wish to open.
PCC file. Click on "OK".
The file dialog box will disappear, and the curve collection information
dialog box will appear.
This dialog box shows the name of the PCC file and lists all the curve
collections that it contains. Each entry in the list box shows the name of
the collection as well as the device names and the number of damage
curves that it contains.
2.
Select the curve collection you would like to display and click on "Show".
The Curve Window will appear showing all of the curves contained in the
collection. You can perform various operations on this window, such as
adding, removing and editing the curves. You can also display faults that
you simulated on the curves.
TO OPEN ANOTHER PCC FILE OR SAVE AN OPENED PCC FILES:

1.

The curve collection information dialog box will appear.
Click on:
"Open" and enter the appropriate information in the standard file dialog
box to open a new PCC file. If the present PCC file has been changed,
another dialog box will appear asking you whether the change should be
saved.
"Save" to save the curve collections to the PCC file you open previously.
"Save as" and enter the appropriate information in the standard file
dialog box to save the curve collections to a PCC file of a different name.
228 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE

TO RENAME OR REMOVE A CURVE COLLECTION:
1.

The curve collection information dialog box will appear.
Select a curve collection and click on:
"Remove" to remove the curve collection.
"Rename" and enter the appropriate information as prompted to rename
a curve collection.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
OVERCURRENT/DISTANCE RELAY WINDOW COMMAND
The Overcurrent Relay Window and Distance Relay Window command in the Main Window makes the curves
window or the distance relay window the active window and brings it to the top. These commands are most
useful for calling up the relay window when it is hidden behind other windows or has been minimized. Please use
the Relay | View Relay Curves command to open a relay window if it has not been opened.
TO OPEN RELAY WINDOW:
1.
Select the Relay | Open Overcurrent or Distance Relay Window command.

Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the Curves
Window or Distance Relay Window has not been opened.
The relay window screen will appear in the foreground.
230 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
PLACE IMPORTED RELAY COMMAND
This command lets you place an imported relay into a relay group. The imported relays come from the Relay |
Import Relay command in the Main Window. They have to be placed manually because the location information
was either missing or invalid. These relays are said to be in the holding tank.
TO PLACE AN IMPORTED RELAY WITH NO LOCATION INFORMATION:
1.

Click the left mouse button once on the relay group to which you want to
place the imported relay.
The selected relay group will turn dotted red.
2.
Select the Relay | Place Imported Relay command.

imported relay.
A dialog box will appear displaying a list of imported overcurrent and
distance relays that you can place into the selected relay group.
3.
Select a relay you want to place into a relay group.
4.
Click on "Place" to place the selected relay into the selected relay group.
5.
Click on "Remove" to remove the selected relay from the holding tank.
This command effectively deletes the selected relay.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all the relays that you want to (1) place into the
selected relay group and (2) remove from the list box.
7.

The relays you selected will be placed into the selected relay group.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
FORM COORDINATION PAIR COMMAND
A coordinating pair consists of two relay groups: a "Primary" group and a "Backup" group. The coordination
pair information is used by the coordination checking features within OneLiner. The Form Coordination Pair
command in the Main Window allows you to add coordinating pairs. Once you have added a coordinating pair,
the updated information is recorded in the binary data file.
There are two methods for forming relay coordination pairs. One of the methods described below also allows you
to remove coordinating pairs.
TO ADD A COORDINATION PAIR:
This is the first of two methods of forming a coordinating pair. This method requires you to select two relay
groups with the mouse prior to executing the command. An alternative method described below, under "To Add
or Remove Coordination Pairs", requires the selection of only one relay group.
1.
Select the primary relay group and the backup relay group.
Click the left mouse button once on the primary relay group. Then, with
the <Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button once on the backup
relay group.
The relay group symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the Relay | Form Coordination Pair command.

A dialog box will appear informing that the coordinating pair has been
form.
TO ADD OR REMOVE COORDINATION PAIRS:

This is the second of two methods of forming a coordinating pair. This method requires you to select only one
relay group prior to executing the command. You can also use this method to remove existing coordinating pairs.
1.

If you want to create a new coordinating pair, you can select either the primary
relay group or the backup relay group.
2.
Select the Relay | Form Coordination Pair command.

A dialog box will appear. There are two list boxes. The top list boxes
contain the backups of the selected relay group. The bottom list box
contains the relay groups for which the selected relay is a backup.
232 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.
Add coordination pairs for this relay group.

If you want a neighboring relay groups to backup the current relay
group, click on the + button to the right of the top list box.
A dialog with candidate relay groups will appear.
Select a relay group and click on OK. This Neighboring Relay Groups
dialog box will disappear. The relay group you selected will appear in the
top list box of the original dialog box.
If you want the current relay group to backup a neighboring relay group,
click on the + button to the right of the bottom list box. The method of
selecting a relay group is the same as above.
4.
Remove a coordination pair.

Select a relay group in one of the list boxes, and then click on the "-"
button on the right.
A message box will appear asking you to confirm the removal.
Click on the "OK" button to remove the coordination pair.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
CREATE RELAY TEST FILE COMMAND
The Create Relay Test File command in the Main Window creates one or more files for relay testing purposes.
The relay test file contains simulated voltage and current quantities for one or more short-circuit conditions that
you have simulated in OneLiner as well as prefault and post-fault states. The test files can be in one of the
following formats: COMTRADE files, Doble SS1 files, comma delimited files (CSV), and tab delimited text files.
This command can be used to create a test file for relays at a single location, or it can be used to create multiple
files for end-to-end testing.
Prior to executing this command, you must simulate the faults and select one of the test locations on the one-line
diagram.
TO CREATE RELAY TEST FILES:
1.
Simulate the faults that you want to be included in the test file.
You may want to test the relay with fault that should trip the relay as well
as faults that should not trip the relay. You may alternatively create a
sequence of faults that the relays may see, e.g., an intermediate fault
near the remote bus, followed by a line-end fault.
2.
Select the location where the test file will be used.

Click on either a relay group or on one end of a branch symbol.
3.
Select the Relay | Create Relay Test File command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the test data file format.
Select the output format by clicking on of the radio buttons:

COMTRADE and enter sampling rate in the edit box to create
COMTRADE file. Most current test equipment can read this file
format
Doble SS1 to create test file with Doble SSIMUL macro. This file format
can be read by Doble ProTest software.
Excel CSV to create test file in CSV format. You can open this file
format in Microsoft Excel and other spread sheet software.
Text -delimited text file to create test file in text.
Click on OK.
If you have highlighted a branch terminal, skip to step 2.
If you have highlighted a relay group, a dialog box will appear asking you
to specify the relay in the group you want to test.
234 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Mark the check box in front of the relay that you want tested. OR
Click on entry labeled RELAY to create a generic test file for any relay
at this location.
Click on OK to close the Select Test Relay dialog.
The Relay Test Quantities dialog will appear.
2.
Specify relay test quantities:
Enter a unique name to describe this set of test data. The name cannot be
longer than 44 characters.
Select CT location and connection from the CT at combo box CT at.
Enter CT ratio in the Ratio edit box to the right.
Specify PT location from the dropdown PT at combo box. Mark the
check box PT on line side for PTs that are on the line side of the
circuit breaker. These PTs will have a zero voltage signal in when the
circuit breaker is opened. Enter PT ratio in the edit box.
SECTION 3
Note: Select N/A in one of the above dropdown combo box if

corresponding signal is not wanted in the output file.
Specify prefault state by entering load current and power factor in the
edit boxes. Prefault voltage is assumed to be 1.0 per unit.
Select analog channels to be included in the test file. Available channels
are phase and sequence quantities. Transformer neutral current and
tertiary winding circulating current can also be selected if the relay CT is
on a transformer.
Skip to the Click on OK paragraph at the end of this step if you are not
exporting to a COMTRADE file
Specify COMTRADE digital recording channels: you can create
COMTRADE digital channel for binary signals along side with analog
voltages and currents to control the relay test-equipment function during
the relay test. Click on Add to insert a new digital channel. The digital
channel dialog will appear.
Enter channel ID
Enter channel initial channel state.
To insert a new state transition click on Add. A dialog will appear.
Enter duration of interval since last state transition in the edit box and
click OK.
To remove a state transition: highlight it in the list and click Delete
button.
To move a state transition up or down the list: highlight it in the list and
click Up or Down button.
To change duration of interval between state transitions highlight it in
the list and click Edit button.
Click OK when all state transitions are entered for the digital channel.
You will be back in the Relay Test Quantities screen.
236 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
To edit setting of a digital channel: highlight it in the channel list and

click on Edit button.
To remove a digital channel: Highlight it in the channel list and click on
Delete button.
Enter comment in the edit box. Information you type in this box will
appear in COMTRADE header file.
Click on OK .
Create Relay Test file screen will appear with summary of relay test
quantities you have just specified.
3.
Specify additional set of test quantities or edit existing set.
To edit setting of an existing test quantities set in the list, highlight it in

the list and click on Edit
Skip the rest of this step if you are not planning to do end-to-end testing
To do End-to-end test on transmission line voltage and current test
quantities at both ends of the line are required.
Click on Add button in the Relay Quantities to Record list. The Relay
selection dialog box will appear.
Repeat step 1 and 2 to specify additional set of test quantities to record.
4.
Specify the relay test plan.

A relay test plan consists of a number of steps with different network states that
you wish to store in the relay test file. The program automatically creates an initial
two-step test plan with a NO FAULT and an OPEN BREAKER state of 5 cycles
duration.
SECTION 3
To add new step click on Add button. To edit an existing step highlight
it in the list and click on Edit. A dialog box will appear for you to specify
setting of the step.
Select the network state in this step from the dropdown combo list.
Available states are:
NO FAULT: 1 per-unit voltage and specified prefault current will be
reported.
FAULT: Fault voltage and current will be reported. All faults you
simulated prior to this command will be available in the list.
OPEN BREAKER: Zero current will be reported. If the PT is on the line
side, a zero voltage will be reported. Otherwise the open breaker voltage
will be 1 per-unit.
Enter the state duration in the edit box. All durations are in cycles.
Click OK to close this dialog box. You will be back at the Create Relay
Test file screen with updated test plan.
Click on Simulate breaker contact opening at zero crossing of current to
align signal transition from Fault state to Open Breaker state exactly at
a zero crossing of the current. Note: this option can be selected only
when creating COMTRADE files.
Click on Simulate single pole tripping to ask the program to record
transition from Fault to Open Breaker state only for the faulted phases.
238 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
4.
Write the test file.

Click on Write test file button when you finish entering all recorded
quantities setting and test plan.
A standard File Save dialog will appear. Use the controls in this dialog to
enter test file name and location.
For each set of test quantities you specified, the program will ask for one
file name. COMTRADE header file (.hdr) and configuration file (.cfg) will
have the same name that you assigned to the data file (.dat) in the File
Save dialog.
After all test files have been created, the program will display an
information message box.
Click OK to go back to the Create Test File screen.

5.
Specify another test plan or exit.

Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 to create anther set of test files.
Click on Done button to exit this command.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
IMPORT RELAY COMMAND
The Import Relay command in the Main Window is designed to facilitate the transfer of a large amount of relay
data, including coordination pairs and pilot protection schemes from a text file into an OneLiner binary data file.
The text file must be in the ASPEN relay data format described in Section 7.
TO IMPORT RELAY DATA FROM A TEXT FILE:
1.
Select the Relay | Import Relay command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the text file to import.
The default extension is .RAT.
2.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the relay data file that
you wish to import.
Once OneLiner accepts the file name the dialog box will disappear. If any
data errors are found when importing a relay, the program ignores only
that relay. Data errors and error messages, if any, will be displayed in the
TTY Window (use the View |TTY Window to open it) and written to a text
file "ASPEN.LOG" in the current directory.
Part of the data for each relay tells the program where it resides in the
network. Relays that have valid location data are place automatically by
the OneLiner. Those that have invalid or missing location information are
put into a "holding tank" in the binary data file. You can later place these
relays using the Relay | Place Imported Relay command.
Coordination pairs that have valid location data are formed automatically
by the OneLiner. Those that have invalid or missing location information
are ignored.
3.
240 SECTION 3
Optional: Use the Save command to save the new relay information to disk.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
EXPORT RELAY COMMAND
The Export Relay command in the Main Window lets you export the present relay settings for a selected set of
overcurrent and distance relays as well as their coordination pairs to a text file. This file will be in the ASPEN
Relay format. See Section 7 for more information. The data file generated by this command is formatted for
computer usage. Use the Relay | Relay Report command to generate English-like reports.
TO EXPORT RELAY DATA TO A TEXT FILE:
1.
Select the Relay | Export Relay command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify which relays and the type
of relays to be exported to the text data file.
2.
Select relays to be exported. Click on:

"All relays" radio button to export all the relays in the file.
"Relays in area" or "Relays in zone" radio button and select an entry
from the drop down list box to export just those relays in the selected area
or zone.
"Relays within" and enter a tier limit in the "tiers of selected bus" edit
box to export just those relays that are within a certain distance from a
selected bus. This option is dimmed and cannot be selected unless you
selected a bus with the left mouse button prior to Step 1.
3.
Select the types of relays to be exported.

Click on the "overcurrent and/or the "distance" radio button to export
data on overcurrent relays and distance relays.
4.
Enter a date in the "mm-dd-yyyy" edit box to export the relays that were created
or changed since that time.
5.

A dialog box will appear asking you to name the relay data file.
relay data file.
You should name all your text relay files with the .RAT extension.
6.
SECTION 3
Main Window
RELAY MENU
REPORT COMMAND
The Report command in the Main Window creates an English-like report on relay parameters and writes it to a text
file.
TO CREATE A RELAY DATA REPORT:
1.
Select the Relay | Relay Report command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if a binary data
file has not been opened.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the relays and relay types
that should be included in the relay report.
2.
Select relays to be included in the report. Click on:

"All relays" to include all the relays.
"Relays in area" and select an area from the drop down list box to include
just those relays in the selected area.
"Relays in zone" and select a zone from the drop down list box to include
just those relays in the selected zone.
"Relays within" and enter a tier limit in the "tiers of selected bus" edit
box to include just those relays that are within a certain distance from a
selected bus. This option is dimmed and cannot be selected unless you
selected a bus with the left mouse button prior to Step 1.
3.
Select the types of relays to be included in the report.

Click on the "overcurrent" radio button and/or the "distance" radio
button to include overcurrent relays and distance relays, respectively.
4.
Enter a date in the "mm-dd-yyyy" edit box to include the relays that were created
or changed since that time.
5.

A dialog box will appear asking you to name the report file.
report file. You should name all your report files with the .REP extension.
6.
242 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
RELAY MENU
DELETE ALL RELAYS COMMAND
The Delete All Relays command in the Main Window allows you to remove all of the relays and relay groups
within your binary data file. This command also removes all coordinating-pair and pilot-scheme information.
TO DELETE ALL RELAYS:
1.
Select the Relay | Delete All Relays command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are no
relays in your binary data file.
A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion of all relays.
2.
Enter Delete all (without the quotes) in the edit box.
3.
Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear and all relays will be deleted from your
binary data file.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
SPECIFY CLASSICAL FAULT COMMAND
The Specify Classical Fault command in the Main Window lets you specify and simulate one or more classical
faults. To activate this command you must first select either (1) a relay group if you wish to simulate a close-in
fault, an intermediate fault, or a line-end fault, or (2) a relay group or a branch if you wish to simulate an
intermediate or a line-end fault, or (3) a bus if you wish to simulate a bus fault. These three methods are explained
in turn.
TO SPECIFY CLOSE-IN, INTERMEDIATE OR LINE-END FAULTS BY SELECTING A RELAY GROUP:
1.

2.
Select the Faults | Specify Classical Fault command.

The initial selections are those of the last fault simulation.
3.
Clear fault options (optional)

Click on Clear Options to remove the check mark from all the fault
simulation options and to reset the fault impedance to zero.
4.
Select the fault types.

Click on check boxes labeled "No outage" and "With outage" to select
one or more of the following fault types. "No outage" means no branch
outage will accompany the fault. "With outage" means one or more
branch outages will be taken when the fault is applied. In the case of
"with outages" another dialog box will appear later to let you specify the
branch outages.
Close-in fault: A fault immediately in front of the selected relay group.
Close-in fault with end opened: A fault immediately in front of the
selected relay group with the far end of the branch disconnected. If the
branch is a transmission line with intermediate tap buses, the far end of
the first segment will be disconnected.
244 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Remote-bus fault: A bus fault at the far end of the branch. If the branch
is a transmission line with intermediate tap buses, the remote-bus fault will
be applied to the "real bus" at the opposite end.
Line-end fault: A fault at the far end of the branch with the far end of the
branch disconnected. If the branch is a transmission line with
intermediate tap buses, the line end fault will be applied to the last
segment of the line.
Intermediate fault (also called a sliding fault): A fault in the middle of a
transmission line. The location of the fault is specified in the next step.
This option is not available to relay groups on transformers or phase
shifters.
Intermediate fault with end opened: A fault in the middle of a
transmission line with the far end of the line disconnected. (On a line with
intermediate tap buses the "far end" refers to the end of the entire line.)
The location of the fault is specified in the next step. This option is not
available to relay groups on transformers or phase shifters.
5.
If you selected any of the intermediate faults, you must specify the location of the
faults.
To simulate an intermediate fault on a single position on the line, enter
the location of the fault as a percentage of the distance between the nearend and far-end of the line in '%'.
Intermediate faults must have a location percentage in the range 0.01 to
99.99. Zero percent is defined to be at the selected relay group, or at the
near-end bus of the line. One hundred percent is defined to be at the farend bus. If the line has intermediate tap buses, the percentage is for the
entire line.
To simulate multiple intermediate faults on the line, click on "Auto seq.". Two
additional edit boxes labeled "From" and "To" will appear. Enter the location
increment in the edit box labeled '%', and the percentage range in 'From' and
'To'.
The percentage you specify will be for the whole line. The first intermediate
fault will occur at the minimum allowed percentage of the range with
succeeding faults appearing at increments of the line length specified by the
percentage in the '%' edit box. For example, if you type in a percentage of 20
and leave the default range of 0.0 to 100.0 undisturbed, OneLiner will simulate
four intermediate faults at 20%, 40%, 60% and 80%. (The end points are
excluded because the allowed locations must lie between 0.01 and 99.99%.) As
another example, if you type in a percentage of 10 and specify a range from 4 to
40, OneLiner will automatically simulate four intermediate faults at 4%, 14%,
24% and 34%.
6.
Select one or more phase connections. Click on:

3LG:
2LG:
1LG:
L-L:
Three phase fault.

Two phase to ground fault.
Single phase to ground fault.
Line to line fault.
Click on radio button to select phase ID for each fault connection.

The connections you select will apply to all the fault options selected.
SECTION 3
Following figure illustrates the four different phase connections:
7.
Specify the fault impedance.

Enter the fault impedance in 'Fault Z (ohm)'. See figure in Step 6 for the
position of the fault impedance.
8.
Click on "Clear previous results" to discard all previous fault simulations.

Normally OneLiner appends new simulation result to previous results.
You can access any of these results by using the Faults | Show Solution
on 1-line, Relay | View Relay Curves, or Faults | Solution Report
commands. Over time, OneLiner may accumulate a stack of many
simulation results. This Clear previous results option allows you to clear
the stack and start afresh.
9.
Click on "Simulate".
If you checked any of the 'With outage' check boxes skip down to step 10.
The dialog box will disappear and OneLiner will begin the fault
calculations. A dialog box will appear to inform you of the program's
progress.
The Main Window will automatically display the one-line diagram with the
post-fault solution. If more than one fault is simulated, the last solution is
shown.
10. Specify the branch outage options.

If you marked one or more of the six check boxes labeled 'With outage', a
dialog box will appear asking you to specify branch outages.
The outages you specify in this step will apply to all the fault types that
have the "With outage" option selected. The list box contains all the
branches in the neighborhood of the fault point.
The following restrictions apply:
1) At most five branches can be taken out of service at once.
246 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
2) At most two bus terminals of a 3-winding transformer can be

disconnected at once. In the list box, each 3-winding transformer is listed
as two branches, primary-secondary and primary-tertiary. You may select
one of the two branches to be taken out of service, but not both.
Note: You can alternatively take the branches out of service with the
Network | Take Out of Service command prior to fault simulation.
However, this method will cause all previous fault solutions to be
cleared from the result stack.
Select the branch outage options. Click on one or more of the following:
1 at a time:
2 at a time:
To take one branch out of service at a time.

To take two branches out of service at a time. OneLiner will
automatically select all possible pairs of branches among
those that you selected.
All at once: To take all the selected branches out of service
simultaneously.
Ground outaged lines at both ends and enter grounding resistance in
ohm: To take a line out of service and ground both ends
with the grounding resistance.
11. Select branches out of service.
Mark the check box in front of line name.
12. Click on "OK" to begin fault simulation.
The dialog box will disappear and OneLiner will begin the fault
calculations. A dialog box will appear to inform you of the program's
progress. At the end of the simulation, you will see a line that reads: "xxx
faults successfully simulated" in the status bar at the bottom of the Main
Window.
To see the post-fault solutions, you must select either the Faults | Show
Solution on 1-line or the Relay | View Relay Curves command.
TO SPECIFY INTERMEDIATE OR LINE-END FAULTS BY SELECTING A BRANCH:
1.
Select a branch.
Click the left mouse button once on a branch symbol.
The relay group symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The position
you clicked on is important: For an intermediate fault, the nearest branch
terminal will be defined as 0%. For a line-end fault, the fault will be applied
to the opposite end of the branch.
2.
Select the Faults | Specify Classical Fault command.

The same fault-specification dialog box will appear. The only difference is
that the first four check boxes involving close-in faults will be grayed and
disabled.
TO SPECIFY BUS FAULTS:

1.
Select a bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus symbol.
SECTION 3
2.
Select the Faults | Specify command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the phase connection, fault
impedance and outages.
The options in this dialog box are similar to those for the relay-group
based method of fault selection and will not be repeated here.
248 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
SPECIFY SIMULTANEOUS FAULT COMMAND
The Specify Simultaneous Fault Command in the Main Window lets you specify and simulate a fault with up to
ten simultaneous unbalanced network modifications and short circuits. The program logic for this command is
based on an algorithm developed by V. Brandwajn and W.F. Tinney in the early 1980s. With this method, any
combination of simultaneous network modifications and short circuits can be solved with the same generality.
After the simulation of a simultaneous fault, OneLiner will automatically display the solution on the one-line
diagram.
TO SPECIFY A SIMULTANEOUS FAULT:
1.
Select the Faults | Specify Simultaneous Fault command.

A dialog box with a large list box will appear. If you have simulated a
simultaneous fault earlier in the session, the list box will contain your last
simultaneous fault specifications. Otherwise, the list box is blank.
2.
Load fault specifications from file

If you have not saved any fault specification to file, or if you wish to start
from scratch, skip to step 3.
Press the Load button. A file open dialog box will appear.
Use the standard controls in the file open dialog box to select the file you
would like to load and click Open. The fault specification files have
extension of .FLT. The saved fault specification will be displayed in the
list box.
3.
If needed, press the Clear All button to remove all the network modifications and
short circuits from the list box, so that you can start over from the beginning.
4.
Press the Add button to add a network modification or a short circuit.

A Simultaneous Fault dialog box will appear.
SECTION 3
Click on one of the radio buttons in the Fault Application group box to
select a fault type: Bus fault, bus-to-bus fault, line-end fault, branch
outage, intermediate fault, one-phase-open fault, two-phase-open fault,
and 3-phase-open fault.
The appearance of the dialog box changes depending on the fault type.
The picture shown above is for the bus fault. A second dialog box will
appear for bus-to-bus fault and for other fault types involving branches.
Bus Fault: Select the bus to be faulted by clicking on its name in the list
box. Then select the fault connection and phase type, and enter the fault
impedances, if any.
Bus-to-Bus Fault (also called a crosscountry fault): Select the two buses
to be shorted by clicking on their names in the two list boxes. Then select
one of the entries under Phase Type to specify which phase of Bus1 is
shorted to which phase of Bus2. Enter a fault impedance if there is a
finite impedance between the two shorted phases.
Line-End Fault: Select the affected branch by highlighting the two bus
terminals. The short circuit will be applied to the Bus2 side of the branch
after the Bus2 end has been disconnected. Then select the fault
connection and phase type, and enter the fault impedances, if any.
Branch Outage: Select the branch to be outaged by selecting the bus
terminals in the two list boxes.
Intermediate Fault: Select the affected line by highlighting the two bus
terminals. Enter the location of the fault by entering a percentage in the
edit box labeled %=. The end of the branch you highlighted in the left
list box (BUS1) is assumed to be 0%, and the other end 100%. Then
select the fault connection and phase type, and enter the fault
impedances, if any.
250 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Phase-Open Faults: Select the affected branch by highlighting the two

bus terminals. The phase-open fault will be on the side of the bus you
highlighted in the left listbox (Bus1). Then, for 1-phase-open and 2phase-open faults, select one of the entries under Phase Type to
indicate which phase or phases are opened.
The fault impedances are based on the following diagram. For a 3-phase
fault, all four impedances can be specified separately. For a 2-phase fault,
only Zg and two of the other impedances can be specified. For a singleline to ground fault, only Zg and one of the other impedances can be
specified. For a phase-to-phase fault, the impedance Zg is infinite, and
only two of the impedances on the affected phases can be specified.
5.
Repeat step 2 for all the network modifications and short circuits that you wish
to simulate simultaneously.
There is a maximum of 10 network modifications and short circuits.
6.
To review a network modification or short circuit you specified, click on an

entry in the list box and press Edit.
To delete a network modification or short circuit you specified, click on
an entry in the list box and press Delete.
Press the Save button to store fault specification list to a file. A file
dialog will appear asking you to specify the file name.
When done, press Simulate to begin simulation.
OneLiner will present the fault solution in a graphical form on the one-line
diagram, and in a text form in the TTY window.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULT MENU
SHOW SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Show Solution On 1-Line command in the Main Window lets you display a post-fault solution and location
directly on the one-line diagram. The quantities that can be displayed under this command include currents,
voltages and relay operating times. The faults to be displayed must have been simulated previously using the
Fault | Specify command. You can use the probe function to show the voltage and current phasor of network
elements once a post-fault solution is displayed on the one-line diagram.
TO DISPLAY SOLUTION ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1.
Select the Faults | Show Solution on 1-line command.

Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have
been simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault
simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the fault and the display
options.
2.
Select a fault.
Select the fault to be displayed by clicking once on the fault description.
You can select a fault by clicking on any line in its description.
3.
Input the number of tiers in the 'no. of tiers' edit box.

The tier parameter determines the extent over which the network solution
will be displayed. If you specify a tier limit of n (where n is a non-negative
integer), OneLiner will display the solution for buses and branches within
n tiers of the fault. There is no built-in upper limit on the tier parameter
although a large value may increase computational time.
4.
Click the 'Show current arrows' check box to display the current arrow with the
branch current.
The direction of the current arrow is based on the phase angle of the
current (rounded to the nearest 45-degree increment). The arrow is a
useful visual aid in most cases. It may not be meaningful for line-to-line
and certain other type faults.
252 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
5.
Select quantities to be displayed.

Click on one of the following six radio buttons to display the sequence or
phase voltages and currents.
0 seq:
+ seq:
- seq:
Pha a:
Pha b:
Pha c:
Zero-sequence voltages and 3 times the zero-sequence

currents.
Positive-sequence voltages and currents.
Negative-sequence voltages and currents.
Phase-'a' voltages and currents.
Phase-'b' voltages and currents.
Phase-'c' voltages and currents.
Click on the "Relay Operating Time" radio button to display the relay
operating times. Select the relay groups to be displayed by clicking on
one or more of the following check boxes.
OC Ground:
OC Phase:
DS Ground:
DS Phase:
Overcurrent ground relays and reclosers.

Overcurrent phase relays, fuses and reclosers.
Distance ground relays.
Distance phase relays.
The program will display the fastest operating time in each relay group.
6.
Select the output display units.

You can skip this section if you are displaying relay operating times.
Click on the "p.u." radio button to display the voltages and currents in
per unit.
Click on the 'physical' radio button to display the voltages in kilovolts
(line-to-ground) and the current in amperes.
7.
Click on the "Display" button.

The dialog box will disappear and the one-line diagram will be redrawn to
show the output of the quantities requested. If you are using the splitwindow feature, the solution will be displayed on both panes. A red X
will appear at the location of the fault. The fault current being displayed
will change depending on the quantity being shown. For example, the
phase 'a' current is shown next to the fault location when phase 'a'
quantities are being shown, regardless of the fault type. In addition, a
summary of the fault is written to the TTY Window.
If voltages and currents are being displayed:
1. Voltages and currents are shown as complex numbers in polar form.
The symbol that separates the magnitude and angle of the complex
number denotes the quantity that is being displayed: 'A', 'B' and 'C' for a-,
b-, and c-phase quantities and '@', 'P' and 'N' for zero-, positive- and
negative-sequence quantities.
2. Bus voltages are shown immediately beneath the bus names and
nominal kVs. The magnitudes are in either per-unit or kV (line-to-ground)
and the angles are in degrees.
3. The generator currents are shown immediately above the generator
symbols. The magnitudes are in either per-unit or amperes and the angles
are in degrees. The angle of a generator current is between -90 and 90
degrees if it flows out of the generator and into the bus.
SECTION 3
4. The branch currents are shown next to where the branch connects to
the bus. The magnitudes are in either per-unit or amperes and the angles
are in degrees. For branches near the fault, the current angle will be about
-90 degrees if it is flowing out of the bus into the branch and about +90
degrees if it is flowing out of the branch into the bus. The branch arrows
are shown after the branch currents to indicate the direction of current
flow.
If relay operating times are being displayed:

1. The relay operating time in seconds is shown above each relay group.
The operating time is preceded by:
FU:
if it is from a fuse.
OG:
if it is from an overcurrent ground relay.
OP:
if it is from an overcurrent phase relay.
RG:
if it is from a ground recloser.
RP:
if it is from a phase recloser.
ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 or ZG4: if it is from a ground distance relay. The numbers
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the zone numbers.
ZP1, ZP2, ZP3 or ZP4: if it is from a phase distance relay. The numbers 1,
2, 3 and 4 are the zone numbers.
2. The words 'No relay' are shown if the relay group has no relays of the
type being displayed.
3. The quantity '9999s' is shown if none of the relays of the type being
displayed has operated.
254 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
For a detailed look at the voltage and current phasors for the network
elements please refer to the View | Phasor command located on the next
page.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULT MENU
SHOW PHASORS COMMAND
The Show Phasor command in the Main Window allows you to display and print the voltage and current phasors
of any generator, load, shunt, line, and transformer or phase shifter. Before using this function, you must
simulate the fault and display the voltage and currents on the one-line diagram. In addition, you must make sure
that tier limit is sufficiently high to show the voltage and currents on the network element of interest.
TO DISPLAY VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PHASORS:
1.
Select the network element.

Click the left mouse button once on the element of interest. It will turn
dotted red when selected.
2.
Select the View | Phasors command.

A dialog box will appear displaying the voltage and current phasors.
Note: This command is dimmed if a fault is not presently being shown
on the one-line diagram. See the Faults | Show Solution on 1 -line
command.
3.
Select the voltage to be displayed.

Click on one of the following radio buttons.
L-G:
L-L:
Sequence:
Line-to-ground voltages, Va, Vb, Vc.

Line-to-line voltages, Vab (Va -Vb), Vbc (Vb -Vc), Vca (Vc -Va).
Sequence voltages, V+, V-, Vo.
The voltage phasor will be redrawn and voltage values will be updated
reflecting the voltage selected.
256 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
4.
Select the current to be displayed.

Note: This command will be disabled if the element selected is a bus.
Click on one of the following radio buttons.
Phase:
Sequence:
Phase currents, Ia, Ib, Ic.

Sequence currents, I+, I-, 3Io.
The current phasor will be redrawn and current values updated reflecting
the current selected.
Click on the "Neutral" radio button if you want to see the neutral
current of an autotransformer.
Note: This radio button is available only if the selected network element
is an autotransformer.
Click on the "Tertiary" radio button if you want to see circulating
current in the delta winding of a 3-winding transformer.
Note: This radio button is available only if (1) the selected network
element is a 3-winding transformer, and (2) you are viewing the phasors
on the tertiary terminal (press the "Show Opposite Bus" button to
change terminal).
5.
Select the apparent impedance to fault to be displayed.

Click on one of the following radio buttons:
Phase to phase: The program automatically select this button when
showing 3LG and LL fault result.
Phase to ground: The program automatically select this button when
showing 1LG and 2LG fault result.
Enter the zero sequence impedance compensation factor K in the edit box
and click on Refresh to display phase to ground apparent impedance
calculated using this new value.
6.
Select the voltage and current scaling.

Click on the "Change" button.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the method by which the
voltage and current phasors are scaled. By default, the program scales
the voltage phasors using the nominal kV of the network element. The
current phasors are scaled automatically such that the longest current
phasor takes up the full width of the plot.
SECTION 3
Click on the "Auto" radio button in the Voltage Scaling group box if you want
the program to select a scaling factor based on the length of the longest
voltage phasor. Otherwise, click on the "Scaled by" radio button in the
Voltage Scaling group box and enter a scaling factor in kV.
Change the Current Scaling similarly.
The dialog box will disappear and the voltage and current phasors will be
redrawn reflecting the scaling factors you selected.
7.
Select the phasor reference.

Click on the 'Reference' drop down list box and select a voltage or
current phasor, which will be drawn at zero degree.
The rest of the voltage and current phasors will be redrawn with the same
relative position with respect to the reference phasor you selected.
8.
Click on the "Show Opposite Bus" button to display voltage and current phasors
on another terminal of a branch.
Note: This button is visible only if the network element is a line,
transformer or phase shifter.
For a branch, the phasor probe shows you the voltages and currents at
one terminal at a time. The name of the terminal bus being display is
shown at the top of the dialog box, after the words "Solution at".
9.
Click on the "Send to TTY" button to print the fault solution and description to
TTY window.
10. Click on the "Send to printer" button to print the phasor diagram, the fault
solution and description.
11. Click on the "Done" button to close the dialog box.
258 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
SOLUTION REPORT COMMAND
The Solution Report command in the Main Window writes all of the cases or just the case being displayed to (1) a
text file, (2) the TTY Window, or (3) a printer. The output format is identical to that of the ASPEN Batch Short
Circuit Module.
TO WRITE THE FAULT SOLUTION(S) TO AN OUTPUT FILE, THE TTY WINDOW, OR A PRINTER:
1.
Select the Faults | Solution Report command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed if you have modified the network since
the last fault simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the coverage and output
source of the fault solution(s).
2.
Select the number of cases to be wr itten out. Click on:

All XX Case(s): To output all of the cases. The total number of available
cases is listed here.
Current Case: To output only the current case being displayed on the
one-line diagram. This option is disabled if a fault solution
is not being displayed.
3.
Select the output units. Click on:

Per Unit:
To have the currents and voltages shown in per unit.
Physical units: To have the voltages shown in kV (line-to-ground) and

the current in amperes.
4.
Enter the number of lines per page in 'Lines per page'.

Printers vary in the number of lines of text they can conveniently fit on a
page. This value is set initially to 60. This value is ignored when the
output is written to the TTY Window.
5.
Specify buses to include in report

Enter number of tiers from fault.
Specify additional buses. Click on the Bus Selector button to select
additional buses. A bus selector dialog will appear.
SECTION 3
The list box on the left of this dialog shows list of buses in the network.
The list box on the right shows list of buses selected for output
Click on Sort by Name or Sort by Number to arrange bus names in
the lists accordingly.
Enter bus name or number in the Search for edit box to lookup bus in
the lists.
Highlight one or more buses in one list and click on > or < button to
move them to the other list.
To move buses between lists using certain criteria, click on >> or
<< to. Add To List dialog will appear.
Click on:
Per Unit:
To copy all buses from one list to the other.
Buses in area(s):
To copy only buses in specified area(s).
Buses in zone(s):
To copy only buses in specified zone(s).
Buses from file:
To copy only buses in bus list file.
Buses in vicinity of the selected bus on the 1-line. Enter number of tiers
to define the scope of selection.
260 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Enter additional selection criteria: number of neighbor tiers, bus number

range, nominal kV range.
6.
Edit the first page heading.

This text will appear on the top of the first page.
7.
Click on "To File" to write the fault solution(s) to a text file.

A dialog box will appear asking you to name the output file. You should
name all your output files with the .OUT extension.
output file.
Once OneLiner accepts the file name, the dialog box will disappear.
8.
Click on "To TTY" to write the fault solution(s) to the TTY Window.
The 'Solution Report' dialog box will disappear. The TTY Window will
appear with the fault solution(s) on it.
9.
Click on "To Printer" to send the fault solution(s) to the printer.

Use the controls in the standard font dialog box to specify the font size
used for the printed text.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN COMMAND
The Voltage-Sag Analysis | Run command can help you study the voltage variations at a voltage-sensitive
customer's bus caused by short circuits in the vicinity. The program automatically simulates bus faults and
intermediate faults in the vicinity of the monitored bus and tabulates the voltage at the monitored bus. Buses
where faults caused the monitored voltage to drop below the threshold are flagged on the 1-line. This feature has
an automatic stopping criterion that ends the simulations when the monitored voltage is above the threshold for
all the faults at a certain distance away. You must select the monitored bus before running this command.
TO RUN VOLTAGE SAG ANALISYS:
1.
Select the Voltage Sag Analysis | Run command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for voltage sag analysis parameters.
NOTE: This command will be dimmed and cannot be selected if no

monitored bus is selected on the 1-line.
2.
Enter voltage sag analysis parameters.

Click on phase connection in fault: 3LG, 2LG, 1LG or L-L. Definition of
these fault specifications is given in help section of the Specify Classical
Fault command.
Enter fault impedance in ohm.
Enter number of intermediate fault to be simulated on each transmission
line beside bus faults. 1 means a single intermediate fault at 50% will be
simulated for each line. 2 means two intermediate faults at 33.3% and
66.7%, and so on.
Enter stopping voltage threshold in per unit. The program begins by
faulting the monitored bus, and then it will fault all the buses and lines
that are one bus away from the mo nitored bus, and then two buses away,
and so on. We refer to these fault buses as tier-1 buses, tier-2 buses, etc.
The program will continue simulating faults until the voltage magnitude at
the monitor bus stays above the voltage threshold when faults are applied
to all the buses in tier-n.
Select the output option: CSV file, Report file, TTY Window, or Printer.
262 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Click on check box Output only cases with voltage below threshold to
include in the output only cases in which the voltage magnitude at the
monitored bus is below the voltage threshold.
3.
Click on OK to start the analysis.

If you selected file output option, a Save File dialog box will appear asking
you for file name.
output file.
Once OneLiner accepts the file name, the dialog box will disappear.
When the analysis is complete, OneLiner will display the voltage-sag
results on the one-line diagram. Specifically, the monitored-bus voltage in
per unit will be shown below each faulted bus name. The program will also
paint a colored halo around each faulted bus to help you visualize its
effect on the monitored bus. The more severe the voltage sag at the
monitored bus caused by a fault, the darker halo will be painted around
the faulted bus.
In the sample one-line display below, the bus Oregon 33kV is the
monitored bus.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | SHOW 3LG/2LG/1LG/LL FAULTS SOLUTION ON 1-LINE
COMMAND
The Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 3LG/2LG/1LG/LL Faults Solution On 1-Line Command in the Main Window lets
you display voltage sag at a monitored bus that is caused by fault at other buses in the system. You must
complete the Voltage Sag Analysis command before running this command.
TO DISPLAY 3LG FAULT VOLTAGE SAG RESULT:
1.
Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 3LG Faults Solution On 1-Line
Command.

1.
Command.

1.
Command.
TO DISPLAY LL FAULT VOLTAGE SAG RESULT:

1.
Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show LL Faults Solution On 1-Line

Command.
OneLiner will display the voltage-sag results on the one-line diagram.
Specifically, the monitored-bus voltage in per unit will be shown below
each faulted bus name. The program will also paint a colored halo around
each faulted bus to help you visualize its effect on the monitored bus. The
more severe the voltage sag at the monitored bus caused by a fault, the
darker halo will be painted around the faulted bus.
264 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
BUS FAULT SUMMARY COMMAND
The Bus Fault Command in the Main Window lets you quickly create a table with fault current and X/R ratio at
every bus in the system. The result is written to file in CSV format that can be opened by most spreadsheet
programs.
TO CREATE BUS FAULT SUMMARY:
1.
Select the Faults | Bus Fault Summary command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for bus fault summary parameters.
2.
Enter Bus Fault Summary parameters.

Click on:
Entire network: To simulate fault at every bus in the network.
Selected bus: To simulate fault at the selected buses only.
Select check box Exclude tap buses if you do not want to include tap
buses in the result.
Enter fault impedance R and X in the edit boxes. This impedance will be
applied to all the faults.
Enter header text for fault summary report. This text will be shown at the
beginning of the report file.
3.
Click on OK to create bus fault summary.

If you selected Apply bus fault to selected bus, a Bus selector dialog will
appear.
SECTION 3
Use the bus selector controls to build list of buses where you want to get
fault current and X/R ratio summary. Click OK when done.
A File Save dialog will appear. Use the standard controls in the dialog to
specify name and location of the comma delimited (CSV) output file.
Click on Save when done. The program will create the output file at the
location specified. As information dialog box will appear when the output
file is complete.
Click on Yes to open bus fault summary file in spreadsheet program.
Bus fault summary file data fields are:

NO:
Bus number
BUS:
Bus name
KV:
Bus nominal kV
LOCATION: Bus location field.
266 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3LG(A), X/R: 3LG fault current in amps and X/R ratio.

LL(A), X/R:
Z+, Z-, Z0:
LL fault current in amps and X/R ratio.

Positive-, negative- and zero-sequence Thevenin equivalent
in ohms.
SCFLAG_3LG, SCFLAG_2LG, SCFLAG_1LG, SCFLAG_LL: List of

MOV-protection of series capacitors that operated in fault.
Note: The X/R ratios are not ANSI/IEEE X/R ratios. If you need
ANSI/IEEE X/R ratios, we suggest that you run the Bus Fault Summary
command in the Batch Short Circuit Program.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
GROUND CURRENT CALCULATOR COMMAND
The Ground Current Calculator Command in the Main Window lets you tabulate and total all ground currents at a
number of buses you specify. This information is useful in many studies, such as step and touch potential
calculation or substation grounding mat design.
TO CALCULATE THE TOTAL GROUND CURRENT:
1.
Select the Faults | Ground Current Calculator.

The Bus selector dialog box will appear.
2.
Specify buses.
Use the bus selector dialog box to select a number of buses. Click OK
when done.
The neutral currents of a transformer will be included if one or both
terminal buses are in the list.
The neutral current of shunts, grounding banks, loads and generators will
be included if these devices are attached to any of the buses in the list.
The zero-sequence fault current is included if the fault was applied to one
of the buses in the list.
The ground currents are always saved in the CSV format. A File Save
dialog will appear.
3.
Specify output file name

Use standard controls in the dialog to specify name and location of output
file.
Click on Save to create the ground-current report file.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
268 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Click on Yes to open ground current report file in spreadsheet program.
SECTION 3
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
FAULT LOCATOR COMMAND
The Fault Locator Command in the Main Window finds the most probable location of a fault on a transmission
line given the voltages and/or currents recorded near the fault. This command works by simulating a large number
of intermediate faults on the line and comparing the recorded fault quantities to simulation results. It reports the
best-matched cases in the fault location report. Before running this command you must first click on branch
terminal or relay group where the recorded fault quantities were obtained.
TO LOCATE A FULAT ON A TRANSMISSION LINE:
1.
Select the location of the fault recorder.

Click the mouse once on one end of a line, transformer, phase shifter or
switch at which the faulted voltages and/or currents were recorded.
The branch symbol will become highlighted.
2.
Select the Faults | Fault Locator command

If the fault recorder location you selected in step 1 is on a transmission
line, the Fault Locator dialog will appear. Go to step 3.
If the fault recorder location you selected is not on a transmission line, a
dialog will appear asking you to select the faulted line.
Mark the check box in front of the faulted line to select it.
Click on OK. The Fault Locator dialog box will appear.
3.
270 SECTION 3
Check the fault-recorder location in the Fault Locator dialog box to make sure it
is correct. If not, you must start over from the beginning.
COMMAND REFERENCE
4.
Enter recorded fault current and voltages

Phase and sequence voltages and currents must be entered as primary
quantities, RMS values. Currents are entered in amperes and voltage in
kV, line-to-neutral. Leave edit boxes blank or enter N/A if you do not have
recorded value for the corresponding quantity.
5.
Specify the faulted line.

The line to be faulted is showed within the Check for fault on line group
box.
Click on the browse button to specify a different faulted line.
Click on check box Also check on neighboring lines to expand scope of
the search to transmission lines that are connected to end buses of the
selected line.
6.
Specify search and reporting parameters.

Click on check boxes 3LG , 2LG, 1LG, LL to select fault
connection to be simulated.
Enter fault resistance range to be applied in simulation.
Enter number of best-matched cases to be included in the report.
7.
Click on Locate to start the fault location.

The program will start simulating fault on every 1% of selected line(s) to
find the ones that best match the recorded fault quantities.
When the simulation is competed, the fault location report will be shown
on the TTY window.
SECTION 3
272 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
FAULTS MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options Command in the Main Window lets you change several parameters that will affect how the short
circuits are simulated.
TO CHANGE FAULT SIMULATION PARAMETERS:
1.
Select the Faults | Options command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the short-circuit solution
parameters.
2.
Select the prefault voltage profile. Click on:

Assumed Flat:To set all prefault bus voltages to a fixed voltage
magnitude and angle of zero degrees. Enter the desired
prefault voltage magnitude in the edit box below. The
default is 1.0 per-unit.
From a linear network solution: To compute the positive-sequence
prefault voltages with a dc load flow in which each
generator is modeled by a voltage source in series with the
generator impedance. You can specify the generators
open-circuit voltage (magnitude and angle) in the generator
info dialog box.
From a Power Flow solution: To use a true power flow solution as the
prefault voltage profile. To use this option with a
standalone Power Flow Program, you must first solve the
power flow within the Power Flow Program and save the
case in the OLR file. To use this option with a combined
OneLiner/Power Flow executable, the program will
automatically prompt you to solve the power flow when
you simulate a short circuit.
See section 4.9 for more detailed discussion on Prefault Voltage Profile
selection.
SECTION 3
3.
Specify the Ignore in Short Circuit options:

Click on "Loads" to ignore all the loads. This option will be ignored for a powerflow-solution start.
Click on "Transmission line G+jB" to ignore all the shunt admittances of
transmission lines. This option will be ignored for a power-flow-solution start.
Click on "Shunts with + seq values" to ignore all switched shunts, as well as all
the shunt (i.e., reactors and capacitors that are attached to buses) that have a
positive -sequence component. This option will be ignored for a power-flowsolution start.
4.
Select which generator impedance to use for the positive -sequence model for
short circuit studies.
5.
Select method for simulating MOV protected series capacitors.

Select check box Iterate Solution to enable iterative solution of MOV
protected capacitor devices.
Enter Acceleration factor to be used in MOV iterative solution.
The program applies this factor to update equivalent impedance of MOVseries capacitors between iteration. The factor must be between 0.1 and
1.0.
6.
Select definition of fault MVA.

Click on either Current times prefault voltage or Current times nominal
voltage as definition of fault MVA. OneLiner computes MVA using
prefault voltage by default.
7.
Specify whether you want the program to change the display quantities when you
browse the results from multiple faults.
Mark the check box if you want the display quantity (a phase or sequence
quantity or relay operating time) to remain the same when you browse a
series of fault of different types (3LG, 1LG, L-L, etc.).
8.
Specify whether you want the program to include outaged branches in solution
report.
Select this check box if you want the to see the voltage and current
results of outaged branches to appear in the TTY window and fault
solution report.
The fault currents and voltages on an outaged line can be different from
zero if the line is (1) mutually coupled to in-service lines in the same rightof-way and (2) the outaged line is grounded on both ends through
grounding chains.
9.
Click on OK.
The new options will take effect next time you simulate a fault.
274 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
CHECK MENU
PRIMARY/BACUP RELAY COORDINATION COMMAND
The Primary/Backup Relay Coordination command in the Main Window helps you check the coordination
between coordinating pairs. The results are shown in a tabular form. The program flags any case in which the
coordinating time interval is outside the range of acceptable values. ,
This command works with primary and backup relays of virtually any combination of types (phase, ground,
overcurrent and distance). This command can also be used to check the coordination between a relay and a
recloser, taking into account the reset time of the relay.
There are six different Extents options available. The user can check all the coordinating pairs in the system, or
just those pairs that are within certain areas and zones, etc.
TO CHECK PRIMARY/BACK RELAY COORDINATION:
1.
Optional: Select a relay group before issuing this command if you wish to
check coordinating pairs involving a single relay group or if you wish to
check coordinating pairs in the vicinity of a specific relay group.
2.
Select the Check | Primary/Backup Relay Coordination command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the checking criteria.
3.
Specify the checking extent.

There are six options available. The first three options are grayed and
cannot be selected if you did not select a relay group prior to issuing the
command.
Selected relay group against its backups: Click on this option to check
the relays within the selected relay group against relays in backup relay
groups.
Selected relay group against relays that it backs up: Click on this option
to check the relays within the selected relay group against relays in relay
groups that are backed up by the selected group.
SECTION 3
Vicinity of selected relay group: Click on this option and enter a tier limit
to check relay groups that are in the vicinity of the selected relay group.
Set tier to 1 to check coordinating pairs whose primary relay group is
within one bus away, and 2 for two buses away, and so on.
Area(s): Click on this option and enter the area numbers to check
coordinating pairs whose primary relays are within the selected areas. The
area string can contain a mixture of ranges and numbers, e.g., 3-5,6,7,1012. Press the button on the right if you need help in composing the
area string.
Zones(s): Click on this option and enter the zone numbers to check
coordinating pairs whose primary relays are within the selected zones. The
zone string can contain a mixture of ranges and numbers, e.g., 3-5,6,7,1012. Press the button on the right if you need help in composing the
zone string.
Entire network: Click on this option to check all coordinating pairs.
4.
Select the coordinating types checked:

Select one of the six options available:
OC Backup / OC Primary (classical):
To check coordinating pairs
with overcurrent relays as primary and overcurrent relays as
back ups using the classical method (described below).
OC Backup / OC Primary (multi-point): To check coordinating pairs with
overcurrent relays as primary and overcurrent relays as
back ups using the multi-point method (described below).
DS Backup / OC Primary: To check coordinating pairs with distance
relays as primary and overcurrent relays as back ups. The
multi-point method is used.
OC Backup / DS Primary: To check coordinating pairs with overcurrent
relays as primary and distance relays as back ups. The
DS Backup / DS Primary: To check coordinating pairs with distance
relays as primary and distance relays as back ups. The
OC Backup / Recloser Primary: To check coordinating pairs with
reclosers as primary and overcurrent relays as back ups.
5.
Select the relay types to be checked. Click on one or both options:

Ground: To check ground relays.
Phase: To check phase relays and fuses.
6.
Select the fault types to be used. Click on one or more options:

3LG faults: 3-phase faults.
2LG faults: 2-line-to-ground faults.
1LG faults: single-line-to-ground faults.
L-L faults: line-to-line faults.
7.
Select which contingencies, if any, should be checked. Click on:

Double: To consider cases with double branch outages (excluding
double transformer outages).
Single:
276 SECTION 3
To consider cases with single branch outages.
COMMAND REFERENCE
8.
Select where the results will be written.

The choices are either the TTY Window or a report file.
9.
Specify the range of acceptable coordinating time interval (CTI).

In 'Min (s)' and Max (s) enter the CTI range in seconds.
The coordinating time interval is defined as the operating time of the
backup relay minus the operating time of the primary relay. The program
will automatically flag any case in which the coordinating time interval is
below the minimum CTI or higher than the maximum CTI.
10. Click on Report only flagged cases to limit the output to cases with problems.
This option will reduce the amount of output, especially when many relays
are being checked.
11. Click on "OK" to begin coordination checking.
The dialog box will disappear and the TTY window will appear showing
the program's progress.
OUTLINE OF THE CLASSICAL OC/OC COORDINATION CHECKING ALGORITHM:
One of the two methods for checking overcurrent/overcurrent relay
coordination is labeled Classical. The method is so called because it has
been in used in the industry for years, and it was the only method
available in OneLiner prior to version 9. The classical method works as
follows:
1) A close-in fault of the type selected is applied to the primary relay
group with the remote end of the branch open. This condition usually
generates the highest relay current in the primary relay group. The relay
operating time of the relays in the primary relay group is checked. If there
is no instantaneous operation or if the primary relay is on a transformer,
set the scaling factor to 1.0 and go to step 3.
2) Compute the scaling factor Iinst/I, where I is the relay current of the
relay that operated instantaneously and Iinst is the instantaneous setting
of that relay.
3) Multiply the primary and backup relay currents by the scaling factor.
This effectively simulates an intermediate fault in front of the primary relay
in which the primary relay current is just below the instantaneous value.
See figure below.
Note: This method is exact if the primary relay is on a transmission line

that is not mutually coupled. The results are approximate if the line is
mutually coupled.
SECTION 3
4) Compute the relay operating times.

The above steps are repeated with no outages and then, if selected, with
single and double outages of branches that are connected to the primary
bus.
OUTLINE OF THE MULTI-POINT COORDINATION CHECKING ALGORITHM:
In contrast to the classical method, which checks the primary/backup
coordination for a single fault, the multi-point method checks the
coordination for a large number of faults along the primary branch, with
the remote end of the branch open and closed. Specifically, the multi-point
method works like this:
1) The program simulates the following faults on the branch where the
primary relay group is located: (a) Close-in faults in front of the primary
relay group, with the remote end of the branch closed and opened; (b) If
the primary group is on a line, intermediate faults on every 10%, with the
remote end of the line closed and opened; (c) Line-end faults; (d) Remote
bus faults.
2) In each of faults simulated, the program calculates the operating time of
selected relays in the primary and backup groups. The program then
calculates the CTI.
3) Depending on the selected report option the program will report the
checking result for every fault, or only for faults that result in CTI
violations.
4) If the contingency options are tuned on, steps 1 through 3 are repeated
with single and/or double outages of branches that are adjacent to the
primary relay group.
OUTLINE OF THE RELAY/RECLOSER COORDINATION CHECKING ALGORITHM:
The Relay/Recloser coordination checking logic is designed to detect
possible mis -coordination between an upstream relay that backs up a
recloser. This algorithm takes into account the relays finite reset time,
which prevents the relay disk from being reset completely between
consecutive recloser operations. If the relay reset time is zero, then this
algorithm simply checks the CTI between the recloser curve and the relay
curve, for the respective currents. The checking algorithm works as
follows:
1) The program simulates close-in faults in front of the recloser with the
branchs remote end opened. This situation is assumed to generate the
largest fault currents through the recloser and backup relay. No branch
outages are considered.
2) The program simulates the relays disk build-up through the sequence
of fast and slow operations of the recloser. The report shows the position
of the backup relay at the end of this sequence in two ways: (1) As the
percent disk travel (100% being the position that causes the contacts to
close), and (2) As the time remaining to trip.
3) Step 2 is repeated with the recloser current and the relay current
decrease in steps of 10% (of the initial current of step 1) until the recloser
stops tripping.
278 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
OUTLINE OF COORDINATION CHECKING REPORT:

The coordination report heading will include (1) the name of the selected
relay group, (2) the CTI criteria, and (3) the fault type.
Following the heading are one or more sections. Each section shows the
coordination between a primary relay with one or more backups. At the
beginning of each section are the names of primary and backup relays,
and a list of branches that will be taken out of service. Each section lists
the following:
1) the names of the primary and backup relays that operate fastest in the
relay groups.
2) line outages, if any.
3) the current and operating time of the primary and backup relays.
4) the difference in the two operating times.
5) a warning flag, "W1", if the difference in operating time exceeds Max
CTI value or is below the Min CTI value.
Following the last section is a listing of overcurrent relay parameters for
those relays checked.
An example coordination report follows.
SECTION 3
Main Window
CHECK MENU
OC MINIMUM PICKUP COMMAND
The OC Minimum Pickup command in the Main Window lets you check the pickup settings of overcurrent
ground and phase relays to make sure that they are set low enough to detect faults on the remote-bus and remote
line ends. Branch contingencies are automatically considered for the faults on the remote bus. The results are
shown in a tabular form. The program flags any case in which the relays pickup settings are too low.
TO CHECK THE PICKUP CURRENT OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS:
1.
Optional: Select a relay group if you want to check the relays at the
selected group only or if you want to check relays in the vicinity of the
selected group.
Click the left mouse button on a relay group.
2.
Select the Check | OC Minimum Pickup command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the checking options.
3.

There are five options available. The first two options are grayed and
command.
Selected relay group only: Click on this option to check the relays within
the selected relay group only. This option works even if the selected relay
group has no relays. In the absence of relays, the report shows only the
primary currents at the relay location.
to check the relays that are in the vicinity of the selected relay group. Set
tier to 1 to check relays that are within one bus away, and 2 for relays
within two buses away, and so on.
Area(s): Click on this option and enter the area numbers to check the
relays within the selected areas. The area string can contain a mixture of
280 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
ranges and numbers, e.g., 3-5,6,7,10-12. Press the button on the

right if you need help in composing the area string.
Zones(s): Click on this option and enter the zone numbers to check the
relays within the selected zones. The zone string can contain a mixture of
ranges and numb ers, e.g., 3-5,6,7,10-12. Press the button on the
right if you need help in composing the zone string.
Entire network: Click on this option to check all the relays.
4.
Specify checking options.

Click on "Remote bus faults" to check the pickup settings for remote
bus faults.
Click on "Remote line-end faults" to check the pickup settings for
remote line-end faults.
Click on "Check double contingencies" to consider cases with double
branch outages (excluding double transformer outages) in addition to
single contingencies.
5.
Enter the margin of the pickup setting in "Margin".

The margin must be less than or equal to 1.0. To be considered
acceptable, the relay current must be greater than the pickup value divided
by this margin. For example, a margin of 0.91 means that the relay currents
for the various faults must be at least 10% higher than the pickup.
6.

7.
Click on Report only flagged cases to limit the output to cases with problems.
are being checked.
8.
Click on "OK" to begin checking the pickup settings.

OUTLINE OF ALOGORITHM USED TO CHECK PICKUP SETTINGS:

When checking the pickup settings at the relay group as shown in the
figure below, the program simulates (a) bus faults at bus B with and
without line outages, and (b) line-end faults on branches connected to
bus B without outages.
OUTLINE OF REPORT FOR CHECKING PICKUP SETTINGS:

The checking report will appear either on the TTY Window or in a text
report file. The sample output for one relay group is shown below. Note
SECTION 3
that the ground relays are checked with single-line-to-ground faults, and
the phase relays are check with 3-phase faults. The tabular output should
be self-explanatory, except perhaps for the warning flags, which are
explained below:
E3:
W3:
E4:
'Relay does not trip'. The relay current is too low to trip the relay
when it should have.
'Relay may not pick up'. The relay current is greater than the
pickup, but it is smaller than the pickup divided by the margin.
Hence, the relay will trip, but not reliably.
'Instantaneous unit trip'. The relay current is greater than the
instantaneous setting. The faults applied should not have tripped
the instantaneous unit.

An example checking report for a single relay group follows.
===============================================================================================
ASPEN OneLiner and Power Flow Version 9.1
Tue Aug 05 15:50:20 2003
Minimum Pickup Checking Report
Checking extent: Selected relay group only:
6 NEVADA
132.kV 8 REUSENS
132.kV 1 L Nev/Reusens
Margin= 1.000
Number of relay groups checked= 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Checking minimum pickup of relay group on
6 NEVADA
132.kV 8 REUSENS
____Fault_____Outage__Relay_Name__________Pickup(A)__Current(A)__Time(s)__Flag_
1LG Remote Bus None NV-G1
375.0
3575.8
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
1 NV-G1
375.0
3569.3
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
2 NV-G1
375.0
3013.4
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
3 NV-G1
375.0
3115.5
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
4 NV-G1
375.0
3149.5
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
5 NV-G1
375.0
3213.8
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
6 NV-G1
375.0
3071.4
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
7 NV-G1
375.0
3491.0
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus None NV-P1
125.0
3496.5
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
1 NV-P1
125.0
3751.5
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
2 NV-P1
125.0
3020.3
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
3 NV-P1
125.0
3145.5
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
4 NV-P1
125.0
3175.4
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
5 NV-P1
125.0
3175.4
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
6 NV-P1
125.0
2830.9
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
7 NV-P1
125.0
3434.0
0.000 E4
Outage branches:
1.
6 NEVADA
2.
6 NEVADA
3.
6 NEVADA
4.
6 NEVADA
5.
6 NEVADA
6.
6 NEVADA
7.
6 NEVADA
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
28
7
2
10
0
4
10
ARIZONA
OHIO
CLAYTOR
NEW HAMPSHR
DOT BUS
TENNESSEE
NEW HAMPSHR
132.kV
132.kV
132.kV
33.kV
13.8kV
132.kV
33.kV
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
L
L
L
X
X
P
T
Nev/Ariz
Nev/Ohio
Clav/Nev
Nev/NH/Rnk
Nev/NH/Rnk
Ten/Nev
Nev/NH
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameters of relays checked:

_OC_Relay_Name_______Type_____________________CTR_____Tap______TD___INST.___Inst_Delay__Reset
NV-G1
Ground IAC-77
100.
2.5
2.
2500
0
0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
282 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
CHECK MENU
OC INSTANTANEOUS SETTING COMMAND
The OC Instantaneous Setting command in the Main Window lets you check the instantaneous settings of
overcurrent ground and phase relays to make sure that they are set properly. Branch outages are considered for
the faults on the remote bus. Branch contingencies involving mutually coupled lines automatically consider the
case where the outaged line is grounded on both ends. The results are shown in a tabular form. The program
flags any case in which the relays instantaneous settings are set either too high or too low.
TO CHECK THE INSTANTANEOUS SETTING OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS:
1.
Optional: Select a relay group if you want to check the relays at the
selected group only or if you want to check relays in the vicinity of the
selected group.
Click the left mouse button on a relay group.
2.
Select the Check | OC Instantaneous Setting command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the checking options.
3.

command.
primary currents at the relay location, without any adjustment by the dcoffset multiplier.
SECTION 3
4.
Specify checking options.

Click on Close-in fault to check the operating time for close-in faults.
The instantaneous unit should trip on a close-in fault.
Click on "Line-end fault" to check the operating time for line-end faults.
The instantaneous unit may or may not trip, depending on the protection
philosophy.
Click on "Remote bus faults" to check the operating time for remote bus
faults. The instantaneous unit should not trip.
Click on "Check double contingencies" to consider cases with double
branch outages (excluding double transformer outages) in addition to
single contingencies.
5.
Select dc-offset multiplier options.

The branch currents contain a dc component for a very short time after the
onset of a fault. Modern relays have input filters that eliminate this dc
component. Older relays cannot distinguish between the ac fault current
and the dc component and therefore, act on currents that are higher than
the symmetric ac fault currents computed by OneLiner. The offset
current multiplier allows the checking logic to take the dc offset current
into account for relays that are marked as Sensitive to dc offset in the
relays info dialog boxes.
Select Use fixed value of and enter multiplier value in edit box to use it
in checking instantaneous setting.
Select Compute based on X/R ratio to have the program calculate dcoffset multiplier value using network X/R ratio at the relay location.
6.
Enter the instantaneous margin in "Margin".

For the close-in fault, the instantaneous setting is acceptable if the
adjusted relay current (of item 5) is less than the instantaneous setting. No
margin is used.
For line-end faults, the margin is also not used because no warning
messages are issued for line-end faults.
284 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
For the other faults (remote-bus fault and remote line-end fault on
mutually coupled lines) for which the instantaneous unit should not trip,
the instantaneous setting is considered acceptable if it is greater than the
adjusted relay current (of item 5) by a margin you enter here. The margin
must be 1.0 or larger. For example, a margin of 1.10 means that the
instantaneous setting must be at least 10% higher than the adjusted fault
current.
7.

8.
Click on Report only flagged cases to limit the output to cases with problems.
are being checked.
9.
Click on "OK" to begin instantaneous checking.

OUTLINE OF INSTANTANEOUS CHECKING ALGORITHM:

When checking the instantaneous units at the relay group shown below,
the program simulates (a) a close-in fault to make sure that the relays trip
instantaneously. It then simulates (b) a line-end fault. No warnings are
issued for line-end faults because opinion varies on whether the
instantaneous should trip. Finally, the program simulates (c) remote bus
faults with and without outage to make sure that the instantaneous setting
is greater than the fault current. If the relays being checked are on a line
that is mutually coupled to a parallel line, the program also performs (d) a
line-end fault on the parallel line to make sure that the relays do not trip
instantaneously.
OUTLINE OF REPORT FOR CHECKING INSTANTANEOUS SETTINGS:

The checking report will appear either on the TTY Window or in a text
report file. The sample output for one relay group is shown below. Note
that the ground relays are checked with single-line-to-ground faults, and
the phase relays are check with 3-phase faults. The tabular output should
be self-explanatory, except perhaps for the warning flags, which are
explained below:
SECTION 3
E5:
E4:
W4:
W6:
Instantaneous unit does not trip on close-in fault. The relay

current, after adjusted for dc offset (if any), is less than the
instantaneous setting.
Instantaneous unit trip. The relay current, after adjusted for dc
offset (if any), is greater than the instantaneous setting, causing
the relay to trip when it should not have.
Instantaneous unit may trip. The relay current, after adjusted for
dc offset (if any), is less than the instantaneous setting, but it is too
close to the instantaneous setting to allow for a margin of safety.
No instantaneous unit. The relay does not have an
instantaneous unit.

An example checking report is shown below.
===============================================================================================
ASPEN OneLiner and Power Flow Version 10.1
Wed Aug 06 10:49:36 2003
Instantaneous Setting Checking Report
Checking extent: Selected relay group only:
6 NEVADA
132.kV 8 REUSENS
Margin= 1.000, DC-offset current multiplier= 1.000
Number of relay groups checked= 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Checking instantaneous settings of relay group on
6 NEVADA
132.kV 8 REUSENS
____Fault_____Outage__Relay_Name___________Inst.(A)__Current(A)__Time(s)__Flag_
1LG Close-in
None NV-G1
2500.0
5897.5
0.000
1LG Line-end
None NV-G1
2500.0
4000.2
0.000
1LG Remote Bus None NV-G1
2500.0
3575.8
0.000 E4
1LG Remote Bus
1 NV-G1
2500.0
3658.2
0.000 E4
3LG Close-in
None NV-P1
2000.0
6480.7
0.000
3LG Line-end
None NV-P1
2000.0
4180.8
0.000
3LG Remote Bus None NV-P1
2000.0
3496.5
0.000 E4
3LG Remote Bus
1 NV-P1
2000.0
3855.1
0.000 E4
Outage and remote branches:
1.
8 REUSENS
132.kV -
28 ARIZONA
132.kV 1 L
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameters of relays checked:

_OC_Relay_Name_______Type_____________________CTR_____Tap______TD___INST.___Inst_Delay__Reset
NV-G1
Ground IAC-77
100.
2.5
2.
2500
0
0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Error and warning flags:
W4: Instantaneous unit may trip.
E4: Instantaneous unit trips.
E5: Instantaneous unit does not trip on close-in fault.
W6: No Instantaneous unit.
===============================================================================================
286 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
CHECK MENU
RELAY LOADABILITY COMMAND
The Relay Loadability command in the Main Window allow you to quickly determine if any of the phase distance
relays and phase overcurrent relays in the system will trip in heavy loading condition. The program simulates load
condition according to NERC recommendation 8A which relies on the current ratings of transmission lines.
Therefore you must enter a current rating for every transmission line on which you want to check the relay
loadability.
TO CHECK RELAY LOADABILITY:
1.
Select the Check | Relay Loadability command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the checking parameters.
2.

command.
primary currents at the relay location, without any adjustment by the dcoffset multiplier.
SECTION 3
3.
Specify voltage range.

Enter lower limit in Less than and upper limit in greater than or equal
to edit boxes. These limits pertain to the nominal kV of the relays. Only
relays in the specified kV range will be checked.
Note: The kV range will not apply if you check Selected relay group
only.
4.
Specify checking quantities.

Voltage magnitude: The program will apply this per-unit voltage to the
relays being checked. The default is 0.85 per-unit.
Enter current multiplier and select line current rating basis: This
calculated current magnitude will applied to relays being checked. The
default multiplier is 1.5.
Enter line angle: The program will simulate this phase angle between
current and voltage when checking relay. A lagging power factor is
assumed.
5.
Specify output options.

Select Output to TTY Window to send checking report to the TTY
Window.
Select Output to file to send the checking report to a file.
Click on the check box Output flagged cases only to include in the
report only relays that trip under heavy load conditions.
6.
Click on OK to start checking.

If you selected Output to file option, the program will display a standard File
Save dialog asking you to specify name and location of the report file.
Relay loadability checking report will contain list of checked relay in following
format:
288 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
CHECK MENU
NETWORK ANOMALIES COMMAND
The Network Anomalies command in the Main Window looks for anomalies in the network data and reports its
findings in the TTY Window. The user can also direct the program to automatically check for anomalies each time
when a binary file is opened.
TO CHECK FOR NETWORK ANOMALIES:
1.
Select the Check | Network Anomalies command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select which network anomalies to look for.
2.
Click on "Branch impedance too small" and enter a threshold value (in per unit)
to look for branches with impedances smaller than the threshold.
Branches with very small impedance can cause numerical problems and result in
grossly incorrect short circuit solutions. The smallest impedance one can use for
lines and transformers is a function of the system being modeled. In most
networks, branch impedances that are 0.001 per-unit or larger do not cause
problems.
3.
Click on "Transformer tap too high" and enter a threshold value (in per unit) to
look for transformers with unusually high tap ratios.
Click on "Transformer tap too low" and enter a threshold value (in per unit) to look
for transformers with unusually low tap ratios.
The program will list any 2-winding transformers whose tap KVs are outside of
the normal range you specified. The same is done for 3-winding transformers.
4.
Click on "Transformer with wrong phasing" to look for transformers with

incorrect phase shift.
An example of a system with wrong phasing is shown below. Here, the subtransmission system is connected to the transmission system though two wyedelta transformers, one with the delta leading and the other with the delta lagging.
The program will report on both 2- and 3-winding transformers with incorrect
phasing.
SECTION 3
Note: The program will check only the transformers that are in the same
contiguous network as the generator being shown in the Generator Angle Ref
drop-down listbox.
5.
Click on "Parallel branches with same circuit ID" to look for parallel
transmission lines and 2-winding transformers that have the same circuit ID.
Parallel lines must have different circuit IDs so that the program can tell them apart.
The same is true with transformers, phase shifters, and other branch types.
Parallel switches are not allowed. This function also looks for parallel switches.
6.
Click on Generators with wrong reference angle to look for generators whose
reference angles are inconsistent with the phase shift of the network elements.
Perform this check only if you are using the from a linear network solution
starting option for short circuit simulations. See the Faults | Options command for
more information on prefault voltage profile.
Select a generator in the Generator Angle Ref drop-down list box below. The
program will use this generators angle as the reference and temporarily compute
the reference angle of all the other generators in the same contiguous network. The
program will then compare the computed reference angle to the reference angle in
the generators info dialog boxes. It will report on any differences found.
Note: The generators reference angles are not changed by this command. If you
want the program to set the generator reference angle automatically, see the
Network | Set Generator Ref Angle command.
Note: The program will check only the generators that are in the same
contiguous network as the generator being shown in the Generator Angle Ref
drop-down listbox.
7.
Click on 3-W transformers with questionable parameters to look for 3winding transformers with dubious short-circuit impedances or winding
configurations. Specifically, the program will report on:
a)
Wye-wye-delta transformers with Zpso greater than, or equal to, Zps.
b) Transformers with unusual test configurations. When you double-click on any

of these 3-winding transformers, you will see the old dialog box instead of the
new dialog box of version 9.
8.
Select Things to check when an OLR file opens.

Mark the two checking options available if you want the program to
perform the checks automatically when it opens an OLR file.
The program will show a message box when it detects any anomalies. The
details are in the TTY Window.
290 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
9.

Anomaly checking will commence if you have marked one or more items in the
Things to check now group box.
The program will look for all of the anomalies you selected above and
output the result to the TTY Window. If there are any anomalies, you
must correct them manually.
Close the TTY window when you are done.
SECTION 3
Main Window
CHECK MENU
DATA COMPATIBILITY COMMAND
The Data Compatibility command in the Main Window will check for zero bus numbers, bus names over 8
characters, and other potential problems when converting data to either PTI or GE PSLF format.
TO CHECK FOR DATA COMPATIBILITY:
1.
Select the Network | Data Compatibility command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify which format you would
like to check for possible data compatibility problems.
2.
Select the data type. Click on:

ASPEN:
This is the default. The data in the file is ASPEN

compatible, by definition. The OK button is not enabled
when this option is selected.
PTI:
To check for any possible data compatibility problems

associated with the PTI format. Specifically these include:
Area names longer than 8 characters.
Zone names longer than 8 characters.
Zone numbers less than 1 or greater than 100.
Bus names longer than 8 characters.
Generator IDs longer than 1 character.
Generator Ids with characters other than 1 through 9, or
A through Z.
Branch Ids with characters other than 1 through 9, or A
through Z.
GE (EPC):
To check for any possible data compatibility problems

associated with the PTI format. Specifically these include:
Area numbers less than 0 or greater than 99.
Bus names longer than 8 characters.
3.
Click on "OK" to begin checking.

Note: The OK button is disabled when the ASPEN option is active.
The TTY Window will appear showing any warnings found. The program will not
fix any of these problems. You must do it manually.
Close the TTY window when you are done.
292 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
UNDO COMMAND
The Undo command in the Main Window allow you to discard changes in network and in the one-line diagram
brought about by recent commands or drag/drop editing. Virtually all commands in OneLiner can be undone, but
these few exceptions:
File | Open, File | Close and File | Save As commands.
File | Read Change File command.
Network | Boundary Equivalent command.
Network | Options, Diagram | Options and Faults | Options command.
TO UNDO A COMMAND:
1.
Select the Tools | Undo command_name.

Note: The actual label of this menu will show the name of the command
to be undone.
The network and one-line diagram will be brought back to the state that
existed prior to the command being undone. At any time, you can undo up
to the last 8 commands.
SECTION 3
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
DATA BROWSER COMMAND
This command activates the Data Browser, a tool that allows you to review and edit data for all the network
elements and protective devices, including those that are not visible on the one-line. Each page of the browser
lists one type of object. There are separate pages for buses, generators, loads, shunts, switched shunts,
switches, transmission lines, dc lines, 2-winding transformers, 3-winding transformers, phase shifters, areas,
zones, mutual-coupling parameters, circuit breakers, series capacitors, and relays. For ease of viewing, you may
filter the output by the objects area and zone affiliation and by their nominal kV.
The Area and Zone pages provide the only means of modifying the area and zone data.
The Scale Generator and Scale Load commands are available within the generator and load pages.
You can customize each page of the Browser by specifying which parameters you want listed and the sort order.
See TO CUSTOMIZE THE DATA BROWSER below.
TO OPEN THE DATA BROWSER:
1.
Select the Tools | Browser command.

The Data Browser will appear on the screen. The Browser dialog box is
resizable: You can make it bigger or smaller by clicking on an edge and
drag it with the mouse.
2.
Select the type of object to be listed.

Click on the Type drop down list box and select one of the following:
Areas:
Attributes of areas, including the scheduled inter-area
import/export schedule and area slack bus.
Breakers: Attributes of circuit breakers.
Buses:
Attributes of buses. The bus type is PV if it is a generator
bus and it regulates voltage. Otherwise, it is a PQ bus.
DC Lines: Attributes of 2-terminal dc lines.
Generators:
Attributes of generators. One generating unit per line.
Loads:
Attributes of loads. One load unit per line.
Shunts:
Attribute of capacitors and reactors. One shunt unit per line.
Switched Shunts: Attributes of switched shunts.

Switches: Attributes of switches.
Lines:
Attributes of transmission lines.
Phase Shifters:
Attributes of phase shifters.
Transformers, 2-Winding: Attributes of 2-winding transformers.

Transformers, 3-Winding: Attributes of 3-winding transformers.
Zones:
Attributes of zones.
Zero-sequence Mutuals:
Line pairs and their zero-sequence mutual
coupling impedance in per-unit.
Series Capacitors: Attributes of MOV-protected series capacitors.
Overcurrent phase relays
294 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Overcurrent Ground Relays

Fuses
Distance Phase Relays
Distance Ground Relays
Reclosers
The Data Browser will display the information you selected. The Lines page is
shown below.
3.
Filter the list by area or by zone.

The area/zone option is set initially to **ALL, which means all zones and areas.
Click on the 'Area/zone' drop down list box and select an area or a zone of
interest.
Note: This option is disabled when area or zone information is being
displayed.
The Data Browser will display only those network elements and relays
within the selected area or zone.
4.
Filter the list by nominal kV.

This option is set initially to **ALL, which means all voltages. Click on
the 'Nominal kV' drop down list box and select a voltage level.
Note: This option is disabled when area or zone information is being
displayed.
The Data Browser will display only those network elements and relays
that match the nominal kV you selected.
SECTION 3
5.
Change the sort order or a column.

Click on the title bar of any column to have the grid sorted by the items in
that column.
Successive clicking on the same column toggles the sort order between
ascending and descending.
6.
Search the grid for a specific string.

Click on the Search button near the upper right corner of the Data Browser. A
dialog box will appear.
Select a column using the Look In drop down list box.

Enter in the For text edit box the string or substring that you are seeking.
Press Find Forward or Find Backward to locate the next match.
Press Done when you are finished searching.
7.
Edit a network element or relay.

Double-click on a row in the grid. Alternatively, select the element and
click on "Edit". The properties dialog box for the element will appear.
Make necessary modifications and click on "OK". The dialog box will
disappear and the grid will be updated automatically.
8.
Locate a network element or a relay on the one-line diagram.

Select a network element or relay on the grid by click on its row. Then click on
the Locate on 1-Line button.
The Data Browser will disappear. The item you selected will appear highlighted on
the screen.
TO TAKE AN OBJECT IN OR OUT OF SERVICE:

1.
Take a network element or relay in or out of service.

Select an element and click on "In/Out Serv.". The element will toggle
between in service and out of service.
TO DELETE AN OBJECT:
1.
Delete a network element or a relay.

Select an element and click on "Delete". The element will be deleted, and
will disappear from the list.
Note: Areas and zones cannot be deleted.
TO SCALE GENERATION OR LOAD:

1.
Click on the Type drop down list box and select either Generator or Load.
2.
Change the Area/Zone and kV filters, as needed, to list just those generators or
loads that you wish to scale.
296 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.
Specify a scaling factor and scale the load or generation.

Click on "Scale". A dialog box will appear asking you for the MW and
MVAR scaling factors.
Enter the scaling factors and click on "OK".
The MW and/or MVAR value for all the elements listed on the current
page will be multiplied by the scaling factors you entered.
TO VIEW AND EDIT AREA DATA:
1.
View and edit Area data.

The Data Browser is the only place where you can view and edit area data.
Select Area in the Type drop down list box. Select an area in the grid
and click on Edit. A dialog box with the area data will appear.
Area No.:
Area number ranging from 0 to 999. When you change the

area number, the program automatically updates the area
number of all the buses within the area.
Name:
A 12-character area name. Any alphanumeric characters can

be used except for the string delimiter (single or double
quotation mark).
Area Slack Bus: Click on the drop down list box and select the area slack
bus. The Power Flow Program will adjust the MW output of
this generator to enforce the net-export constraint. Select
__none (floating area) if you do not want the Power Flow
Program to enforce the Net MW Export constraint.
Net MW Export: Net MW export target. A positive value means power is
shipped out of the area through tie lines.
2.
View bus and tie-line lists for an area.

Click on the Buses button in the Area dialog box. A dialog box will
appear displaying all of the buses within this area.
SECTION 3
Click on "Done" to close the 'Buses in Area' dialog box.

Click on the Tie Lines button to see a list of tie lines. A dialog box will
appear displaying all the transmission lines, phase shifters, and 2-winding
transformers that span the current area and its neighbors. The area
number of the neighbor is shown at the end of each entry.
Click on "OK" to close the 'Tie Lines in Area' dialog box.

TO VIEW AND EDIT ZONE DATA:
1.
View and edit Zone data.

The Data Browser is the only place where you can view and edit zone data.
Select Zone in the Type drop down list box. Select a zone in the grid
and click on Edit. A dialog box with the zone data will appear.
2.
Zone no.:
Zone number ranging from 1 to 999. When you change the

zone number, the program automatically updates the zone
number of all the buses within the zone.
Name:
A 12-character zone name.
View bus list for a zone.

Click on the Buses button in the Zone dialog box. A dialog box will
appear displaying all of the buses within this zone.
298 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Click on Done to close the 'Buses in Zone' dialog box.

TO CREATE A REPORT WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE GRID:
1.
Click on "Report" to generate a text file containing the equipment or

information that is being displayed by the Data Browser.
A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the name of the report file in CSVformat (*.CSV) that you can use as input to Microsoft Excel.
Click on Save as type and select Bus List File (*.TXT) to create a bus
list file for the equipment being displayed. Bus list files can be used in
OneLiner Bus Selector dialog when selecting buses for various
commands.
report file. Click on "OK" to close the standard file dialog box.
TO CUSOMIZE THE DATA BROWSER
The Data Browser is user customizable. For each page, you can specify which parameters you want displayed and
assign a column number to each of the visible parameters. In addition, you can specify the original sort order for
the page. Your preferences are stored in the Windows Registry. The program will follow them in all subsequent
sessions.
1.
Click on the Type drop-down list box to open the page of interest.
2.
Click on the Option button at the upper right corner of the dialog box. A
dialog box will appear. (This one is for the Lines page.)
SECTION 3
3.
Specify which items are to be displayed and change the column order.
In the Column Order listbox, mark the items that you want to see displayed in
the grid. Remove the checkmark for those items you want to omit.
Highlight any one of the checked items in the list box, press the Move Up or
Move Down button to change the column order.
\4.
Change the sort order.

Use the controls within the Sort group box on the right to specify how the data
will be sorted.
TO CLOSE THE DATA BROWSER:

1.
300 SECTION 3
Click on "Done" to close the Data Browser.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
SCRIPTING | EDIT/CREATE SCRIPT COMMAND
This command starts the PowerScript editor, a tool that allows you create and edit scripts. Please refer to the
PowerScript Users Manual for additional details on how to create and run scripts.
TO OPEN THE SCRIPT EDITOR:
1.
Select the Tools | Scripting | Create Script command.

The Script Editor will open.
The Script editor has command to open existing script file and to create
new ones. Please refer to the PowerScript Users Manual for additional
information.
To close the Script Editor, execute the File | Exit command on the menu
bar of the Script Editor.
SECTION 3
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
SCRIPTING | RUN SCRIPT COMMAND
This command executes an existing script. You must have created the script previously using the Script Editor or
a text editor.
TO EXECUTE A SCRIPT:
1.
Select the Tools | Scripting | Run Script command.

A standard File Open dialog box will appear asking you to locate a script
file with a .BAS extension.
Select the script file you want to run and click on OK.
The Script will start running. Please refer to the PowerScript Users
Manual for additional details.
302 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
USER-DEFINED COMMANDS | SETUP COMMAND
The Tools | User-Defined Commands menu has space allocated for five user-defined commands. These commands
are initially listed as Command 1, Command 2, etc. This User-Defined Command | Setup command enables you to
customize the user-defined commands. You can give each command a meaningful name and assign to it a script
file. OneLiner will execute the script file when a user selects the menu item.
TO CUSTOMIZE USER DEFINED COMMANDS:
1.
Select the Tools | User-Defined Commands | Setup command.

A dialog box will appear. The information on this dialog box is divided
evenly into five groups, one for each of the five user-defined commands.
2.
Customize a command.
Enter a menu label that describes what the command will do.
Enter the full path name of a script file in the edit box labeled Script File. If
needed, click on the Browse button to the right to locate it.
3.
Repeat step 2 for commands you want to customize. When done, click on OK to
close the dialog box.
SECTION 3
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
RUN CONFIGURATION PROGRAM COMMAND
The Run Configuration Program command in the Main Window allows you to launch the Configuration Program
for OneLiner and Power Flow.
TO LAUNCH THE CONFIGURATION PROGRAM:
1.
Select the Tools | Run Configuration program command.

A message box will appear to remind you to restart the OneLiner program after
you have made changes to the program configuration.
The Configuration Program will appear.
Press Help to see the documentation for the Configuration Program.
304 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
RUN DISTANCE RELAY EDITOR COMMAND
The Run Distance Relay Editor command in the Main Window allows you to launch the Distance Relay Editor
from within OneLiner.
TO LAUNCH THE DISTANCE RELAY EDITOR:
1.
Select the Tools | Run Distance Relay Editor command.

A message box will appear to remind you to restart the OneLiner program after
you have made changes to the relay library.
The main window of the Distance Relay Editor will appear, with a relay library
already opened. This library is the distance relay library being referenced by
OneLiner.
SECTION 3
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
HASP KEY UPDATE | REQUEST KEY UPDATE CODE COMMAND
The commands under Hasp Key Update are for users who has received the following message when OneLiner starts
up:
You can ignore this topic altogether if you have not seen this message or if the commands under Tools | Hasp Key
Update are dimmed.
There are two steps to updating the serial number on a key. This Request Key Update Code command is for the first
step.
TO REQUEST THE KEY UPDATE CODE
1.
Select the Tools | Hasp Key Update | Request Key Update Code command.
2.
Enter your company name, your name, and your telephone and fax number.
All the fields, with the exception of Fax, are required.
3a. Send request by eMail.

Press Send by eMail to send the necessary information to ASPEN via
eMail. Note: Use this option only if your company is connected to the
Internet.
Your eMail program will appear showing a new message with all the
necessary information in the body of the message.
Press Send to send the message to ASPEN.
306 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3b. Send request by fax.

Press Write to TTY to write the necessary information to the TTY
Window. The TTY Window will appear with text similar to this example.
Use the mouse the highlight the lines of text.

Use the TTY | Print Selected Text command to print the request.
Fax the printed request to ASPEN. The fax number is (650)347-0233.
SECTION 3
Main Window
TOOLS MENU
HASP KEY UPDATE | APPLY KEYS SERIAL NUMBER UPDATE CODE COMMAND
The Hasp Key Update | Apply Keys Serial Number Update Code command is for users who have sent a key update
code request to ASPEN and have received from ASPEN an update code.
You can ignore this topic altogether this command menu is dimmed.
There are two steps to updating the serial number on a key. This Apply Keys Serial Number Update Code command
is for the second and final step.
TO APPLY THE KEY UPDATE CODE
1.
Select the Tools | Hasp Key Update | Apply Keys Serial Number Update Code
command.
Enter the code you received from ASPEN and press Apply.
DistriView will update the serial number of your key using information contained
in the code.
308 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.3 CURVES WINDOW COMMAND

The Curves Window displays the characteristics of overcurrent relays, fuses and reclosers. You can open this
window through the Relay | View Relay Curves command from the Main Window. You can have up to 20 relay,
fuse and recloser curves on the same plot. You can also have up to 6 transformer damage curves, conductor
annealing curves and other damage curves.
You can change the parameters of any protective equipment or damage curves by double-clicking on its caption
box. The curves are redrawn immediately after you change the parameters.
The Curves Windows offers a wide variety of grid styles, colors and time units. The relay curves can be shifted
or unshifted depending on the preferences you set in the Misc | Preferences command.
You can move the caption boxes for protective equipment and damage curves by dragging with either mouse
button. The fault description is also movable.
You can store the curves being displayed in the Curves Window to a curve collection in a PCC file. When you
recall the curve collection later with the Relay | Open Curve Collection command in Main Window, or with the
Misc | View Curve Collection command in the Curves Window, the relay curves, damage curves, relay
descriptions, annotations, the fault description and the legend will reappear in the exact same arrangement on the
window.
The cursor coordinates are shown in the lower left portion of the window when you drag with either mouse
button. When dragging with the left mouse button while depressing the Control <Ctrl> key, an L-shaped symbol
spanning the initial mouse position and the current mouse position will appear on the screen. In addition, the
current cursor coordinates and the extent of the L-shaped symbol are shown in the lower left portion of the
window. Clicking the right mouse on the Curves Windows will bring up a floating menu of commonly-used
commands. The list of commands within the floating menu varies depending on the item you clicked on.
You can edit the legend at the bottom of the graph by double-clicking on it. You can also add text annotations
and graphics anywhere on the graph.
You can work on the Curves Window and the Main Window at the same time. If you have a large monitor, you
can arrange the windows side by side and execute commands in both windows. When you display a fault in one
of the windows, the same fault is displayed on the other window. If your monitor is not large enough to see both
windows at the same time, you can minimize the Curves window while you view the one-line diagram. To restore
the Curves window, simply double-click on the window icon at the bottom of the screen.
The commands in the Curves Window are described in this section.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
MISC MENU
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND
The Misc | Select Printer command in the Curves Window allows you to set up your printer.
1.
Select Misc | Select Printer command.

You should follow the procedure outlined in your Windows or Windows
Users manual to configure your printer.
310 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
MISC MENU
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND
The Print Graph command in the Curves Window prints the entire x-y plot of relay curves and damage curves.
For best results, the printer should be setup for the portrait orientation.
TO PRINT THE GRAPH:
1.
Select the Misc | Print Graph command.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the printing parameters. The
current printer and page selection is shown inside the dialog box.
Click on Change to bring up the Printer Setup dialog box to change

printer and paper setting. Click on "OK".
2.
Enter the desired margin on all sides of the printed page.
3.
Click on "Change" inside the Printer Font box to change the typeface and size of
the printer font.
The fonts shown in the list box are those available on your printer.
Common fonts are Courier, Arial and Times Roman. Font size controls the
height of the type in units of points where one point is defined to be 1/72
of an inch. OneLiner uses Arial to paint on the screen. You may wish to
select another font if (1) Arial is not available on your printer or (2) you
prefer the appearance of another font.
Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select the
font, font style and size you want. Click on "OK".
4.
Enter a scaling factor in "Scaling factor".

The scaling factor allows you to adjust the amount of the graph that will
be printed. When the scaling factor is 1.0, the contents of the Curves
Window are scaled to fit on the paper. When the scaling factor is less
than 1.0, the entire graph will be printed, only smaller. When the scaling
SECTION 3
factor is larger than 1.0, only a portion of the graph will not appear on the
paper. The scaling factor does not affect the font size.
5.
Select a curve width.

You can vary the width of the curves. A thicker curve may be desirable to
make it stand out. The unit of width is point, or 1/72 of an inch.
6.
Check the box "Print black and white" to print the curves in black and white.
7.
Check the box Print todays date in the legend box if you want to date stamp
the curve printout.
8.
Click on "Legend" to bring up the Curve Legend dialog box to enter legend
information.
9.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the graph will now be printed.
312 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
MISC MENU
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND
The Misc | Export Graph command in the Curves Window lets you create a Window Metafile or Enhanced
Window Metafile that corresponds to the curves and other graphics currently displayed on the screen. These are
vector graphic files that can be imported to other Windows programs such as Microsoft Word and AutoCAD.
TO SAVE RELAY CURVES AS A WINDOWS METAFILE OR ENHANCED WINDOWS MATA FILE:
1.
Select the Misc | Export Graph command.

metafile.
choice. A message box will appear informing you that the picture has
been exported.
Press OK to continue.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
MISC MENU
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command in the Curves Window lets you copy the entire graph being
displayed to the window clipboard. The picture is stored in the clipboard in the enhanced Windows metafile
format. You can paste the picture into other Windows programs such as Microsoft Word and AutoCad.
TO COPY THE GRAPHS DISPLAYED:

1.
Select the Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command.

A dialog box will appear informing you that the graph is copied to the
clipboard.
314 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
MISC MENU
VIEW CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
This command is the same as the Relay | View Curve Collection command in the Main Window. Please refer to
that command for instructions.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
MISC MENU
SAVE THIS CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
A curve collection contains the time-versus-current characteristics of overcurrent relays, fuses and conductor
damage curves that were displayed on the Curves Window. The Save This Curve Collection command in the
Curves Window lets you save the curve collection to the curve-collection buffer in random access memory.
When you exit the program, the curve-collection buffer will be saved to a PCC file.
TO SAVE THE CURVE COLLECTION:
1.
Select the Misc | Save This Curve Collection command.

A dialog box will appear asking you where to save the current curve
collection in the Curves Window.
If only the last two radio buttons are visible, skip down to step 3.
2.
Select where you would like to save the curve collection. Click on:
In order to save a curve collection, there must be a file name associated with the
curve-collection buffer. This file name can be an existing PCC file or a new PCC
file that you wish to create. Click on:
"Append" to append the curve collection to the buffer.
"Replace" to replace the curve collection of the same name in the buffer
with the curve collection shown on the Curves Window.
"Append to another PCC file" to fill the buffer with the contents of
another PCC file and append this curve collection to the buffer.
"Save to a new PCC file" to create a new PCC file. The buffer is emptied
and then this collection is copied to the buffer.
If you click on an option other than Replace, a dialog box will appear
asking you to name this curve collection. The name can have up to 20
characters.
Enter the name you would like to assign to the current curve collection in
"Name" and click on "OK". The dialog box will disappear and the curve
collection will be copied to the buffer.
If you selected "Append to another PCC file" or "Save to a new PCC file",
a file dialog box will appear.
316 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Use the controls in the curve collection file dialog box to enter the PCC
file name. Click on "OK". The curve collection will be saved to the PCC
file you specified when you exit the program.
Skip remaining instructions.
3.
If a PCC file has not been opened when the Save This Curve Collection command
is executed, a dialog box with only two options will appear asking you where to
save the current curve collection.
Select where you would like to save the curve collection. Click on:
"Append to a PCC file" to fill the buffer with the contents of an existing
PCC file and copy this curve collection to the end of the buffer.
"Save to a new PCC file" to create a new PCC file. The buffer is emptied
and this collection is copied to the buffer.
A curve collection file dialog box will appear.
Use the controls in the curve collection file dialog box to enter the PCC
file name. Click on "OK".
The curve collection will be saved to the PCC file you specified when you
exit the program. A dialog box will appear asking you to name this curve
collection. The name can have up to 20 characters.
Enter the name you would like to assign to the current curve collection in
"Name" and click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the curve collection will be appended to
the PCC buffer.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
MISC MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command in the Curves Window lets you specify the options for the Curves Window. These
include the (1) unit of time, (2) grid color and style, (3) layout and style of axes, (4) shifted curve style, (5) curve
description location, (6) whether to hatch fuse curves, (7) whether to display the relay test quantity in the TTY
window, (8) test point and (9) font size.
TO SPECIFY THE OPTIONS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW:
1.
Select the Misc | Options command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the options for the
overcurrent relay plot.
2.

"Seconds" to use seconds as units of time.
"Cycles 60 Hz" to use cycles as units of time, assuming 60 hertz.
"Cycles 50 Hz" to use cycles as units of time, assuming 50 hertz.
3.
Select the Grid Color. Click on "Light green", "Light blue" or "Yellow".
4.
Select the Grid Style. Click on "Full grid" or "Decades only".
5.
Select the Axes style. Click on "Log-log" or "Semi-log".

The log-log plot uses a logarithmic scale for both axes. The semi-log plot
uses a logarithmic scale for the horizontal axis (current) and a mixture of
logarithmic and linear scales for the vertical axis (time). The axis is linear
below 2 seconds and logarithmic above 2 seconds.
318 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
6.
Select the units for the X axis. Click on:

"in A":
"in MVA":
To display the horizontal axis in A.

To display the horizontal axis in MVA.
7.
Select where you would like the X axis to start. Click on "1 A or 1 MVA" or
"10A or 10MVA".
8.
Specify whether you want the automatically shifted curves to continue beyond the
total fault current. Click on "Stop at fault I" or "Do not stop".
The "Stop at fault I" option displays the relay curves only for currents
less than the fault current. The "Do not stop" option extends the curves
beyond that point.
9.
Select the Location of the Curve Description. Click on "Left" or "Right".

The program will use the left side or the right side of the grid as the default
location of the relay curve descriptions. The other side of the grid is the
default location of the damage curve descriptions. The fault description, if
any, is below the last relay curve description. As always, you can move
the descriptions with the mouse.
10. Click on "Hatch" in "Fuse Curve" group box to fill the area between the totalclear curve and the minimum-melt curve with a hatch pattern.
11. Click on "Shown in TTY" to display the Relay Test Quantity on the TTY
Window.
The pre- and post-fault voltage and secondary current of the relays will be
displayed in TTY Window when executing the Relay Operations for 1
Fault command. You can select and copy the relay test quantities in the
TTY Window to the clipboard, and then paste the data from the clipboard
to your text data file for relay testing.
12. Enter the test point in "Test Point".
The program will show in the relay description the time delay at a test
point, in the form, TP=xxx. The default value of 5.0 means that the time
delay is for 5 times the pickup setting. If the test point is set to 0.0, the
TP=xxx entry will not be shown in the relay description.
13. Click on "Font size" and select the desired font.
the text in the client area of the Curve Window.
14. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the graph will be redrawn with the
options you selected. Your options are stored in the Window registry.
They will be used automatically from now on, unless you change them
with this command.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
MISC MENU
CLOSE WINDOW COMMAND
The Close Window command in the Curves Window lets you close the Curves Window and return to the Main
Window.
TO CLOSE THE CURVES WINDOW:
1.
320 SECTION 3
Select the Misc | Close Window command to close the Curves Window.
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
ADD MENU
RELAY CURVES COMMAND
The Relay Curves command in the Curves Window allows you to add relay curves to the plot. You can add
relays in the vicinity of the first relay in the plot, relays in primary or backup groups, or relays on the remote bus.
TO ADD RELAY CURVES IN VICINITY:
1.
Select the Add | Relay Curves command.

Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are
already 20 relay curves on the plot.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the relay curves to be added
to the plot.
2.
Select from the dropdown list at the upper-left corner what relays you want to be
include in the list box.
- Relays in this relay group. List only relays that are within the same relay
group as the first relay on the plot.
- Relays in vicinity: Set tier number to 0 to list relays at the same bus as
the first relay, 1 for relays at buses that are one bus away, and so
on.
- Relays backed up by this group: Lists relays that are backed up by the
first relay, as determine by the coordinating-pair information.
- Backup relays of this group: Lists the first relays backups as determine
by the coordinating-pair information.
- All primary and backup relays of this group: List relays in coordinating
pairs involving the first relay.
- Relay on remote bus: Lists relays at the remote end of the first relays
branch.
Each relay in the list is identified by the relay name, the branch name, and
the branch name.
3.
Select one or more relays by marking check box in front of relay name.
Click on "OK" when done.
The dialog box will disappear and the relay curves you selected will be
displayed on the plot.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
ADD MENU
CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Conductor Damage Curve command in the Curves Window allows you to add a conductor damage curve to
the overcurrent relay plot. The equations and parameters in this command are designed specifically for annealing
damage to bare conductors and insulated cables caused by excessive short-circuit current.
TO ADD A CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE:
1.
Select the Add | Conductor Damage Curve command.

already 6 damage curves on the plot.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the conductor damage curve
parameters. The equation of the damage curve is shown near the top.
ENTER THE VALUE OF K MANUALLY:

2a. In the drop-down combo box, select User defined. Enter the conductor and
insulation parameter (k) in 'k'.
This parameter, k, is a function of the conductor and insulation type.
HAVE ONELINER ENTER THE VALUE OF K FOR YOU:
2b. In the drop-down combo box, select one of the following strings.
"Conductor AAC, "Conductor ACAR", "Conductor ACSR, "Conductor
Copper", "Cable Polyvinyl chloride 75C/150C", "Cable Thermoplastic
polyethylene 75C/150C", "Cable Rubber insulated 75C/200C", "Cable
XLPE 75C/250C", "Cable XLPE 90C/250C".
The corresponding value of K will appear in the edit box. You will not be
able to edit this value.
Caution: There is no industrial standard for values of k for different
conductor types. The determination of k depends on assumption on the
melting point of the metal conductors and the conductors normal
operating temperature plus other factors. Hence you may find different
values of k for the same conductor type in different handbooks. We
strongly recommend that you research this subject carefully before using
this function.
ENTER CONDUCTOR SIZE A MANUALLY:
3a. In the drop-down combo box, select User defined. Enter the conductor crosssectional area in circular mills in 'A'.
322 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
HAVE ONELINER ENTER CONDUCTOR SIZE A FOR YOU:

3b. In the drop-down combo box, select one of the standard AWG sizes.
The corresponding value of the cross-sectional area will appear in the edit
box A. You will not be able to edit this value.
4.
Enter any comments up to 32 characters in 'Comments'.
5.
Click on "OK" to draw the damage curve.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
ADD MENU
TRANSFORMER DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Transformer Damage Curve command in the Curves Window allows you add a transformer damage curve and
inrush curve to the overcurrent relay plot. These transformer damage curves conform to the ANSI/IEEE C57.109
standard of 1985.
You can enter the damage-curve parameters manually or have OneLiner compute it for you. The automatic
feature is new in this Version 10. It is an improvement over the old link damage curve to relay curve feature by
further shifting the damage curve by the ratio:
Maximum winding current / Relay current in primary amps.
This additional adjustment is the key to showing the transformer damage curve correctly for all fault types, all
winding configuration, and all network topology -- including parallel transformers. We suggest you choose this
automatic feature unless you feel compelled to specify the damage curve manually.
TO ADD DAMAGE CURVE AND INRUSH CURVE USING THE AUTOMATIC FEATURE:
1a. Select the Add | Transformer Damage Curve command.
When the dialog box appears, click on the top radio button labeled
Automatic.
2a. Select a curve.

In the drop-down combo box below, select a curve for a fuse, relay or
recloser that is protecting the transformer.
The device you select must be on one end of the transformer of interest.
The program will automatic get the transformer data and compute the
necessary parameters for the damage curve.
Skip to step 4 below.
TO ADD DAMAGE CURVE AND INRUSH CURVE MANUALLY:
1b. Select the Add | Transformer Damage Curve command.
When the dialog box appears, click on the second radio button labeled
Manual.
324 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
2b. Press the Select transformer from list button if you want the program to help
you fill in the transformer MVA rating, base current, and impedance values.
Otherwise, skip to step 3b and enter the values by hand.
Press the Select transformer from list button.
A dialog box will appear showing list of 2- and 3-winding transformers that
are in the vicinity of the first relay. If you have selected a linked relay
curve that is attached to a transformer, the program will automatically
highlight that transformer.
Select a transformer in the list by clicking on it.

Click on Plot on dropdown list to select either the high- or the low-side
kV. The damage curve will be based on this nominal kV.
Select on the ratings in the MVA rating edit box or type in a value by
hand. Within the MVA rating dropdown list are the MVA base of the
transformer, and its ratings MVA1, MVA2 and MVA3. The damage curve
will be based on the MVA value you select or enter here.
Click OK when done. The dialog box will disappear, and the program will
fill in the three numeric edit boxes in the Damage-Curve dialog box.
Skip Step 3b and go to step 4.
3b. Input the damage curve parameters.
Rating:
The transformers MVA rating.
Base I:
The one per-unit base current (also known as the selfcooled current) in amps, for either the high or low side of
the transformer.
SECTION 3
X:
4.
The transformer leakage reactance in per unit based on the

transformer's MVA rating. The value of X is between 5%
and 15% for most transformers.
Enter comments with up to 63 characters in 'Comments'.

Your comments will be displayed on the screen as part of the curve
identification.
5.
Click on the box Show inrush curve also if you want the program to draw an
inrush curve in addition to the damage curve.
The inrush curve is a function of the full-load current. Under the
automatic option, OneLiner will shift the inrush curve with the relay
curve, but it will not adjust it with the additional shifting factor.
6.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the transformer damage curve will be
drawn on the plot.
326 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
ADD MENU
DAMAGE CURVE FROM LIBRARY COMMAND
The Damage Curve From Library command in the Curves Window allows you add a damage curve from the relay
library to the plot. Any damage curve can be shown here, including conductor burn down curves and insulation
damage curves. In order to show a damage curve with this command, the curve must have been entered into a
relay library specifically as a damage curve. See ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor User's Manual for details.
TO ADD A DAMAGE CURVE FROM A RELAY LIBRARY:
1.
Select the Add | Damage Curve from Library command.

The Curve Selector will appear.
2.
Select a damage curve from the Curve Selector.
3.
Enter comments with up to 32 characters in 'Comments'.

Your comments will be displayed on the screen as part of the curve identification.
4.
Click on "Select this curve".

The dialog box will disappear and the damage curve will be drawn on the
plot.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
ADD MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Annotation command in the Curves Window lets you add an annotation anywhere in the plot. You can use
the annotations to label the curves or to mark certain features and modifications that warrant special attention.
You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for printing and delete them immediately afterwards. The
user interface for the annotations is the same as that in the Main Window. The annotations can be saved with a
curve collection into the PCC file. To execute this command you must first select the annotation location with the
left mouse button.
1.

Click the left mouse button once on the desired location of the new annotation.
A red crosshair will appear at that location.
2.
Select the Add | Annotation command.

3.
Enter an annotation with up to 50 characters in the edit box.
4.
Click on "Mark the annotation" to put a diamond shaped marker just left of the
text.
5.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will close and the crosshair will be replaced by the new
annotation.
328 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
ADD MENU
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Add | Picture From Clipboard command in the Curves Window lets you paste a picture that you have
previously copied to the Windows clipboard. The picture can come from the main window of DistriView, or from
another drawing program such as Illustrator or AutoCad. You can paste up to 16 pictures anywhere on the plot.
The pictures can be saved with a curve collection into the PCC file. To execute this command you must first
select a location with the mouse button.
TO ADD A NEW PICTURE:
1.
Select the picture location.

Click the left mouse button once on the desired location of the new picture.
2.
Select the Add | Picture from Clipboard command.

The picture will be displayed at the location you have selected.
NOTE: The command will be dimmed if the Windows clipboard contains
no picture in compatible format.
3.
Resize and Move picture.

To move the picture, click left mouse button inside the picture and drag
to the new location.
To resize the picture, click left mouse button near an anchor point on a
side or corner and drag the mouse until the new size has been achieved.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
RELAY CURVE COMMAND
The Relay Curve command in the Curves Window lets you remove a relay, fuse or recloser curve from the
overcurrent relay plot.
TO REMOVE A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER CURVE:
1.
Select the Remove | Relay Curve command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the plot
contains only a single relay curve.
A dialog box will appear. Within the list box are the curves that are being
displayed.
2.
Select the curve to be removed and click on "OK".

The dialog box will close, and the selected curve will be removed from the
plot.
330 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Damage Curve command in the Curves Window lets you remove a damage curve from the overcurrent relay
plot.
TO REMOVE A DAMAGE CURVE:
1.
Select the Remove | Damage Curve command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select the damage curve to be
removed.
2.
Select the damage curve to be removed and click on "OK".

The dialog box will close. The damage curve will be removed from the
plot.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
ALL BUT 1ST RELAY CURVE COMMAND
This command lets you remove all but the first relay curve from the plot. All the damage curves will also be
removed.
TO CLEAR ALL BUT THE FIRST RELAY CURVE:
1.
Select the Remove | All But 1st Relay Curve command.

The screen will be redrawn showing only the first relay curve.
332 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
FAULT COMMAND
This command lets you remove fault description in curve window.
TO CLEAR FAULT DESCRIPTION:
1.
Select the Remove | Fault command.

The screen will be redrawn showing only the relay curves.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Annotation command in the Curves Window lets you remove an annotation. To execute the command, you
must first select an annotation with the mouse.
TO REMOVE AN ANNOTATION:
1.
Select the annotation you want to delete.

Click the right mouse button once on the annotation you want to delete.
The annotation will be highlighted.
2.
Select the Remove | Annotation command.

The annotation will be removed from the screen.
334 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
PICTURE COMMAND
The Remove | Picture command in the Curves Window lets you remove a picture. To execute the command, you
must first select a picture with the mouse.
TO REMOVE A PICTURE:
1.
Select the picture you want to delete.

Click the left mouse button once on the picture that you want to delete.
The picture frame will become dotted.
2.
Select the Remove | Picture command.

The picture will be removed from the screen.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
RELAY SETTING COMMAND
The Relay Setting command lets you adjust the settings of one of the relays, fuses and reclosers being displayed
in the Curves Window.
TO ADJUST THE CURVE SETTING:
1.
Select the Edit | Relay Setting command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select a relay curve that you want
to adjust. Within the list box are the curves that are being displayed.
2.
Select a relay and click on "OK".

The dialog box will disappear. An info dialog box for the selected device
will appear. See Section 6, Relay Dialog Boxes, for details.
3.
Make the necessary adjustments in the info dialog box and click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the curve of the selected device will be
updated to reflect the new parameters.
336 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
TRIAL RELAY ADJUSTMENT COMMAND
The Trial Relay Adjustment command in the Curves Window allows you to examine, for a given fault current, the
dependence of the relay operating time on its time-dial and pickup setting. This command also lets you update
the relay parameters with the adjusted time dial setting.
TO MAKE TRIAL RELAY ADJUSTMENTS:
1.
Select the Edit | Trial Relay Adjustment command.

Note: This item is dimmed and cannot be activated unless you have (1)
simulated a fault using the Fault | Specify command in the Main Window
and (2) displayed a specific fault with the Show | Relay Operations for 1
Fault command in the Curves Window.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a relay curve.
2.
Select a relay and click on "OK".

The dialog box will disappear. A second dialog box will appear allowing
you to adjust the time dial setting, the pickup value, and the relay current.
3.
Click on "Change Amps" to use a current other than the actual fault current for
trial adjustments.
Another dialog box will appear asking for the relay current.
SECTION 3
Enter the relay current in 'Amps' and click on "OK".

The dialog box titled 'Trial Adjustment Current' will disappear. The
program will use the relay current you specified to compute the trial
setting, and display the relay current and operating time in the dialog box
titled 'Trial Adjustments'.
4.
Manipulate the scroll bar to change the time dial setting.

For the purpose of this command, the relay is treated as nondirectional.
The relay current and operating time are shown. An operating time of
9999s means the current is too low to trip the relay.
Adjust the time dial setting with the 'T dial' vertical scroll bar.
The relay operating time is updated automatically as you make this
adjustment.
5.
Click on "Apply It" to transfer the new time dial and pickup settings to the
relay.
The dialog box will disappear. The program will (1) update the curves to
reflect these changes and (2) update the relay parameters with the
adjusted time dial setting.
338 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
SHIFTING FACTOR COMMAND
The Shifting Factor command in the Curves Window allows you to shift the relay curves in the plot by specifying
their horizontal and vertical shifting factors. The shifting factors affect the shape and position of the relay curves
as well as their operating times shown on the Curves Window. The shifting factors, however, have no effect on
the relay operating time on the one-line diagram in the Main Window. The shifting factors are stored in the PCC
file when you save the curve collections.
TO SHIFT THE RELAY CURVES:
1.
Select the Edit | Shifting Factor command.

A dialog box will appear displaying the shifting factors for all the curves
being displayed.
2.
Select a relay curve and click on "Change".

A dialog box will appear asking you for the horizontal shifting factor H,
and the vertical shifting factors B and C.
The program uses the following formulas to shift the curve:

i' = H * i
t' = B * t + C
The curve is not shifted if the shifting factors are at their default values:
H=1, B=1, and C=0.
3.
Enter the horizontal shifting factor, H, in 'H'.

This shifting factor moves the curve horizontally. The curve is moved to
the right if H is greater than 1 and to the left if H is less than 1. Horizontal
shifting is used most commonly to account for the difference in current on
the two sides of a transformer. You have the option of specifying the
shifting factor manually (as you do here), or let the program shift the
curves automatically when you execute the Show | Relay Operations for 1
Fault command.
SECTION 3
4.
Enter the vertical shifting factor, B, in 'Time Multiplier B'.

The vertical shifting factor B is a time multiplier. The curves moves up
when B is greater than 1.0, and mo ves down when B is less than 1.0.
5.
Enter the vertical shifting factor, C, in 'Time Adder'.

The factor C is a time adder. This factor, along with the vertical shifting
factor, B, lets you stretch and move the curves in the vertical direction.
6.
Click on "OK".
The 'Change Shifting Factor' dialog box will disappear. The list box will be
changed showing the latest shifting factors. The relay curves and
operating points will be updated to reflect the new shifting factors.
7.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all the relays that you want to shift manually.
8.
Click on "Reset" to reset all of the shifting factors to their default values.
9.

Each of the relay parameter boxes on the plot will display its shifting
factors if they are not at the default values.
Note: If you specify vertical shifting factors other than the default
values, the relay operating time on the Curves Window will not agree
with those on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.
340 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
DAMAGE CURVE PARAMETERS COMMAND
This command allows you to change the parameters of a damage curve being displayed in the Curves Window.
TO CHANGE DAMAGE CURVE PARAMETERS:
1.
Select the Edit | Damage Curve Parameters command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select a damage curve.
2.
Select a damage curve and click on "OK".

The 'Adjust Damage Curve' dialog box will disappear. Another dialog box
for the selected damage curve will appear. See the Add | Conductor
Damage Curve, Add | Transformer Damage Curve and Add | Damage
Curve from Library commands in the Curves Window for details on the
damage curves.
3.
Modify the parameters in the dialog box and click on "OK".

The dialog box will disappear and the selected damage curve will be
redrawn reflecting the new parameters.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
LEGEND COMMAND
The Legend command allows you to edit the legend of the plot that appears at the bottom of the Curves Window.
The legend can be saved with a curve collection into the PCC file.
TO EDIT THE LEGEND OF A PLOT:
1.
Select the Edit | Legend command.

A dialog box will appear with the existing legend.
2.
Enter the desired text.

@ Voltage:
kV rating of transmission line the relay group is protecting.
By:
Name or initials of person who edited the curves.
For:
Name of transmission line.
No.:
Numerical identifier.
Comments:
Notes or helpful comments concerning this plot.
Date:
The date on which revisions were made.
Both 'For' and 'Comment' edit boxes can have up to 80 characters. The rest
can have up to 12 characters.
3.
Click on "OK" when you have finished editing the legend box.
The dialog box will disappear and the legend will appear at the bottom of
the plot, under the horizontal axis.
342 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND
The Transparent Picture command allows you to toggle the background of a selected picture between transparent
and opaque. A transparent picture is one that has a transparent background. An opaque picture has a solid
background that you cannot see through.
TO MAKE THE BACKGROUND OF A PICTURE TRANSPARENT OR OPAQUE:
1.
Select the picture.

Click the right mouse button on a picture that was pasted on the Curves
Window.
2.
Select the Edit | Transparent Picture command.

The background of the selected picture will change from transparent to
opaque, or vise versa.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
EDIT MENU
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND
The relay and damage curve descriptions can be moved anywhere on the plot. This command will place them
back in their default locations.
TO PUT THE CAPTIONS BACK AT THEIR DEFAULT POSITIONS:
1.
Select the Edit | Rearrange Captions command

The captions of all the curves will be relocated to their default positions in
the Curves Window. The relay curve descriptions will be on the left or the
right, depending on your preference in the Misc | Options command in the
Curves Window. The damage curve descriptions will be located opposite
of the relay curve descriptions. The fault description, if any, is placed
below the last relay curve description.
344 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND
This command shows graphically the relay operating points (current, time) for all the faults that have been
simulated. A tabular output is also written to the TTY Window.
TO SHOW THE RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS:
1.
Select the Show | Relay Operations for All Faults command.

Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have been
simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault simulation.
The screen will be redrawn to show on each relay curve the operating
points (current, time) for all the faults that have been simulated. These
points are indicated by small rectangles. Curves and operating points will
be shifted if you have specified horizontal and vertical shifting factors
with the Edit | Shifting Factor command.
This command will also automatically produce a table of relay currents and
operating times in the TTY Window.
2.
Select the Show | TTY Window command to open the TTY Window.
Any fault solutions being displayed in the Main Window prior to this
command will be cleared.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND
This command lets you show graphically the operating points (current, time) on the relay curves for a fault that
was simulated previously. The curves and operating times on the plot can be shifted manually or automatically.
The program will simultaneously display the solution on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.
TO SHOW THE RELAY OPERATIONS FOR A FAULT:
1.

Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have been
simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a fault. The list box will
contain all the faults that have been simulated.
2.
Select a fault.
If the fault description takes more than one line, you can select it by
clicking on any one of those lines.
3.
Enter a 'Current Multiplier' to scale the relay current by a constant.

The current multiplier is set to 1.0 by default. You can change this value to scale
all the relay currents. This option is most commonly used to check relay
coordination with relay currents that are larger or smaller than the actual fault
currents.
4.
Select a Horizontal Shift option.

Click on the drop down list and select one of the options:
- 'Manual': to horizontally shift each of the relay curves by the shifting
factor 'H', which is 1 by default. This option is so called because you can
shift each curve manually by changing its shifting factor H in the Edit |
Shifting Factor command. The curves are not shifted if you did not specify
the manual shifting factors.
- 'Align curves with total fault current': to shift each relay curve
horizontally by the factor: (total fault current) / (relay current). This is
the same as the old Automatic option in previous versions.
- 'Align curves with custom current': to shift each relay curve
horizontally by the factor: (custom current) / (relay current). The program
will display a dialog box asking you to enter the custom current.
346 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
- 'Align curves with relay #xx ': to shift each relay curve horizontally by
the factor: (relay #xx current) / (relay current). The result is that relay
curve #xx stays where it is, while all the other relays curves are shifted so
that their operating points are aligned with that of the relay curve #xx.
Note: if the reference relay #xx does not operate on the fault, the shifting
factors will be based on the total fault current.
When the curves are shifted automatically, the program will ignore the
manual horizontal shifting factor H.
Note: The program will use the vertical shifting factors 'B' and 'C' in all
cases, regardless of the Horizontal Shift Option you select.
5.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear. The Curves Window will be redrawn to
show the operating point (current, time) for each of the curves. The fault
description is shown. In addition, the relay current and operating time are
added below the relay identifiers. See example below.
A summary of the fault is written to the TTY Window. The relay test
quantities (consisting of the currents and voltages before and after the
fault) are also written to the TTY Window if the Write to TTY option
within the Relay Test Quantities group box is selected.
6.
Optional: Select the Show | TTY Window command to open the TTY Window.
The Main Window will be als o redrawn to show the same fault on the oneline diagram. The shifting factors and options have no effect on the relay
operating time on the one-line diagram.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
SHOW MENU
TEST VALUES COMMAND
The Relay Test Values command in the Curves Window lets you compute one or more test values for a relay that
is being displayed. The test values (in the form of X times pickup and Y seconds delay) are for the most recent
relay settings. The test values are unaffected by any of the shifting factors.
TO OBTAIN THE TEST VALUES:
1.
Select the Show | Relay Test Values command.

A dialog box will appear listing the relays being displayed in the Curves
Window.
2.
Select one of the relays and click on "OK".

A table of the time delays versus test currents will be shown on the TTY
window. If the time unit for the Curves Window is in cycles (50 or 60 Hz),
the table will also list the time delays in cycles.
3.
Select Menu | Close Window to close the TTY Window.
4.
348 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
Curves Window
SHOW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
This command lets you open the TTY Window to view its contents.
TO SHOW THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the Show | TTY Window command.

The TTY Window will appear on top of the Curves Window.
2.
Use the scroll bars to view different parts of the window.

3.
SECTION 3
Curves Window
SHOW MENU
FAULT BROWSER COMMAND
This command lets you show or hide the fault browser toolbar. The Fault Browser is a VCR-button-like device to
help you go quickly from one fault result to another. The Fault Browser looks like this:
The default position of the Browser is the upper left corner of the Curves Window.
TO SHOW/HIDE THE FAULT BROWSER TOOLBAR:
1.
Select the Show | TTY Fault Browser command.

The program will show or hide the fault browser toolbar accordingly.
Note: This command is available only in showing relay operation for
one fault.
350 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
3.4 DS RELAYS WINDOW COMMANDS

The DS Relays Window displays the characteristics of distance relays. You can open this window with the View |
Relay Curves command from the Main Window. Up to two distance-relay characteristics can be displayed in this
window at one time. The axes are in primary ohms. An optional circular grid can be toggled on and off with the
Misc | Grid On/Off command.
You can change the extent of the x and y axes in primary ohms and consequently, the scaling of the distance relay
characteristics using the zoom slider on the toolbar. You can also press one of the shortcut keys to enter
corresponding zoom level.
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Approximate Extent
4x 3 ohms
9x 6 ohms
17x 12 ohms
35x 25 ohms
70x 50 ohms
140x100 ohms
280x200 ohms
The relay parameters are shown within rectangular description boxes. You can move these boxes with either
mouse button. You can open the info dialog box by double-clicking the left mouse button within the description
box.
When the characteristics of a second relay are being displayed, you can view the offset and the direction
(forward or reverse) of this relay by double clicking the left mouse button on the small crosshair at its origin. You
can change the offset of the relay with respect to the origin of the graph by dragging the crosshair with the
mouse.
The cursor coordinates are shown in the lower left portion of the window when you drag with either mouse
button. Clicking the right mouse button on the DS Relays Window will bring up a floating menu of commonlyused commands.
You can work on the DS Relays Window and the Main Window at the same time. If you have a large monitor,
you can arrange the windows side by side and execute commands in both windows. When you display a fault in
one of the windows, the same fault is displayed on the other window. If your monitor is not large enough to see
both windows at the same time, you can minimize the DS Relays Window while you view the one-line diagram.
To restore the DS Relays Window, simply double-click on the window icon at the bottom of the screen.
The commands in the DS Relays Window are described in this section.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND
The Misc | Select Printer command in the DS Relays Window allows you to set up your printer.
1.
Select Misc | Select Printer command.

You should follow the procedure outlined in your Windows Users
manual to configure your printer.
352 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND
This Misc | Print Graph command lets you print the contents of the DS Relays Window. For best results the
printer should be set up for the landscape orientation.
TO PRINT THE CONTENTS OF DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1.
Select the Misc | Print command.

Note: The print preview feature is not available for relay curves.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the printing parameters. The
current typeface and font size are shown within the Font group box.
2.
Click on "Change" to change the font.

Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select the
3.
Enter the page margins.

The plot will be surrounded by empty spaces on four sides. The Margins
control the dimension of the empty spaces.
4.
Enter a scaling factor in "Scaling factor".

The scaling factor allows you to adjust the size of the image on the printed
page. When the scaling factor is less than 1.0, a larger portion of the plot
will be printed. The scaling factor does not affect the font size.
5.
Click on "Print black and white" to print the curves in black and white.
6.
Click on "OK". The dialog box will disappear and printing will begin.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND
The Misc | Export Graph command in the DS Relays Window lets you create a Window Metafile or Enhanced
Window Metafile that corresponds to the curves and other graphics currently displayed on the screen. These are
vector graphic files that can be imported to other Windows programs such as Microsoft Word and AutoCAD.
TO SAVE RELAY CURVES AS A WINDOWS METAFILE OR ENHANCED WINDOWS MATA FILE:
1.
Select the Misc | Export Graph command.

metafile.
choice. A message box will appear informing you that the picture has
been exported.
Press OK to continue.
354 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command in the DS Relays Window lets you copy the entire graph being
displayed to the window clipboard. The picture is stored in the clipboard in the enhanced Windows metafile
format. You can paste the picture into other Windows programs such as Microsoft Word and AutoCad.
TO COPY THE GRAPHS DISPLAYED:

1.
Select the Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command.

A dialog box will appear informing you that the graph is copied to the
clipboard.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
This command lets you specify the options for the DS Relays Window. These include the (1) unit of time, (2)
color of the grid, (3) whether to display the relay test quantity in the TTY Window and (4) font size.
TO SPECIFY THE OPTIONS FOR THE DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1.
Select the Misc | Options command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the options for various
aspects of the distance plot.
2.

"Seconds" to use seconds as the units of time.
3.
Select the Grid Color. Click on "Light green", "Light blue" or "Yellow".
Note: Use the Misc | Grid On/Off command to display the gird.
4.
Click on "Shown in TTY" to display the Relay Test Quantity on the TTY
Window.
The pre- and post-fault voltage and secondary current of the relays will be
displayed in TTY Window when executing the Relay Operations for 1
Fault command. You can select and copy the relay test quantities in the
TTY Window to the clipboard, and then paste the data from the clipboard
to your text data file for relay testing.
5.
Click on "Font size" and select the desired font.

the text in the client area of the DS Relays Window.
6.
Click on "Show dynamic characteristics" to display the relays dynamic

characteristics on the screen. This option works only on mho relays.
7.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the graph will be redrawn with the
options you selected. Your options will be stored in the Window registry
and will be used automatically from now on.
356 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
GRID ON/OFF COMMAND
This command lets you turn the circular grid on or off.
TO TURN THE CIRCULAR GRID ON OR OFF:
1.
Select the Misc | Grid On/Off command.

The graph will be redrawn with the circular grid on or off.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
LOAD REGION COMMAND
This command displays a specified load region on the complex plane. This is designed as an aid to avoid load
encroachment on distance characteristics.
TO DISPLAY THE LOAD REGION:
1.
Select the Misc | Load Region command.

A dialog box will appear asking for the load region parameters.
2.
Enter the maximum load in MVA or amperes.

NERCs recommendation 8A recommends a value of 150% of the lines long-term
current rating.
3.
Enter the minimum power factor of the load. If the line angle is known, the
power factor is equal to the cosine of the line angle.
4.
Enter the loads nominal kV and per-unit value.

A voltage that is lower than one per-unit will make load encroachment more likely.
A value is 0.85 per-unit is recommended by NERCs recommendation 8A.
5.
Click on Forward load region or Reverse load region.
6.
Click on "Show" to display the load region.

The load region will appear on the distance relay window.
358 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
6.
Remove the load region from the distance relay window.

Select the Misc | Load Region command.
The previous dialog box will appear.
Click on "Hide.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
This command lets you close the DS Relay Window and return to the Main Window.
TO CLOSE THE DS RELA Y WINDOW:
1.
360 SECTION 3
Select the Misc | Close Window command to close the DS Relay Window.
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
RELAY CHARACTERISTICS COMMAND
This Add | Relay Characteristics command in the DS Relay Window lists the distance relays that are in the
vicinity of the first relay and lets you add one of them to the plot in either the forward or reverse direction.
TO ADD A SECOND DISTANCE RELAY TO THE PLOT:
1.
Select the Add | Relay Characteristics command.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if two relay
curves are already being displayed.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the relay to be added.
2.
Select from the dropdown list at the upper-left corner what relays you want to be
include in the list box.
- Relays in this relay group. List only relays that are within the same relay
group as the first relay on the plot.
- Relays in vicinity: Set tier number to 0 to list relays at the same bus as
the first relay, 1 for relays at buses that are one bus away, and so
on.
- Relays backed up by this group: Lists relays that are backed up by the
first relay, as determine by the coordinating-pair information.
- Backup relays of this group: Lists the first relays backups as determine
by the coordinating-pair information.
- All primary and backup relays of this group: List relays in coordinating
pairs involving the first relay.
- Relay on remote bus: Lists relays at the remote end of the first relays
branch.
Each relay in the list is identified by the relay name, the branch name, and the
branch name.
3.
Select the relay want to add to the plot by marking its check box.
SECTION 3
4.
Specify the position of the origin for the second relay.

Enter the coordinates in polar form; with the magnitude (in primary
ohms) and angle (in degrees) in the Ohm and Deg. edit boxes,
respectively.
The offset is initialized to the magnitude and characteristic angle of the
line impedance if the branch of the first relay group is a line.
5.
Select the orientation.

Click on "Forward" to display the second relay characteristics with a forward
orientation. Click on Reverse to display in the opposite orientation.
6.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the characteristics of the selected relay
will be displayed on the same plot. The parameters of the added relay will
be shown in a box to the right of the plot.
362 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND
This Add | Remote Branch Impedances command in the DS Relays Window shows graphically the impedance of
transmission lines that are attached to the remote bus. This graphical display is useful for checking the coverage
of zone 2 as a percentage of the remote line impedances.
TO ADD REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES:
1.
Select the Add | Remote Impedances command.

The impedances of the remote transmission lines will be displayed as
dotted lines on the plot. The length and orientation of the dotted lines
reflect the impedance of the lines in primary ohms. The program displays
line information in separate notation boxes. You rearrange position of
these notation boxes using the mouse
Note: Because of infeeds, you should not expect the impedance of faults
on these remote lines to always lie directly on the line characteristics.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Annotation command in the DS Relays Window lets you add an annotation anywhere in the plot. You can
use the annotations to label the relay characteristics or to mark certain features and modifications that warrant
special attention. You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for printing and delete them immediately
afterwards. The user interface for the annotations is the same as that in the Main Window. To execute this
command you must first select the annotation location with the left mouse button.
1.

2.
Select the Add | Annotation command.

3.
Enter an annotation with up to 50 characters in the edit box.
4.
Click on "Mark the annotation" to put a diamond shaped marker just left of the
text.
5.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will close and the crosshair will be replaced by the new
annotation.
364 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Add | Picture From Clipboard command in the lets you paste a picture that you have previously copied to
windows clipboard anywhere in the plot. The picture can come from the main window of DistriView, or from
another drawing program such as Illustrator or AutoCad. You can paste up to 16 pictures on the plot. To execute
this command you must first select a location with the mouse button.
1.

2.
Select the Add | Picture from Clipboard command.

The picture will be displayed at the location you have selected.
Note: The command will be dimmed if the windows clipboard contains
no picture in compatible format.
3.
Resize and Move picture.

To move the picture click left mouse button in side the picture and drag
to the new location.
To resize the picture, click left mouse button near an anchor point on
picture side or corner and drag the mouse until the new size has been
achieved.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
ALL BUT 1ST RELAY COMMAND
This command removes the second distance relay from the plot.
TO REMOVE THE SECOND DISTANCE RELAY FROM THE PLOT:
1.
Select the Remove | All But lst Relay command.

The screen will be redrawn to show only the characteristics of the first
relay.
366 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND
This command removes the remote-branch impedances that was added using the Add | Remote Branch
Impedances command.
TO REMOVE REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES:
1.
Select the Remove | Remote Branch Impedances command.

The screen will be redrawn to show only the characteristics of the relays.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Remove | Annotation command in the Curves Window lets you remove an annotation. To execute the
command, you must first select an annotation with the mouse.
TO REMOVE AN ANNOTATION:
1.
Select the annotation you want to delete.

Click the left mouse button once on the annotation you want to delete.
The annotation frame will become dotted.
2.
Select the Remove | Annotation command.

The annotation will be removed from the screen.
368 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
PICTURE COMMAND
The Remove | Picture command in the Curves Window lets you remove a picture. To execute the command, you
must first select a picture with the mouse.
TO REMOVE A PICTURE:
1.
Select the picture you want to delete.

Click the left mouse button once on the picture you want to delete.
The picture frame will become dotted.
2.
Select the Remove | Picture command.

The picture will be removed from the screen.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
RELAY SETTING COMMAND
This command allows you to change the settings of one of the relays being displayed in the DS Relays Window.
TO CHANGE THE RELAY SETTINGS:
1.
Select the Edit | Relay Setting command.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select the name of the relay to edit.
2.
Select the relay you want to edit and click on "OK".

The Adjust Relay dialog box will be replaced by the Info dialog box for the
selected relay. See Section 6, Relay Dialog Boxes, for details on relay
parameters.
3.
Modify the parameters in the Info dialog box and then click on "OK".
The Info dialog box will disappear and the characteristic curves of the
relay will be redrawn to reflect the new parameters.
370 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
This command lets you edit an annotation on the DS Relays Window.
TO EDIT AN ANNOTATION:
1.
Select the annotation.

Click the left mouse button on the annotation of interest.
2.
Select the Edit | Annotation command.

The annotation dialog box will appear.
3.
Edit the annotation and press OK.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND
The Transparent Picture command allows you to toggle the background of a selected picture between transparent
and opaque.
TO MAKE THE BACKGROUND OF A PICTURE TRANSPARENT OR OPAQUE:
1.
Select the picture.

Click the right mouse button on a p icture that was pasted on the DS
Relays Window.
2.
Select the Edit | Transparent Picture command.

The background of the selected picture will change from transparent to
opaque, or vise versa.
372 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
FIND ORIGIN COMMAND
This Edit | Find Origin command causes the DS Relay Windows to be refreshed with the origin of the plot back to
its default location near the lower left corner of your monitor. This command is useful after you have scrolled the
DS Relays Window or changed the zoom setting.
TO REDRAW THE DS RELAYS WINDOW WITH THE ORIGIN AT THE LOWER LEFT CORNER:
1.
Select the Edit | Find Origin command.

The axes and characteristics of the relays will be redrawn on the plot using
the default position of the origin.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
SECOND RELAY ORIGIN COMMAND
This command will let you adjust the position of second relay shown on the plot. When you add a second relay
to the DS Relays Window with one the commands under the Add menu, you can specify the origin and
orientation of the second relay. This Second Relay Origin Command lets you change the position of the second
relay characteristics at any time if the default position does not suit your needs.
TO SPECIFY THE POSITION AND ORIENTATION OF THE SECOND RELAY CHARACTERISTICS:
1.
Select the Edit | Second Relay Origin command.

Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the characteristics of
only one relay are being displayed.
2.
Specify the position of the origin for the second relay.

Enter the coordinates in polar form; with the magnitude (in primary
ohms) and angle (in degrees) in the Ohm and Deg. edit boxes,
respectively.
3.
Select the orientation.

Click on "Forward" to display the second relay characteristics with a forward
orientation. Click on Reverse to display in the opposite orientation.
4.

The second relay will be redrawn with the new origin and orientation you
specified.
374 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND
The relay descriptions can be moved anywhere on the plot. This command causes all the descriptions to be put
back to their default locations. This command is useful after you have moved the relay descriptions, scrolled the
DS Relays Window, or changed the zoom size of the plot.
TO REARRANGE THE CAPTIONS:
1.
Select the Edit | Rearrange Captions command.

The captions of all the relays will be relocated to their default positions in
the DS Relays Window. The relay descriptions will be at the upper right
corner. The fault description, if any, will be located below the last relay
description.
SECTION 3
DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND
This command lets you graphically display the operations of the selected distance relays for all the faults that
have been simulated.
TO SHOW RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS:
1.
Select the Show | Relay Operations for All Faults command.

simulation.
The screen will be redrawn to show the fault impedances for all the faults
that have been simulated. This command will also automatically write a
table of relay zones, operating times and apparent impedances to the TTY
Window.
376 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND
This command lets you show graphically the operations of the selected distance relays for a fault that was
previously simulated.
TO SHOW RELAY OPERATIONS FOR A FAULT:
1.

simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a fault. The list box will
contain all the faults that have been simulated.
2.
Select a fault and then click on "Display".

If the fault description takes more than one line, you can select it by
clicking on any one of those lines.
The dialog box will disappear and the window will be redrawn to show the
apparent impedances. The program will simultaneously update the
solution on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.
The fault description is shown below the relay parameter box. The
apparent impedances that are plotted vary depending on the relay type.
For most phase relays, the following 3 quantities are plotted:
B-C Unit: (Vb-Vc)/ (Ib-Ic)
C-A Unit: (Vc-Va)/ (Ic-Ia).
A-B Unit: (Va-Vb)/ (Ia-Ib)
For most ground relays, the following 3 quantities are plotted:
A Unit:
B Unit:
C Unit:
Va / (Ia+3KIo)
Vb / (Ib+3KIo)
Vc / (Ic+3KIo).
Va, Vb, and Vc are the phase voltages. Ia, Ib, and Ic are the phase
currents. Io is the zero sequence current. K = (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1).
SECTION 3
It is important to note that the graphical characteristics and the apparent

impedances shown are for information purposes only. The logic that
determines tripping is completely separate from the logic that draws the
relay characteristics and the apparent impedances.
The result of the tripping logic is shown in text below the apparent
impedances. It indicates which units are tripped and which are restrained.
The units that are tripped are highlighted by a red check mark. The time
delay is also shown. (Details on the tripping logic can be found in Section
2 of the Distance Relay Editor Users Manual.)
The relay characteristics shown are the so-called static characteristics
that assume no cross polarization or voltage memory. The actual tripping
area can be larger than the static characteristics. It is possible, therefore,
for a relay to trip when the apparent impedance is outside of the static
characteristics. When in doubt, you should rely on the tripping results
shown in text, and not on the graphical display of the relay characteristics
or the apparent impedances.
A summary of the fault is written to the TTY Window. This includes all of the
operating quantities used to determine whether the relay trips or not. The
relay test quantities (consisting of the currents and voltages before and after
the fault) are also written to the TTY Window if the Relay Test Quantities
option is selected within the Misc. | Options command.
378 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
This command lets you open the TTY Window to view its contents.
TO SHOW THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the Show | TTY Window command.

The TTY Window will appear on top of the DS Relays Window.
2.
Use the scroll bars to view different parts of the window.

3.
SECTION 3
3.5 TTY WINDOW COMMANDS

The TTY Window displays program output in the traditional text form. (Historical note: TTY stands for
"Teletype", the standard text -only terminal used with early computers.) OneLiner writes to the TTY Window
when:
A text data file is being imported, exported or added to the system: The text informs you of the program's
progress and reports any data errors.
A change file is being processed: The text informs you of any data errors and the number of changes made.
A relay data file is imported: The text informs you of any data errors and the total number of relays imported.
Out of service equipment are listed using the Network | Outage List command in the Main Window.
Reference angle of all generators are automatically set using the Network | Set Generator Ref. Angle command
in the Main Window: The text informs you of any changes in generator reference angle.
Fault solutions are being written to an output file using the Fault | Solution Report command in the Main
Window: The text informs you of the program's progress.
Relay coordination is being checked: The text shows the relay current, relay operating time and the
coordinating time interval.
You press on the Write to TTY button in the overcurrent relay test value dialog box: The TTY shows a table
of test currents and time delays.
Fault solutions are being displayed graphically in the Main Window by using the Faults | Show Solution on
1-line command in the Main Window. The default output shows just a fault summary but you can get a
detailed textual output if you click on the "Write to TTY Window also" check box in the Solution on 1-line
dialog box.
The fault operating points are being displayed for all faults by execution of the Relay Operations for All
Faults command in the Curves Window or the DS Relays Window. The text shows a table of relay
operations for all the faults that have been simulated.
The fault operating points are being displayed for a single fault by execution of the Relay Operations for 1
Fault command in the Curves Window or the DS Relays Window. The text shows the summary of the fault
and relay quantities.
The TTY Window opens automatically in some of these cases. For the remainder, you must open the window
manually using the TTY Window command in the Main Window, the Curves Window and the DS Relays
Window. You can minimize the TTY Window while you view one-line diagram or relay curves.
The program stores the contents of the TTY Window in a buffer. The size of the buffer grows as more text is put
into it, until the size reaches roughly 100 pages of text. Thereafter, any additional text is wrapped around to the
beginning of the buffer. You can clear the TTY buffer at any time with the Menu | Clear command.
The commands in the TTY Window are described in this section.
380 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
TTY Window
MENU TTY
CLEAR COMMAND
This command lets you clear the contents of the TTY Window.
TO CLEAR THE CONTENTS OF THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the TTY | Clear command.

The TTY Window will be redrawn to show a blank screen.
SECTION 3
TTY Window
MENU TTY
SELECT FONT COMMAND
This command lets you choose the font, font style, and size of the text displayed in the TTY Window.
TO SELECT THE FONT USED IN THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the TTY | Select Font command.

Use the controls in the standard font-selection dialog box to select the
The dialog box will disappear and DistriView will use the selected font to
display the text in TTY Window.
382 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
TTY Window
MENU TTY
PRINT SELECTED TEXT COMMAND
This command lets you print the text that you have selected. You must select one or more lines of text before
issuing this command.
TO PRINT SELECTED TEXT:
1.
Select the text that you want to print.

The selected text will become highlighted.
2.
Select the TTY | Print Selected Text command.

Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if no text has
been selected.
The standard font dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
For best effects, you should select a fixed-pitch font, such as Courier,
Courier New or LinePrinter.
3.
Use the controls in the standard font-selection dialog box to select the font you
want for printing. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and printing will begin.
SECTION 3
TTY Window
MENU TTY
SAVE SELECTED TEXT COMMAND
This command lets you save the text that you have selected to a file. You must select one or more lines of text
before issuing this command
TO SAVE SELECTED TEXT TO A FILE:
1.
Select the text that you want to save.

2.
Select the TTY | Save Selected Text command.

been selected.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the output file.
3.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the output file name.
It is recommended that you name all your output report files with the .REP
extension.
4.
Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the selected text will be written to the
file.
384 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
TTY Window
TTY MENU
This command lets you close the TTY Window.
TO CLOSE THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the Menu | Close window command.

The TTY Window will disappear. The contents of the TTY Window are
not affected by this command.
SECTION 3
TTY Window
EDIT MENU
SELECT ALL COMMAND
This command lets you select all the text in the TTY Window.
TO SELECT ALL OF THE TEXT IN THE TTY WINDOW:
1.
Select the Edit | Select All command.

All the text in TTY Window will become highlighted.
386 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
TTY Window
EDIT MENU
COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
This command copies text that you have selected to the clipboard. It is designed to help you transfer text to other
Windows programs, such as text editors or word processors. You must select one or more lines of text before
issuing this command.
TO COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD:
1.
Select the text that you want to print.

2.
Select the Edit | Copy Selected Text to Clipboard command.

been selected.
The selected text will be copied to the clipboard.
SECTION 3
TTY Window
EDIT MENU
FIND COMMAND
This command lets you search for a string in the TTY text buffer. You can search for multiple occurrences of the
string in forward or backward direction from current selection
TO FIND A TEXT STRING:
1.
Select the Edit | Find command.

A Search TTY dialog box will be shown.
2.
Type the search string into the edit box labeled Find text.
3.
Click on Find Forward or Find Backward to look for the string in the
corresponding direction from currently selected line.
If a match is found the line will be highlighted on TTY window. You can
continue to search either forward or backward till the last occurrence of
the search string in that direction.
4.
Click the "Done" button when the search is completed.

The search window will be closed.
388 SECTION 3
COMMAND REFERENCE
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
4.1 BUSES
A bus is identified by its name and nominal kV. Optional data include a bus number, a location name (usually the
name of the substation), an area number and a zone number. A bus can be associated with one or more circuit
breakers. Please refer to the Breaker Rating Module Users Manual for description of the breaker model.
4.2 GENERATORS, LOADS,AND SHUNTS

Each bus can have a generator, a load, a shunt and a switched shunt.. The models for generators, loads, shunts
and switched shunts are described in the following sections.
Generators
Each bus can have at most one generator, but each generator can have up to 32 units.
Short Circuit Studies
In short circuit simulations, the generator is modeled by a Thevenin equivalent in each sequence network. The
equivalent in the positive sequence consists of a voltage source in series with an impedance. There are three
different impedances for the positive sequence: the subtransient impedance, the transient impedance and the
synchronous impedance. The user can select any one of these three impedances in the Faults | Options command.
The equivalent in the negative and zero sequences consists of an impedance only. See figure below.
Figure 4.1: Generator model. R1+jX1 is the positive-sequence impedance. v is the voltage across the internal
voltage source. R2+jX2 is the negative-sequence impedance. R0+jX0 is the zero-sequence impedance. Rg+jXg is
the impedance between the neutral of the generator and ground.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 389
The internal voltage of the generator, v, is equal to:
The voltage you specified in the Faults | Options dialog box and at 0.0 degree when the Assumed flat
option is selected.
The open-circuit voltage and reference angle you specified in the generators info dialog box if From a linear
network solution voltage profile option is selected. See Section 4.9 for details.
A value based on the power flow solution if starting from a solved case.
Power Flow Studies

A generator bus can be controlling voltage or having fixed MW and MVAR schedule. A voltage-controlling
generator can control the voltage magnitude at its local bus terminal or the voltage magnitude at a remote
location.
Loads
Each bus can have at most one load, but each load can have up to 32 units. Each unit has a constant-power,
constant-current and constant-impedance component.
Short Circuit Studies
The aggregate load at each bus is modeled as a constant shunt admittances between the bus terminal and
ground.
The load admittance, Y (in mhos) is computed from the formula:
Y = f*/(3*v*v)
where f is the load (MW+jMVAR) and v is bus voltage (kV, line-to-ground). The bus voltage, v, is equal to:
A fixed voltage magnitude (usually 1.0 per-unit) at 0.0 degree if starting from a flat bus voltage profile.
The calculated voltage if starting from a from a linear network solution voltage profile. See Section 4.9 for
details.
The power flow solution voltage if starting from a solved power flow case.
The program uses the same shunt admittance is used in all three sequences, unless you specify that the load is
ungrounded. An ungrounded load has infinite impedance in the zero sequence.
Power Flow Studies
In each iteration of the power flow, the power consumption of the constant-impedance and constant-current
portions of the load are updated to reflect the loads dependence on voltage. The constant-power portion of the
load is modeled as is, without any special treatment.
Shunts
Each bus can have at most one shunt, but each shunt can have up to 32 units. The shunts in the positive and
zero sequence can be specified separately. The positive- and negative-sequence shunts are assumed to be the
same. In both short-circuit and power-flow studies, shunts are modeled as passive admittances between the bus
terminal and ground. An ungrounded shunt can be modeled with a zero-sequence admittance of zero.
Switched Shunt
Each bus can have at most one switched shunt. A switched shunt is a bank of reactors and/or capacitors that can
be switched on and off to regulate voltage. The switched shunts are modeled the same way as fixed shunts.
390 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
4.3 TRANSMISSION LINES & SERIES

CAPACITORS/REACTORS
Each transmission line is modeled as a pi-circuit. See figure below. The shunt admittances at the two ends of the
line can be different. The unbalanced shunts can be used to model reactors or capacitors that are switched on
and off with the line. However, lines with unbalanced shunt admittances cannot be mutually coupled to other
lines.
Figure 4.2: The transmission line model. In the positive and negative sequence, R+jX is the series impedance,
and G1+jB1 and G2+jB2 are the shunt admittances. The parameters R0+jX0, G10+jB10 and G20+jB20 are defined
similarly in the zero sequence.
A series capacitor/reactor is a simplified line with a capacitor or reactor between the two terminals. The reactances
X and X0 are assumed to be the same and R and R0 must be zero.
When a series capacitor is modeled with MOV protection, the overall impedance of the MOV/capacitor assembly
is a function of the protective-level current, defined as Vpk/(1.414*X), where Vpk is the maximum capacitor voltage
maintained by the presence of the MOV, and X is the reactance of the capacitor bank. The protective-level current
is typically 2.0 to 2.5 times the rated current of the capacitor bank. This model of the MOV-protected series
capacitor was originally proposed by Goldsworthy (D.L. Goldsworthy, A linearized Model for MOV-Protected
Series Capacitors, IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. PWRS-2, No. 4, November 1987.)
The simultaneous-faults logic in OneLiner was modified to handle the MOV-protected series capacitors based on
the Goldsworthy model. The solution is done in the phase domain (and not in the sequence domain) because the
MOVs on the three phases of a series capacitor can have unequal impedances in an unbalanced fault. The shortcircuit solution has to be iterative because the MOV characteristics are nonlinear. You can turn on or off the
iteration logic for simulating MOV-protected capacitors using the Fault | Option command
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 391
4.4 PHASE SHIFTERS

The phase shifter model for both short-circuit and power-flow studies is shown below. The impedances and
phase shift angle are specified by the user. An automatic control feature in the Power Flow Program adjusts the
shift angle to control the MW flow through the phase shifter.
Figure 4.3: Phase shifter model. "a" is the phase shift. A positive value causes the voltage angle of Bus1 to
lead that of Bus2 in the positive sequence. R+jX is the leakage impedance and B is the magnetizing susceptance
in the positive sequence. The parameters R2+jX2 and jB2 are defined similarly in the negative sequence. The
parameters R0+jX0 and jB0 are defined similarly in the zero sequence.
4.5 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL INFORMATION

OneLiner offers a wide variety of 2- and 3-winding transformer models, including auto-transformers and
transformers with complicated neutral connections. The transformer models in OneLiner are based on the paper:
V. Brandwajn, H.W. Dommel and I.I. Dommel, "Matrix Representation of Three-Phase N-Winding Transformers
for Steady State and Transient Studies," IEEE Trans. on PAS, June 1982.
The same method is used in the Electromagnetic Transients Program (EMTP) for modeling multi-phase
transformers.
The input data for each transformer consist of its physical parameters that can be obtained readily from the
manufacturer's data sheets or from parameters of existing equivalent circuits. The equivalent circuits for the
transformers are formulated by the program, and never by the user. This approach enables OneLiner to:
Model the plus or minus 30 degree shift in wye-delta transformers;

Represent complicated transformer types exactly;
Avoid the use of fictitious buses;
Output explicitly, in amps, the neutral current for each auto-transformer and the tertiary circulating current for
each 3-winding transformer.
Some general features of the transformer models are described in the following sections.
392 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
Impedances of 2-Winding Transformers

Each 2-winding transformer has two terminal buses: Bus1 and Bus2. The short-circuit impedance of the
transformer, Zps, is measured in a short circuit test in which the Bus1 terminal is excited while the Bus2 terminal is
shorted to ground. In the case of a wye-delta transformer, the Bus1 terminal is assumed to be connected to the
wye winding. (Otherwise, it is not possible to measure a finite zero-sequence short -circuit impedance.) The
positive- and zero-sequence impedances are always the same for a transformer that is made up of separate, singlephase units.
The short-circuit impedances are in per-unit based on the transformers base MVA and the tap voltages (and not
the nominal voltages).
Impedances of 3-Winding Transformers
Each 3-winding transformer has three terminal buses: Bus1, Bus2 and the tertiary bus. The three short-circuit
impedances of a 3-winding transformer are defined as follows:
Zps:
Zpt:
Zst:
Impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the Bus2 terminal shorted to ground and the tertiary
open-circuited.
Impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the tertiary shorted to ground and the Bus2 terminal
open-circuited.
Impedance measured at the Bus2 terminal with the tertiary shorted to ground and the Bus1 terminal
open-circuited.
For wye-wye-delta transformers, you have the option of entering the zero-sequence short -circuit impedances
Zpso, Zpto and Zsto, or the impedances of the classical T model. If you decide to enter the short-circuit
impedances, please note that Zpso should be smaller than Zps.
The impedances of a 3-winding transformer are in per-unit based on the transformers base MVA and the tap
voltages (and not the nominal voltages).
Tap Voltages
The tap voltages of the transformer windings affect the turns ratio of the transformer as well as the short-circuit
impedance values. (See the last paragraph under "Short Circuit Impedances".) The transformer terminals are
assumed to be connected to the same physical winding taps in the short-circuit test as in actual use. The tap
voltages you specify must be in kV, line-to-line.
Magnetizing Impedance
The magnetizing impedance of a transformer is the apparent impedance measured at a terminal with the other
terminals open-circuited. The magnetizing impedance of most transformers is very large (>50 per unit) and can be
ignored in short circuit studies.
The zero-sequence magnetizing impedance of three-leg-core transformers is a notable exception. In some cases it
is as low as 1.0 per unit. The low impedance is a direct result of the 3-leg-core construction. When a set of 3phase windings is excited by zero-sequence current, the three fluxes are forced out of the iron core to return
through the air or oil where the magnetic permeability is much smaller than that of iron. The low permeability in
the flux path results in low apparent impedance of the windings.
The program has provisions for modeling the magnetizing susceptance of 2- and 3-winding transformers.
(Susceptance is -1/reactance.) The user should consider the modeling of magnetizing impedance of 3-leg-core
transformers if high accuracy is desired.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 393
Figure 4.5: A three-leg-core transformer. This figure shows the fluxes produced by zero-sequence current.
394 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
4.6 2-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

The program offers 2-winding transformer models in five basic configurations shown in figure 4.6. Note that in
the case of a wye-delta transformer, the wye-connected winding is attached to the Bus1 side.
A number of variations can be derived from these five basic configurations by varying the grounding
impedances. Figure 4.7 shows how this can be done for the basic configuration with two wye connected
windings.
Figure 4.6: Basic two-winding transformer configurations.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 395
Figure 4.7: Four variations of the basic wye-wye configuration. Note that infinite impedance is signified by the
value 1.0E8 + j1.0E8.
In addition to the transformer winding configurations of Figure 4.6, the program also supports three zigzag
winding configurations:
Zigzag-wye with wye leading 30 degrees
Zigzag-wye with wye lagging 30 degrees
Zigzag-delta (with no phase shift)
396 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
4.7 3-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

The program offers a variety of 3-winding transformer models. The basic configurations available are shown in
Figure 4.8.
Again, a number of variations can be derived from these basic configurations by varying the grounding
impedances. See Figure 4.7 for examples on how this can be done for the basic configuration where the first two
windings are wye-connected.
The allowable test configurations for 3-winding transformers are shown in Figure 4.9.
Figure 4.8: Basic three-winding transformer configurations in use. The 'in use' configurations
must be one of the configurations shown in this figure.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 397
Figure 4.8 (continued): Basic three-winding transformer configurations in use. Numerous variations
can be derived from the three basic forms on this page. See Figure 4.7.
398 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
Figure 4.8 (continued): Basic three-winding transformer configurations in use.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 399
4.8 ZERO-SEQUENCE MUTUAL COUPLING

Transmission lines with balanced pi representation may be coupled to each other in the zero sequence. The user
can specify the mutual coupling between any two transmission lines. The mutual coupling parameters include:
The per-unit mutual coupling impedance.

For each line, the beginning and ending percentage that is mutually coupled to the other line.
The mutual impedances between two lines can be positive or negative, depending on the orientation of the two
lines. The orientation of a line is implied by the order of the end-bus names. We will illustrate this idea with the
example below.
For Line a, the specification "122 39" implies one orientation, while "39 122" implies an opposite one. If the line
pair consisting of Line a and Line b is specified as either:
Line a
Line b
122 39
79 443
or
Line a
Line b
39 122
443 79
then the mutual parameters Rab+jXab is positive because the orientation corresponds directly with the physical
layout of the two lines.
If the line pair consisting of Line a and Line b is specified as either:
Line a
Line b
122 39
443 79
or
Line a
Line b
39 122
79 443
then the mutual parameters Rab+jXab is negative because the orientation of Line a is opposite to the physical
layout of Line b in each case.
400 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
4.9 PREFAULT VOLTAGE PROFILE

The program has three prefault-voltage options, (1) Assumed flat, (2) From a linear network solution and (3)
from a power flow solution. You can select one of these options using the Fault | Options command in the Main
Window. The "Assumed flat" option is the default.
Assumed flat option
All the bus voltages are set to a fixed magnitude (usually 1.0 per-unit) at 0 degrees in prefault under this option.
The user can specify the flat-bus voltage magnitude in the Faults | Options dialog box.
A uniform voltage profile requires zero current flow in prefault state. Whenever necessary, the program inserts
artificial current sources in the network to compensate all prefault current flows. These current sources are used
in the following cases:
1)
2)
In parallel with any positive-sequence shunts or loads. The output of these current sources are labeled as
"fictitious current sources" in the printed output.
At both terminals of a phase shifter and wye-delta transformer. The outputs of these current sources are not
shown in the printed output because the current injected into one terminal of a branch is canceled by an
equal but opposite current source at the other terminal.
From a linear network solution option

Under this option (called Flat generator start in previous versions of OneLiner) each generator is modeled by an
internal voltage source behind the generator impedance. The user can specify the magnitude and angle of the
internal voltage source in the generators info dialog box.
The terminal voltages of the generators, as well as the voltages of the other buses, are computed explicitly by the
program before any fault simulations. The magnitude of the prefault voltages may or may not equal to the
generators open-circuit voltage, depending on the network configuration. You can see the prefault voltages in:
1)
2)
the printed output, and

the TTY Window when you display the fault results on the one-line diagram.
The prefault voltages are uniform across the network if, and only if, there is no current flows in any of the
branches before the fault is applied. In practical terms, this means that:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
There can be no loads or shunts in the positive sequence, and

The magnitude of the open-circuit voltage of all the generators are the same, and
The tap kVs of the transformers are set to the nominal kV of the terminal buses.
The generators are phased properly. You can use the Network | Set Genenerator Ref. Angle command to set
all the generator reference angles automatically.
All the transformers have correct phase shift. You can verify this with the Check | Network Anomalies
command.
Even when all of the above conditions are met, the prefault voltage magnitudes may still come out slightly
different the generators open-circuit voltage. The possible causes are:
1)
Voltage rise caused by the very small shunt capacitances that were inserted into the branches by the
program to avoid numerical singularity.
2)
The presence of phase shifters.
From a Power Flow Solution option

A true, non-linear power flow solution is used as the prefault voltage profile. All the loads are converted to
constant impedances for this simulation.
To use this option when your Power Flow Program is a standalone executable, you must first solve the power
flow within the ASPEN Power Flow Program and save the case within the OLR file.
SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS 401
If you use this option when your Power Flow Program is in the same executable file as OneLiner, the program
will automatically prompt you to solve the power flow before solving a short circuit.
402 SECTION 4
NETWORK MODELS
SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The text data file is a text file that contains the parameters of the power network. The text data file is intended
primarily as a medium of exchange between ASPEN programs and foreign programs.
OneLiner and Power Flow reads the text data file under the File | Open Text Data File command, and it produces a
network data file under the File | Export Network command. The text data file contains the following information:
Miscellaneous system parameters
File comments
Bus data
Bus regulation data
Generation data
Load data
Shunt data
Switched shunt data
DC line data
Transmission line data (also for series capacitors)
Phase shifter data
Two-winding transformer data
Three-winding transformer data
Zero-sequence mutual coupling data
Area data
Zone data
Breaker data
The format of this data is described in this section.
It should be noted that the text data file format is designed for computer readability. Users should not try to read
the text data file nor edit it by hand. The following guidelines pertain to the text data file format:
1. All alphanumeric data must be within quotation marks. You can specify whether to use single or double
quotation mark as the string delimiter in the Network | Options dialog box. You choice of the string delimiter
is stated in the beginning of the text data file. See item 6 in the [SYSTEM PARAMETERS] section.
2. Adjacent data items must be separated by one or more spaces.
3. Adjacent sections are separated by one blank line.
4. If the data for an object takes more than one line, add the character \ to the end of each line (except the last
one) to let the program know that more data for the same object will follow.
5. The sections do not have to be in the order shown, except (a) the [ONELINER AND POWER FLOW DATA]
section must be first, (b) the [BUS DATA] section must precede sections that refer to bus names, (c) the
[BUS REGULATION DATA] section must precede the [GENERATOR DATA] section, and the
[TRANSMISSION LINE DATA] section must precede the [MUTUAL DATA] section.
SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT 403
6.
7.
8.
Each object must have all the values listed before the equal sign, which are needed for identification
purposes.
Users should enter all the values after the equal sign. If the data stream for the object terminates before all
the data values are read in, the program will replace the values omitted (after the last value entered) by their
default values.
All per-unit values are in system base, except as noted otherwise.
5.2 FILE HEADER

The file contains the key words [ONELINER AND POWER FLOW DATA] and the name and version of the
program that created the text file.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [ONELINER AND POWER FLOW DATA]. This is followed by the
data described below. A blank line ends the section. The program-version line is required.
File Header Format
The file information begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
String delimiter
You can specify whether character strings are enclosed by single or double quotation marks. The syntax is:
delimiter= or delimiter= The default is the single quotation mark. This line is optional, but if you want to
use it, it should be the first one in the section.
2.
Application Program Name

The program name that follows 'app= ' is the program that created this file, enclosed by quotation marks.
3.
Program Version
The numbers that follow ver= are the year the program was released, the version letter enclosed by
quotation marks, and the major and minor version number, separated by a period.
4.
Creation Date
The date following 'date= ' is the date on which the network text file was created, enclosed by quotation
marks.
An example of this section is shown below.

[ONELINER AND POWER FLOW DATA]
delimiter=
app= 'ASPEN OneLiner and Power Flow'
ver= 2003 'A 9.1
date= 'Fri Aug 08 10:58:15 2003'
5.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

This section contains the system MVA as well as a number of parameters that are used in OneLiner and Power
Flow.
Section Header
The first line in the section must say: [SYSTEM PARAMETERS]. This is followed by the data described below.
A blank line ends the section.
404 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
System Parameters Format

The system parameters begin immediately after the section header. Only the Base MVA item is required. The
others are optional and can be omitted. The data format is described below.
1.
Base MVA
The number following mva= is the system per-unit base MVA. The default value is 100.
2.
Generator Impedance for Short Circuits

The number following genZtype= tells the program which of the positive-sequence generator impedances
to use for short circuit simulations: 0 for subtransient, 1 for transient, and 2 for synchronous. Zero is default.
3.
Power Flow Parameters

The parameters following pf= are for power flow simulations. The parameters are, in this order:
Maximum Iterations: The iterative solution will stop when the iteration count reaches this number, even if
the power flow has not converged. The default value is 20.
MW Tolerance:
The power flow is considered converged if the maximum MW and MVAR bus
mismatches are less than their respective tolerances and the auto adjustment
constraints (if any) have been enforced. The default value is 1.0 MW.
MVAR Tolerance:
See explanation for MW Tolerance. The default value is 1.0 MVAR.
P Adj. Threshold:
Real power adjustment threshold. This value is meaningful only if the LTC,
MVAR-limit, area-interchange or remote voltage-control constraints are being
enforced. The program checks and enforces these constraints whenever the
maximum MW and MVAR bus mismatches are below this threshold and the Q Adj.
Threshold, respectively. The auto adjustment thresholds (P Adj. and Q Adj.
thresholds) must be at least twice as large as the convergence tolerances. The
default value is 20 MW.
Q Adj. Threshold:
See explanation of the P Adj. Threshold. The default value is 20 MVAR.
Enforcement Options: A bit field containing the automatic adjustment options used. The default is 0 for no
automatic adjustments.
4.
Short Circuit Parameters

The parameters following sc= are for short circuit simulations. They are listed below:
Prefault Voltage option: 0 for From linear network solution; 1 for Assumed flat; and 2 for From power
flow solution. 1 is the default.
Ignore Instantaneous: 1 to ignore the instantaneous unit of overcurrent relays; 0 otherwise. 0 is the default.
5.
Ignore Loads:
1 to ignore loads; 0 otherwise. 0 is the default.
Ignore Shunts:
1 to ignore switched shunts and shunts with + seq. components; 0 otherwise. 0 is

the default.
Ignore Line G+jB:
1 to ignore the shunt admittances of transmission lines; 0 otherwise. 0 is the

default.
Extend to 1.0 Pickup:
1 to extrapolate overcurrent relay curves to 1.0 times pickup; 0 otherwise. 0 is the

default.
Ignore Phase Shift:
1 to ignore phase shift of wye-delta transformers and phase shifters; 0 otherwise. 0

is the default.
Size Information (optional)

The size information lets the program know, at the very beginning of the file, roughly how many objects of
different kinds are in the file. This information enables the program to allocation the memory for these objects
just once, instead of doing it piecemeal as data are read in. This has the effect of speeding up the reading of
SECTION 5
very large files, sometimes by as much as a factor of 10. The size information include one or more of the
following, on separate lines:
'NObus= ':
Total number of buses
NOgen=:
Total number of generators
NOload=:
Total number of loads
NOcap=:
Total number of shunts
NOline=:
Total number of transmission lines
NOxfmr=:
Total number of 2-winding transformers
An example system-parameters section is shown below.
[SYSTEM PARAMETERS]
mva= 100
genZType= 0
pf= 20 1 1 20 20 6
sc= 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
NObus= 30
NOgen= 6
NOload= 21
NOline= 35
NOxfmr= 4
5.4 FILE COMMENTS

The file comments section contains comments on the system. The comments can be any description or notes the
user may want to attach to the file.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [FILE COMMENTS].
File Comments Section Format
This is followed by the comments, which can have up to 74 lines of text. Each line must be enclosed by quotation
marks and can have a maximum of 79 characters. A blank line ends the section.
An example file comments section with 3 lines is shown below.
[FILE COMMENTS]
' 29-BUS TEST SYSTEM'
'Summer peak load in 1998'
'Transformer between NEVADA and REUSENS is taken out of service'
5.5 BUS DATA

The bus data section contains bus names and other parameters.
Section Header
The first line in the bus data section must say: [BUS DATA]. This is followed by the data described below. A
blank line ends the section.
Bus Data Format
The bus data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each bus is described below.
406 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus, left justified, with a maximum of 12 characters. Any alpha-numeric characters
can be used, except for # , $ and the string delimiter (single or double quotation mark). The bus name is
enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
Base kV: Nominal, line-to-line, voltage of the bus in kV.
3.
Bus Number: Numerical identifier for the bus. Each bus may be assigned a number between 0 and 99999,
inclusive. The bus number is optional. However, if the bus number is not 0, it must be unique.
4.
Area Number: Area number of the area in which bus resides. The area number must be in the range 0-999,
inclusive. The default value is 1.
5.
Zone Number: Zone number of the zone in which bus resides. The zone number must be in the range 0-999,
inclusive. The default value is 1.
6.
Location Name: Location name for bus, maximum of 8 characters. The default value is first 8 characters of
bus name. The location name is enclosed in quotation marks. The location name is generally the name of the
substation.
7. Tap Bus Flag: 0 if it is a regular bus; 1 if it is a tap bus at the junction of two line sections.
8. Bus Voltage (real part): Real part of the bus voltage from a power flow solution, in per-unit.
9. Bus Voltage (imaginary part): Imaginary part of the bus voltage from a power flow solution, in per-unit.
10. State Plane X Coordinate: This is a floating-point number.
11. State Plane Y Coordinate: This is a floating-point number. The Y coordinate is assumed to increase in the
Up direction.
12. DistriView Substation Group Number: The DistriView substation group number must be in the range 0-999,
inclusive.
13. Transformer Midpoint Flag: 1 if this bus is a transformer midpoint; 0 otherwise.
14. Bus Symbol Length: 1 if the bus symbol is a dot, otherwise the length of the bus symbol in pixels. A minus
number means the bus was placed once, but it is currently hidden. Zero means the bus has never been
placed.
15. Bus Symbol Angle: Meaningful only when the bus symbol is not a dot. An angle of 0 means the bus bar is
horizontal; 90 means the bus bar is vertical.
16. Bus Symbol X Coordinate: Meaningful only when the bus symbol length is not zero. This must be an integer
between 32000 and 32000.
17. Bus Symbol Y Coordinate: Meaningful only when the bus symbol length is not zero. This must be an integer
between 32000 and 32000. This Y coordinate increase in the Down direction.
18. Substation group: Substation group number for this bus. The default value is 0.
19. Mid-point bus flag: 0 if it is a regular bus. 1 if it is mid point of a 3-winding transformer represented as Tequivalent.
18. Comment: Comments with a maximum of 64 characters. Any alpha-numeric characters can be used, except
for the string delimiter (single or double quotation mark). The comment text is enclosed in quotation marks.
An example bus data section is shown below.
[BUS DATA]
'MARYLAND' 33= 18 3 1 'MARYLAND' 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 ''
'MINNESOTA' 33= 15 3 1 'MINNESOT' 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 ''
'MONTANA' 33= 14 3 1 'MONTANA' 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 ''
'NEVADA' 132= 6 1 1 'NEVADA' 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 'Revised 19/9/1999'
SECTION 5
5.6 BUS REGULATION DATA

The bus regulation data section lists the generator regulation parameters.
Section Header
The first line in the bus regulation data section must say: [BUS REGULATION DATA]. This is followed by the
data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Bus Regulation Data Format
The bus regulation data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus to which the generator is attached. The bus name is enclosed in quotation
marks.
2.
Base kV: Nominal kV of the generator bus.
3.
Generator Reference Angle: The angle of the voltage source in the generator model. This angle and the
open-circuit voltage (item 8) are used in the flat-generator-voltage start option of OneLiner only. The default
value is 0.0.
4.
Regulation Type Flag: 0 if the generator regulates voltage. 1 if the generator has fixed MW and MVAR
output. 2 if the generator is on the system slack bus. The default type is 0.
5.
Scheduled Voltage: Scheduled voltage magnitude in per-unit. This value is used only if the generator is
regulating voltage. The default value is 1.0.
6.
Regulated Bus Name: The name of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the generator.
The regulated bus name is enclosed in quotation marks. The default name is the local bus name.
In most cases, the generator regulates the voltage at its own terminal. If the generator regulates the voltage
at another bus, the bus being regulated must be a load bus.
7.
Regulated Bus Base kV: Nominal kV of the regulated bus. The default value is nominal kV of the local bus.
8.
Generators Open Circuit Voltage: The magnitude of the voltage source in the generator model, in per-unit.
This value and the referenced angle are used in the flat-generator-voltage start option of OneLiner only. The
default value is 1.0.
An example bus regulation data section is shown below.

[BUS REGULATION DATA]
'CLAYTOR' 132= 0 0 1 'CLAYTOR' 132 1
'FIELDALE' 132= 0 0 1 'FIELDALE' 132 1
'GLEN LYN' 132= 0 0 1 'GLEN LYN' 132 1
'HANCOCK' 13.8= 0 0 1 'HANCOCK' 13.8 1
5.7 GENERATOR DATA

The generator data section contains parameters of generating units. All per-unit impedances for generators are
based on the rating of the units and not the system MVA.
Section Header
The first line in the generator data section must say: [GENERATOR DATA]. This is followed by the data
described below. A blank line ends the section.
Generator Data Format
408 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
The generator data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus to which the generator is attached, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
Base kV: Nominal kV of the generator bus.
3.
Generating Unit Identifier: A two-character identifier used to differentiate between multiple generating units
on the same bus. The identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
In-Servi ce Flag: 1 if the generator is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
5.
R": The subtransient resistance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model.
6.
X": The subtransient reactance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model. R
and X cannot both be zero.
7.
R': The transient resistance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model.
8.
X': The transient reactance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model. R and X
cannot both be zero.
9.
R: The synchronous resistance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model
10. X: The synchronous reactance (per-unit on generator base) in the positive-sequence generator model. R and
X cannot both be zero.
11. R2: The internal resistance (per-unit on generator base) in the negative-sequence generator model.
12. X2: The reactance (per-unit on generator base) in the negative-sequence generator model. R2 and X2 cannot
both be zero.
13. R0: The internal resistance (per-unit on generator base) in the zero-sequence generator model.
14. X0: The internal reactance (per-unit on generator base) in the zero-sequence generator model. R0 and X0
15. RN: Resistive component of neutral impedance in ohms (do not multiply by 3). The default value is 0.0.
16. XN: Reactive component of neutral impedance in ohms (do not multiply by 3). The default value is 0.0.
17. MVA: MVA rating of the generating unit. The default value is the system MVA .
18. Scheduled MW: Scheduled MW output. The default value is 0.0.
19. Scheduled MVAR: Scheduled MVAR output. This value is used only if the generator has fixed MW and
MVAR output (specified in the Bus Regulation Section). The default value is 0.0.
20. Minimum MW: Minimum MW output. The default value is -9999.0.
21. Maximum MW: The maximum MW output. The default value is 9999.0. The MW limits are not used in this
version of the program, but they will be used to limit the output of the system and area slack generators in
future versions.
22. Minimum MVAR: Minimum MVAR output. The default value is -9999.
23. Maximum MVAR: Maximum MVAR output. The default value is 9999.0. The MVAR limits are used only if
the generator is regulating voltage. During the power solution, the generator initially regulates voltage. The
program starts checking the MVAR output after several iterations. If the MVAR output goes beyond the
limits, the generator is changed to the fixed MW+jMVAR mode, with the MVAR held at the relevant limit. In
subsequent iterations, the program checks the voltage magnitude to see if the initial constant-voltage mode
can be restored. If so, the generator is reverted back to regulating voltage.
24. Actual MW Generation: Actual MW generation, from a solved power flow solution.
25. Actual MVAR Generation: Actual MVAR generation, from a solved power flow solution.
SECTION 5
An example generator data section is shown below.

[GENERATOR DATA]
'CLAYTOR' 132 '1'= 1 0 0.2 0 0.2 0 0.2 0 0.2 0 0.2 0 0 100 0 0 -9999 9999 -9999 9999 0
0
'FIELDALE' 132 '1'= 1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0 100 0 0 -9999 9999 -9999 9999
0 0
'GLEN LYN' 132 '1'= 1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0 100 0 0 -9999 9999 -9999 9999
0 0
'HANCOCK' 13.8 '1'= 1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 0 0 100 0 0 -9999 9999 -9999 9999
0 0
410 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
5.8 LOAD DATA

The load data section contains load parameters.
Section Header
The first line in the load data section must say: [LOAD DATA]. This is followed by the data described below. A
Load Data Format
The load data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus to which the load is attached, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
Base kV: Nominal kV of the bus.
3.
Load Unit Identifier: A two-character identifier used to differentiate between multiple load units on the same
bus. The identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the load is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
5.
MW Constant Power: Megawatts (constant-power component) consumed. The default value is 0.0.
6.
MVAR Constant Power: Megavars (constant-power component) consumed. The default value is 0.0.
7.
MW Constant Current: Megawatts (constant-current component) consumed when the voltage is at 1.0 per
unit. The default value is 0.0. The constant-current component is not yet working in this version.
8.
MVAR Constant Current: Megavars (constant-current component) consumed when the voltage is at 1.0 per
unit. The default value is 0.0. The constant-current component is not yet working in this version.
9.
MW Constant Impedance: Megawatts (constant-impedance component) consumed when the voltage is at 1.0
per unit. The default value is 0.0.
10. MVAR Constant Impedance: Megavars (constant-impedance component) consumed when the voltage is at
1.0 per unit. The default value is 0.0.
11. Grounding Flag: 0 if the load is grounded; 1 if it is ungrounded. The default value is 0.
An example load data section is shown below.
[LOAD DATA]
'ALASKA' 33 '1'= 1 10.6 1.9 0 0 0 0 0
'CALIFORNIA' 33 '1'= 1 3.5 2.3 0 0 0 0 0
'CLAYTOR' 132 '1'= 1 21.7 12.7 0 0 0 0 0
5.9 SHUNT DATA

The shunt data section contains parameters of shunt units.
Section Header
The first line in the shunt data section must say: [SHUNT DATA]. This is followed by the data described below.
A blank line ends the section.
Shunt Data Format
The shunt data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus to which the shunt is attached, enclosed by quotation marks.
SECTION 5
2.
3.
Shunt Unit Identifier: A two-character identifier used to differentiate between multiple shunt units on the
same bus. The identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the shunt is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
5.
G: Positive-sequence shunt conductance, G, in per unit. The same value is used in the negative sequence.
The default value is 0.0.
6.
B: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance, B, in per unit. The same value is used in the negative sequence. B
is positive for capacitors and negative for reactors. The default value is 0.0.
7.
G0: Zero-sequence shunt conductance in per unit. The default value is 0.0.
8.
B0: Zero-sequence shunt susceptance in per unit. B0 is positive for capacitors and negative for reactors.
The default value is 0.0.
9.
3-Winding Transformer Shunt Flag: 1 if the shunt is part of the T model of a 3-winding transformer; 0 if is
not. The default value is 0. This flag is for output purposes only. It has no effect on the solution.
An example shunt data section is shown below.

[SHUNT DATA]
'OHIO' 132 '1'= 1 0 0 0.3 0.8 0
'ROANOKE' 13.8 '1'= 1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 0
'WASHINGTON' 33 '1'= 1 0.01 0.07 0.3 0.7 0
5.10 SWITCHED SHUNT DATA

The switched shunt data section contains switched shunt parameters.
Section Header
The first line in the switched shunt data section must say: [SWITCHED SHUNT DATA]. This is followed by the
data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Switched Shunt Data Format
The switched shunt data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name: Name of the bus to which the switched shunt is attached, enclosed by quotation marks.
2.
3.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the switched shunt is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
4.
B: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance, B, in per unit. B is positive for capacitors and negative for
reactors. The same value is used in the negative sequence. The zero-sequence of the switched shunt is
calculated automatically by the program. You can see the value of B0 in use within the Data Browser. The
default value for B is 0.0.
5.
Control Mode Flag: 0 if the susceptance of the switched shunt is fixed. 1 if the susceptance of the shunt
banks is switched on and off incrementally in discrete steps to regulate voltage. 2 if the susceptance of the
shunt banks is adjusted continuously to regulate voltage.
6.
Min Target Voltage: Minimum target voltage in per-unit. This value is ignored when the control mode is on
"Fixed". The default value is 0.0.
412 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
7.
Max Target Voltage: Maximum target voltage in per-unit. This value is ignored when the control mode is on
"Fixed". The default value is 0.0.
8.
Controlled Bus Name: Name of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the switched shunt.
The bus name is enclosed in quotation marks.
9.
Controlled Bus Base kV: Nominal kV of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the switched
shunt.
10. Number of Banks: Number of banks in the switch shunt. A switched shunt can have up to 8 banks of
capacitors and reactors.
11. Bank #1 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the first bank of capacitors and reactors. The number of
steps in each bank can be any integer between 1 through 9, inclusive. A value of 0 means that the bank as
well as all the subsequent banks are not in use.
12. Bank #2 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the second bank of capacitors and reactors.
13. Bank #3 Number of Steps : Number of steps for the third bank of capacitors and reactors.
14. Bank #4 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the fourth bank of capacitors and reactors.
15. Bank #5 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the fifth bank of capacitors and reactors.
16. Bank #6 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the sixth bank of capacitors and reactors.
17. Bank #7 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the seventh bank of capacitors and reactors.
18. Bank #8 Number of Steps: Number of steps for the eighth bank of capacitors and reactors.
19. Bank #1 G/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence conductance of each step for the first bank. This value is
ignored in the current version of OneLiner.
20. Bank #1 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the first bank. The susceptance is
positive for a capacitor and negative for a reactor. The default value is 0.0.
21. Bank #2 G/Step: This value is ignored in the current version of OneLiner.
22. Bank #2 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the second bank.
23. Bank #3 G/ Step: This value is ignored in the current version of OneLiner.
24. Bank #3 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the third bank.
26. Bank #4 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the fourth bank.
28. Bank #5 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the fifth bank.
30. Bank #6 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the sixth bank.
32. Bank #7 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the seventh bank.
34. Bank #8 B/Step: Per-unit positive-sequence susceptance of each step for the eighth bank.
35. Bank #1 Go/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence conductance of each step for the first bank. This value is ignored
in the current version of OneLiner.
SECTION 5
36. Bank #1 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the first bank. The default value is
0.0. The susceptance is positive for a capacitor and negative for a reactor. Enter zero if the bank is
ungrounded.
37. Bank #2 Go/Step: This value is ignored in the current version of OneLiner.
38. Bank #2 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the second bank.
40. Bank #3 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the third bank.
42. Bank #4 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the fourth bank.
44. Bank #5 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the fifth bank.
46. Bank #6 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the sixth bank.
48. Bank #7 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the seventh bank.
50. Bank #8 Bo/Step: Per-unit zero-sequence susceptance of each step for the eighth bank.
An example switched shunt data section is shown below.
[SWITCHED SHUNT DATA]
'OHIO' 132= 1 5.24 1 0.88 1.1 'REUSENS' 132 8 1 2 2 4 8 3 3 8 /
0 0.6 0 0.4 0 0.7 0 0.11 0 0.5 0 0.3 0 0.45 0 0.2 /
0 0.3 0 0.2 0 0.7 0 0.12 0 0.44 0 0.22 0 0.7 0 0.5
5.11 TRANSMISSION LINE DATA

The transmission line data section contains positive- and zero-sequence parameters for transmission lines, series
capacitors and reactors. The zero-sequence mutual coupling data are specified later in Section 5.15. All the
impedances are based on the system MVA base and the nominal kV of the bus terminals.
Section Header
The first line in the transmission line data section must say: [TRANSMISSION LINE DATA]. This is followed by
the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Transmission Line/Series Capacitor Data Format
The transmission line data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the branch, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
Bus1 Base kV: Nominal kV of Bus1.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of branch, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
Bus2 Base kV: Nominal kV of Bus2. This must be the same as Bus1s base kV.
414 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
5.
Circuit Identifier: A two-character circuit identifier. Parallel branches must have different circuit identifiers.
The circuit identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
6.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the branch is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
7.
Meter Flag: 0.0 if the line is metered at Bus1. 100.0 if it is metered at Bus2. No other values are allowed.
8.
Branch Name: A 12-character name for the line, enclosed in quotation marks. The branch name is blank by
default.
9.
Type Name: A 12-character name for the configuration type used to calculate the electrical parameters for the
transmission line. The type name is enclosed in quotation marks. The type name, if not blank, must match
one of the type names in the ASPEN Line Table File, ASPEN.LTB. The type name is blank by default.
10. Length: Physical length of transmission line. This value is required when the Type Name is not blank. The
default value is 0.0.
11. Unit of Length: Unit of length for transmission line, enclosed in quotation marks. It is required when the
Type Name is not blank. The unit of length must be one of the following: kt (for 1000 feet), ft, mi, m or km.
12. R: Positive-sequence series resistance in per unit. The same value is used for the negative sequence.
13. X: Positive-sequence series reactance in per unit. X must be negative for a series capacitor. The same value
is used for the negative sequence. R and X cannot both be zero.
14. G1: Positive-sequence shunt conductance on the Bus1 side, in per unit. The same value is used for the
negative sequence. The default value is 0.0.
15. B1: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance on the Bus1 side, in per unit. The same value is used for the
negative sequence. The default value is 0.0.
16. G2: Positive-sequence shunt conductance on the Bus2 side, in per unit. The same value is used for the
negative sequence. G2 can be different from G1, but unbalanced lines cannot be mutually coupled. The
default value is G1.
17. B2: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance on the Bus2 side, in per unit. The same value is used for the
negative sequence. B2 can be different from B1, but unbalanced lines cannot be mutually coupled. The
default value is B1.
18. R0: Zero-sequence series resistance in per unit.
19. X0: Zero-sequence series reactance in per unit. Xo must be negative for a series capacitor. Ro and Xo
20. G10: Zero-sequence shunt conductance on the Bus1 side, in per unit. The default value is G1.
21. B10: Zero-sequence shunt susceptance on the Bus1 s ide, in per unit. The default value is B1.
22. G20: Zero-sequence shunt conductance on the Bus2 side, in per unit. The default value is G10.
23. B20: Zero-sequence shunt susceptance on the Bus2 side, in per unit. The default value is B10.
24. Number of Current Ratings: Number of current ratings to follow. It must be 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
25. Current Rating #1: Current rating in ampere. The default value is 0.0.
29. MOV protected level current: For series capacitor, enter the protected level current of the MOV in kA, which
must be positive. The default is 0.0.
SECTION 5
30. Series compensation flag: Enter 0 for transmission line; 1 for in-service series capacitor/reactor; 2 for
bypassed series capacitor/reactor.
An example transmission line data section is shown below.
[TRANSMISSION LINE DATA]
'GLEN LYN' 132 'CLAYTOR' 132 '1'= 1 0 'Glen/Clay' '' 0 'ft' /
0.0192 0.0575 0 0.0132 0 0.0132 0.0384 0.115 0 0.0066 0 0.0066 4 0 0 0 0 0 0
'GLEN LYN' 132 'TEXAS' 132 '1'= 1 0 '' '' 0 'ft' /
0.0452 0.1852 0 0.0102 0 0.0102 0.0452 0.1852 0 0.0102 0 0.0102 4 0 0 0 0 0 0
5.12 PHASE SHIFTER DATA

The phase shifter data section contains the parameters of phase shifters. All the impedances and admittances are
based on the phase shifters own MVA base and the nominal kV of the branch terminals.
Section Header
The first line in the phase shifter data section must say: [PHASE SHIFTER DATA]. This is followed by the data
described below. A blank line ends the section.
Phase Shifter Data Format
The phase shifter data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the phase shifter, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of the phase shifter, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
5.
Circuit Identifier: A two-character circuit identifier. Parallel phase shifters must have different circuit
identifiers. The circuit identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
6.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the phase shifter is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
7.
Meter Flag: 0.0 if the phase shifter is metered at Bus1. 100.0 if it is metered at Bus2. No other values are
allowed. This feature is not being used in this version.
8.
Branch Name: A 12-character name for the phase shifter, enclosed in quotation marks. The branch name is
blank by default.
9.
Shift Angle: Phase shift in degrees. A positive shift angle will cause the voltage angle of Bus1 to lead that
of Bus2 in the positive sequence.
10. R: Positive-sequence series resistance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base).
11. X: Positive-sequence series reactance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). R and X cannot both
be zero.
12. B: Positive-sequence susceptance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). B must be zero or
negative. The default value is 0.0.
13. R0: Zero-sequence series resistance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). The default value is R.
14. X0: Zero-sequence series reactance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). R0 and X0 cannot both
be zero. The default value is X.
15. B0: Zero-sequence susceptance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). B0 must be zero or
negative. The default value is B.
416 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
16. R2: Negative-sequence series (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). The default value is R.
17. X2: Negative-sequence series reactance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). R2 and X2 cannot
both be zero. The default value is X. See #16 above.
18. B2: Negative-sequence susceptance (in per unit, on phase shifters own MVA base). B2 must be zero or
negative. The default value is B.
19. Number of Ratings: Must be 1.
20. MVA Rating: This feature is not being used in this version.
21. MW Flow Control Flag: 0 if the phase shifter angle is fixed; 1 if it is adjusted in the Power Flow Program to
automatically control real power flow.
22. Max Angle Limit: The Power Flow Program will adjust the phase shift between this value and the minimum
angle limit (item 23 below). The program requires the maximum angle to be more than 1 degree larger than the
minimum angle. The default value is 0.0.
23. Min Angle Limit: See item 22 above.
24. Max Target MW: Maximum target range for flow of real power in megawatts. This value is ignored when the
MW flow control is off. The default value is 0.0.
25. Min Target MW: Minimum target range for flow of real power in megawatts. This value is ignored when the
MW flow control is off. The default value is 0.0.
26. Base MVA: The MVA base for all the impedances. The default is the system base MVA.
An example phase shifter data section is shown below.
[PHASE SHIFTER DATA]
'TENNESSEE' 132 'NEVADA' 132 '1'= 1 0 'Ten/Nev' 5 0.0119 0.0414 -0.0045 0.03 0.12 -0.0045
0.0119 0.0414 -0.0045 1 100 /
0 0 0 0 0 100
5.13 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA

The 2-winding transformer data section contains parameters for 2-winding transformers.
With the exception of the line shunts, all the per-unit impedances and admittances for 2-winding transformers are
based on the transformers own MVA base and the tap kVs. The admittances of the line shunts are based on the
system MVA base and the nominal kV of the bus terminals.
The grounding impedances are in ohms and should be entered without any multiplication by 3.
2-Winding Transformer Data Section Header
The first line in the 2-winding transformer data section must say: [2W TRANSFORMER DATA]. This is
followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
2-Winding Transformer Data Format
The 2-winding transformer data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
SECTION 5
5.
Circuit Identifier: A two-character circuit identifier. Parallel transformers must have different circuit
identifiers. The circuit identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
6.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the transformer is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
7.
Meter Flag: 0.0 if the transformer is metered at Bus1. 100.0 if it is metered at Bus2. No other values are
allowed.
8.
Branch Name: A 12-character name for the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks. The branch name is
blank by default.
9.
Bus1 Tap kV: The Bus1 winding tap voltage in kV, line-to-line. The default is the nominal kV of Bus1.
10. Bus2 Tap kV: The Bus2 winding tap voltage in kV, line-to-line. The default is the nominal kV of Bus2.
11. Auto-Transformer Flag: 1 if the transformer is an auto-transformer; 0 if it is not. An auto-transformer is
assumed to be wye-connected.
12. R: Real part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the Bus2
terminal short circuited. The same value is used in the negative-sequence model. R and X are in per-unit
based on transformers own MVA base and the tap voltages.
13. X: Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
Bus2 terminal short circuited. The same value is used in the negative-sequence model. R and X cannot both
be zero.
14. B: Positive-sequence susceptance (in per-unit on transformers own MVA base and tap voltages). The same
value is used in the negative-sequence model. B must be zero or negative.
15. R0: Same meaning as R, except R0 is for the zero sequence.
16. X0: Same meaning as X, except X0 is for the zero sequence.
17. B0: Same meaning as B, except B0 is for the zero sequence.
18. Bus1 Winding Configuration: G if wye connected, D if delta connected. The default is G. The table
below lists winding configuration codes for the different transformer types supported by the program:
1. Wye-Wye: Winding configuration=GG; test configuration=GG, Auto flag=0.
2. Auto-Wye: Winding configuration=GG; test configuration=GG, Auto flag=1.
3. Wye-Delta, delta lags: Winding configuration=GD; test configuration=GD, Auto flag=0.
4. Wye-Delta, delta leads: Winding configuration=GE; test configuration=GD, Auto flag=0.
5. Delta-Delta: Winding configuration=DD; test configuration=GG, Auto flag=0.
19. Bus2 Winding Configuration: G if wye connected, D if delta connected and the delta is lagging the wye
winding, or E if delta connected and the delta is leading. See table in item 18.
20. Bus2 Winding Configuration in test: (Note: The Bus1 winding configuration in test is assumed to be G
always.) The Bus2 winding configuration in test is G if wye connected; D if delta connected and the delta
was closed during the test. See table in item 18.
21. RG1: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus1 winding configuration is G. See Figure 4.6
for location of neutral impedances.
22. XG1: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus1 winding configuration is G.
23. RG2: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus2 winding configuration is G.
24. XG2: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus2 winding configuration is G.
25. RGN: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if both winding configurations are G.
26. XGN: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if both winding configurations are G.
418 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
27. Number of Ratings to follow: Must be 3.

28. MVA Rating 1: Three-phase MVA rating of transformer. Default value is 0.0.
31. LTC Side: 0 if the transformer does not have a movable tap or if the tap is locked. 1 if the movable tap is at
the Bus1 side. 2 if the movable tap is at the Bus2 side.
32. LTC Type: 0 if the LTC regulates the voltage magnitude. 1 if the LTC regulates the MVAR flow. The MVAR
regulation has not been implemented in the current version.
33. Minimum Tap: Minimum tap voltage in per-unit. The default is 0.51.
34. Maximum Tap: Maximum tap voltage in per-unit. The default is 1.50.
35. Step Size: The tap increment in per-unit. Specify 0.0 if the tap is continuous. The default is 0.00625.
36. Minimum Target: The minimum per-unit voltage or the minimum MVAR flow. The default is 0.51.
37. Maximum Target: The maximum per-unit voltage or the maximum MVAR flow. The default 1.50.
38. Regulated Bus Name: Name of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the LTC. The bus
name is enclosed in quotation marks.
39. Regulated Bus Base kV: Nominal kV of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the LTC. Set
the Regulated Bus Name to blank and the Regulated Bus Base kV to 0 if the LTC is locked or if it is regulating
MVAR flow.
40. G1: Positive-sequence conductance of the line shunt on the Bus1 side. All line-shunt admittances are based
on the system MVA base and the nominal kV of the branch terminals. The default value is 0.0.
41. B1: Positive-sequence s usceptance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus1 side. The default value is 0.0.
42. G2: Positive-sequence conductance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus2 side. The default value is 0.0.
43. B2: Positive-sequence susceptance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus2 side. The default value is 0.0.
44. G10: Zero-sequence conductance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus1 side. The default value is 0.0.
45. B10: Zero-sequence susceptance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus1 side. The default value is 0.0.
46. G20: Zero-sequence conductance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus2 side. The default value is 0.0.
47. B20: Zero-sequence susceptance in per unit of the line shunt on the Bus2 side. The default value is 0.0.
48. Base MVA: With the exception of the line shunts, all the transformer impedances and admittances are based
on this MVA base. The default is the system MVA base.
49. LTC center tap kV: Load tap changer center position in kV.
An example 2-winding transformer data section is shown below.
[2W TRANSFORMER DATA]
'NEVADA' 132 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 '1'= 1 0 'Nev/NH' 132 33 0 0 0.556 0 0 0.556 0 /
G G G 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0.51 1.5 0.00625 0.51 1.5 '' 0 /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
'VERMONT' 33 'TENNESSEE' 132 '1'= 1 0 '' 33 132 0 0 0.256 0 0 0.256 0 /
G D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0.51 1.5 0.00625 0.51 1.5 '' 0 /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100
SECTION 5
5.14 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA

The 3-winding transformer data section contains parameters for 3-winding transformers.
All the per-unit impedances and admittances for 3-winding transformers are based on the transformers own MVA
base and the tap voltages.
The grounding impedances are in ohms and should be entered without any multiplication by 3.
3-Winding Transformer Data Section Header
The first line in the 3-winding transformer data section must say: [3W TRANSFORMER DATA]. This is
followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
3-Winding Transformer Data Format
The 3-winding transformer data begins immediately after the section header. The 3-winding transformer data
format is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
5.
Tertiary-Bus Name: Bus name at the tertiary terminal, enclosed in quotation marks.
6.
Tertiary-Bus Nominal kV: Nominal kV (line-to-line) of the tertiary-terminal bus.
7.
Circuit Identifier: A two-character identifier. Transformers with two or more terminal buses in common must
have different circuit identifiers. The circuit identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
8.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the transformer is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
9.
Meter Flag: 0 if the transformer is metered at Bus1; 100 if it is metered at Bus2. No other values are allowed.
10. Branch Name: A 12-character name for the transformer, enclosed in quotation marks. The branch name is
blank by default.
13. Tertiary Tap kV: The tertiary tap voltage in kV (line-to-line). The default is the nominal kV of the tertiary
terminal.
14. Auto-Transformer Flag : 1 if the transformer is an auto-transformer; 0 if it is not.
15. RPS: Real part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the Bus2
terminal short circuited and the tertiary terminal open. RPS and XPS are in per-unit, based on the
transformers own MVA base and the tap kVs.
16. XPS: Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
Bus2 terminal short circuited and the tertiary terminal open.
17. RPT: Real part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus2 terminal open. RPT and XPT are in per-unit, based on the
18. XPT: Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus2 terminal open.
420 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
19. RST: Real part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the Bus2 terminal with the
tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus1 terminal open. RST and XST are in per-unit, based on the
20. XST: Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short -circuit impedance measured at the s Bus2 terminal with
the tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus1 terminal open.
21. B: Positive-sequence magnetizing susceptance in per unit, base on the transformers own MVA base and the
tap kVs. The same susceptance is used in the negative-sequence model. B must be zero or negative.
22. RPS0: Same meaning as RPS, except RPS0 is for the zero sequence.
23. XPS0: Same meaning as XPS, except XPS0 is for the zero sequence.
24. RPT0: Same meaning as RPT, except RPT0 is for the zero sequence.
25. XPT0: Same meaning as XPT, except XPT0 is for the zero sequence.
26. RST0: Same meaning as RST, except RST0 is for the zero sequence.
27. XST0: Same meaning as XST, except XST0 is for the zero sequence.
28. B0: Same meaning as B, except B0 is for the zero sequence.
29. Bus1 Winding Configuration: G if wye connected; D if delta connected. The default value is G The
table below lists the winding configuration codes for the different transformer types supported by the
program:
1. Wye-wye-wye: Winding config.=GGG; Test config.=GGG; Auto flag=0
2. Auto-wye-wye: Winding config.=GGG; Test config.=GGG; Auto flag=1
3. Wye-wye-delta, delta lags: Winding config.=GGD; Test config.=GGD; Auto flag=0
4. Wye-wye-delta, delta leads: Winding config.=GGE; Test config.=GGD; Auto flag=0
5. Auto-wye-delta, delta lags: Winding config.=GGD; Test config.=GGD; Auto flag=1
6. Auto-wye-delta, delta leads: Winding config.=GGE; Test config.=GGD; Auto flag=1
7. Wye-delta-delta, delta lags: Winding config.=GDD; Test config.=GDD; Auto flag=0
8. Wye-delta-delta, delta leads: Winding config.=GEE; Test config.=GDD; Auto flag=0
9. Delta-delta-delta: Winding config.=DDD; Test config.=GGG; Auto flag=0
30. Bus2 Winding Configuration: G if wye connected, D if delta connected and the delta is lagging the wye
winding, or E if delta connected and the delta is leading. See table in item 29.
31. Tertiary Winding Configuration: G if wye connected, D if delta (lagging) connected and E if delta (leading)
connected. The default value is G.
32. Bus2 Winding Configuration in Test: (Note: The Bus1 winding configuration in test is assumed to be G
always.) The Bus2 winding configuration in test is G if wye connected; D if delta connected and the delta
was closed during the test. See table in item 29.
33. Tertiary Winding Configuration in Test: G if wye connected; D if delta connected and the delta was closed
during the test. See table in item 29.
34. RG1: Grounding resistance in ohms. This is meaningful only if the Bus1 winding configuration in use is G.
35. XG1: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus1 winding configuration in use is G.
36. RG2: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus2 winding configuration in use is G.
37. XG2: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if the Bus2 winding configuration in use is G.
38. RGN: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if both Bus1 and Bus2 winding configurations in use
are G.
39. XGN: Grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if both Bus1 and Bus2 winding configurations in use
are G.
SECTION 5
40. RG3: Grounding resistance in ohms. Meaningful only if the tertiary winding configuration in use is G.
41. XG3: The grounding reactance in ohms. Meaningful only if the tertiary winding configuration in use is G.
42. Number of Ratings to follow: Must be 3.
46. Fictitious Bus Number: The fictitious bus number must be in the range 1-99999, inclusive. The default value
is 0. When exporting the data to the PTI format (Version 26 or earlier) and the GE PSLF format, Power Flow
assigns this number to the middle, fictitious bus of the equivalent T model.
47. Base MVA: All the transformer impedances and admittances are based on this MVA base. The default is the
system MVA base.
48. LTC Side: 0 if the transformer does not have a movable tap or if the tap is locked. 1 if the movable tap is on
the Bus1 side, 2 if it is on the Bus2 side, and 3 if it is on the Bus3 side.
49. LTC Type: 0 if the LTC regulates the voltage magnitude. 1 if the LTC regulates the MVAR flow. The MVAR
regulation has not been implemented in the current version.
50. Minimum Tap: Minimum tap voltage in per-unit. The default is 0.51.
51. Maximum Tap: Maximum tap voltage in per-unit. The default is 1.50.
52. Step Size: The tap increment in per-unit. Specify 0.0 if the tap is continuous. The default is 0.00625.
53. Minimum Target: The minimum per-unit voltage or the minimum MVAR flow. The default is 0.51.
54. Maximum Target: The maximum per-unit voltage or the maximum MVAR flow. The default 1.50.
55. Regulated Bus Name: Name of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the LTC. The bus
name is enclosed in quotation marks.
56. Regulated Bus Base kV: Nominal kV of the bus whose voltage magnitude is to be regulated by the LTC. Set
the Regulated Bus Name to blank and the Regulated Bus Base kV to 0 if the LTC is locked or if it is regulating
MVAR flow.
57. LTC center tap kV: Load tap changer center position in kV.
An example 3-winding transformer data section is shown below.
[3W TRANSFORMER DATA]
'NEVADA' 132 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'DOT BUS' 13.8 '1'= 1 0 'Nev/NH/Rnk' 132 33 13.8 1 /
0 0.318 0 0.416 0 0.318 0 0 0.27995 0 0.416 0 0.318 0 G G D G D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0
0 0 0 100 0 0 0.51 1.5 0.00625 0.51 1.5 '' 0 33.0
5.15 SWITCH DATA

The switch data section contains parameters for switches.
Section Header
The first line in the switch data section must say: [SWITCH DATA]. This is followed by the data described
below. A blank line ends the section.
Switch Data Format
The switch data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
422 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the switch, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of switch, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
Bus2 Base kV: Nominal kV of Bus2. This must be the same as Bus1s base kV.
5.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the line is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
6.
Name: A 15-character name for the switch, enclosed in quotation marks.
8.
Status: 1 if the switch is closed; 0 if it is open.
9.
Current Rating: Current rating of the switch in amperes. Default is 0.
An example switch data section is shown below.

[SWITCH DATA]
'ROANOKE' 13.8 'DOT BUS' 13.8 ''= 1 'ROANOKE' 7 100
SECTION 5
5.16 DC LINE DATA

The dc line data section contains parameters of 2-terminal dc lines.
Section Header
The first line in the dc line data section must say: [2-TERMINAL DC DATA]. This is followed by the data
described below. A blank line ends the section. In the following Converter 1 refers to the converter at the Bus1
side, and Convert 2 refers to the converter at the Bus2 side.
DC Line Data Format
The dc line data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Name of the converter terminal at one end of the dc line, enclosed in quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Name of the converter terminal at the other end of dc line, enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
5.
Circuit ID: A two-character ID enclosed in quotation marks. Parallel dc lines must have different circuit IDs.
6.
In-Service Flag: 1 if the dc line is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
7.
Name: A 12-character name for the dc line, enclosed in quotation marks.
8.
Rectifier Side: 0 if the Convert 1 is the rectifier; 1 if the Converter 2 is the rectifier.
9.
Control Mode: 0 to control MW at rectifier; 1 to control MW at inverter; 2 to control current (amperes).
10. Control Target: MW or amperes to be held fixed by the controller. This value must be positive.
11. Control Margin: The MW target is to be reduced by this amount when the rectifier voltage is too low.
12. Scheduled dc Voltage: Scheduled dc voltage at the inverter. This value must be positive.
13. Resistance of the dc line: Resistance of the dc line in ohms. This value must be positive.
14. Number of Bridges at Converter 1: This integer value must be positive.
15. Max Angle Limit at Converter 1: This limit, in degrees, is alpha max if Converter 1 is the rectifier, and gamma
max if Converter 1 is the inverter.
16. Min Angle Limit at Converter 1: This value must be positive.
17. Nominal kV of Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: The nominal kV at the dc side of the transformer
in kV, line-to-line. This value must be positive.
18. Tap Position of Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: The position of the LTC tap on the ac side of the
transformer, in per-unit.
19. Max Tap Position of Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: The max position of the LTC tap on the ac
side of the transformer, in per-unit.
20. Min Tap Position of Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: The min position of the LTC tap on the ac
side of the transformer, in per-unit. This value must be positive.
21. Tap Step Size of Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: Step size of the LTC tap, in per-unit. Set to zero
if continuous.
22. Resistance of each Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: Resistance of the transformer, in per-unit,
based on the MVA rating of the transformer (item 24).
424 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
23. Reactance of each Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: Reactance of the transformer, in per-unit,
based on the MVA rating of the transformer (item 24).
24. MVA Rating of Each Commutation Transformer at Converter 1: The resistance and reactance are assumed
to be based on this MVA rating. The program assumes that there is one commutation transformer for each
bridge.
25-35: Same as items 14-24, except these are for the Convert 2.
An example switch data section is shown below.
[2-TERMINAL DC DATA]
'BUS1' 100 'BUS0' 100 '1'= 1 '' 0 0 100 0.1 400 10 /
2 90 10 160 1 1.1 0.91 0.00625 0 0.1 50 /
2 89 11 170 1 1.2 0.92 0.00625 0.001 0.101 50.5
5.17 MUTAL COUPLING DATA

The mutual data section contains zero-sequence mutual coupling parameters for transmission lines. See Section
4.8 for more information.
Mutual Data Section Header
The first line in the mutual data section must say: [MUTUAL DATA]. This is followed by the data described
Mutual Data Format
The mutual data begins immediately after the section header. The mutual data is aggregated into mutual groups,
each of which may be up to 240 lines. Each group must begin with the groupSize= keyword and ends with the
endGroup keyword. The number that follows the groupSize= keyword is the number of lines in the group. This
number must be greater than 1 and less than, or equal to, 90.
Between the groupSize= and endGroup keywords must be the data for n(n-1)/2 of mutual coupled pairs, where n
is the number of lines in the group. The data format of each mutual coupled pair is described below.
1.
Bus1 Name: Bus name at one end of the first line in the mutually coupled pair. The bus name is enclosed in
quotation marks.
2.
3.
Bus2 Name: Bus name at the other end of the first line in the mutually coupled pair. The bus name is
4.
5.
Circuit Identifier: A two-character circuit identifier for the first line in the mutually coupled pair. The circuit
identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
6.
Bus3 Name: Bus name at one end of the second line in the mutually coupled pair. The bus name is enclosed
in quotation marks.
7.
Bus3 Base kV: Nominal kV (line-to-line) of Bus3.
8.
Bus4 Name: Bus name at the other end of the second line in the mutually coupled pair. The bus name is
9.
Bus4 Base kV: Nominal kV (line-to-line) of Bus4.
SECTION 5
10. Circuit Identifier: A two-character circuit identifier for the second line in the mutually coupled pair. The
circuit identifier is enclosed in quotation marks.
11. RM: The real part of an off-diagonal term in the Z matrix associated with the coupling between lines BUS1BUS2 and BUS3-BUS4. This value is in per-unit. The default value is 0.0.
12. XM: The imaginary part of an off-diagonal term in the Z matrix associated with the coupling between lines
BUS1-BUS2 and BUS3-BUS4. This value is in per-unit. The default value is 0.0.
13. % From of first line: The starting point, with 0% being the beginning, of the section of lines that are
mutually coupled. The default value is 0.0.
14. % To of first line: The ending point, with 100% being the end, of the section of lines that are mutually
coupled. The default value is 100.0.
15. % From of second line: The starting point, with 0% being the beginning, of the section of lines that are
mutually coupled. The default value is 0.0.
16. % To of second line: The ending point, with 100% being the end, of the section of lines that are mutually
coupled. The default value is 100.0.
An example mutual data section is shown below.
[MUTUAL DATA]
groupSize= 2
'NEVADA' 132 'ARIZONA' 132 '1' 'REUSENS' 132 'ARIZONA' 132 '1'= 0 5.73921e-006 0 100 0
100
endGroup
groupSize= 3
'GLEN LYN' 132 'CLAYTOR' 132 '1' 'GLEN LYN' 132 'TEXAS' 132 '1'= 0 5.73921e-006 0 100
0 100
'GLEN LYN' 132 'CLAYTOR' 132 '1' 'GLEN LYN' 132 'CLAYTOR' 132 '2'= 0 5.73921e-006 0
100 0 100
'GLEN LYN' 132 'CLAYTOR' 132 '2' 'GLEN LYN' 132 'TEXAS' 132 '1'= 0 5.73921e-006 0 100
0 100
endGroup
5.18 AREA DATA

The area data section contains area interchange parameters.
Area Data Section Header
The first line in the area data section must say: [AREA DATA]. This is followed by the data described below. A
Area Data Format
The area data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Area Number: Area number ranging from 0 to 999, inclusive.
2.
Area Name: Name of the area with a maximum of 12 characters. Any alphanumeric characters can be used,
except for the string delimiter (single or double quotation mark). The area name is enclosed in quotation
marks.
3.
Regulation Flag: 1 if you want the Power Flow to regulate the output of the area slack generator to enforce
the net area export. The default value is 0. Must be 1 if area slack bus is not blank.
426 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
4.
Area Slack Bus Name: Area slack bus name enclosed in quotation marks. The program will adjust the MW
output of this generator to enforce the net-export constraint. The area slack bus name is blank by default.
5.
Area Slack Bus kV: Nominal kV of the area slack bus. The default value is 0.0.
6.
MW Export: Net MW export target. A positive value means power is shipped out of the area through tie
lines. A negative value means power is imported from another area. The default value is 0.0.
7.
Export Tolerance: Must be greater than zero. The default value is 10.0.
An example area data section is shown below.

[AREA DATA]
1= 'AA' 0 '' 0 0 10
2= 'CC' 0 '' 0 0 10
3= 'BB' 0 '' 0 0 10
5.19 ZONE DATA

The zone data section contains zone numbers and names.
Zone Data Section Header
The first line in the zone data section must say: [ZONE DATA]. This is followed by the data described below. A
Zone Data Format
The zone data begins immediately after the section header. The zone data format is described below.
1.
Zone Number: The zone number must be in the range 0-999, inclusive. The default value is 0.
2.
Zone Name: Name of the zone with a maximum of 12 characters. Any alphanumeric characters can be used
except for the string delimiter (single or double quotation mark). The zone name is enclosed in quotation
marks.
An example zone data section is shown below.

[ZONE DATA]
1= 'ZONE NA'
2= 'ZONE NB'
5.20 BREAKER DATA

The breaker data section contains circuit breaker parameters.
Breaker Data Section Header
The first line in the breaker data section must say: [BREAKER DATA]. This is followed by the data described
Breaker Data Format
The breaker data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1.
Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the breaker is attached. The bus name is enclosed in quotation marks.
SECTION 5
2.
Base kV
Nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus to which the breaker is attached.
3.
Breaker Name
Name of the breaker with a maximum of 12 characters. Any alphanumeric characters can be used, except for
the string delimiter (single or double quotation mark). The breaker name is enclosed in quotation marks.
4.
In-Service Flag
This value will always be 1. Circuit breakers cannot be taken out of service.
5a. IEEE rated breaker Interrupting Time

Interrupting time of the breaker in cycles. The default value is 3.
5b. IEC rated breaker %dc Component
Rated percent dc component of the breaker.
6.
Rating Method
Rating method of the breaker. Enter 0 for 'IEEE-Symmetrical Current'; 1 for 'IEEE-Total current'; 2 for IEC.
Default is 1.
7.
Contact Parting Time 1

Contact parting time of the breaker for protected devices in group 1, in cycles. Contact parting time must
include relay tripping delay and breaker energization time. The default value is 4.
8.

9a. IEEE Rated Short Circuit Current or MVA

Rated short circuit current in amps if the rating method is 'Symmetrical current'. Rated short circuit MVA if
rating method is 'Total current'. The default value is 0.0.
9b. IEC Rated Breaking Current
Rated short circuit breaking current in amps. The default value is 0.0.
10a.
IEEE Rated Momentary Current

Rated momentary current of the breaker in amps. This is only used when the breaker rating method is 'Total
current'. The default value is 0.0.
10b. IEC Rated ac making current

Rated ac making current of the breaker in amps.
11. Number of Operations
Number of breaker reclosing operations. Possible choices are 0, 2, 3 and 4. The default value is 0. This is
only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
12. First Reclosing Interval
First reclosing interval in seconds. The reclosing interval is the elapse time between successive breaker
opening and reclosing. You must enter (n-1) positive values, where n is the total number of operations to
lockout. The default value is 0.0. This is only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
13. Second Reclosing Interval
Second reclosing interval in seconds. This is only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
14. Third Reclosing Interval
Third reclosing interval in seconds. This is only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
15. Breaker Operating kV
Operating kV of the breaker. The default value is nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
16. Max Design kV
Maximum design kV of the breaker. The default value is nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
428 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
17. kV Range Factor

kV range factor for breaker. The default value is 1.0. This is only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
18. Breaker Derating Flag
0 if the breaker is to be derated because of reclosing operation: 1 if it is not. The default value is 0. This is
only used when the breaker is IEEE rated.
19. Breaker rating check method for group 1
Specifies the current that the breaker must interrupt: 0 for total current of devices in the group; 1 for maximum
individual device current in the group.
21. Breaker Comments
Breaker comments enclosed in quotation marks. The comments can contain up to 32 characters.
22. Breaker RDB location field
Location ID enclosed in quotation marks. The field can contain up to 50 characters. This information is used
for connecting to the Relay Database.
23. Breaker RDB S01 field
S01 field enclosed in quotation marks. The field can contain up to 50 characters. This information is used for
connecting to the Relay Database.
24. Number of Protected Devices in Group 1
This must be an integer greater than, or equal to, zero.
25. Number of Protected Devices in Group 2
26. Protected Device Identifiers
For each protected device in Group 1 and Group 2, the following data are expected, on separates lines. List
those in Group 1 first, then those in Group 2.
If the protected device is a Bus: Enter (1) the letter B only.
If the protected device is a Generator unit, Shunt unit or Load unit, enter: (1) The device type code: U for
Generator unit; S for shunt unit; D for load unit, followed by (2) the unit ID enclosed in quotation marks.
If the protected device is a Line, Phase Shifter or Transformer, enter: (1) The device type code: L for Line;
T for 2-winding transformer; X for 3-winding transformer; P for phase shifter, W for switch (2) Bus1 name
enclosed in quotation marks, (3) Bus1 base kV, (4) Bus2 name enclosed in quotation marks, (5) Bus2 base kV,
and (6) the circuit ID enclosed in quotation marks.
An example breaker data section is shown below.
[BREAKER DATA]
'NEVADA' 132= 'bk6' 1 7 0 11.1 11.1 1 0 1 0 0 0 132 132 1 0 0 1 /
'' /
'AC' /
'SEL-321' /
2 2 /
X 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'NEVADA' 132 '1' /
X 'NEVADA' 132 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'MV' /
B /
X 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'NEVADA' 132 '2'
SECTION 5
5.21 BREAKER NAMEPLATE DATA

The breaker nameplate data section contains circuit breaker nameplate parameters. This section can be used with
MODIFY keyword in the Change File only.
Breaker Data Section Header
The first line in the breaker nameplate data section must say: [MODIFY BREAKER NAMEPLATE DATA]. This
is followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Breaker Data Format
1.
Bus Name
2.
Base kV
3.
Breaker Name
4.
In-Service Flag
This value will always be 1. Circuit breakers cannot be taken out of service.
5.
Interrupting Time
Interrupting time of the breaker in cycles. The default value is 3.
6.
Rating Method
Rating method of the breaker. Enter 0 for 'Total Current'; 1 for 'Symmetrical current'. Default is 1.
7.

8.

9.
Rated Short Circuit Current or MVA

Rated short circuit current in amps if the rating method is 'Symmetrical current'. Rated short circuit MVA if
rating method is 'Total current'. The default value is 0.0.
10. Rated Momentary Current

Rated momentary current of the breaker in amps. This is only used when the breaker rating method is 'Total
current'. The default value is 0.0.
11. Number of Operations
Number of breaker reclosing operations. Possible choices are 0, 2, 3 and 4. The default value is 0.
12. First Reclosing Interval
First reclosing interval in seconds. The reclosing interval is the elapse time between successive breaker
opening and reclosing. You must enter (n-1) positive values, where n is the total number of operations to
lockout. The default value is 0.0.
13. Second Reclosing Interval
Second reclosing interval in seconds.
14. Third Reclosing Interval
Third reclosing interval in seconds.
430 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
15. Breaker Operating kV

Operating kV of the breaker. The default value is nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
16. Max Design kV
Maximum design kV of the breaker. The default value is nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
17. kV Range Factor
kV range factor for breaker. The default value is 1.0.
18. Breaker Derating Flag
0 if the breaker is to be derated because of reclosing operation: 1 if it is not. The default value is 0.
21. Breaker Comments
Breaker comments enclosed in quotation marks. The comments can contain up to 32 characters.
22. Breaker RDB location field
Location ID enclosed in quotation marks. The field can contain up to 50 characters. This information is used
for connecting to the Relay Database.
23. Breaker RDB S01 field
S01 field enclosed in quotation marks. The field can contain up to 50 characters. This information is used for
connecting to the Relay Database.
[MODIFY BREAKER NAMPLATE DATA]
'NEVADA' 132= 'bk6' 1 7 0 11.1 11.1 1 0 1 0 0 0 132 132 1 0 0 1 /
'' /
'AC' /
'SEL-321' /
5.22 BREAKER CONNECTION DATA

The breaker connection data section contains circuit breaker connection information. This data section can be
used with the MODIFY keyword in change files only.
Breaker Connection Data Section Header
The first line in the breaker connection data section must say: [MODIFY BREAKER CONNECTION DATA].
This is followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Breaker Connection Data Format
1.
Bus Name
2.
Base kV
SECTION 5
3.
Breaker Name
4.
Breaker rating check method for group 1

5.
Breaker rating check method for group 2

6.
Number of Protected Devices in Group 1

7.
Number of Protected Devices in Group 2

8.
Protected Device Identifiers

For each protected device in Group 1 and Group 2, the following data are expected, on separates lines. List
those in Group 1 first, then those in Group 2.
If the protected device is a Bus: Enter (1) the letter B only.
If the protected device is a Generator unit, Shunt unit or Load unit, enter: (1) The device type code: U for
Generator unit; S for shunt unit; D for load unit, followed by (2) the unit ID enclosed in quotation marks.
If the protected device is a Line, Phase Shifter or Transformer, enter: (1) The device type code: L for Line;
T for 2-winding transformer; X for 3-winding transformer; P for phase shifter, (2) Bus1 name enclosed in
quotation marks, (3) Bus1 base kV, (4) Bus2 name enclosed in quotation marks, (5) Bus2 base kV, and (6) the
circuit ID enclosed in quotation marks.

[MODIFY BREAKER CONNECTION DATA]
'NEVADA' 132= 'bk6' 0 1 /
2 2 /
X 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'NEVADA' 132 '1' /
X 'NEVADA' 132 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'MV' /
B /
X 'NEW HAMPSHR' 33 'NEVADA' 132 '2'
432 SECTION 5
NETWORK DATA FORMAT
SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the contents of the dialog boxes for overcurrent relays, fuses, reclosers and distance
relays.
6.2 OVERCURRENT GROUND RELAYS
The following are instructions to enter the data for a new relay of this type:
1.
Enter the basic data.

ID:
A 20-character name for the relay. We recommend that you

include in the ID certain mnemonics that identifies the relay
type. For example, you may want to end the ID with the
SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES 433
letter 'G' for ground relays, and 'P' for phase relays. The ID
only has to be unique among fuses and overcurrent relays
in the same relay group.
CT ratio:
The CT ratio is defined to be the primary/secondary turns

ratio of the current transformer. You can either a number
value or a ratio in the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy. For
example, for a 600A-to-5A CT, enter one of the following
120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Time dial:
The time dial can have any value between the minimum and
maximum time-dial levers of the selected overcurrent relay.
The time dial value should be set to 1.0 if the relay has only
curve. Note: You can use the Time Dial Calculator to
calculate the time dial from input values of time delay and
multiple of pickup. See Appendix D for details.
Pri. A:
The instantaneous setting may be left at 0.0 if the relay

does not have an instantaneous unit. Otherwise the
instantaneous setting should have the value 3Io (in
amperes) at the primary side of the current transformer.
Delay:
The time delay of the instantaneous element in seconds.

This should be left at 0.0 if the relay does not have an
instantaneous element.
Char. angle: The characteristic angle, in degrees, is the angle between

the polarizing voltage and the vector of maximum torque.
The vector of maximum torque defines a half plane, which is
shown shaded in the following figure. A zero-sequence
polarized relay is assumed to pick up whenever Io lies
within the shaded region. A negative-sequence polarized
relay is assumed to pick up whenever I2 lies within the
shaded region. The characteristic angle is initialized to -90
degrees.
Note: The characteristic angle edit box is not visible if
both the time element and the instantaneous unit are both
non-directional.
2.
Select the relay type.

Click on the button marked next to the 'Curve' edit box. The Curve
Selector will appear.
434 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
The tree-list on the left of this dialog box showing all relay curves from
overcurrent relay library files located in the Overcurrent Relay Library
Directory OneLiner configuration setting. The memo box on the right
displays detailed information on the highlighted entry in the tree-list.
TO SELECT A RELAY CURVE:
Highlight curve name in the tree-list.
NOTE: you can use the Find command described below to locate the
curve you want to use.
Click on Select this curve. The Curve Selector will disappear. The name
of the selected curve will be copied to the Curve edit box.
TO SPECIFY AN INSTANTANEOUS/DEFINITE TIME RELAY
ELEMENT:
Click on No curve required. The Curve Selector will disappear. The name
N/A will be copied to the curve-name edit box.
TO LOOK UP A RELAY CURVE USING KEYWORD:
Click on Find. A dialog will appear.
Enter key word(s) you want to search in the edit box.

Specify search options: look for keyword in curve name, annotation
and/or library name.
Select check box Match whole string only to ignore partially matched
words.
Click on Find. The dialog will disappear. If an entry with matching
keywords is found, it will be highlighted.
Click on Find next to go the next match if theres any.
Click on Show devices with multiples curves only to eliminate from the
list curves with single time dial. Recloser curves usually have only single
time dial.
SECTION 6
3.
Select the tap unit.

Click on the 'Tap unit' drop down list box and select a tap unit.
The tap units are listed in alphabetical order. The list includes all tap units
found in the relay library files. If you wis h to enter a pickup value directly
without referencing a tap unit, simply select N/A and proceed to step 6.
You may also create the tap unit you want with the ASPEN Overcurrent
Relay Editor. See the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor for details.
4.
Enter the pickup value.

For a Continuous Tap Unit, enter the pickup value (in amperes) in the
Pickup (A)' edit box.
For a Discrete Tap Unit, either type in the pickup value (in amperes) or
select one from the 'Pickup (A)' drop down list box.
5.
Select the directional control.

Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Time Element' group box
if the time delay element of the relay is directional.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Instantaneous Element'
group box if the instantaneous unit is di rectional.
6.
Click on 'Sensitive to dc offset' if the relays instantaneous unit does not filter
the dc offset and is affected by it.
The program uses this datum when checking the settings of the overcurrent
instantaneous units.
7.
Enter the time adder (in seconds) in 'time adder' and the time multiplier in 'Time
multiplier'.
The time delay is given by T=aT+b, where T is the time given by the unshifted
curve, and a is the time multiplier and b is the time adder.
8.
Select the polarizing quantities.

Click on the 'Polarized by' drop down list box and select one of the
following:
Vo, Io: Zero-sequence polarized relay. Vo and Io are the zero-sequence
voltage and current, respectively.
V2, I2 : Negative-sequence polarized relay. V2 and I2 are the negativesequence voltage and current, respectively.
9.
Select the location of the current sensor.

Click on the 'CT location' drop down list box and select the desired
location of the current sensor.
Note: Ignore this step for transmission lines and phase shifters because
their relays are always assumed to sense the terminal current.
The CT Location list box contains a list of the possible current sensor
locations for transformers. The relay can sense either the terminal current,
or the current flowing in the primary or secondary neutral. In the case of
an autotransformer, the program will correctly sense the common neutral
current (select either of the Auto Neutral items). For a 3-winding
transformer, you can also place the current sensor within the delta tertiary.
436 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
10. Select the operating quantities.

Click on the 'Operates on' drop down list box and select one of the
following currents: 3Io, 3I2, Io or I2
Io and I2 are the zero- and negative-sequence current, respectively. The
operating time of the relay will depend on the magnitude of the selected
current.
11. Enter the reset time (in seconds) in 'Reset time'.
This is the time required for the disk to rotate back to the original position, after
a full travel at the maximum time dial. The program uses this datum to check the
coordination between relays and reclosers.
12. Enter comments.
You can enter any text up to 95 characters long in this field.
LINK TO ASPEN RELAY DATABASE:
This linkage is operational only if you already have ASPEN Relay
Database client program installed on the same computer.
1.
Specify object(s) in RDB that are linked to this OneLiner relay. Click on
Browse button next to the box labeled Linked Relays. A login dialog box will
appear.
Enter database name, your user name and password and click on OK to
log into Relay Database. Refer to Relay Database user manual for more
information on Relay Database login procedure.
A dialog will appear to build the list of devices in the database that you
would like to link to this OneLiner relay.
SECTION 6
Double click on substation name to see the list of relays at this location.
Click on -> button or double click on relay name in a substation will add
it to the list of linked relays.
Click on <- button or double click on relay name in the list will remove it
from the list.
Click Up or Down button to position each relay in the list. The order with
which relay names are shown in the list will be used in data transfer
between the two programs.
Click on OK button to close the dialog and return to relay info dialog.
The linked relay list box should show the name and location of RDB relays
you have selected.
2.
Select data mapping script (Optional)

Click on the browse button next to the Data mapping field. A dialog box
will appear with list of available script programs.
Select a script or **DIRECT MAPPING** from the list and click on

Select to return to relay info dialog.
The selected data link script program will be executed every time data
transfer takes places.
3.
438 SECTION 6
Click on Database button to open the link to relay database. The relay database
link dialog will appear
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
4.
Select Setting request

Click on the tabs to select one of the linked relays.
Click on the list of Available Setting Request to select the one you
want to link to the OneLiner relay.
If you have selected a data mapping script in step2, skip to step 7

5.
Setup direct data mapping

Click on the cell in Data source column. A drop-down list with
contains name of all visible data fields for each of the linked relays will
appear. Each item in the list shows the field name with a prefix that
identifies the relay order number on the linked relay list and the table code:
S: for TSETTING, Q: for TREQUEST, and R: for TRELAY. For
TSETTING fields, the code also contains settings group name. For
example:
[1]R.Serial Number: Data field serial number in TRELAY table of the first
relay in the list.

[1]S.1:CTR: Field CTR in group 1 in TSETTING table of the first relay in
the list.
Select the data field you want to assign to the OneLiner relay parameter
on the same row. Click ONCE outside the list. The value of the data field
from the Relay Database will be show in the New Value column.
Skip to step 7.
6.
Create data mapping script

Select SCRIPT: Create New Script in the Data mapping dropdown list.
After a confirmation request, a dialog box will appear.
Enter script name and description and click OK. Script name must be a
valid window file name. The program will assign .BAS extension to the file
and store it in the \SCRIPT subdirectory in the OneLiner program
directory.
OneLiner automatically generates a script file with template of data
conversion subroutines and list of global variables that will be used to
transfer relay data. The file will be loaded in the script editor ready to be
edited.
SECTION 6
Edit data mapping program

The data exchange global variables names show the type of the data item
it contains:
OLR_xxxx:
OneLiner relay parameter xxxx.
TTTT_YYYY_N: Database data field. Where:

TTTT:
Data table identifier: TRELAY, TREQUEST or TSETTING
YYYY:
Name of data fields in TRELAY and TREQUEST; or

Combination of group name and setting name of data
fields in TSETTING
N:
Order number of the linked device.
The Data Mapping script program consists of the file header section and
data transformation logic section. File header is a block of Basic comment
lines at the beginning to the file. It is separated from the rest of the code
by a blank line. The header must have following format:
- Line 1: Signature line identifying the file
- Line 2: Relay Database type.
- Line 3: OneLiner relay type.
- File comments.
Data transformation logic must be defined as two BASIC subroutines:
- RDB2OLR with the logic for transforming relay database data to
OneLiner; and
- OLR2RDB with the logic for transforming OneLiner data to relay
database. Note: OneLiner only makes use of subroutine
RDB2OLR for transferring data from relay database to
OneLiner. Future version of the program will support data
transfer in both directions.
At the beginning of data transfer the variables always contain current
value of relay data from OneLiner and relay database they represent.
These input data would be used by the script programs logic to evaluate
new value of OneLiner relay model parameters or device settings
440 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
depending on the direction of data transfer. After successful execution of

the script program, newly evaluated relay data will be available in the form
suitable in the destination program.
Use Run | Start, Debug | Step and Debug | Breaker point commands in
the editor to test and debug the data translation logic. The data translation
result will be shown in a separate output dialog.
Save the script and close the script editor when you are satisfied with the
result.
7.
Edit new value (Optional)

Click on a cell in the New value column to edit.
8.
Transfer data
Click on RDB -> OneLiner button to transfer the data shown in RDB
Value column to corresponding OneLiner relay parameter. This dialog
will be closed and the Overcurrent Relay Dialog box will appear with
updated parameter values.
Alternatively, click on the Save Link setting button to store updated
RDB-to-OneLiner link settings without transferring any data.
OneLiner will automatically store in the binary data file the RDB-toOneLiner link and data mapping you made for this relay.
See appendix H for more detailed discussion on the linkage to Relay
database.
TO CLOSE THE OVERCURRENT RELAY DIALOG BOX:

1.
Click on "OK" to close the 'Overcurrent Ground Relay Info' dialog box.
SECTION 6
6.3 OVERCURRENT PHASE RELAYS
1.
442 SECTION 6

ID:
A 20-character name for the relay. We recommend that you

include in the ID certain mnemonics that identifies the relay
type. For example, you may want to end the ID with the
letter 'G' for ground relays, and 'P' for phase relays. The ID
only has to be unique among fuses and overcurrent relays
in the same relay group.
CT ratio:

120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Time dial:
The time dial can have any value between the minimum and
maximum time-dial levers of the selected overcurrent relay.
The time dial value should be set to 1.0 if the relay has only
one curve. Note: You can use the Time Dial Calculator to
calculate the time dial from input values of time delay and
multiple of pickup. See Appendix D for details.
Pri. A:
The instantaneous setting may be left at 0.0 if the relay

does not have an instantaneous unit. Otherwise the
instantaneous setting should be the value of the phase
current (in amperes) at the primary side of the current
transformer.
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
Delay:
The time delay of the instantaneous element in seconds.

This should be left at 0.0 if the relay does not have an
instantaneous element.
Char. angle: The characteristic angle, in degrees, is measured between

the polarizing quantity and the vector of maximum torque.
The polarizing quantity of an overcurrent phase relay is
assumed to be one of the following:
Phase a:
Phase b:
Phase c:
Vb - Vc
Vc - Va
Va - Vb
where Va, Vb and Vc are the phase voltages at the branch

terminal. The vector of maximum torque defines a half
plane, which is shown shaded in the figure below. The
relay is assumed to pick up whenever the phase current lies
within the shaded region. The characteristic angle is
initialized to 30 degrees.
Note: This edit box is visible only if either the time
element or the instantaneous unit is directional.
2.
Select the CT connection.

Click on either the radio button "Wye" or "Delta" to specify a wye- or
delta-connected CT.
3.
Select the relay type.

Click on the button marked next to the 'Curve' edit box. The Curve
Selector will appear.
The tree list on the left hand side of this dialog box shows all the relay
curves from overcurrent relay library files in the Overcurrent Relay
Library Directory. You can change this library directory with the
OneLiner/Power Flow configuration program. The memo box on the right
SECTION 6
hand side displays detailed information on the entry you highlighted in

the tree list.
Mark the Show devices with multiples curves only check box to omit
from the list curves with a single time dial. This option will eliminate
recloser curves that usually have only a single time dial.
TO SELECT A RELAY CURVE:
Highlight a curve name in the tree list.
Note: You can use the Find command described below to locate the
curve you want to use.
Click on Select this curve. The Curve Selector will disappear. The
selected curve name will be copied to the curve-name edit box.
TO SPECIFY AN INSTANTANEOUS/DEFINITE TIME RELAY
ELEMENT:
Click on No curve required. The Curve Selector will disappear. The name
N/A will be copied to the curve-name edit box.
TO LOOK UP A RELAY CURVE USING KEYWORD:
Click on Find. A dialog will appear.
Enter the keyword(s) you want to search in the edit box.

Specify search options: look for keyword in curve name, the curves
annotation and/or the library name.
Select check box Match whole string only to ignore partially matches.
Click on Find. The dialog will disappear. If an entry with matching
keywords is found, it will be highlighted in the Curve Selectors tree list.
Click on Find next to go the next match if theres any.
4.
Select the tap unit.

The tap units are listed in alphabetical order. The list includes all tap units
found in the relay library files. If you wish to enter a pickup value directly
without referencing a tap unit, simply select N/A and proceed to step 6.
You may also create the tap unit you want with the ASPEN Overcurrent
Relay Editor. See the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor for details.
5.
Select the pickup value.

For a Continuous Tap Unit, enter the pickup value in the Pickup (A)' edit
box.
For a Discrete Tap Unit, either type in the Pickup (A) edit box or select
an entry from the 'Tap (A)' dropdown list box.
444 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
6.
Select the directional control.

Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Time Element' group box
if the time delay element of the relay is directional.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Instantaneous Element'
group box if the instantaneous unit is directional.
7.
Click on 'Sensitive to dc offset' if the relays instantaneous unit does not filter
the dc offset and is affected by it.
The program uses this information for checking instantaneous units.
8.
Enter the time adder (in seconds) in 'time adder' and the time multiplier in 'Time
multiplier'.
The time delay is given by T=aT+b, where T is the time given by the unshifted
curve, and a is the time multiplier and b is the time adder.
9.
Enter the reset time (in seconds) in 'Reset time'.

This is the time required for the disk to rotate back to the original position, after
a full travel at the maximum time dial (assumed to be 10). The program uses this
information for relay-recloser coordination checking.
10. Enter comments.

You can enter any text up to 95 character long in this field.
11. Link to ASPEN Relay Database.
See Section 6.2 for further details.
12. Click on "OK" to close the 'Overcurrent Phase Relay Info' dialog box.
SECTION 6
6.4 FUSES
The following are instructions to enter the data for a new fuse:
1.

ID:
A 20-character name for the fuse. We recommend that you

include in the ID certain mnemonics that identifies the
device as a fuse. For example, you may want to end the ID
with the letter 'F' to denote a fuse. The ID only has to be
unique among fuses and overcurrent relays in the same
relay group.
Fuse curve: Click on the button to bring up the Curve Selector and
select a fuse curve. See section 6.3 for details on this dialog
box.
Current divider: Enter 1 unless you are paralleling more than one fuse of the
same type to achieve a higher current rating. Enter 2 if you
have two fuses in parallel and 3 for three fuses, and so on.
Minimum-melt time multiplier: It is a common practice to lower the
minimum-melt curve to account for pre-heating of the fuse. In
some textbooks, this time multiplier is referred to as the K
factor (not to be confused with the K factor of a ground
distance relay.) The minimum-melt time multiplier must be
positive and less than, or equal to, 1.
2.
Enter fuse location. Select

On branch terminal if this fuse is installed on terminal of the equipment.
Inside tertiary winding if this fuse is installed inside delta winding of a 3winding transformer.
446 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
3.
Enter the short circuit capability checking parameters:

This information is needed if you plan to use the Breaker Rating Module
to check the fuse rating in short circuit condition. Only one piece of
information is needed for each fuse:
Rated interrupting current in amperes. If this parameter is zero, the
Breaker Rating Module will not include this fuse in the checking process.
4.
Select the fuse operating time.

Click on either the Total clear or Minimum melt radio button.
A fuse has two curves: the total-clear curve, which is the upper curve, and
the minimum-melt curve. The curve you select is used for computing the
fuse operating time.
5.
Enter comments.
You can enter any text up to 95 character long in this field.
6.
Link to ASPEN Relay Database.

See Section 6.2 for further details.
7.
Click on "OK" to close the 'Fuse Data' dialog box.
SECTION 6
6.5 RECLOSERS
The following are instructions to enter the data for a new recloser:
1.

ID:
A 20-character name for the recloser. It is recommended

that you include in the ID certain mnemonics that identifies
the device as a recloser. For example, you may want to end
the ID with the letter 'R' to denote a recloser. The ID only
has to be unique among reclosers in the same relay group.
Total operations to lock-out: Enter the total number of reclosing operations,

fast and slow, the recloser will perform before it locks out and
stops trying.
No. of fast operations: Enter the number of operations in which the recloser
will use the fast curve. This number must be equal to, or
smaller than, the total operations to lockout minus one.
Reclosing intervals: Lapse time in seconds between an opening operation
and the following closing operation. This number must be
positive. The number of reclosing intervals you need to enter
is equal to the number of operations to lockout, minus one.
2.
Enter the phase-unit curves.

Click on the button next to Fast and Slow radio boxes to bring up
the Curve Selector to select a recloser type in each one.
If the recloser has no phase unit, select N/A for both curves and leave
the rest of the parameters at their default values.
448 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
If the recloser has a phase unit, but has zero fast operations, then select
N/A for the fast curve and leave the parameters of the fast curve at their
default values.
See section 6.3 for details on the Curve Selector.
3.
Enter the phase-unit parameters.

Enter the pickup current in amperes if the recloser curve is drawn as
operating time versus times minimum current. Leave the pickup
current as 1A if the recloser curve is drawn as operating time versus
amperes. The vast majority of recloser curves are drawn as operating time
versus amperes.
Enter the Minimum Response time (Min time) in seconds. The default
value is zero.
Enter the Time Multiplier (dimensionless) and the Time Adder in
seconds. The default values are 1.0 and 0.0 s, respectively.
Enter the High Current Trip setting in amperes and delay in seconds. The default values
are 0.0A (which means the high-current trip is not in use), and 0.0s.
When the high-current-trip setting is not zero and it is exceeded by the
recloser current, the program gives the operating time as the high-currenttrip delay, adjusted by the time multiplier (but not the time adder) of the
operating curve.
When the high-current-trip is not operating, the program gives the
operating time as the higher of two quantities: ( a*t+b ) and ( a*c+b ),
where t is the operating time according to the operating curve, a is the
time multiplier, b is the time adder, and c is the minimum response time
of the operating curve.
Optional: Enter a comment with up to 95 characters.
4.
Enter the ground unit curves and parameters.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the ground unit.
5.
Enter comments.
SECTION 6
6.6 DISTANCE GROUND RELAYS
The instructions for adding a ground distance relay are the same as those
for adding a phase distance relay with following exceptions:
1. The minimum current threshold for a ground relay is the minimum
ground current, 3Io (in secondary amps) that is required to trip the
relay. You should enter a nonzero value here to avoid spurious
tripping.
2. There are four additional edit boxes for entering the magnitude and
angle of K1 and K2, which is defined as (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1). (The
parameters Zo and Z1 are the zero- and positive-sequence impedances
of the transmission line, respectively.) The parameter K1 is used for
zone 1 only. The parameter K2 is used for the other zones.
3. The Line Impedance button will show you the value of K1 for the
transmission line.
450 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
6.7 DISTANCE PHASE RELAYS
1.

ID:
A 20-character name for the relay. The ID only has to be

unique among distance relays in the same relay group. You
can enter 12 additional characters in the unlabeled edit box
below this one for comments or additional identification
information.
PT location: The default is the bus where current relay group is located.
You can alternatively select a neighboring bus that is on
opposite terminal of a transformer. The program will
automatically adjust the phase shift voltage signal
according to the winding configuration of the transformer.
PT ratio:
The PT ratio is defined to be the primary/secondary turns

ratio of the voltage transformer You can either a number
value or a ratio in the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy.
CT ratio:

120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Min I:
Fault detector threshold in secondary amperes. One of the

phase currents must exceed this value in order for the relay
to trip. You should enter a non-zero value here to avoid
spurious tripping.
Z1 Delay:
Time delay in seconds when zone 1 trips.
SECTION 6
2.
Select Zone 2 supervision.

Click on the button next to 'Zone 2 supervision' edit box to bring up
the Curve Selector. Select an overcurrent relay type if Zone 2 of this
relay supervises an overcurrent relay. Otherwise, leave the setting at
'_Fixed' for a fixed zone-2 time delay.
A detailed description of the Curve Selector can be found in section 6.3.
When you select an overcurrent relay type other than '_Fixed', two
additional edit boxes labeled 'Time dial' and Pickup (A) will appear.
These are the time dial and pickup of the overcurrent relay being
supervised by zone 2. The overcurrent relay is assumed to be nondirectional.
Enter the time dial value and the pickup setting.
Note: The program will ignore the zone-2 time-delay datum in the data
grid. The time delay of zone 2 will be based on the characteristics of the
relay curve you select here.
3.
Click on "Change Type if you with to change the distance relay-type model
being used for this relay.
A dialog box with a list of available distance relay types will be displayed.
Select a distance relay type and click on "OK".

The 'Relay Type' dialog box will disappear. The program will try to
preserve as many as the existing parameters as possible. In some cases,
you will need to enter new values. The type name above the data grid will
change accordingly.
4.
Input the relay parameters in the data grid.

The data grid is initially filled with the default values of all the parameters.
The meanings of the various relay parameters are explained in the
Distance Relay Editor Users Manual.
5.
Display line impedances.

Click on the 'Line Impedance' button.
A message box will appear displaying the line impedance in secondary
ohms. You can invoke this command any time after the CT and PT ratios
have been entered. You can specify the percentages the program will use
with the Relay | Options command.
Note: This button is dimmed and cannot be activated if the relay is not
on a transmission line.
452 SECTION 6
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
6.
Enter comments.
SECTION 6
7.
Link to ASPEN Relay Database.

See Section 6.2 for details.
8.
454 SECTION 6
Click on "OK" to close the 'Distance Phase' dialog box.
RELAY DIALOG BOXES
SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
7.1 INTRODUCTION
You can import relay data into an ASPEN OneLiner binary file by:
1.
Exporting the relevant data from the database into a text file in the form described in this document. You are
responsible for this step.
2.
Importing the text file using the Relay | Import Relay command in the Main Window in OneLiner.
The file begins with an optional header section that begins with the line [ASPEN RELAY DATA] and ends with a
blank line. The line delimiter= or delimiter= specifies the string delimiter being used. Other information in this
section includes the date, and program name and version that generated the file.
The relay data that follow may contain parameters of:
Overcurrent ground relays.

Overcurrent phase relays.
Fuses.
Reclosers.
The record for each relay begins with a line that identifies the relay type - for example, "OC GROUND RELAY" for
an overcurrent ground relay. The relay data, on one or more lines that follow, must be arranged in a specific
order. The line width is limited to 132 characters.
Adjacent data items for a relay must be separated by a semicolon, plus any number of blanks. Data items
containing alphanumeric text, such as bus names, must be enclosed by the string delimiter, which can be either a
single quotation mark or a double quotation mark. You can change the string delimiter in the Network | Options
command.
Data for different relays are separated by one or more blank lines.
Relay data are briefly described in this section. Please refer to Section 6, Relay Dialog Boxes, for more information
on relay parameters.
7.2 RELAY LOCATION INFORMATION

The following relay location information is common to all relay types:
BUS_NO1; BUS1; KV1; BUS_NO2; BUS2; KV2; CKT; BTYP;
BUS_NO1: The bus number of the near-end bus. This value is currently ignored by the program.
SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT 455
BUS1: The name of the near-end bus enclosed by quotation marks. The name must match exactly a bus name in
the short circuit data. The bus name can have at most 12 characters.
KV1:
The nominal kV (line-to-line) of the near-end bus.
BUS_NO2: The bus number of the far-end bus. This value is currently ignored by the program.
BUS2: The name of the far-end bus enclosed by quotation marks. The name must match exactly a bus name in
the short circuit data. The bus name can have at most 12 characters.
KV2:
The nominal kV (line-to-line) of the far-end bus.
CKT:
The circuit ID enclosed by quotation marks. The circuit ID can have at most 1 character.
BTYP: The branch type. Set the type to 1 for a transmission line, 2 for a 2-winding transformer, 3 for a phase
shifter, and 10 for a 3-winding transformer.
You may omit the relay location information by leaving all the above fields blank. (Use at least one blank for each
field, e.g., ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;). In this case, the program will store the relay data and allow you to specify the relay
location graphically within OneLiner at a later time.
7.3 OVERCURRENT GROUND RELAYS

The record for an overcurrent ground relay is shown below. The first line must have the words OC GROUND
RELAY, starting at column 1. The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The
record ends with a blank line.
OC GROUND RELAY
BUS_NO1; BUS1; KV1; BUS_NO2; BUS2;
RELAY_ID; CTR; TD; INST; CANG;
TDIR; IDIR; RTYP; TTYP;
TAP; LOC; POLAY;
RDBID; LINKSCRIPT; CTRATIO; INFO;
INSTDELAY; OCLIB;
KV2;
CKT;
BTYP;
RELAY_ID: An identifier for the relay. The relay ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in quotation marks.
The ID must be unique among all the overcurrent relays and fuses in the same relay group.
CTR:
CT ratio expressed as a single number, e.g., set CTR to 120 for a 600A:5A CT.
TD:
Time dial.
INST:
Instantaneous setting in primary amps (3Io). Set INST to 0.0 if the relay has no instantaneous unit.
CANG: Characteristic angle in degrees. CANG is used only if the relay is directional. Please refer to Section
6.2 in the On-Line Help for definition.
TDIR:
Time-element directionality flag. Set TDIR to 1 if the time element is directional. Set TDIR to 0 if the time
element is not directional.
IDIR:
Instantaneous-element directionality flag. Set IDIR to 1 if the instantaneous element is directional. Set
TDIR to 0 if the instantaneous element is not directional.
RTYP: Relay type enclosed by quotation marks. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available relay type in the Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
TTYP: Tap type enclosed by quotation marks. The tap type can have at most 8 characters. It must match
exactly an available tap type in the Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
TAP:
Tap setting in secondary amps.
456 SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
LOC:
Location of the CT. Set LOC to 1 if the CT is on the branch terminal. Set LOC to 2 if the relay is on a
transformer and the CT is on the neutral of BUS1. Set LOC to 3 if the relay is on a transformer and the
CT is on the neutral of BUS2.
PREV: For backward compatibility with OneLiner 4.0 only. This is set to 0 if the relay operates on 3Io and is
polarized by Vo; 1 if the relay operates on 3Io and is polarized by V2; 2 if the relay operates on I2 and is
polarized by V2.
OPER: Operating Quantity. Set OPER to 0 if the relay operates on 3Io; 1 if the relay operates on 3I2; 2 if the
relay operates on Io. Set OPER to 3 if the relay operates on I2.
POLAR: Polarization Quantity. Set to 0 if the relay is polarized by Vo and Io. Set Polar to 1 if polarized by V2
and I2.
DCOFF: DC offset. Set DCOFF to 1 if the instantaneous unit is sensitive to the dc offset; 0 if not.
TADD: Time adder in seconds. Set TADD to zero if not needed.
TMULT: Time multiplier. Set TMULT to 1.0 if not needed.
RST:
Reset time in seconds when the time dial is at maximum value.
ISTDLY: Instantaneous delay in seconds.

RDBID: Relay identifier string in ASPEN Relay Database. Can have up to 255 characters enclosed in quotation
marks
LINKSCRIPT: Name of data mapping script. Can have up to 50 characters enclosed in quotation marks
CTRATIO: CT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters
enclosed in quotation marks
INFO: Comments
INSTDELAY: Definite time element delay. Enter 0 for instantaneous element
OCLIB: Overcurrent library file name
7.4 OVERCURRENT PHASE RELAYS

The record for an overcurrent phase relay is shown below. The first line must have the words OC PHASE
RELAY, starting at column 1. The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The
record ends with a blank line.
OC PHASE RELAY
BUS_NO1; BUS1; KV1; BUS_NO2; BUS2; KV2;
RELAY_ID; CTR; TD; INST; CANG;
TDIR; IDIR; RTYP; TTYP; TAP;
CTCNCT;
RDBID; LINKSCRIPT; CTRATIO; INFO;
INSTDELAY; OCLIB;
CKT;
BTYP;
The ID must be unique among all the overcurrent relays and fuses in the same relay group.
CTR:
TD:
Time dial.
INST:
Instantaneous setting in primary amps. Set INST to 0.0 if the relay has no instantaneous unit.
CANG: Characteristic angle in degrees. CANG is used only if the relay is directional. Please refer to Section
6.3, in the On-Line Help for definition.
SECTION 7
TDIR:
Time-element directionality flag. Set TDIR to 1 if the time element is directional. Set TDIR to 0 if the time
element is not directional.
IDIR:
Instantaneous-element directionality flag. Set IDIR to 1 if the instantaneous element is directional. Set
TDIR to 0 if the instantaneous element is not directional.
RTYP: Relay type enclosed by quotation marks. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available relay type in the Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
TTYP: Tap type enclosed by quotation marks. The tap type can have at most 8 characters. It must match
exactly an available tap type in the Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
TAP:
Tap setting in secondary amps.
CTCNCT: CT connection. Set to 0 if the CT is in wye connected. Set to 1 if the CT is in delta connected.
DCOFF: DC offset. Set DCOFF to 1 if the instantaneous unit is sensitive to the dc offset; 0 if not.
TADD: Time adder in seconds. Set TADD to zero if not needed.
TMULT: Time multiplier. Set TMULT to 1.0 if not needed.
RST:
Reset time in seconds when the time dial is at maximum value.
ISTDLY: Instantaneous delay in seconds.

marks
enclosed in quotation marks
INFO: Comments
INSTDELAY: Definite time element delay. Enter 0 for instantaneous element
7.5 FUSES
The record for a fuse is shown below. The first line must have the words OC FUSE, starting at column 1. The
remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The record ends with a blank line.
OC FUSE
BUS_NO1; BUS1; KV1; BUS_NO2; BUS2; KV2; CKT;
RELAY_ID; CTR; TD; RTYP; TMULT;
RDBID; LINKSCRIPT; COMMENTS; INTR_CAPA; OCLIB;
BTYP;
RELAY_ID: An identifier for the fuse. The ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in quotation marks. The ID
must be unique among all the overcurrent relays and fuses in the same relay group.
CTR:
CT ratio expressed as a single number, e.g., set CTR to 120 for a 600A:5A CT. Normally, the CT is 1.0 for
a fuse.
TD:
Curve used for time calculations: 1 for minimum melt curve; 2 for total clear curve.
RTYP: Fuse type enclosed by quotation marks. The fuse type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available fuse type in the Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
TMULT: Minimum melt time multiplier. Must be positive and not greater than 1.
458 SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
marks
COMMENTS: Comments as string. Can have up to 50 characters enclosed in quotation marks.
INTR_CAPA: Rated interrupting current in amperes.
7.6 RECLOSERS
The record for a recloser is shown below. The first line must have the words RECLOSER, starting at column 1.
The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The record ends with a blank line.
RECLOSER
RELAY_ID; FASTOPS; TOTALOPS; RINT1; RINT2; RINT3;
P_FTYPE; P_STYPE; P_FMINI; P_FTADD; P_FTMULT; P_SMINI; P_STADD; P_STMULT; P_FAST;
P_FMINRESPONSE: P_SMINRESPONSE; P_INST; P_INSTDELAY;
G_FTYPE; G_STYPE; G_FMINI; G_FTADD; G_FTMULT; G_SMINI; G_STADD; G_STMULT; G_FAST
G_FMINRESPONSE: G_SMINRESPONSE; G_INST; G_INSTDELAY;
OCLIB;
RELAY_ID: An identifier for the recloser. The ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in quotation marks. The
ID must be unique among all the reclosers in the same relay group.
FASTOPS: Number of fast operations. This must either 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
TOTALOPS:
Total number of operations to lockout. This must be an integer greater than, or equal to
FASTOPS. The maximum is 4.
RINT1: First reclosing interval in seconds. This must be a positive floating point number if TOTALOPS is 2, 3 or
4.
RINT2: Second reclosing interval in seconds. This must be a positive floating point number if TOTALOPS is 3 or
4.
RINT3: Third reclosing interval in seconds. This must be a positive floating point number if TOTALOPS is 4.
P_FTYPE: Name of the fast curve in the phase unit, enclosed in quotation marks. Enter N/A if FASTOPS is zero
or if the phase unit is not in use.
P_STYPE: Name of the slow curve in the phase unit, enclosed in quotation marks. Enter N/A if FASTOPS is
equal to TOTALOPS or if the phase unit is not in use.
P_FMINI: Minimum trip current of the fast curve of the phase unit in amperes. This is usually equal to 1.
P_FTADD: Time adder of the fast curve of the phase unit, in seconds.
P_FTMULT: Time multiplier of the fast curve of the phase unit.
P_SMINI: Minimum trip current of the slow curve of the phase unit in amperes. This is usually equal to 1.
P_STADD: Time adder of the slow curve of the phase unit, in seconds.
P_STMULT: Time multiplier of the fast curve of the phase unit.
P_FAST: 1 to report on the trip time of the fast curve; 0 to report on the trip time of the slow curve.
P_FMINRESPONSE: Minimum response time of the phase unit fast curve.
P_SMINRESPONSE: Minimum response time of the phase unit slow curve.
SECTION 7
P_INST: Phase unit high current trip setting.

P_INSTDELAY: Phase unit high current trip delay.
G_FTYPE: Name of the fast curve in the ground unit, enclosed in quotation marks. Enter N/A if FASTOPS is
zero or if the ground unit is not in use.
G_STYPE: Name of the slow curve in the ground unit, enclosed in quotation marks. Enter N/A if FASTOPS is
equal to TOTALOPS or if the ground unit is not in use.
G_FMINI: Minimum trip current of the fast curve of the ground unit in amperes. This is usually equal to 1.
G_FTADD: Time adder of the fast curve of the ground unit, in seconds.
G_FTMULT: Time multiplier of the fast curve of the ground unit.
G_SMINI: Minimum trip current of the slow curve of the ground unit in amperes. This is usually equal to 1.
G_STADD: Time adder of the slow curve of the ground unit, in seconds.
G_STMULT: Time multiplier of the fast curve of the ground unit.
G_FAST: 1 to report on the trip time of the fast curve; 0 to report on the trip time of the slow curve.
S_FMINRESPONSE: Minimum response time of the phase unit fast curve.
S_SMINRESPONSE: Minimum response time of the phase unit slow curve.
S_INST: Phase unit high current trip setting.
S_INSTDELAY: Phase unit high current trip delay.
OCLIB: Overcurrent library file name.
7.7 DISTANCE GROUND RELAYS

The record for a distance ground relay is shown below. The first line must have the words DS GROUND RELAY,
starting at column 1. The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The record
ends with a blank line.
DS GROUND RELAY
RELAY_ID; CTR; PTR; TYPE; MTYP; KM; KA; MINI;
Pickup;
TD;
OCTYP;
PINDEX1;
PVALUE1;
......
PINDEXn;
PVALUEn;
RDBID; LINKSCRIPT; CTRATIO;
The ID must be unique among all the distance relays in the same relay group.
CTR:
PTR:
PT ratio expressed as a single number.
TYPE:
Relay type enclosed by quotation marks. The relay type can have at most 18 characters. It must match
exactly an available distance ground relay type in the Distance Relay Library referenced by the .DRL file.
MTYP: Manufacturer's type designation enclosed by quotation marks. It can have most 12 characters. The
manufacturer's type is used for informational purposes only.
460 SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
KM1:
The magnitude of the parameter K1. K1 is usually set equal to (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1), where Z1 and Zo are the
positive- and zero-sequence impedance of the transmission line. The values KM1 and KA1 are used for
zone 1 only.
KA1:
The angle of the parameter K1 in degrees.
KM2:
The magnitude of the parameter K2. K2 is usually set equal to approximately the value of K1. The values
KM2 and KA2 are used for zone 2 and higher.
KA2:
The angle of the parameter K2 in degrees.
MINI:
The minimum neutral current (3Io), in secondary amps, the fault current must exceed in order for relay to
operate.
PICKUP:
This value is ignored if the zone 2 has a fixed time delay; otherwise it specifies the pickup in
secondary amps for the overcurrent relay.
TD:
This value is ignored if the zone 2 has a fixed time delay; otherwise it specifies the time dial of the
overcurrent relay.
OCTYP: The zone-2 timer type enclosed by quotation marks. Set this value to '__Fixed' if zone 2 has a fixed time
delay; otherwise specify a relay type. The relay type can have at mo st 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available relay type in the OC Relay Library referenced by the .OLR file.
PINDEX1, ......
PINDEXn: Index for each parameter of the relay type.
PVALUE1, ......
PVALUEn: Value for each parameter of the relay type.
The total number of parameters of a relay type is determined by the method of the relay model. (See
Section 2 of ASPEN Distance Relay Editor User's Manual for more information on relay types and
methods.)
RDBID: Relay identifier string in ASPEN relay database. Can have up to 255 characters enclosed in quotation
marks
PTRATIO: PT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters enclosed
in quotation marks
Z1DELAY: Zone 1 delay in seconds.
VTBUSNAME: PT bus name.
VTBUSKV: PT bus kV
OCLIBNAME: Name of OC relay library file containing the zone-2 TOC timer.
7.8 DISTANCE PHASE RELAY

The record for a distance phase relay is shown below. The first line must have the words DS PHASE RELAY,
starting at column 1. The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The record
ends with a blank line.
DS PHASE RELAY
BUS_NO1; BUS1;
RELAY_ID; CTR;
KV1;
PTR;
BUS_NO2; BUS2; KV2;

TYPE; MTYP; MINI;
CKT;
BTYP;
SECTION 7
T2; PICKUP; OCTYP;

PINDEX1;
PVALUE1;
......
PINDEXn;
PVALUEn;
RDBID; LINKSCRIPT; CTRATIO;
The ID must be unique among all the distance relays in the same relay group.
CTR:
PTR:
PT ratio expressed as a single number.
TYPE:
Relay type enclosed by quotation marks. The relay type can have at most 18 characters. It must match
exactly an available distance phase relay type in the Distance Relay Library referenced by the .DRL file.
MTYP: Manufacturer's type designation enclosed by quotation marks. It can have most 12 characters. The
manufacturer's type is used for informational purposes only.
MINI:
The minimum phase current, in secondary amps, that must be exceeded in order for relay to operate.
PICKUP:
This value is ignored if the zone 2 has a fixed time delay; otherwise it specifies the pickup in
secondary amps for the overcurrent relay.
TD:
This value is ignored if the zone 2 has a fixed time delay; otherwise it specifies the time dial of the
overcurrent relay.
OCTYP: The zone-2 timer type enclosed by quotation marks. Set this value to '__Fixed' if zone 2 has a fixed time
delay; otherwise specify a relay type. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available relay type in the program OC Relay Library.
PINDEX1, ......
PINDEXn: Index for each parameter of the relay type.
PVALUE1, ......
PVALUEn: Value for each parameter of the relay type.
The total number of parameters of a relay type is determined by the method of the relay model. (See
Section 2 of the ASPEN Distance Relay Editor User's Manual for more information on relay types and
methods.)
RDBID: Relay identifier string in ASPEN relay database. Can have up to 255 characters enclosed in quotation
marks
PTRATIO: PT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters enclosed
in quotation marks
Z1DELAY: Zone 1 delay in seconds.
VTBUSNAME: PT bus name.
VTBUSKV: PT bus kV
OCLIBNAME: Name of OC relay library file containing the zone-2 TOC timer.
462 SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
7.9 RELAY GROUP COMMENTS

The record for a relay group is shown below. The first line must have the words RELAYGROUP, starting at
column 1. The remaining data starts on the next line and can occupy one or more lines. The record ends with a
blank line.
RELAYGROUP
BUS_NO1; BUS1;
COMMENTS;
KV1;
BUS_NO2;
BUS2;
KV2;
CKT;
BTYP;
COMMENTS: Relay group comments. The comments can have up to 239 characters enclosed in quotation
marks. If the comments contains more than one line, each of the lines except the last one must be
terminate by the new line symbol: \n.
7.10 SAMPLE RELAY DATA FILE

A sample relay data file is shown below.
[[ASPEN RELAY DATA]
delimiter='
app= 'ASPEN OneLiner'
ver= 2005 'A' 10 2
date= 'Wed Jun 08 17:25:29 2005'
OC GROUND RELAY
2; 'CLAYTOR'; 132.; 6; 'NEVADA'; 132.; '1'; 1;
'CL-G1'; 100; 1; 2000; -90;
1; 1; 'IAC-77'; 'Two'; 2; 1; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 1; 0; 0;
''; ''; '100:1'; ''; 0; 'GE';
OC FUSE
6; 'NEVADA'; 132.; 28; 'ARIZONA'; 132.; '1'; 1;
'NV Fuse'; 1; 1; 'CHANCE-H050'; 1;
''; ''; ''; 0; 1;
'CHANCE'
OC PHASE RELAY
2; 'CLAYTOR'; 132.; 6; 'NEVADA'; 132.; '1'; 1;
'CL-P1'; 100; 0.5; 2150; 0;
1; 1; 'CO-5'; 'Two'; 2.5; 0; 0; 0; 1; 0; 0;
''; ''; '100:1'; ''; 0; 'ABB';
DS GROUND RELAY
2; 'CLAYTOR'; 132.; 6; 'NEVADA'; 132.; '1'; 1;
'Clator_NV G1'; 100; 400; 'GCX-Type'; 'GCXX'; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0;
0; 0; '__Fixed';
10200; 6;
20200; 11;
20400; 0.6;
30200; 17;
30300; 75;
30400; 1.1;
'';
'';
'100:1'; '400:1'; ''; 0;
'CLAYTOR'; 132;
'';
SECTION 7
DS PHASE RELAY
2; "CLAYTOR"; 132.; 6; "NEVADA"; 132.; "1"; 1;
"CLPhase2"; 10; 35; "CEY-Type"; "CEY52B"; 0;
0; 0; "__Fixed";
10200; 7;
10300; 75;
20000; 0;
20100; 75;
20200; 10;
20300; 75;
20400; 0.5;
30000; 0;
30100; 75;
30200; 18;
30300; 75;
30400; 1;
30500; 1;
'';
'';
'10:1'; '35:1'; ''; 0;
'CLAYTOR'; 132;
'';
464 SECTION 7
RELAY DATA FORMAT
SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT
8.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT

You can generate a textual output of the short circuit solutions in OneLiner by:
Selecting the Faults | Solution Report command in the Main Window. The output is saved to a file or written
directly to a printer.
Clicking the "Write to TTY Window Also" option in the dialog box for the Faults | Show Solution on 1-line
command in the Main Window. The output is written to the TTY Window.
The Batch Short Circuit Module produces textual outputs of the same format. The output format is explained in
this section.
8.2 TITLE PAGE

The first page of the output is a title page that contains some basic information about the output, the system
statistics and options. An example follows:
-- ASPEN OneLiner(Tm) -VERSION
DATE AND TIME:
10.2
SERIAL NO. 1003
Wed Aug 13 10:39:04 2005
OLR FILE NAME: C:\ASPEN\SAMPLE30.OLR

NAME OF THIS FILE: C:\ASPEN\ONELINE.OUT
BASE MVA = 100.
THIS FILE HAS:
29
6
21
0
35
4
1
1
2
BUSES
GENERATORS
LOADS
SHUNTS
LINES
2-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
3-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
PHASE SHIFTERS
MUTUAL COUPLING GROUPS
FILE COMMENTS:
29-BUS TEST SYSTEM
PREFAULT VOLTAGE PROFILE: FLAT BUS VOLTAGES
IGNORE INSTANTANEOUS UNITS
[ ]
IGNORE PHASE SHIFT
[ ]
IGNORE LOADS
[ ]
IGNORE TRANSMISSION LINE G+jB
[ ]
DELETED AND OUT-OF-SERVICE EQUIPMENT:
NONE.
SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT 465
8.3 FAULT SOLUTIONS

Following the title page are reports of one or more short circuit simulation. In OneLiner, the solutions are in the
order they were simulated. In Batch Short Circuit Module, the solutions are arranged in ascending order of the
bus name at which the fault is applied. The output for each fault begins and ends with a long line of equal signs.
The electrical quantities in the report are in amperes, kilovolts, and ohms if you requested the output to be in
physical units. Otherwise, they are in per-unit.
Fault Summary:
The fault summary at the beginning of each fault solution contains the following:
Fault description: This includes the fault type, fault location, outage list if any and fault impedance if nonzero. For an intermediate fault on a transmission line with tap buses, the fault location is specified by two
percentages. The percentage in parentheses refers to the whole line and the other one refers to the segment.
Fault current in the sequence and phase domain: This is the total current at the fault point.
Thevenin impedance: This is the Thevenin impedance of the system at the fault location before the fault is
applied.
Short circuit MVA: The short circuit MVA is defined as the product of the prefault voltage and the postfault current. This quantity is shown for 3-phase, 2-line-to-ground, single-line-to-ground and line-to-line
faults.
ANSI X/R ratio (in outputs of the Batch Short Circuit Module only): This is the X/R ratio of the system at
the fault location, computed according to the ANSI/IEEE standard C37. The value X is the Thevenin
impedance computed using only the reactance of the network elements. The value R is computed using only
the resistance of the network elements. See the Batch Short Circuit Module User's Manual for more
information.
X/R ratio: This is the X/R ratio of the system at the fault location, computed using the complex Thevenin
impedances. Here, R and X are the real and imaginary part of the total impedance seen by the equivalent
positive-sequence voltage source. For example, for a single-line-to-ground fault, R+jX is given by
Z1+Z2+Zo, where Z1, Z2 and Zo are the positive-, negative- and zero-sequence Thevenin impedances.
Ratios Ro/X1 and Xo/X1: Ro+jXo is the zero-sequence Thevenin impedance, and X1 is the imaginary part of
the positive-sequence Thevenin impedance. These two ratios give a measure of the effectiveness of
grounding at the fault location.
The fault summary ends with a line of dashes. An example of a fault summary for an intermediate fault is shown
below:
=========================================================================================================================
2. 1LG Interm. fault 29.02%( 5.00%) on:
NEVADA
132. kV - REUSENS
132. kV 1L
FAULT CURRENT (A @ DEG)
+ SEQ
- SEQ
0 SEQ
A PHASE
B PHASE
C PHASE
2325.4@ -79.8
2325.4@ -79.8
2325.4@ -79.8
6976.1@ -79.8
0.0@
0.0
0.0@
0.0
THEVENIN IMPEDANCE (OHM)
1.85621+j10.3901
1.85621+j10.3901
2.09521+j11.4707
SHORT CIRCUIT MVA= 1595.0
X/R RATIO= 5.55263
R0/X1= 0.20165
X0/X1= 1.10401
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The output ends here if you specified a tier limit of -1. Otherwise, a number of bus-oriented outputs follow.
466 SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT
Bus-Oriented Output
The remaining output for a fault is organized by buses. The output for each bus begins and ends with a long line
of dashes. The output for each bus includes:
The bus identifiers and prefault voltage.

Bus voltage in sequence and phase domain.
Generator, load and shunt currents in sequence and phase domain, if any.
Branch currents in sequence and phase domain.
The number of buses in the output depends on the tier limit you specified. If the fault solution covers more than
one bus, the bus-oriented outputs are arranged by the tier number, or the proximity to the fault. Buses that are
closest to the fault are shown first. Buses that are within the same tier are arranged in ascending order of the bus
name.
The programs take into account the tap buses when assigning the tier number. In OneLiner, the tap buses are
always included in the output. In the Batch Short Circuit Module, you have the option of omitting the tap-bus
outputs.
The following is a sample output for the two buses: NEVADA and CLAYTOR. A more detailed explanation is
listed after this sample output.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BUS
6 NEVADA
132.0KV
AREA AA
TIER 0
(PREFAULT V=1.000@ 0.0 PU)
+ SEQ
- SEQ
0 SEQ
A PHASE
B PHASE
C PHASE
VOLTAGE (KV, L-G)
>
51.744@ 0.0
24.466@ 180.0
27.278@-180.0
0.000@ 0.0
77.680@-121.8
77.628@ 121.8
BRANCH CURRENT (A) TO
>
28 ARIZONA
132.0 1L
130.5@ 102.1
130.2@ 108.6
90.9@ 108.9
351.1@ 106.3
52.6@ -80.6
27.2@ -87.2
8 REUSENS
132.0 1L
544.7@ 95.5
544.0@ 95.9
656.9@ 96.0
1745.6@ 95.8
110.1@ 97.4
115.3@ 98.0
7 OHIO
132.0 1L
448.0@ 106.4
446.8@ 107.0
505.0@ 107.1
1399.8@ 106.9
53.7@ 109.5
61.8@ 111.2
2 CLAYTOR
132.0 1L
424.8@ 100.4
418.5@ 103.3
498.5@ 103.6
1341.4@ 102.5
59.2@ 111.5
97.4@ 114.2
10 NEW HAMPSHR
33.0 1X
277.8@ 89.4
275.3@ 98.2
362.6@ 93.0
914.1@ 93.4
50.4@ 85.5
123.9@ 92.4
11 ROANOKE
13.8 1X
AUTO NEUTRAL CURRENT =
1477.5 @ 74.8 A
4 TENNESSEE
132.0 1P
705.2@ 104.1
713.8@ 94.7
390.0@ 97.6
1804.0@ 99.0
216.7@ -79.5
418.3@ -78.0
10 NEW HAMPSHR
33.0 1T
105.8@ 88.8
105.8@ 105.2
130.7@ 96.3
340.1@ 96.7
1.7@ 1.0
52.1@ 95.2
CURRENT TO FAULT (A)
>
2623.8@ -80.1
2623.8@ -80.1
2623.8@ -80.1
7871.3@ -80.1
0.0@ 0.0
0.0@ 0.0
THEVENIN IMPEDANCE (OHM) > 9.32488@ 80.1 9.32488@ 80.1 10.3965@ 80.2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BUS
2 CLAYTOR
132.0KV
AREA AA
TIER 1
(PREFAULT V=1.000@ 0.0 PU)
+ SEQ
- SEQ
0 SEQ
A PHASE
B PHASE
C PHASE
VOLTAGE (KV, L-G)
>
65.423@ -1.6
11.003@-173.9
11.242@-173.2
43.515@ -5.8
76.596@-120.6
76.304@ 119.7
SHUNT CURRENTS (A)
>
FROM GENERATOR
315.0@ -80.2
315.7@ -83.9
322.6@ -83.2
952.9@ -82.4
25.8@ -95.0
12.6@ 132.2
TO LOAD
94.4@ -32.0
15.9@ 155.8
16.2@ 156.5
62.8@ -36.1
110.5@-150.9
110.1@ 89.3
FROM FICT. CURR. SOURCE
110.0@ -30.3
0.0@ 0.0
0.0@ 0.0
110.0@ -30.3
110.0@-150.3
110.0@ 89.7
BRANCH CURRENT (A) TO
>
6 NEVADA
132.0 1L
426.7@ -79.6
420.4@ -76.8
500.5@ -76.4
1347.2@ -77.6
59.4@ -68.5
97.5@ -65.8
5 FIELDALE
132.0 1L
68.1@ 113.4
69.6@ 100.8
55.7@ 100.6
192.3@ 105.2
5.0@ 17.3
27.2@ -56.8
4 TENNESSEE
132.0 1L
260.5@ -72.1
267.1@ -84.1
128.3@ -92.8
649.7@ -81.1
94.2@ 118.2
189.9@ 113.4
1 GLEN LYN
132.0 2L
147.8@ 101.9
146.4@ 102.3
119.0@ 101.5
413.2@ 101.9
29.1@ -73.2
27.3@ -77.9
1 GLEN LYN
132.0 1L
147.8@ 101.9
146.4@ 102.3
119.0@ 101.5
413.2@ 101.9
29.1@ -73.2
27.3@ -77.9
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION 8
1. Bus identifier and prefault voltage: The identifier includes the bus number, the bus name, the nominal kV and
the area number. Buses whose name starts with the '#' character are new buses created by the program when
simulating line-end and line-out faults. The new buses are given non-positive bus numbers. In the example
below, the program creates the new bus #NEVADA, next to the bus NEVADA, for a line-end fault.
Buses whose name contains the '$$' characters are new buses created by the program when simulating
intermediate faults. These buses also have non-positive bus numbers. See example below.
On the same line with the bus name is the tier number. Tier 0 includes the faulted bus. Tier 1 includes buses that
are 1 bus away from the fault, etc.
The prefault voltage is the last item on the first line. The prefault voltage is always set equal to a fixed value at 0
degree if you requested the flat-bus-voltage option. The prefault voltage is a computed quantity if you requested
the start from a linear network solution option.
Because the fault currents are dependent on the prefault voltages, it is important that you check the prefault
voltages when using the flat-generator-voltage option.
2. Post-fault voltage: The post-fault voltage of the bus is located on the line that begins with the word 'Voltage'.
3. Shunt currents: You will see a 'Shunt Currents' section if there are generators, loads or shunts attached to the
bus. You will see an entry labeled "From Fict. Current Source" if: 1) there is a load or a positive-sequence shunt
on the bus and 2) you are using the flat-bus-voltage option. The fictitious current source is an ideal current
source whose output is required to establish a flat bus profile in the presence of shunts and loads.
4. Branch Currents: This section lists the currents flowing on all the branches attached to the bus. The current
is considered positive if it flows away from the bus. You can deduce the current direction from its phase angle
(with the assumption that the system is primarily reactive): The current is leaving the bus if its angle is in the
vicinity of -90 degrees. The current is coming into the bus if its angle is in the vicinity of 90 degrees.
For all branches except 3-winding transformers, the branch current takes only one line in the report. For a 3winding transformer, the branch current takes two lines. See above example for the 3-winding transformer
between buses NEVADA, NEW HAMPSHR and ROANOKE. In the branch-current section for bus NEVADA,
NEW HAMPSHR and ROANOKE appear on two separate lines. The current on the first line is the total current
leaving NEVADA, going to the other two end buses. No current is shown on the second line.
For 2- and 3-winding autotransformers, you will see an additional entry labeled "AUTO NEUTRAL CURRENT"
on the following line. This is total zero-sequence current (3Io) flowing in the transformer neutral.
For the tertiary bus of a 3-winding transformer, you will see an additional entry labeled "CIRCULATING
CURRENT". This is the zero sequence current (Io) circulating in the delta winding.
Note: In OneLiner only: If you are simulating a close-in fault, the branch current on the faulted branch will not
match that on the one-line-diagram display. The reason is that the branch current in the textual report is for a
bus fault; the current in the one-line diagram is for a close-in fault in front of the relay.
468 SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT
5. Monitored Branch Summary (for OneLiner only): The monitored branch is the branch on which you
highlighted a relay group before specifying the fault. This section shows the relay current and the bus voltage
on the two ends of the branch. At the end of the summary are some derived quantities such as 3Io, Va/Ia, etc.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MONITORED BRANCH:
6 NEVADA
132.0KV ->
-8 #REUSENS
132.0KV 1L
RELAY CURRENT (A)
+ SEQ
1604.2@ -79.8
- SEQ
1604.2@ -79.8
0 SEQ
1604.3@ -79.8
A PHASE
4812.8@ -79.8
B PHASE
0.1@ -81.5
C PHASE
0.1@ -81.5
BUS VOLTAGES (KV, L-G)

6 NEVADA
132.0
51.637@ 0.1
24.574@ 179.7
27.064@-179.5
0.000@ 0.0
77.802@-121.5
77.168@ 121.7
-8 #REUSENS
132.0
51.634@ 0.1
24.576@ 179.7
27.066@-179.5
0.007@ 164.1
77.802@-121.5
77.168@ 121.7
3Io=
4812.9@ -79.8 A
Va/Ia= 2.25e-015@ -90.7 Ohms
(Va-Vb)/(Ia-Ib)=
16.2@ 138.3 Ohms
(Zo-Z1)/3Z1 = 0.0000 @ 0.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION 8
470 SECTION 8
SOLUTION IN TEXT
SECTION 9
DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES
9.1 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW

Getting Information on a Piece of Equipment
The fastest way to open the Info dialog box on a piece of equipment is to double-clicking the left mouse button
on the equipment of interest.
Adding a Line or Transformer between Two Buses
Click the left mouse button on the first bus, then, with the <Shift> key held down, click the right mouse button on
the second bus. When the floating menu appears, click on the New Line or New 2-W Transformer command.
Copying and Pasting System Components to a Bus or Branch
Click the right mouse button on a load, generator, shunt, switched shunt, or relay group you would like to copy.
When the floating menu appears, click on the Copy command. Then, click the right mouse button on the bus or
branch to which you would like to paste the device. When the floating menu appears, click on the Paste
command. If you are pasting a relay group, you will be prompted to enter a unique name for each relay within that
group.
Copying and Pasting Branches Connected Between Two Buses
Click the right mouse button on a line, two-winding transformer, or phase shifter that you would like to copy.
When the floating menu appears, click on the Copy command. Then, click the left mouse button on the first bus,
then, with the <Shift> key held down, click the right mouse button on the second bus. When the floating menu
appears, click on the Paste Device command. If you are pasting a wye-delta transformer, the wye winding will be
connected to the first bus you selected.
Copying and Pasting Three-Winding Transformers
Click the right mouse button on the three-winding transformer you would like to copy. When the floating menu
appears, click on the Copy command. Then, click the left mouse button on the primary bus, then, with the <Shift>
key held down, click the left mouse button on the secondary bus, then, with the <Shift> key held down, click the
right mouse button on the tertiary bus. When the floating menu appears, click on the Paste New 3W Transformer
command.
Adjusting Length of Bus Symbols
Click the left mouse button on the bottom of the bus you would like to either shorten or lengthen. The cursor will
change from the standard symbol to two arrows pointing away from each other. Drag the mouse down to
lengthen the bus. Drag the mouse up to shorten the bus. If shortening a bus symbol, you must move all attached
equipment above the lowest position of the revised bus symbol prior to executing this command.
SECTION 9
DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES 471
Using Buttons on Toolbar

There is a toolbar immediately below the menus. The buttons on the toolbar are shortcuts for a number of
frequently used commands, such as applying a fault, viewing the fault currents on the one-line diagram, and
viewing the relay characteristics.
The 26 icons on the toolbar are shortcuts to the following frequently used commands.
File | New
File | Open Binary Data File
File | Save
Tools | Undo
Tools | Data Browser
Faults | Specify Classical Faults
Faults | Specify Simultaneous Fault
Faults | Show Solution on 1-line
Display Zero Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Positive Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Negative Sequence Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'A' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'B' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Phase 'C' Quantities (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Relay Operating Times (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display First Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Previous Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Next Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Display Last Fault Solution (shortcut for Faults | Show Solution on 1-Line)
Tools | Scripting | Run Script
View | Device Palette
View | TTY Window
Relay | Curves Window
At the bottom of the window is a narrow, horizontal text area. This is referred to as the Status Bar in this manual.
The status bar displays the fault description when post-fault solutions are being shown.
Scrolling
You can scroll the one-line diagram both horizontally and vertically by pressing the arrow keys in the numerical
keypad. This is equivalent to clicking the mouse on the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
472 SECTION 9
Viewing Different Faults

The "+" and '-" keys let you sequence through the different faults you have simulated: Hitting the "+" key shows
the next fault on the one-line; hitting the "-" key shows the previous fault.
Shutting Down OneLiner
You can exit OneLiner by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.
This is equivalent to executing the File | Exit command.
9.2 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW

Changing Relay Settings or Damage Curve Parameters
You can bring up the info dialog box of a relay or a damage curve by double-clicking the left mouse button on its
description boxes. This is equivalent to executing the "Edit | Relay Setting" or Edit | Damage Curve Parameter
command and selecting a relay or damage curve from the dialog box.
Making Trial Adjustments and Computing Test Values
Click the right mouse button on the relays description box. A floating menu will appear when you release the
mouse button. Click on Relay trial adjustment or Show relay test value.
Opening the TTY Window
Double-click the left mouse button in an area not occupied by the description boxes or the legend box. This is
equivalent to executing the Show | TTY Window command.
Opening the Dialog Box for the Legend Box
Double-click the left mouse button anywhere within the legend box. This is equivalent to executing the Edit |
Legend command.
Closing the Curves Window
You can close the Curves Window by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner. This is
equivalent to executing the Misc | Close Window command.
9.3 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DS RELAY WINDOW

Changing Relay Settings
You can bring up the info dialog box of the relay being shown by double-clicking the left mouse button on the
description box. This is equivalent to executing the Edit | Relay Setting command and then selecting the relay
from the dialog box.
Changing the Offset and Orientation of the Second Relay Characteristics
You can drag the origin of the second relay to change its position. Alternatively, double click the left mouse
button on the origin to open a dialog box in which you can specify the position and orientation (forward or
reverse) of the second relay.
Resizing Relay Description Caption Boxes
You can resize the caption box encapsulating the distance relay description by clicking on the right vertical edge
of the box and dragging it to the desired position.
SECTION 9
Opening the TTY Window

You can bring up the TTY Window by double-clicking the left mouse button in an area not occupied by the
description boxes. This is equivalent to executing the "Show | TTY Window" command.
Closing the DS Relays Window
You can close the DS Relays Window by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner. This
is equivalent to executing the Misc | Close Window command.
9.4 SHORTCUTS FOR THE TTY WINDOW

Selecting Everything from the Mouse Position Onward
Double-click the right mouse button on a line of text selects that line and all the lines that follow.
Closing the TTY Window
Double-clicking on the control menu box of the TTY Window closes the window. This is equivalent to executing
the "Menu | Close Window" command.
9.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DIALOG BOXES

Pushing the OK Button
Pushing the <Enter> key on the keyboard is equivalent to clicking once on the OK button.
Pushing the Cancel Button
Pushing the <Esc> key on the keyboard is equivalent to clicking once on the Cancel button.
474 SECTION 9
9.6 KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

While the mouse is the simplest way to execute commands in OneLiner, experienced users will find that the
fastest way to do certain operations is to use the keyboard accelerators. For example, using the View | Find Bus
By Name command with the mouse means moving the mouse to the View menu, clicking on the menu and
selecting the Find Bus By Name command. But you can do the same thing by striking the <F> key.
The keyboard-accelerator equivalent of a command, if available, is shown directly on the pop-up menu. For
example, on the View | Find Bus By Name command, you will see:
Find Bus By Name
The accelerators for the various windows are listed below. (You can use either upper or lower case characters.)
Main Window Accelerator
<Ctrl> and C
<Ctrl> and V
1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
C
D
<Delete>
E
F
N
Q
V
Command
Network | Copy
Network | Paste
Zoom Size 1 through 5 (for backward compatibility with V9)
Relay | View Relay Curves
Network | Delete
Network | Delete
View | Go To End Bus
View | Find Bus By Name
View | Find Bus By Number
Relay | Form Coordination Pair
Faults | Show Solution on 1- Line
Curves Window Accelerator
Command
<Ctrl> and A
<Ctrl> and D
<Ctrl> and F
<Ctrl> and G
<Ctrl> and P
<Ctrl> and T
<Ctrl> and U
Add | Relay Curves

Add | Conductor Damage Curve
Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault
Add | Transformer Damage Curve
Misc | Print Graph
Edit | Rearrange Caption
Show | Relay Operations for all Faults
DS Relay Window Accelerator
Command
1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
<Ctrl> and A
<Ctrl> and F
<Ctrl> and G
<Ctrl> and O
<Ctrl> and P
<Ctrl> and T
<Ctrl> and U
Zoom Size 1 though 8 (for backward compatibility with V9)

Add | Relay Characteristics
Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault
Misc | Grid On/Off
Edit | Find Origin
Misc | Print Graph
Edit | Captions
Show | Relay Operations for All Faults
SECTION 9
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 477
APPENDIX A: SOLUTION ALGORITHM

A.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION
Most commercial short circuit programs today rely on classical short circuit solution methods, which are
characterized by:
The use of the impedance (Z) matrix for modeling the sequence networks
The use of equivalent circuits made up of sequence equivalents at the faulted buses
The classical methods work well for a limited number of fault connections, but it is extremely difficult to extend
these methods to more general faults.
The solution in ASPEN OneLiner is based on an entirely new approach to short circuit computations developed
recently by Vladimir Brandwajn and William F. Tinney.
V. Brandwajn and W.F. Tinney, "Generalized Method of Fault Analysis," IEEE
Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, pp. 1301-06, June 1985.
The new method is characterized by:
The use of the admittance (Y) matrix for modeling the sequence networks.
The use of a phase equivalent at the faulted buses.
With this new method, any kind of fault, whether single or simultaneous, is solved with the same generality.
ASPEN OneLiner also exploits a number of phase-oriented solution techniques that are used within the
Electromagnetic Transients Program (EMTP).
A.2 SPARSE MATRIX AND VECTOR METHODS
ASPEN OneLiner employs the classical sparse matrix methods as well as the recently-developed sparse vector
methods.
Sparse matrix methods are well-known in the utility industry. The classical reference is:
W.F. Tinney and J.W. Walker, "Direct Solutions of Sparse Network Equations by Optimally
ordered Triangular Factorization," Proceedings of the IEEE, pp. 1801-09, November 1967.
Sparse vector methods were discovered only a few years ago, and they are much less well known. The original
paper on the sparse vector method is the following:
W.F. Tinney, V. Brandwajn and S.M. Chan, "Sparse Vector Methods," IEEE Trans. on
Power Apparatus and Systems, pp. 295-301, February 1985.
The sparse vector methods exploit, in addition to the high percentage of zeroes in the matrix, the extremely sparse
vectors in fault calculations.
These advanced solution techniques are the key to the program's efficiency and modest storage requirements.
478 APPENDIX
APPENDIX B: 2-WINDING TRANSFORMERS

B.1 INTRODUCTION
The following are the answers to some commonly asked questions about the modeling of 2-winding transformers.
Q: How do I model a transformer with these parameters?

Primary tap: 125kV line-to-line, wye connected with grounded neutral.
Primary nominal kV: 115kV
Secondary tap: 14.4kV line-to-line, wye connected with grounded neutral.
Secondary side nominal kV: 13.8kV
Impedance: 6.0% based on a 15MVA base, with the primary and secondary taps at 125kV and 14.4kV,
respectively.
A: We will let Bus1 and Bus2 of the transformer model be the primary and secondary bus, respectively.
For this
example, all that is necessary is to convert the transformer impedance to the system 100MVA base.
6.0% x ( 100MVA / 15.0MVA ) = 40.0% or 0.400 pu
In this equation we make use of the well-known fact that the per-unit impedance is directly proportional to the
MVA base. The rest of the transformer parameters can be entered into the program as they are.
Q: How do I adjust the transformer impedance if the impedance given by the manufacturer was measured at
different voltage taps than those being used?
A:
Experimental evidence indicates that the per-unit short-circuit impedance increases with the voltage tap, but
there is no simple analytical formula to convert the impedance from one voltage tap to another. The most
common assumption is that the per-unit impedance remains constant at all voltage taps. One may also compute
the impedance using interpolation if the impedance is known at two or more voltage taps.
Q: I have a wye-delta transformer that is modeled by a branch and a shunt in my old short circuit program
(Figure B.1). The nominal kVs are 115 and 69. How do I model this transformer in ASPEN OneLiner and what
value should I use for the infinite impedance?
Figure B.1: The equivalent circuit of a 2-winding wye-delta transformer. The figure shows the positive- and
zero-sequence impedances in percent. The zero-sequence impedances are enclosed in parentheses.
APPENDIX 479
A:
Use these parameters for the transformer: (We assume the per-unit impedances have already been adjusted
to the appropriate MVA base.)
Winding configuration: Wye-delta with delta leading or lagging
Positive -sequence impedance: R+jX = 0.0+j0.0575 pu
Zero-sequence impedance: R0+jX0 = 0.0+j0.0462 pu
BUS1 tap voltage: 115.0 kV
BUS2 tap voltage: 69.0 kV
That's all. There is never a need to specify infinite impedances or special shunts for 2- winding transformers in
OneLiner. The program automatically creates the appropriate equivalent circuits based on the winding
configuration and the values of R, X, R0 and X0 given.
480 APPENDIX
APPENDIX C: TIME DIAL CALCULATOR

C.1 INTRODUCTION
The Appendix describes the ASPEN Time Dial Calculator, an auxiliary program that computes the time dial setting
of an overcurrent relay given the tap multiple and the time delay.
C.2 TIME DIAL CALCULATOR
In OneLiner, the tap multiple and the time dial are among the required inputs for overcurrent relays. This creates
a problem for users who store their relay settings just using the tap multiple and the time delay and do not record
the corresponding time dial settings.
The Time Dial Calculator does away with the guesswork in finding the time-dial value corresponding to a given
time delay and tap multiple. You simply enter the tap multiple and the time delay, select a relay library and a relay
type and click on the "Compute" button. The program calculates and displays the equivalent time dial setting.
See picture below.
The relay library files are those in the Overcurrent Relay Library Directory. You can change the Overcurrent Relay
Library Directory with the OneLiner/Power Flow Configuration Program.
APPENDIX 481
APPENDIX D: OVCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY

D.1 INTRODUCTION
ASPEN provides you with an overcurrent relay library that contains time-current characteristics of overcurrent
relays, fuses and reclosers. This appendix gives tips on how to manage this library of curves.
D.2 OVERCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY
The overcurrent relay library is a collection of binary file that stores the parameters of curves for overcurrent
relays, fuses and reclosers. These files have file extension of .RLY.
The following .RLY files are shipped with Version 10:
ABB.rly
AREVA.rly
ASPEN_Taps.rly
Basler.rly
Beckwith.rly
Bussmann.rly
Calor_Emag.rly
Chance.rly
Combined_Tech.rly
Cooper.rly
Cutler_Hammer.rly
Elastimold.rly
ElectroFusi.rly
Federal_Pioneer.rly
G&W_Electric.rly
GE.rly
Hi_Tech.rly
Joslyn.rly
Kearney.rly
Merlin_Gerin.rly
Multilin.rly
Nu-Lec.rly
NxtPhase.rly
Reyrolle.rly
RTE.rly
S&C.rly
Scheider_Electric.rly
SEL.rly
Shawmut.rly
Siemens.rly
Southern_States.rly
Standard.rly
ZIV.rly
There are over 3000 sets of curves in these files. Please refer to the on-line help OC Curves List for a complete list
of devices in these files.
482 APPENDIX
You can use the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor to create your own relay curves. Please refer to the on-line help
OC Relay Help for more information.
OVERCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY DIRECTORY

When you install OneLiner, the setup program copies the above .RLY files to a dedicated directory called the
Overcurrent Relay Library Directory. The default directory is C:\ASPEN1L_LIB. You can change the Overcurrent
Relay Library Directory at any time with the OneLiner Configuration Program.
Within OneLiner you can select curves in any of these files. The tool that facilitates access to the curves is called
the Curve Selector.
MANAGING THE OVERCURRENT RELAY LIBRARY

Use a common library for all users: In an organization with many OneLiner users, we strongly recommend that
you store the .RLY files in a directory on a file server and make that directory the Overcurrent Relay Library
Directory for all the users. This practice will greatly simplify the task of keeping the relay curves up to date.
Do not edit the .RLY files provided by ASPEN. The reason is that these files will be automatically overwritten
when you install a maintenance update from ASPEN.
Store curves you made or modified in separate files. If you wish to add relay curves or damage curves to the
relay library, we recommend that you store them in separate .RLY files. You will be able to access the curves you
created once you move these custom .RLY files to the Overcurrent Relay Library Directory.
VERIFYING THE CURVES
The curves within the overcurrent relay libraries were created by ASPEN and by users like you. ASPEN has not
verified the correctness of all the curves. It is important that you check the curves against manufacturers'
specifications before you use them in OneLiner.
If you have created new relay curves that may be useful to other users, you are urged to submit them to ASPEN
for distribution. We also welcome suggestions on which relays and fuses that you would like to see added to the
relay libraries.
APPENDIX 483
APPENDIX E: DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY

E.1 INTRODUCTION
ASPEN OneLiner provides you with a distance relay library that contains characteristics of different distance
relays. This section describes these library files and gives you suggestions on how to manage them.
E.2 THE DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY
OneLiner comes with several distance relay library files with .DRL extension:
ABB.drl
ALSTOM.drl
ASPEN.drl
SIEMENS.drl
ASPEN OneLiner reads the relay library ASPEN.DRL when it begins execution. The program then uses the
parameters within the relay library to compute the time delay of relays and to plot their characteristics.
The default relay library ASPEN.DRL that comes with OneLiner contains some of the more commonly used relay
types. The other three .DRL files contain additional distance relay types. If you wish to use relays types in these
files, you must first move them to the default relay library using the Distance Relay Editor. The procedure is as
follows:
1.
Start OneLiner. Execute the Tools | Run Distance Relay Editor command. This
command will launch the Distance Relay Editor and open the default library at the
same time.
2.
Within the Distance Relay Editor, execute the Type | Copy from Another Library
command. Follow instructions to copy one or more distance relay types from
another library into ASPEN.DRL.
3.
Exit Distance Relay Editor and save changes you made to ASPEN.DRL.
Close OneLiner now and start it again. You should see the new relay types listed in the distance relay dialog box.
You can use the Distance Relay Editor to edit existing relay types and to create new distance relay types. Please
see the on-line help file DS Relay Help for more information.
484 APPENDIX
APPENDIX F: CASE COMPARISON PROGRAM

F.1 INTRODUCTION
The ASPEN Case Comparison Program, DIFFER.EXE, is designed to compare two ASPEN data files and to
report on their differences in network parameters and relay settings (including coordination pairs). This program
can also generate a change file that you can use in OneLiner and Power Flow to automatically update a data file.
The program accepts two types of input files:
Binary data files with the .OLR extension.

Text data files with the .DXT extension.
You can use this program to compare:
Two .OLR files,

A .OLR file and a .DXT file, or
Two .DXT files.
In the following, we will refer to the first input file as 'FileA' and the second as 'FileB'.
The program produces two output text files:
A difference report with the .REP extension.

(Optional) A change file with the .CHF or .ANA extension.
The difference report is an English-like report listing all the differences between the two input files. This report is
shown on the main window and can also be sent to the printer.
The change file contains a collection of commands that, when it is applied to FileA, the resulting file will have the
same network parameters and relay settings as those of File B. See 'Section 3.2 Main Window Commands : File |
Read Change File' for a description of this command for more information. Three types of commands are in the
change file:
Commands to delete network elements and relays that are in FileA but not in FileB;
Commands to add network elements and relays that are in FileB but not in FileA;
Commands to modify the network elements and relays that are in both files, but have different parameters.
The format of the change file is identical to the ASPEN network data format described in Section 5 and the relay
data format described in Section 6.
F.2 APPLICATION NOTES
Comparing two .OLR files
The ability to compare two .OLR files allows you to:
Check for changes made between this year's and last year's base case.
Check for changes between a base case and a case that has been altered.
Comparing a .OLR file and a .DXT file

The ability to compare a .OLR file with a .DXT file was implemented with the following application in mind.
Company A is member of a reliability council. Once a year, it receives from the
council a data file that contains Company A's system plus some equipment of
Company A's immediate neighbors. Engineers in Company A must update their
OneLiner data files to keep pace with this new information.
APPENDIX 485
The brute-force solution of importing the new data from scratch is not practical. A better solution is to compare
the existing data in the current .OLR file with the new data from the council and then use the change file produced
by The Case Comparison Program to update the .OLR file using OneLiner or Power Flow.
The procedure is the following:
Make a copy of the current .OLR file, which we will call V93.OLR.
Convert the data file from the council into a text data file in the ASPEN format using one of the conversion
programs available from ASPEN. We will call the converted program COUNCIL.DXT.
Run DIFFER.EXE to compare V93.OLR with COUNCIL.DXT. We will call the difference report, REPORT.REP,
and the change file, CHANGE.CHF.
Run OneLiner to update V93.OLR using CHANGE.CHF. The network of the updated file will be identical to
that of COUNCIL.DXT.
F.3 INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Double click on the Case Comparison icon in the ASPEN

OneLiner program group to start the program.
When the program starts up, you will see the Main Window.
2.
Select the File | Compare command to specify input files.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the input for input data File
A. The input file can be either a binary data file or a text data file. A binary
data file must have the .OLR extension. A text data file must have the
.DXT extension.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of
the first input data file, 'File A', and click on "OK".
Note: The order in which you specify the two input files is unimportant if
you do not want to produce a change file. If a change file is wanted, File
A must be the file that needs to be updated later in OneLiner -- namely,
File A+Change File=FileB.
The dialog box for input File A will be replaced by a similar dialog box for
input data File B.
second input data file, 'File B', and click on "OK".
486 APPENDIX
The dialog box will disappear and another dialog box will appear allowing
you to enter the comparison options.
3.
Select the portion of the network you would like to compare. Click on:
Entire Network: To compare the entire network.
Boundary:
Then, enter a two-character boundary circuit identifier to

compare just the equipment at the system boundary.
Please refer to the Diagram | Equivalent Branch Color Code
and Network | Boundary Equivalent commands in Section
3.2 for discussions of boundary equivalence. For the
purposes of this command, a boundary branch is any line,
transformer or phase shifter that has the circuit ID you
specify in the edit box labeled Ckt ID. A boundary bus is
defined as any bus that is connected to one or more
boundary branches.
The program will report on the differences in the parameters
of boundary branches, loads, shunts and generators
connected to boundary buses.
Area no:
Click on Inside or Outside area(s) and enter a string

of area numbers and ranges, separated by commas.
For example, to compare equipment within areas 1, area 3,
and areas 5 through 9, enter 1,3,5-9 (without the quotes)
in the edit box and click on the Inside radio button.
Zone no:
Same as area number, except this is for comparing

equipment within zones.
APPENDIX 487
4.
Select the method in which the two files will be correlated. Click on:
Name and kV: Two buses, one from each input file, are considered to be
same bus if they have the same name and nominal kV.
Bus Number: Two buses, one from each input file, are considered to be
same bus if they have the same non-zero bus number. If the
bus numbers are both 0, the two buses are considered the
same if their names and nominal kVs are identical.
5.
Click on "Produce Change File" if you want the program to produce a

change file. Click on ASPEN Format to produce a change file that
you can use within OneLiner. Click on ANAFAS to produce a
change file in the ANAFAS format.
6.
Select which elements to compare. Click on:

Buses:
To compare buses.
Areas and Zones: To compare Areas and Zones.
Generators: To compare generators.
Loads:
To compare loads.
Shunts:
To compare shunts.
Transmission Lines: To compare transmission lines.
Phase Shifters: To compare phase shifters.
Switches: To compare switches.
Transformers: To compare two- and three-winding transformers.
Mutual Coupling: To compare the zero-sequence mutual coupling between lines.
Overcurrent relays, fuses: To compare overcurrent relays and fuses.
Distance relays: To compare distance relays.
Coordination pairs: To compare coordination pairs.
DC lines: To compare 2-terminal dc lines.
7.
Click on "OK". Then specify the difference and change file names.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the file name of the difference
report. The default extension for the report file is .REP.
difference report and click on "OK".
If you selected the "Produce Change File" option, another dialog box will
appear asking you for the name of the change file. The default extension
for the change files is .CHF
change.
8.
Click on "OK".
The dialog boxes for the file name and the comparison options will
disappear. Another dialog box will appear reporting on the program's
progress.
488 APPENDIX
Any differences detected by the program will be written out to the Main Window
and to the output file. When the comparison is finished, the dialog box will
disappear and the Main Window will look something like the following.
Note: Because of the limited capacity of the text buffer, some of the
output may not be accessible by scrolling this window. The full output,
however, is always available in the output file.
8.
Print either the Difference Report or the Change File.

You can print either the difference report or the change file report by
selecting the appropriate command in the File menu.
9.
Select the File | Exit command to exit the program.
APPENDIX 489
APPENDIX G: LINKAGE TO RELAY DATABASE

G.1 INTRODUCTION
OneLiner-to-ASPEN Relay Database linkage allows protection engineers to transfer physical data stored in the
relay database to OneLiner. With direct access to the Relay Database and extensible data conversion capability
of the OneLiner program, users can download setting data of relays and other protective devices from the
database to simulate their operations in OneLiner under various fault conditions.
To utilize the linkage feature OneLiner users must complete 3 setup steps:
1.
Enable Relay Database connection in OneLiners setup program;
2.
Form links between relay objects in OneLiner and devices in the Relay Database; and
3.
Select or create data mapping scheme for transferring relay data from the database to OneLiner for each of
the linked relays.
G.2 RELAY DATA IN ONELINER AND ASPEN RELAY DATABASE

The structure of relay data in OneLiner and Relay Database can differ significantly. In-depth knowledge of these
data structures is essential for planning and setup of the linkage between the two programs.
OneLiner relays are generic models that simulate fault-tripping functions of various relays employed in power
system protection. Following model types are currently supported: overcurrent ground, overcurrent phase, fuse
and a number of commonly used distance relaying type. Each of these protective equipment has a fixed set of
setting parameters that OneLiner user must entered before relay operation can be simu lated. The data needed in
OneLiner are generally referred to as electrical settings of relays. Examples of these settings include minimum
pickup, CT ratio, zone impedance, etc.
ASPEN Relay Database is a system for storage and management of physical data of relays and other protective
devices. Examples of such physical data include serial number, make, model, DIP-switch position, programming
settings, etc. The Relay Database is designed to be easily adaptable for any combinations of makes and models of
devices that are deployed in a power system network. Each device stored in the database consists of two data
sections:
General data (TRELAY): This section can have up to 20 string data fields named S01 to S20 and up to 10 numeric
data fields named N01 to N10. Customized labels can be defined for display with these fields in the
databases forms. Each device in the database can have only single TRELAY section. It is most suitable for
storage of the devices data that remain unchanged over time such as serial numb er, make, model etc.
Setting requests (TREQUEST&TSETTING): Each device in the database can have any number of setting
requests. The TREQUEST part of this section can have up to 20 string data fields named S01 to S20 and up
to 10 numeric data fields named N01 to N10. The TSETTING part is defined individually for each device
model to have any number of setting fields arranged in any order. TSETTING fields are identified by a key
consisted of a Group name and a Row number.
G.3 ENABLING RELAY DATABASE CONNECTION
To enable direct connection from OneLiner to the Relay Database, you must install both OneLiner and Relay
Database programs on your computer. The linkage feature discussed in this document is supported in OneLiner
V2001 or later and Relay Database V2000 or later.
You will need to run the OneLiner setup program to select the correct version of ASPEN Relay Database that
you have installed on the same computer. If your computer already has OneLiner installed without relay database
490 APPENDIX
connection, you will need to un-install the OneLiner program and select the correct version of the Relay
Database.
To open the OneLiner-Relay Database connection you will need to have correct login name and password,
which can be obtained from your database administrator.
G.4 LINKING RELAYS IN ONELINER AND RELAY DATABASE
The relay database browser in OneLiners relay properties dialog box allows the user to link that relay to a relay
record in the relay database. It is possible to link a single OneLiner relay to one or several relays in the relay
database. An example of this one-to-many linkage is a 3-zone KD phase distance relay. In OneLiner the KD relay
actually correspond to three physical different KD relay records in the Relay Database, one for each zone.
The link between the relays in OneLiner and the Relay Database is realized by storing in OneLiner the key data
fields of TRELAY section from each linked relay in the database: Location ID and S01. It is the users
responsibility to make sure that the S01field value is not repeated among relays in the same location so that the
program can correctly lookup linked relays.
G.5 DATA MAPPING

Given the differences in data structures in the two programs, a mapping scheme must be defined before relay data
can be transferred. Two methods of mapping are possible: direct mapping and mapping using PowerScript.
APPENDIX 491
Direct mapping
This method maps each parameter of the OneLiner relay to a data field of the linked object in the Relay database.
Once the mapping has been defined, the data is transferred verbatim each time the data exchange takes place
between the two programs.
The direct mapping method requires that the relay data in the Relay Database to be the same as in OneLiner
because no data transformation is possible. This requirement can significantly limit the number of cases when
direct data mapping is useful.
OneLiners Relay Database Linkage screen offers conveniently way to select data field from the Relay Database
to map to any OneLiner relay parameter. When the mouse is clicked on a cell in the Data Source column in the
Relay Data Mapping table a drop down list of data fields will appear. Each field is shown in the format of
[N].T.Nnnn, where
N:
Order number of linked relay
T:
Data section identifier: R for TRELAY, Q for TREQUEST and S for TSETTING
Nnnn: Name or label of the field. For TSETTING fields, the name is prefixed by the fields group name separated
by a colon.
User can select any field in the list to map it to the OneLiner relay parameter listed on the same row. The current
value of the mapped field will be copied to the New value column of the table.
Data mapping using PowerScript
PowerScript programs can serve as powerful and flexible tool to carry out complex transformation of relay data
from one program to the other. A data mapping script program is assigned to group of linked relays. The program
takes input relay data from one program and converts it into the form required by the other program every time the
data transfer takes place.
PowerScript data mapping variables
A set of BASIC string global variables is declared for use as conduit for relay data transformation in data mapping
script programs. The set contains one variable for every parameter of the OneLiner relay and every data field of
the linked devices in the database. At the beginning of data transfer the variables always contain current value of
relay data from OneLiner and relay database. Based on this input the script programs logic evaluates new value
of OneLiner relay parameters or relay database device settings depending on the direction of data transfer. After
successful execution of the script program, newly evaluated relay data will be available in the form suitable in the
destination program.
The composition of the set of data exchange global variables and the data transformation logic depends solely on
the type of the OneLiner relay and that of the linked devices in the database. Therefore a common data mapping
script program can be used to transfer data between OneLiner and relay database for all relays having the same
types.
To show the nature of the data item each of these global variable contains their names are formulated as follows:
- OLR_XXXX: OneLiner relay parameter XXXX.
- TTTT_YYYY_N: Database data field. Where:
TTTT:
Section identifier: TRELAY, TREQUEST or TSETTING
YYYY:
Name of data fields in TRELAY and TREQUEST; or

Combination of group name and setting name of data fields in TSETTING
492 APPENDIX
Order number of the linked relay.
Data mapping PowerScript program file structure

- File header: the header is a block of Basic comment lines, which is separated from the code by a blank line. The
header must have following content
- Line 1: Signature line identifying the file
- Line 2: Relay Database type.
- Line 3: OneLiner relay type.
- File comments.
- Data conversion code: the logic must be defined as two BASIC subroutines:
- RDB2OLR with the logic for transforming relay database data to OneLiner; and
- OLR2RDB with the logic for transforming OneLiner data to relay database. Note: OneLiner only makes use of
subroutine RDB2OLR for transferring data from relay database to OneLiner. Future version of the program will
support data transfer in both directions.
Data mapping script code generator and editor
OneLiner can generate template of script program to be used as starting point for creating the data mapping
script. To generate a template, user must establish a link between OneLiner relay to its corresponding devices in
the database. In the Relay Database Linkage screen for the link select Create new script in the Data mapping
method drop down list. A template script file will generated in the \Script subdirectory of the OneLiner program
directory. The file will be automatically opened in the script editor window ready for editing. This file contains
prototypes of RDB2OLR and OLR2RDB subroutines with complete list of global variables containing data of the
linked relay types. The code lines with these variables are shown commented out initially.
Active debugging of data mapping script programs is supported in the script editor. When a script program is
opened in the editor using the Edit script command in the Relay database linkage screen, user can use the editor
run command to execute the code. Values of all data mapping global variables before and after execution will be
shown side by side in a debug output screen. This display makes it easy to validate the data transformation logic
being implemented in the code.
Sample data mapping scripts
OneLiner is shipped with a number of data mapping scripts, which were developed by ASPEN and some
industrial users of OneLiner. These scripts contain sample implementation of data transformation logic for some
commonly used relay: KD, SEL etc. These are fully functional programs, which can be used directly or can serve
as starting point in developing more advanced code. To use the sample scripts without modification you will need
to make sure that correct setting templates are in use in the relay database. For this purpose, corresponding
setting template files (.rtp) are included with the program.
APPENDIX 493
Index
A
ANAFAS Format
create change file 483
export to 89
read change file 94
Annotation
add to distance relay window 362, 363
add to one-line diagram 147
add to overcurrent relay window 326
attach to objects 148, 201
detach from objects 148
edit in DS Relays Window 369
find on one-line diagram 207
highlight attached object 209
remove from curves window 332
remove from Curves Window 332
remove from overcurrent relay window 366
Anomalies Checking 287
Area
data 295
data in text data file 423
renumber 295
show area number on one-line 214
show tie lines on one-line 214
ASPEN DistriView
updating substation impedance 93
B
Backup File 21
Batch Short Circuit Module 15, 70
Binary Data File 19, 484
close 83
create new 80
open 81
save 84
save as 85
Boundary Equivalent 179
Branch Names on One-Line 213
Breaker
checking rating 16
data 104
delete all 153
export data 92
Breaker Rating Module 16
Bus
adjust symbol length 469
change area and zone in region 162
change nominal kV 157
change symbol 194
data used for text file 404
delete 149
description of faults 243
find by name 205
find by number 206
go to end bus 208
insert tap bus into a line 171
merge 170
models 387
new 102
place 192
place using state-plane coordinates 200
remove tap bus from a line 172
restore 156
show and hide 195
split 169
Bus Fault Summary 263
C
Case Comparison Program 19, 483
Change File 19, 378, 483, 486
read 94
Change from Line to Series Capacitor/Reactor 161
Change Nominal kV 157
Change T to 3-Winding Transformer 159
Circuit Breaker See Breaker
Classical Fault 242
Color Code
by voltage class 189
for equivalent branches 191
COMTRADE Test File 232
Conductor Damage Curve
add 320
edit parameters of 339
remove 329
Copy to Clipboard
graphical data from Curves Window 312
graphical data from DS Relays Window 353
network and relay data in region 166
network data 166
one-line graphics in a region 186
Index 495
relay data 166

text from TTY Window 385
Curve Collection 20
open 226, 313
save 314
save on exit 83
Curve Selector 441
D
Damage Curve
add from library 325
edit parameters in Curves Window 339
remove conductor or transformer 329
Data Browser 292
area data 295
customization 297
report 297
scale load and generation 294
zone data 296
DC Line
new 143
Default parameters for new objects 101
Definite-Time Overcurrent Relay 433, 442
Delete
all in area or zone 150
all inside a region 151
all outside a region 152
all relays 241
network elements 149
relays or relay groups 224, 228
Device palette 79
Insert tap node 171
new 2-winding transformer 128
new 3-winding transformer 138
new dc line 143
new line 123
new load 114
new phase shifter 133
new series capacitor/reactor 126
new shunt 117
new switch 136
new switched shunt 120
new synchronous machine 109
Show/Hide 217
Distance relay
Dynamic characteristics 354
Distance Relay 458, 460
dialog boxes 448, 449
line-impedance percentages 221
new phase relay 219
view characteristics 225
Distance Relay Window 349
496 Index
add annotation 362

add relay characteristics 359
add remote branch impedances 361
close 358
display load region 356
edit relay settings 368
find origin 371
find origin of 1st relay 371
find origin of 2nd relay 372
grid on/off 355
options 354
print 351
rearrange captions 373
remove all but 1st relay curve 364
remove annotation 366
remove picture 367
remove remote branch impedances 365
show relay operations for 1 fault 375
show relay operations for all faults 374
show TTY window 377
Doble SS1 Test File 232
Drag-and-Drop See Device palette
Dynamic characteristics See Distance relay | Dynamic
characteristics
E
End-to-End Relay Testing 232
Equivalent Branch Color Code 191
Exit Program 99
Export
breaker data 92
graphical data from Curves Window 311
graphical data from Main Window 98
graphical data in DS Relays Window 352
network data 89
relay data 239
F
Fault See Short Circuit
Fault Browser in Curves Window 348
Fault Locator 268
Fault MVA
definition 272
File
backup 21
binary data files 19, 484
change files 19, 378, 483, 486
line table files 124
message files 20
output files 20, 378
PowerScript file 20
previous curve collection files 20
relay data files 238, 378, 461

report files 20
text data file 19, 401, 484
Windows metafile 21
File Comments 86
Find Annotation on one-line 207
Find Bus
by name 205
by number 206
Find Origin
of cuves in distance relay window 371
Font size
main window 188
Fuse
add fuse curve 319
dialog box 444
remove fuse curve 328
G
GE Format
compatibility with 290
export to 89
Generator
delete 149
models 387
new 109
referene angle set 177
restore 156
scale output 295
take out of service 164
Go To End Bus 208
GPS Coordinates 200
Grid On/Off 355
Ground Current Calculator 266
H
Hardware Requirement 15
Help
on-line help 68
Hide Bus
by region 197
selected bus 196
I
Ignore
instantaneous settings 221
line G+jB 272
loads 272
phase shift 101
shunts 272
Impedances on One-Line Diagram 211

Import
network data 82
Inrush Curve 324
Insert Line Kink 203
Insert Tap Bus 171
Installing OneLiner 18
Instantaneous Ov ercurrent Relay 433, 442
K
Keyboard Accelerators 473
kV Color Code 189
L
Legend
Library
distance relay 20, 482
overcurrent relay 19
Line See Transmission Line
Line Table File 124
Load
delete 149
models 387
new 114
restore 156
scaling 295
take out of service 164
Load Region on DS Relays Window 356
Load Tap Changer
2-winding transformer 131
reset center position 178
specifying parameters for 131, 141
LTC See Load Tap Changer
M
Macro See PowerScript
Merge Buses 170
Merge Files 88
Message File 20
Models
series capacitor 389
MOV simulation
acceleration factor 272
turn on/off 272
Mutual Coupling Pair
delete 154, 155
Index 497
modeling 398
new 146
Mutual Group
MVA base
generator 111
phase shifter 134
substation data interface 93
system 80, 87
N
NERC Recommendation 8A 285
Network
anomalies checking 287
export data 89
hide equipment by area or zone 199
options 101
properties 100
show equipment by area or zone 199
show equipment by region 198
show/hide elements 199
Network Data
importing 82
Network equivalent See Boundary equivalent
Network Modeling 387
Neutral Current
in phasor probe 255
Note See Annotation
O
One-Line Diagram
creation 192
scale/shift 204
view solution on 250
On-Line Help 68
Operating System Supported 15
Options
Curves Window 316
DS Relays Window 354
for fault simulation 271
Outage List 185
Output File 20, 378
Overcurrent Relay 277, 316, 432, 440, 460
dialog boxes 431, 440
extrapolate curve 221
remove curve 328
time dial calculator 479
view curve 225
Overcurrent Relay Library Directory 20, 441, 481
managing 481
498 Index
Overcurrent Relay Window

add annotation 326
add conductor damage curve 320
add damage curve from relay library 325
add picture 327
add relay curves 319
add transformer damage curve 322
close 318
edit legend 340
edit relay settings 334
edit shifting factors 337
picture background 341
rearrange captions 342
remove all but 1st relay curve 330
remove annotation 332
remove fault results 331
remove picture 333
remove relay or fuse curve 328
show relay operations for 1 fault 344
show relay operations for all faults 343
show relay test values 346
show TTY window 347
trial relay adjustment 335
P
Palette See Device palette
Paste from Clipboard
network and relay data in region 168
network data 167
relay data 167
using drag/drop palette 79
Phase Shift
ignore option 101
Phase Shifter
models 390
new 133
Phase-Open Fault 249
Phasors 254
Picture
background in DS Relays Window 370
background in overcurrent relay window 327
remove from distance relay window 367
Place Buses 192
Plain One-Line Diagram 210
PowerScript
customize user-defined commands 301
editor 299
run a script 300
Prefault Voltage Profile
choosing 271
flat bus voltage option 399
from a linear network solution option 399

from a power flow solution option 399
Preferences
sort by bus name or no. 187
time in sec. or cycles 187
unit of length 188
Previous Curve Collection See Curve Collectiion
Print
distance relay window 351
graph in Curves Window 309
one-line diagram 96
overcurrent relay curves 309
selected text 381
Printer
setup 95, 308, 350
Properties
network 100
relay 218
PTI Format
compatibility with 290
export to 89
Put Equipment in Service 165
R
Rearrange Captions
in Curves Window 342
in distance relay window 373
Recloser 446
dialog box 446
Reference Angle of Generators 177
Relay See also Overcurrent Relay, Distance Relay,
Fuse and Recloser
delete 224, 228
delete all 241
distancce phase relay 449
distance ground relay 448
fuse 444
options 221
overcurrent ground relay 431
overcurrent phase relay 440
properties 218
sample relay data file 461
test point 317
Relay Coordination
multi-point checking method 276
Relay Coordination Checking
classical method of OC/OC checking 275
instantaneous setting 281, 285
minimum pickup 278
primary/backup 273
recloser/relay checking 276
Relay Coordination Pair
form 230
Relay Curve
add to overcurrent relay window 319
ignore library file name 221
remove all from Distance Relay Window 364
remove relay or fuse curve 328
start a one time pickup 221
Relay Data File 19, 64, 378
exporting 239
format information 453
importing 238
sample 461
Relay Database 16
linkage with OneLiner 488
Relay Group
add or remove coordinating pairs 230
check instantaneous 281, 285
check minimum pickup 278
delete 224, 228
importing a relay into 229
new 223
pasting a relay into 167
Relay Loadability Checking 285
Relay on Remote Bus
add to distance relay window 359
Relay on/off-line 219
Relay Operations for 1 Fault
show in distance relay window 375
show in overcurrent relay window 344
Relay Operations for All Faults
show in distance relay window 374
show in overcurrent relay window 343
Relay Setting
edit in Curves Window 334
edit in distance relay window 368
Relay Test Values,Show 346
Relay Testing File 232
comma delimited file 232
COMTRADE format 232
Doble SS1 format 232
Remote Branch Impedances
add to distance relay window 361
remove from distance relay window 365
Remove Tap Bus 172
Report
network data from Browser 297
relay data 240
relay data from Browser 297
Report File 20
Reset text position 202
Restore 156
bus, generator, load, shunt, or branch 156
Run Configuration Program 302
Run Distance Relay Editor 303
Index 499
S
Scale/Shift One-Line Diagram 204
Script See PowerScript
Scrolling
with mouse wheel 35
with scrollbars 35
Second Relay Origin
find origin in distance relay window 372
Series Capacitor
change from line 161
model 389
Series Capacitor/Reactor
new 126
Setup OneLiner 18
Shifting Factor 337
Short Circuit
algorithm used 476
bus fault summary 263
bus-to-bus fault 248
classical faults 242
close-in fault in front of a relay 242
cross-country fault 248
fault locator 268
ground current calculator 266
intermediate fault 243
intermediate faults at regular inteval 243
line-end fault 243
options 271
output format 463
phase-open fault 249
printing solution report 257
simultaneous faults 247
solution report in text 257
view solution on one-line 250
view voltage-sag results 262
Shortcuts
for the dialog boxes 472
for the distance relay window 471
for the keyboard 473
for the main window 469, 470
for the overcurrent relay window 471
for the TTY window 472
main window toolbar 78
Show Bus
by region 198
in area or zone 199
Show/Hide Area 199
Shunt
currents 466
delete 149
models 387
new 117
500 Index
restore 156
Simultaneous Fault 247
Size Limitations 15
Snap to State Plane Coordinates 200
Solution On One-Line 250
Sorting Preference
by bus name or bus number 187
Sparse Matrix and Vector Methods 476
Split Bus 169
State Plane Coordinates 200
in bus dialog box 103
Statistics 87
String Delimiter for Data Files 101
Substation Data Interface 93
Substation Group Number 93
Switch
new 136
reactance 101
toggle 163
Switched Shunt
models 387, 388
new 120
T
T Circuit Model of 3-Winding Tansformer 159
Take Out of Service 164
Tap Bus
show or hide bus name on one-line 188
Tertiary Current
displayed by phasor probe 255
in solution report in text 466
sensed by relay 434
Text Data File 19, 484
format information 401
open 82
Three Winding Transformer
change from T model 159
new 138
tertiary current in phasor probe 255
tertiary current in text report 466
tertiary current sensed by relay 434
Time Dial Calculator 479
Toolbar 216, 470
Transformer See also Two-Winding Transformer and
Three-Winding Transformer
2-winding configurations 393
2-winding model 477
3-winding configurations 395
models 391
neutral current in phasor probe 255
new 2-winding 128

new 3-winding 138
reset taps to nominal 178
symbol, American or European 187
symbols, American or European 22
Transformer damage curve
add 322
how to 479
link to a curve 322
remove 329
Transformer Inrush Curve 324
Transmission Line
change to series capacitor/reactor 161
description of faults 243
models 389
new 123
restore 156
view tie lines 214
Trial Relay Adjustment 335
TTY Window 378
clear contents of 379
close 383
copy selected text to clipboard 385
find text 386
print selected text 381
save selected text to file 382
select all text 384
select font and size of text 380
view in distance relay window 377
view in main window 215
view in overcurrent relay window 347
Tutorial
Batch Short Circuit Module 70
OneLiner 23
Two Winding Transformer
models 477
new 128
overcurrent relay curves 225

phasors 254
plain one-line diagram 210
solution on one-line diagram 250
toolbar on Main Window 216
TTY Window 215, 347, 377
Voltage Sag Analysis 260
W
Windows Metafile 21
Working Model 17
Z
Zero-Sequence Mutual Coupling See Mutual
Coupling Pair
Zig-zag grounding transformer 118
ZigZag-Delta 2-Winding Transformer 129
ZigZag-Wye 2-Winding Transformer 129
Zone
data 296
renumber 296
Zoom Slider
distance relay window 349
main window 78
U
Undo 291
button on toolbar 78, 470
Unit of Length Preference 188
V
View
areas, tie lines on one-line 214
branch names on one-line diagram 213
distance relay characteristics 225
impedances on one-line diagram 211
Index 501

One Line RV 10 Users Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

One Line RV 10 Users Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ASPEN

Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.

HOW TO ORDER MORE MANUALS

HOW TO REACH ASPEN

INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL............................................................................................................17

2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL ..........................................................................................................................17

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

SIMULATING FAULTS ........................................................................................................................................................72

NETWORK MENU ......................................................................................................................................................102

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

CHANGE | LINE TO SERIES CAPACITOR/REACTOR COMMAND..........................................................................163

VIEW MENU ..................................................................................................................................................................207

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND...............................................................................................................................227

CHECK MENU .............................................................................................................................................................275

TOOLS MENU ...............................................................................................................................................................293

3.3 CURVES WINDOW COMMAND...................................................................................................................................309

ADD MENU ....................................................................................................................................................................321

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

TRANSFORMER DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND .......................................................................................................324

REMOVE MENU ..........................................................................................................................................................330

EDIT MENU ...................................................................................................................................................................336

3.4 DS RELAYS WINDOW COMMANDS..........................................................................................................................351

ADD MENU ....................................................................................................................................................................361

REMOVE MENU ..........................................................................................................................................................366

EDIT MENU ...................................................................................................................................................................370

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

3.5 TTY WINDOW COMMANDS........................................................................................................................................380

NETWORK MODELS .................................................................................................................................389

NETWORK DATA FORMAT ....................................................................................................................403

RELAY DIALOG BOXES ...........................................................................................................................433

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

RELAY DATA FORMAT ............................................................................................................................455

8.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT......................................................................................................465

DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES...................................................................................................................471

SHORTCUTS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW ...................................................................................................................471

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

G.5 DATA MAPPING..........................................................................................................................................................491

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

1.1 ONELINER FEATURES

Virtually unlimited system size with modest memory requirement.

Lightning fast solution speed

Data exporting in PTI PSS/E, ANAFAS, and GE data formats.

Built-in scripting language using the BASIC programming language.

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

Proven reliability at major utilities in the U.S. and abroad.

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

1.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A 800-by-600 or better color monitor.

1.3 NETWORK SUPPORT

1.4 SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION

1.5 BATCH SHORT CIRCUIT MODULE

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

1.6 BREAKER RATING MODULE

1.7 RELAY DATABASE

ASPEN OneLiner Version 10

INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL

Insert the Working Model CD into your CD-ROM drive.